A PRACTICAL COURSE IN S PAN I S H. BY H. M. MONSANTO, A.M., AND LOUIS A. LANGUELLIEE, LL.D., REVISED BY FREEMAN M. JOSSELYN UOCTEUR DB L'UNIVERSIT^ DE PARIS NEW YORK CINCINNATI CHICAGO AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY COPYHIGHT, T875, BY H M MONSANTO AND LOUIS A. LANGUELL1ER COPYRIGHT, 1903, BY CLEMENCE MONSANTO. COPYRIGHT, 1903, BY AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY. w. P. 13 PREFACE. IN preparing the present work it has been the aim of the authors, while excluding nothing of practical value which has already been placed before the public, to combine with the best features of the most approved methods the results of their own experience. While endeavoring to render this work a valuable assistant in the class-room, they have sought at the same time to adapt it to the purposes of pri- vate instruction, and in so doing have availed themselves to a great extent of the admirable plan presented in Woodbury's Practical Course with the German Language. Accordingly the lessons are arranged in the following order : 1. THE SUBJECTS OP THE LESSON. 2. EXAMPLES, accompanied by their nearest English equivalents, and made to illustrate the grammatical and idiomatic principles which are involved in the Lessons. 3. VOCABULARIES placed before the Exercises, the masculine and feminine names being grouped separately, and other parts of speeco arranged alphabetically for convenience of reference. 4. SPANISH EXERCISES. The sentences in Spanish require only the application of the instructions contained in the Lesson, or in the preceding ones, for their translation into English. 5. ENGLISH EXERCISES. The analogous sentences in English are presented in immediate connection with the preceding ones in Span- ish. The principles applied in the Spanish Exercises are thus made a most convenient and effective auxiliary in the still more advanced and difficult work of translating English into Spanish. 6. GRAMMATICAL AND IDIOMATIC PRINCIPLES. This division may be employed by means of the references either in connection with the preceding instructions, or, when not thus required, may be applied both as a test of the pupil's previous deductions, and at the same time as an appropriate and impressive review. The rules on pronunciation will, it is hoped, be found as complete as possible, and the selection of sentences in the Exercises an improve- 3 2fiO1 4 PREFACE. meiit oft those of many former Methods. The conjugation of all the irregular verts 'in general use will bp found at the end of the book, together with a brief sketch on the formation of the Spanish language, and also a complete dictionary of all the words used in the different Exercises. It will be seen that the book does not contain a Second Part de- voted to a systematic rearrangement of the grammatical facts con- tained in the several lessons. Such a Second Part is, we believe, seldom used by students, and we have been careful, as far as possible, in the construction of our lessons to insert together all the facts per- taining to each part of the subject. So the course of our book corresponds very nearly to that which would be adopted in a system- atic grammar. While respectfully presenting this work to the public, the authors indulge the hope that it may prove a welcome auxiliary to the acquisition of the Spanish language. H. M. MONSANTO. LOUIS A. LANGUELLIER. NEW YORK, July, 1875. REVISER'S NOTE. Since the publication of Monsanto and Languellier's Spanish Course in 1875, the advance in linguistics, and especially the revision of Spanish accentuation by the Academy in 1888, make a regulation necessary. For while there are many Spanish grammars before the public, the present book aims to make the basic principles of Spanish grammar familiar to the student by constant practice, and repetition in Spanish. To this end the English statements of grammatical facts have been reduced to the smallest compass compatible with clearness, while the Spanish examples have been made as numerous as possible. In the revision, the editor has endeavored to preserve the original form of the work, only recasting such grammatical statements as seemed to demand it. His especial care has been to present the Spanish text in accordance with the latest rules for orthography and accent rules which have been treated at some length in the intro- duction, and which involved a complete recasting of that part of the work. F. M. J., JR. MADRID, June 17, 1902. CONTENTS. PAGE INTRODUCTION 13 1. Letters and Sounds. Alphabet 13 2. Pronunciation 14 1. Vowels 14 2. Diphthongs 14 3. Triphthongs 15 4. Consonants 15 3. Variations in pronunciation 18 4. Double Letters 19 5. Syllables 19 6. Accent 20 7. Punctuation 23 8. Capital Letters 23 9. Exercises in Pronunciation 24 LESSONS : I. Article, different Forms 26 II. Plural .o 29 III. Contraction of Preposition with Article ...... 33 IV. Pronouns 36 V. Verbs ser and estar 41 VI. Use of the Prepositions de and para 45 VII. The Negative 48 VIII. Adjectives, Formation of the Feminine 53 IX. Place of Adjectives 58 X. Diminutive and Augmentative Nouns 63 XI. Adjectives, Comparative and Superlative Relative . . 69 XII. Superlative Absolute. Adjectives and Adverbs ... 76 XIII. Possessive Adjectives 81 XIV. Possessive Pronouns 86 XV. Demonstrative Adjectives 91 XVI. Demonstrative Pronouns 94 XVII. Auxiliary Verb haber 99 XVIII. Auxiliary Verb haber (crnitimied) 103 XIX. Gerund 107 XX. Cardinal Numbers 112 XXI. Ordinal Numbers 117 XXII. Pronouns in Simple Tenses 122 5 6 - CONTENTS. PAGE XXIII. Relative and Interrogative Pronouns 129 XXIV. Auxiliary Verbs, haber, tener . 136 XXV. Idiomatic Uses of tener 143 XXVI. Auxiliary Verbs, ser, estar 149 XXVII. Haber and ser used as Impersonal Verbs 156 XXVIII. The Time of the Day, etc 161 XXIX. Use of the Article 165 XXX. Personal Pronouns with Prepositions and Verbs . . . 171 XXXI. The Respective Place of Pronouns 176 XXXII. Regular Verbs, Present Indicative 180 XXXIII. Irregular Verbs of the First Conjug., Present Indicative 183 XXXIV. Irregular Verbs of the Second Conjug., Present Indicative 188 XXXV. Irregular Verbs of the Third Conjug., Present Indicative 193 XXXVI. Imperfect Tense, Indicative Mood 199 XXXVII. The Past Definite or Preterit, and the Past Indefinite . 203 XXXVI II. Irregularities of the Preterit 209 XXXIX. The Past Anterior and the Pluperfect (Indicative) . . 215 XL. The Future and Future Anterior 218 XLI. Subjunctive Mood. Present 223 XLII. Imperative Mood 229 XLIII. Subjunctive Imperfect and Pluperfect 234 XLIV. Conditional Mood 241 XLV. Subjunctive Future and Future Perfect 248 XLVI. Infinitive Mood 250 XL VI I. The Infinitive governed by Prepositions 258 XLVIII. The Gerund and Present Participle 261 XLIX. The Past Participle 266 L. The Past Participle (continued) 271 LI. The Passive Verb 275 LII. Reflexive Verbs 279 LIII. Reflexive Verbs (continued) 286 LIV. Periphrastic Verbs 290 LV. Impersonal Verbs 295 LVI. Government of Verbs 299 LVII. Government of Adjectives 302 LVIII. The Adverb 306 LIX. The Preposition 312 LX. Defective Verbs 318 LXI. Agreement of the Verb with its Subject 320 LXII. Conjunctions and Interjections 323 TABLE OF TERMINATIONS OF THE THREE REGULAR CONJUGATIONS . 326 LIST OF THE PRINCIPAL IRREGULAR VERBS 328 FORMATION OF THE SPANISH LANGUAGE 370 GENERAL VOCABULARY 373 1. Spanish-English . . 373 2. English -Spanish . . . . , 386 INDEX. The heavy-face figures refer to the LESSONS, the light-face figures to the RULES ; as, for instance, 3. 1-3 denotes Lesson 3, Rules 1-3, &c. When page or section is referred to, p. or is given with the figures. A or An, 1. 3. A, 3. 1. When used with active verbs, 18. 3. When not used with an active verb, 18. 4 ; 20. 6 ; 23. 2. When used withelcual(/acMaZ,etc.),23.6. When used before a following Infinitive, 46. p. 254, 2. Used after volver, 48. 9 in fine. Used with some Periphrastic verbs, 54. 1-6. Complement of another Preposition. 59. p. 314. Its use, 59. 1. Ablative absolute, 49. 5. Accent, p. 20, 6. Accusative case, 22.6; 23. 2-6; 30.2; 31.1,2,4. Active verb, 51. 1, 2. Becoming a Reflexive Verb, 52. 1. When becom- ing an Impersonal Verb, 55. 2. Adjectives, repeated before nouns, 1. 4. Plural formed as with nouns, 2 9. Formation of the Feminine, 8. 1-5. Referring to two nouns in the singular, 8. 6. Referring to two nouns of differ- ent genders, 8. 7. Used substantively, 8. Place of Adjectives, 9. 1-4. Used also as nouns, 9. 5. Comparative and Superlative, 11, 12. Government of Adjectives, 57. 1-7. Used as adverbs, 58. 9. A donde. See donde. Adverbs, Comparative and Superlative, 11. 12; 13. 9, Rem. 3. Different sorts of Adverbs, 58. pp. 308, 309. Their place, 58. 1. Their formation, 58. 2. Used diminutively or augmen- tatively, 58. 8. Ago, its translation, 27- P 157. Agreement of the verb with its sub- ject, 61. Al, 3. A la, 3. Alas, 3. Algo, when used with tener, 25. 3. Algun. See alguno. Alguno (algunos, alguna, algunas), 4. 8 ; 7. 9, and Obs. : 9. 6, Rem. 1. Alll esta and hay, p. 158. Alos, 3. Alphabet, p. 13, 1. An or A, 1. 3. Andar, when it may be used instead of ir, 48. 4. Ante, its use, 59. 2. Aiios, used with ^ener, 25. 4. Any, 4. 8. Aquel, aquella ; este, esta; ese, esa. Their different meanings, 15, 16. Aquello, eso and esto, their different meanings, 15, 16. Article, Definite, 1. Indefinite, 1. 3. 13. 9, Rem. 2. Not separated from the Demonstrative or Relative Pronoun, 16. 8. When omitted, 23. 7. Its use, 29. When used with an infinitive, 46. 13, 14. Augjnentative nouns and adjectives, 9. Buen. See Bueno. Bueno, 9. 6, Rem. 1. Can, 44. 7, 1. Cardinal numbers, 20. When end- ing in os and as, 20. 2 When used with y, 20. 3. When used instead of the ordinal numbers, 21. 4, Obs. ; R. 5,6. Ch, p. 16, 3. Cien. See Ciento. Ciento, when becoming cien, 20. 4. Used with mil, 20. 8. Collective noun, when put in the sin- gular or in the plural, 61. 8. Collective numbers, 21. Collective partitive, 61. 8. Como, when governing the Infinitive mood, 47. 2. Compound tenses, in Reflexive Verbs, 52. Comparative, its formation, 11. 1-9. Comparative and Superlative, 11, 12. Compound gerund, 48. 6, 8. Compound nouns, 1. 5-6. Con, when used before a following In- finitive, 46, p. 255, 8 ; 48. 5, 3, Note. Complement of an Adjective, 57. 4. Its use, 59. 3. Conditional, 44. Conjunctions, requiring the Subjunc- tive mood, 41. 5. List of the principal Conjunctions, 62. Conmigo, 30. 11. Conocer, and Saber, 14. 9. Consigo, 30. 11. Contigo, 30. 11. Consonants, p. 15, 3. Contents, pp. v, vi. Could, 44. 17, 2. Cual, when used with tal, 23. 7 O. Cual and que, 23. 9. INDEX. dial, Interrogative Pronoun, 23. 11. Cuando, used with Subjunctive future, 45.1. Cuanto (cuanta, cuantos, cuantas), how translated, 23. 13. Cuyo, its uses, 23. 8. As an Interroga- tive Pronoun, 23. 11. D, when suppressed in Reflexive Verbs, 52.7. Dative case, 30. 2 ; 31. 1, 2, 4. Days of the week, 20. De, 3. 1, 2; 6. 1-3 Used with the Definite Article before pronouns, 14. 4-6. Used with ser, 14. 8. Used with tener, 25. 2. When used before a following Infinitive, 46. p. 254, 5, 9, 10, 3, 11. Used after a Past Participle, 49- 7. Used with some Periphrastic Verbs, 54. 1, 5. Preceded by a verb, 56. 1, 2 Complement of an Adjective, 57. l-4 7. Complement of another Preposition, 59. p. 314. Its use, 59. 4. Used after a partitive noun, 61. 8. "D6 and de, 6, 10. Deber, 18. 2. Defective verbs, 60. Definite article, 1. 1, 21; 13.5,7. Used with de, 14. 4-6. Used with verbs expressing moral or physical properties, 25. 6 and Obs. When used to translate on, 28. 3. Its use, 29. Del, 3. 1. De la, 3. 1. De las, 3. 1. De los, 3. 1. Demonstrative adjectives, 15. 1-3. Generally precede the noun, 15. 2. Must be repeated before every noun, 15.3. Demonstrative pronouns, 16. Descriptive Tense, 36. 3. Diminutive nouns and adjectives, 10. Diphthongs, p. 14, 2. 2 ; 6. 5. Direct obiect pronouns, 30. 1-12; 31. 1-2; 52. 1,24. Divisions of the day, 20. p, 113; 28. p. 162. Doble. See p. 118 (Multiplicative Num- bers). Don, 9. 6. Dona, 9. 6. Donde, when preceded by a ( donde), and by en (en donde), 15. 4. Used as a Relative Pronoun, 23. 10. When governing the Infinitive, 47. 2. Double letters, p. 19, 4. E and y, 18. El, 1.1. Used (by euphony) instead of la, 1.2; 13.4. El de e*l (or de ella, de ellos, de ellas). Used instead of el suyo, la sn,ya. etc., 13.5. El (or la, los, las, lo) de V., 14. 4. El, 4. 6; 13.5. El and el. p. 20, 6. 10 ; 4. 6. El cual (la cual, etc.). When used and how, 23. 6. Ella, 4. 6; 13.5. Ellas, 4. 6 ; 13. 5. Fllo, used instead of eso, 16. 9. Cor responding to it, 16. 9. EUos, 4. 6; 13.5. El suyo, la suya, used instead of vuestro, vuestra, 14. 3. En, used with a gerund, 19. 8 and Obs. When used before a following Infinitive, 46. p. 254, R. 5. Its use as a Preposi- tion, 59. 5. En dpnde. See Donde. English-Spanish Vocabulary, p. 386. Ese, esa; este, esta; aquel, aquella; their different meanings, 15, 16. Eso, esto and aquello, their differ- ence of meaning, 16. 1, 3, 9. Estar, used with a Past Participle, 18. 1. Used with a gerund, 19. 3. Not used with ser, ir, venir, 19. 4. Its gerund often preceding another gerund, 19. 9. Used instead of tener, 25. 1, Obs. a, 6, c. Its conjugation, 26. Estar and ser, 5. 1-3. Used instead of tener, 25. 1, Obs. a, 6, c. Their con- jugations, 26. Este, esta; ese, esa ; aquel, aquella; their different meanings, 15. 1 ; 16. 2. EstO, eso, and aquello, their differ- ence of meaning, 16. 1, 3-5. Exclamation-point (j), p. 23, 7, 2. Exclamatory phrases, 62. Feminine gender, 1. 1. Formation of the Spanish lan- guage, pp. 370-372, Fractional numbers, 21. Future anterior, 40. 6. Future perfect, 43. Future tense. Its formation, 40. 1-4. When used instead of the Impera- tive, 40. 5. Subjunctive future, 43. 1. Genders, 1. 1 and General Obs. General Vocabulary, Spanish-Eng- lish, p. 373. English-Spanish, 386. Genitive case, 30. 12. Gerund. See Present Participle. Government, of Verbs, 56. Of Ad- jectives, 57. Of Adverbs, 58. 6. Of Prepositions, 59. Gran. See Grande. Grande, 9. 6, Rem. 3 and note. Haber, 17. 1> 2. Cannot be separated from the principal verb R. 1. Its con- jugation, 24. Used as Impersonal Verb, 27. 1, and translated by ago, there to be, since, this, there, etc., 27. 2. Expressing an action or a state which still continues, p. 157. Express- ing measure or distance, p. 157. Used with que before an Infinitive, 27. 3. Used impersonally, 55. p. 298. Haber and tener, 17. 1. Their con- jugations, 24. Haber de, 18. 2. Hacer, when used instead of haber, 27. 2, Obs. When followed by an In- INDEX. flnitive, 46. 12. Used impersonally, 55. p. 298. Hay and aili esta, p. 158. Hijosmios! 13.9. Holidays, 28. p. 162. How, exclamatory, rendered by que, 23. 12. Imperative mood, 41. 1-7. Used with pronouns, 41. p. 224, 3, 6. Of Reflexive Verbs, 52. 7. Imperative-affirmative, 31. p. 177; 41. 1-7. -Negative, 31. p. 177 ; 41. 5, c, 6. Imperfect, of the Indicative, its for- mation, 36, p. 199 ; its use, 36. 1-3. General Obs. on the Imperfect of the Indicative, 37. 7. Of the Subjunctive, its three forms, 43. 1 ; its use, 43. 2, 4,5. Imperfect conditionals, 44. 2. Impersonal verbs, 55. 1-4. Essen, tially or Accidentally Impersonal Verbs, 55. 2. Peculiarities of some Imper- sonal Verbs, 55. 4. Indefinite article, 1. 3. When omit- ted, 5. 4 and Obs. ; 29. 8. Exceptions, 1-5. Indicative mood, Present, 32. 35. Imperfect, 36. Preterite or Past Defi- nite, 37. Past Anterior, 39. Pluper- fect, 39, Future and Future Anterior, 40. Indirect object, 52. 1, 2, 4. Indirect object pronouns, 30. 1, 2,9-12; 31.1-4. Infinitive mood, 46, 47. When used as a noun, 46. 13 ; with or without the Article, 14. Governed by Prepositions, 47. 1 ; by the conjunctions como, que, the adverb donde, or an Inter- rogative Pronoun, 2 ; rendered by the Present Indicative or the Subjunctive Mood, 3. When may be used instead of the Gerund, 48. 3, 5, Note. When used with con, 48. 5, 2, Note. Infinitive, preceded by que and ha- ber, 27. 3. In order to, 46. 6. Interjections, 62. Interjectional phrases, 62. Interrogation-point (d), P- 22, 7, 1. Interrogative pronouns, 23. When governing the Infinitive, 47- 2. Interrogative sentence, 4. 7. Ir, not used with estar, 19. 4. Used with an adverb, 35. 7. Used with por, 35. 7, Obs. Imperfect Indica- tive, 36. pp. 199, 200. When it maybe used instead of andar, 48. 4. When it may be used instead of estar, 51.7. Irregular verbs, first conjugation, 33. 1-4 ; second conjugation, 34. 1-10 ; third conjugation, 35. 1-9. Irregular verbs, list of the principal Irregular Verbs, pp. 328-369. Irse, 53. p. 288. It, sometimes not rendered in Spanish, 16. 10. Different ways of translating it, 22. 6. Its, 13. 6. Jamas, used with no, 7. 3. Jamas and nunca, 3-5. La, 1. 1-2, 13. 4. As a Pronoun in Simple Tenses, 22. 1-2. In compound tenses, 22. 3. Joined with the Infini- tive and Gerund, 22. 4 and p. 124. Placed after the verb, p. 124. When translated by it, 22. 6. Used with Una to translate one o'clock, 28 1. Las, 2. 1 ; 13. 4. As a Pronoun in Simple Tenses, 22. 1, 2. In Compound Tenses, 22. 3. Joined with the Infini- tive and Gerund, 22. 4 and p. 124. Placed after the verb, p. 124. When translated by them. Used with a numeral to indicate the time of the day. 28.1. Le, used in Simple Tenses, 22. 1, 2. In Compound Tenses, 22. 3. Joined with the Infinitive and Gerund, 22. 4 and p. 124. Placed after the verb, p. 124. When translated by it, 22. 6. Used with a pronoun and V. or W., 30. 7. Les, grammatical translation of to them. 22.6. LI, p. 17, 3. Lo, 1. 1, 2 and Rem. 1, 2. Used with Possessive Pronoun, 14. 7. As a Pro- noun in Simple Tenses, 22. 1, 2. In Compound Tenses, 22. 3. Joined with the Infinitive and Gerund, 22. 4 and p. 124. Placed after the verb, p. 124. Declinable and undeclinable, p. 125; 22. 5. When translated by it, 22. 6. Los, 2. 1; 13. 4. As a Pronoun in Simple Tenses, 22. 1, 2. In Compound Tenses, 22. 3. Joined with the Infini- tive and Gerund, 22. 4 and p. 124. Placed after the verb, p. 124. When translated by them, 22. 6. Mai. SeeMalo. Malo, 9. 6, Rem. 1. M andar, when followed by an Infinitive, 46. 12. Mas de, 20. 7. Masculine gender, 1. 1. May, 44. 11, 1. Medio (media), used to indicate the time of the day, 28. 1. Medio and mitad, 21. 7. Menos, used to indicate the time of the day, 28. 2. Menos de, 20. 7. Mf and mi, p. 20, 6, 1. Might, 11, 2, 3. Might have, 44. 11, 7. Mil, when used in the plural, 20. 5. Used with ciento, 20. 8. Mlo, 13. 9. Mismo, misma, used with a Posses- sive Pronoun, 14. 2. Used with a Dem- onstrative Pronoun, 16. 5. Mitad and medio, 21. 7. Months of the year, 21. Moods, Indicative, 32-40. Impera- tive, 41." Pubjunctive, 42-45. Infini- tive, 46-50- 10 INDEX. Multiplicative numbers, 21. Nada used with ni, 7. 6. Meaning not anything, 7. Hj Obs. When used with tener, 25. 3. Nadie used with ni, 7. 6. Meaning not anybody, 7. H> Obs. Narrative tense, 37. 7. Negative, 7. Double negative, 7 . 2. Two negatives after the verb, 7. 7. Neuter article, 1. 1 and Rem. 1, 2. Neuter gender, 1. 1 and Rem. 1, 2. Neuter verb, when becoming a Re- flexive Verb, 52. 1. When becoming Impersonal Verb, 55. 2, 3. Ni used with jamas, nunca, nada, nadie, etc., 7 6. Requiring the plural, 61. 2. Ningun. See ningunp. Ninguno (ningunos, ninguna, nin- gunas), 7. 9 and Obs. ; 9. 6, Rem. 1. No, put before the verb, 7. 1. When omitted, R. 2, Obs., R. 3. Used by emphasis with an affirmative sentence, 7. 8 and Note. Put at the end of a sentence, R. 10. Nos, when becoming no, 30. 8. Not anybody, 7. 11, Obs. Not anything, 7. 11, Obs. Nouns ending in o, a, cirn or tion, tad or dad. See 1. 5, General Obs. Having no plural, X. 9. Having no singular, 2. 9. Nos and nosotros, 4. 2. Nosotros and nos, 4. 2. Numbers. See Cardinal, Ordinal, Collective, Fractional, and Mul- tiplicative numbers. Nunca used with no, 7. 3. Nunca ^and jamas, R. 3, Obs. N, p. 17, 3. 6, when requiring the Plural, 61. 2. Oandu, 18. p. 104. Object before the subject, 4. 5. Pre- ceded by a cardinal number, 20. 6. O'clock, its translation, 28. 1. On, when translated in Spanish by the Definite Article, 28. 3. One, 1. 3. Ordinal numbers, 21. Agree in gender and number with the noun, 21. 1. When used without the Article, 21. 4. When used instead of a Car- dinal Number, 21.5. Otro, 16. 4. Para, 6. 3. When used before a follow- ing Infinitive, 46. P- 254, 6. Its use, 59.6. Para siempre used with jamds, 7.5. Participio absolute, 30. 3. Participio de Preterite, 48. 6. Participio pasivo, 49. 3. Participles activos, 48. 1. Participios de presente, 48. 1. Participle. See Present Parti- ciple and Past Participle. Passive verb, 51. 1-7. \ Past Anterior, its formation, 39. 1. jM. Its use, R. 2 and Obs. 1, 2. Past Definite. See Preterite. Past Indefinite, 37. 1, 5-7. Past Participle, ends in Regular Con- jugation, viz., in ado for the first con- jugation, and in ido for the second and third conjugations, 17- 5; 49. 1. Ir- regular Past Participles, 18. Agrees with its subject, when accompanied by estar, 18. 1. Always formed regu- larly in the Irregular Verbs of first con- jugation, 33. 3. Irregular Participle, 49. p. 269. Having sometimes an active meaning, 49. p. 269. Considered as an Adjective, 49. 2, 4. Invariable when joined with haber, 49. 3. Used as an abbreviation of the Gerund, 49. 5, 6, and Note. Preceded by a preposi- tion, 49. 6, and Note. Requiring after them de or por, 49. 7. Having an active and a passive meaning, 49. 8. Used as feminine nouns, 49. 9. Verbs having two past participles, one regular and one irregular. Their different uses, 50. p. 274 and R. 1. When invariable, 51. 5, 6. Used as adjective governs de or por, 57. 6- Perfect of the subjunctive, 42. 12. Periphrastic verbs, 54. Pero and sino, 18. 5. Personal pronouns, used with prepo- sitions, 30. 1-3, 9-11. Used with verbs, 30. 1-12. Used with Reflexive Verbs, 52. 1, 2. Plural of nouns, 2 . 2-9. Of adjectives, 8, Used with verbs, 61. 1-3, 6. Pluperfect, of the Indicative, 39. 3, and Obs. Of the Subjunctive, 43. 2, Obs., 6; 44.9. Ponerse, 53. 2. Por, used with ir, 35. 7, Obs. Used with comenzar, empezar, and acabar, 46. 4. Meaning on account of or because; meaning instead of, 47. 1. Used after a Past Participle, 49. 7. Used after an adjective, 57.4, Its use, 59. 7. Por siempre used with jamds, 7- 5. Possessive adjectives, their agree- ment, 13. 1. Repeated before every noun, 2. Not used after a noun, 13. 9. Possessive pronouns, 14. Their agreement, 14. 1. Used emphatically with mismo, misma, propio, pro- pia, 14. 2. Used with fo, 14. 7. Postrer. See Postrero. Postrero, 9. 6, Rem. 1 ; 21. 2. Potential, 46. 11. Preface, pp. iii, iv. Prepositions, 30. 1-3, 7, 9, 10. Must be repeated before every pronoun, 30. 11. Preceding a Past Participle, 49 6, and Note. Following a verb, 56. 1, 2. Following an adjective, 57. 1-7. Pre- ceded by an adverb, 58. 6. Requiring de after them, 59 p. 314, Requiring a after them, F9. p. 314. Prepositional phrases, requiring de after them, 59. p. 314. INDEX. 11 Present indicative, 31. 1-5. Used instead of the Future, 32. 2. Used instead of the Past Tense, 32. 2. Its formation in Regular Verbs, 32. 4, 5 ; in Irregular Verbs of First Conjugation, 33. 1,2,4; in Irregular Verbs of Second Conjugation, 34. 1-10 ; in Irregular Verbs of Third Conjugation, 35. 1-9. When used concurrently with the Pres- ent Subjunctive, 42. 0, 9. May govern the Conditional, 44. 8. When used instead of the Present Indicative, 47. 3. Present Participle, or Gerund, ends (in Regular Verbs) in ando for the first conjugation, and in iendo for the second and third conjugation, 19. 1. Present Participle of verbs ending in eer and uir, 19. 2. Used with estar, 19. 3. Its use, 19. 5-7. Used with en, 19. 8, and Obs. Used with the Present Participle of estar, 19. 9. Used instead of an adverb, conjunction, or preposition, 19. 10. Always formed regularly in the Irregular Verbs of First Conjugation, 33. 3. When used after another verb, 46. 4 and Note, 8 and Note. Has two forms, the one in ante or ente and the second in ando or iendo, 48- 1. When used concur- rently with the Infinitive, 48. 3. When translated in English by the conjunc- tions as, since, if, and the adverbs when, while, whilst, 48. 7, and by como, luego, que, cuando, asl que, 7, Note. Its use, 48. 1-8. When ending in endo, 48. 9. Con- sidered as an adjective, 49. 2. Present subjunctive, its formation, 42. p. 229. Its use, 42. 1-11. When used concurrently with the Present Indicative, 42. 6, 9, or with the Imper- fect Subjunctive, 43. 3, 4. Preterite or past definite, itsforma- ~~-timi, 37. p. 203. Its nise, 37. 1-4, 7. Its irregularities, 38. 1-5. Used with the Past Anterior, 39. 2, Obs. 1.' When requiring the subjunctive mood, 44.9. Preterite perfecto, 42. 5, a. Primer. See Primero. Primero, when becoming primer, 21. 2. When used instead of unq, 21. G. Prime- , when used instead of primer o, 21.3. Pronombres incllticos, 30. l, 2, 4-6,9; 31.2. Pronombres indirectos, 30, 1, 2. Pronouns left out in conjugating a verb, 4. 6. Their respective places, 31. 1-3. Accompanying Reflexive Verbs, 52. p. 282; object, 52. 5. Pronunciation, p. 14, 2. Exercises P- 22, 8. Propio, propi a, used with a Possessive Pronoun, 14. 2. Punctuation, p. 22. 7. Que as a Relative Pronoun when used as a subject, 23. 1. When used as an Accusative, 22. 2. When accompanied by el (or la, los, las, lo), 23. 3. la never suppressed, 23. 4. May precede the person or object, 23. 4, Obs. When preferable to quien, 23. 5, Obs. Used as an exclamation, 23. 12. Used with haber and an Infinitive, 27. 3. Can never be understood, and must be repeated before every subordinate verb, 42. 4 and Obs. When used with the Present Indicative, 46. 1. When gov- erning the Infinitive, 47. 2. Que and cual, 23. 9. Que, Interrogative Pronoun, 23. 11. Quedar, when may be used instead of ser, 51.7. Qu6 de, when used, 23. 13. Quien, used instead of que, 16. 7. Re- lating only to persons, 23. 5. Quie"n, Interrogative Pronoun, 23, 11. Quienes. See Quien. Quitarse, 53. 2. Reciprocal or mutual action, 52. 6. Reflexive verbs, 52. 1-9. Being conjugated with two Personal Pronouns, 52.1. Essentially Reflexive Verbs and Accidentally Reflexive Verbs, 52. 2, 8. Their different meaning, 52.8,9. Verbs being Reflexive in Spanish and not in English, 52. 3. Being conjugated with another verb, 52. p. 283 and R. 4. Ex- pressing a reciprocal or mutual action, 52. 6. Referring to parts of the body, 53. p. 288, and R. 1. Requiring de after them, 56. 2. Regular verbs, table of their termina- tion, p. 328, 329. See Verbs. Relative pronouns, 23. When re- quiring the Subjunctive Mood, 42. 9. S, when suppressed in Reflexive Verbs. 52.8. Saber and conocer, 14. 9. San. See Santo. Santo, 9. 0, Rem. 2 and Obs. Se, 31. 3, 4. Used with a passive sen- tence, 51. 3. Se* and se, p. 20, 6, 1. Seasons, 21. Senor, 9. 6. Senora, 9. 6. Ser, used to express possession, 14. 8. Used without adjective, is accompanied by de, 14. 8. Not used with estar, 19. 4. Used instead of tener, 25 1, Obs. a, &, c. Its conjugation, 26. Used as Impersonal Verb, 27. 1. Im- perfect Indicative, 36. pp. 199, 200. Used with Passive Verbs, 51. 1. Ser and estar, 5. 1-3. Used instead of tener, 25. 1, Obs. a, 6, c. Their con- jugations, 26. Ser de mas edad. 25. 4, Obs. Should, 44. 11,2, 4. Should have, 44. 7. Should like to, 44, 11, 5. Si, when used in the subjunctive (or con- ditional), 44. 2-A ; 45.1. 12 INDEX. Singular, when the subject is put in the singular, 61 4-8. Sino and pero, 18. 5. Solamente, when used instead of sino, 18.6. Some, 4. 8. Sf and si, p. 20, 6, 1. Spanish-English Vocabulary, p. 373 Su. 13. 3, 6. Subject or nominative, 52. 1. When subjects are not of the same person, 61. 4. Composed of two In- finitives, 61.5. Subjunctive mood, 42-45. Pres- ent, 42. Imperfect, 43. Pluperfect, 43. Conditional, 44. Potential, 44. 11. Future, 45. Future Perfect, 45. When used instead of the Infinitive, 47. 3. Required after some preposi- tions, 57. 2. Superlative and comparative, 11, 12. Superlative absolute, its formation, 11. 1-9. Sus. See Su. Suyo, 33.9. Syllables, p. 19, 5. Tal, when used with cual, 23. 7, c. Tener, 9. 5 ; 17. 1, 3. Its conjugation, 24. Its idiomatic uses, 25. 1, 2-5, 7, 8. Tener and haber, 17. 1. Their con- jugations, 24. Tener algo malo, 25. 5. Tener mas edad, 25. 4, Obs. Tener que, 18. 2; 25. 8. Tercer. See Tercero. Tercero, 9. 6, Rem. 1 ; 21. 2, Obs. Tercio, when used instead of tercero, 21 3 That of , 16. 6. That which, 16. 7. Them, how to translate it, 22. 6. The one which, 16. 7. There to be, how translated, 27. 2. They, sometimes not rendered in Span- ish, 16. 10. Those of, 16. 6. Those which, 16. 6. Time of the day, how indicated, 28. 1-2. To, meaning in order to, 46. 6. To be wrong, 25. 2, Obs. Todos, 27. p. 158. To them, how to translate it, 22. 6. Transitive verb, 51. l, 2. Triphthongs, p. 15, 2. 3. Triple. See p, 118 (Multiplicative Num- bers) and 21. 8. Tu, 4. 1. Tuyo, 13. 9. U and o, 18. Un. See Uno. Uno, una, 1. 3; 9. 6, Rem. 1. Their plural, 20. 1. When dropping its o, 1. 3 ; 20. 4. Una used with la to indi- cate one o'clock, 28. 1. Usted (or V.), 4. 3 and Note, R. 6 ; 13. ,, 4. Used with le, 30. 7. Ustedes (VV.), 4. 3 and Note, R. 6; 13. 3, 4. Used with le, 30. 7. Venir, not used with estar, 19, 4. Venir por, 35. 5, Obs , R. 7, Obs. Ver, Imperfect Indicative, 36. pp. 199, Verbs, conjugated interrogatively, 4. 4, 5. Conjugated without pronouns, 4. 6. First conjugation ending in ar, second conjugation in er, third in ir, 17. 4. Present Indicative, 32-35. Imperfect Indicative, 36. Past Definite or Preterite, 37. Past Indefinite, 37. Past Anterior, 39. Pluperfect Indica- tive, 39. Future and Future Anterior, 40. Imperative Mood, 41. Subjunc- tive Mood, 42-45. Infinitive Mood, 46, 47. Gerund or Present Participle, 48. Past Participle, 49, 50 Passive Verb, 51. Reflexive Verbs, 52, 53. Periphrastic Verbs, 54. Impersonal Verbs, 55. Government of Verbs, 56. Requiring no preposition before the following Infinitive, 46. p. 253. R. 1, 10, 1. Requiring a before the follow- ing Infinitive, 46. p. 254, R. 3, 10, 2. Requiring de before the following In- finitive, 46. p. 254, R. 2, Note, 5 and Note, 9 and Note, 10, 3, 11. Requiring para before the following Infinitive, 46. p. 254, R. 6. Requiring en before the following Infinitive, 46. p. 254, R. 7, 10, 4. Requiring con before a fol- lowing Infinitive, 46. p. 255, R. 8, 10, 5. When used before a Gerund, 46. 4 and Note. Having a different meaning according to the following preposition, 46. 9 and Note. Verbs having two Past Participles, one regular, the other Irregular. Their different use, 50. p. 274 and R. I. Defective verbs, 60. Agreement of the verb with its subject, 61. 1-8. Table of Terminations of the three Regular Verbs, p. 326, 327. List of the principal Irregular Verbs, pp. 328-3G9. Vocabulary, Spanish-English, p. 373. English-Spanish, p. 386. Volver a, 48. 9, in fine. Vos, 4. 3 and Note. Vosotros, 4. 3 and Note ; 41. 6. Vowels, p. 14, 2, 1. Voz pasiva, 51. Vuestro, vuestra, 13. 3. We, 4.2. Would, 44. 11, 2, 6. Y and e", 18. When used with Cardinal Numbers, 20. 3. Used to indicate the time of the day, 28. 2. Ya, E8. 10. You, 4. 3 and Note. PRACTICAL SPANISH COURSE. INTRODUCTION. 1. Letters and Sounds. The Alphabet. El Alfabeto. 1. The Spanish alphabet as given by the Spanish Academy contains twenty-nine letters and combinations of letters. ters. tion. ters. tion. ters. f tion. a a ah j jota ho'ta r ere ai f ray b be bay k ka Tcah rr erre ai f rray c ce thay 1 ele ai'lay s ese ai'ssay ch che chay 11 elle atflyay t te tay d de day m erne aVmay u u 00 e e ay n ene ai f nay v ve vay f efe ai'fay n ene aihiyey x ekis ay'keys g ge hay oh (ye yay h hache ah r chey P Pe pay y {y griega eigreeay'ga i i ee q cu coo z zeta thay*tah REMARK. The letter w occurs in Spanish, but only in a few foreign words. This is true also of k. Ex. : Wdshinyton, Konigsberga^ etc. 2. All these letters are of the feminine gender. Ex. : una b, unajota, etc. 3. They are divided, as in English, into vowels and conso- nants. 13 14 INTRODUCTION. 2. The Pronunciation. La Prommciacidn. The Spanish language does not present in its pronunciation the same difficulties as the English language We may say, in fact, that Spanish is pronounced as it is written, and written as it is pronounced, all the letters, with very few exceptions, being sounded in the words. The following rules on the way of pro- nouncing the vowels and consonants, together with those refer- ring to the accentuation of the words, and to diphthongs and triphthongs, will, we trust, enable the students of the Spanish language to acquire a correct pronunciation in a comparatively limited time. 1. Vowels. Vocales. The vowels are a, e, i, y, o, u. They are sounded : a like a in ah : Malaga, papa, bata. 5 like ai in bail : elemento, padre, come. i like ee in see : mira, libra, ira. y as a vowel like the Spanish i : voy, doy, soy. like o in no : obra, dorado, mono. U like oo in food : muro, uno, comun. NOTE. Great care must be used to pronounce the Spanish vowels very purely, and not to glide them into diphthongs, as are most English vowels. REMARK. Y is considered a vowel when it stands by itself, as in y, and; at the end of a word, as in rey, king, or of a syllable immediately followed by a consonant. But, at the beginning of a syllable, y is gener- ally considered a consonant, as in ya, already ; yerba, herb.' The custom of using the letter i instead of y is, however, becoming more general. 2. Diphthongs. Diptongos. Besides the simple sounds, there are in Spanish compound sounds, in wh?ch the two sounds are distinctly heard in a single emission of the voice. The sounds of diphthongs are produced by the rapid utterance of the vowel sounds of which they are composed. Spanish vowels are divided into two classes strong vowel*, a, 0, e, and weak vowels, i, U. CONSONANTS. 15 A combination of a strong and an unaccented weak vowel, or of a weak and strong, may form a diphthong, in which the two sounds are pronounced in one syllable, the weak receiving little stress. These diphthongs are twelve in number : ai, ay : an: aire, hay. pausa. ia ua diablo. fragua. oi, oy : ou: sois, voy. bou. io uo precio. arduo. ei, ey : eu: veis, ley. deuda. ie lie cielo. dueno. NOTE. In considering the combinations given in the second column, they have been included among the diphthongs. But it should be care- fully noted that the weak vowels i and u when before strong vowels are really consonants and are to be pronounced as y and w respectively. If in the above combinations the weak vowel is accented, no diphthong is formed : continue, continue. hacia, hacia. ley, lei. Two weak vowels may form a diphthong if the second be accented: iu . viuda . ^,117: ruido NOTE. If the first be accented, there is no diphthong : fliiido, Rm. 3. Triphthongs. Triptongos. There are four triphthongs in Spanish : iai : preciais, you value. iei : vacie*is, you may empty. nai, nay : santiguais, you bless ; Paraguay. uei or uey: averigueis, you may search ; buey, ox. 4. Consonants. Consonantes. Many of the consonants sound approximately as in English. The following are the rules referring to those which differ materially in the two languages. B differs somewhat from the English pronunciation. In making it the lips are not pressed together and the air is 16 INTRODUCTION. allowed to pass between them without interruption. At the beginning of a word it is somewhat more like the English b : haba, Habana, Cuba, beber, baile. REMARK. B and V have to-day the same pronunciation in Spain. C has two sounds : 1. Before the vowels e and i (ce, ci) it has the sound of the English th. in thick, thin, etc. : cena, cima, decente, recibe, dice. 2. Before the vowels a, 0, and u (ca, co, and cw), and before consonants, it sounds like k in English : cola, cabo, cuna, criado, clamor. CH is a distinct letter, double in figure, but simple in value. It has the same sound as the English ch in church, chair, chin, etc. : macho, mucho, chupa, rancho, dicha. D is pronounced like the English th in then; somewhat stronger at the beginning of a word, and weaker at the end : dado, dedo, hablado, Madrid, atado. G has two sounds : 1. Before e and i, it sounds like a strongly pronounced English h (the German ch in acK). gente, ingenio, agilidad, general, gengibre. 2. Elsewhere it is pronounced like g in go. gato, gorro, gloria, grito, digno. 3. To preserve the latter sound of g before e and i the vowel U (gu) must be inserted before these vowels. guerra, guia, aguijar, guirlanda, guitarra. NOTE. In this case the u is silent. When, however, the u is to be pronounced after the g, and before the letters e and i, a diaeresis ( " ) must be placed over the u (ii) : antigiiedad, argiiir, agiiero, magiieto. H is always mute : hombre, horca, alharaca, hora, honor. hueso, huevo, hueco, liuerto, vihuela. CONSONANTS. 17 J is pronounced as a guttural before all the vowels, that is to say, like the Spanish g before e and i : paja, jabon, caja, cajita, Jorge. REMARK. It will be remarked that this guttural sound is generally indicated by g before e and i, and by 3 before a, o, and u. LL is liquid, arid pronounced as in the English word William : llaga, calle, Hover, caballo, polio. NOTE. A pronunciation not infrequently heard is that where 11 has the value of English y. Thus calle becomes caye, polio poyo, etc. This is not to be followed. IF has a liquid sound, and is pronounced nearly like gn in mignonette, or like the gn in French : senor, ensenar, nino, sueno, anadir. NOTE. The mark over the n (~) is called tilde in Spanish. ft is found only before lie and ui, and has the sound of k (the u being silent) : parque, aqui, querido, despique, queja. REMARK. Whenever the diphthongs ua, ue, uo ar ^receded by the sound of k, and the u is pronounced, the accepted orthography is cu. Thus : cuadro, cuero, acuoso. R is trilled more than in English, but with less force between two vowels or in the middle of a word : rosa, pintura, lirio, cara, perla. RR is more strongly trilled than is r : carro, perro, guerra, cerrajo,* ferrocarril. S has always the hissing sound, like ss in English, as in assembly : sabio, famoso, paseo, pesadumbre, rosa. S is never followed by a consonant when commencing a word, as in the Latin words scientia, Scipio ; and, in order to avoid this, the Spanish write ciencia (suppressing the s) or Escipi6n (having it preceded by an e). T varies sensibly from the English pronunciation. The tip 2 18 INTRODUCTION. of the tongue must be brought well forward, and rest against the upper teeth : tonto, torto, chiquito, tirante, titiritero. V is pronounced like the Spanish B. velo, valor, voluntad, bravo, ave. REMARK. The Spanish Academy now recognizes this pronunciation, although it disapproves of it. W has the sound given it in the language from which th* word containing it is taken : Wagner = Vagner, Washington = Uashington, X sounds like cs or ks in English, as in wax: axioma, examinar, reflexion, exagerar, exuberancia. OBSERVATIONS. 1. The x had formerly the sound of the Spanish j, or g before e and i, but according to the modern orthography the x is replaced by a g or a j whenever it has the guttural sound. Thus, the following words which were formerly written xefe, xergdn, baxeza, baxar, baxo, etc., are written to-day jefe, jergdn, bajeza, bajar, bajo, etc. 2. The x at the end of such words as relox, carcax, almaradux, etc., which formerly changed the x into j for the plural, as relojes, carcajes, etc., is now replaced by a j; and these words are written now reloj, carcaj, almaraduj, etc. NOTE. The final j in reloj is silent. Y at the beginning of a word or syllable is a consonant, and is more strongly pronounced than in English. It approximates the sound of j as in Joe : yo, yesca, reyes, arroyo, haya. Z is pronounced like the English th in the word tJdn, or like the Spanish c before e and i. This letter precedes the vowels a, 0, and u (za, zo, and zu) : zapato, tiz6n, zumo, zorra, Mufioz. 3. Variations in Pronunciation. The pronunciation indicated above is the Castilian, the accepted national idiom. Dialectical differences in pronuncia- tion are not uncommon in Spain itself, and are found regularly in the Spanish-American countries. DOUBLE LETTERS. 19 Such variations are : C before e and i = S : Garcia = Garsia. Z = S I zozobra = sosobra, Gomez = Gomes. Intervocalic or final d is generally silent : nada = wa(a), cow- pradoj comprao. B + Tie is silent : bueno = weno. Gu + a or = W : a^rwa = aww. S is much weakened or disappears : cowo estfa wstec? = como eta ute. Ex + consonant (other than h) = es : excelente = escelente, LI = y : po//o = poyo, caballo = cabayo, lleno = ^ewo. NOTE. In writing j is generally used for g, before e and i: general becomes jeneral. These usages are not to be followed by the student desirous of speaking pure Spanish. 4. Double Letters. Duplicacidn de las letras. The Spanish Academy, conforming to the pronunciation, has suppressed double consonants when one alone is pronounced. CO and nn are the only consonants now doubled, and that only when both are sounded, as in the words acceso, ennoblecer. REMARK. Double 1 (II) and double r (rr) are to be considered only as letters of the alphabet, and not as double consonants. 5. Syllables. Silabas. There are five rules in Spanish for the division of words into syllables : 1. Whenever a single consonant is found between two vowels, it is joined to the vowel which follows it : a-mor, a-la, flu-xi6n, co-fre, mu-ne-ca. 2. The letters ch, 11, and rr, because simple in their promm* ciation, must not be divided : chi-co, co-che, CF -lie, ca-ba-llo, pe-rra 20 INTRODUCTION. 3. When two or more consonants stand between vowels, the last consonant goes with the following vowel. The others are united with the preceding syllable : es-pe-rar, abs-te-ner, in-sis-tir, sub-ver-sion. EXCEPTION. L and r unite with any preceding consonant except s, forming a consonantal diphthong: a-blan-dar, ins-tru-ir, ca-te-dri-lla, es-tre-me-cer. OBSERVATION. When double c and double n occur in a word, one of these letters is placed in each syllable : ac-cion, en-uo-ble-ce. 4. In compound words formed from prepositions and other parts of speech the preposition forms a separate syllable, as in : ab-ne-ga-cion, des-a-gra-da-ble, con-ca-vi-dad, sub-ver-sion. 5. Vowels forming a diphthong or triphthong must not be separated : gra-cio-so, guar-dia, pre-ciais. 6. Accent. Acento. 1. The Spanish word of more than one syllable receives a greater stress on one of these syllables than on the others. This is called the tonic accent, and varies, falling generally on any one of the last three syllables. 2. In writing (or printing) this tonic accent is represented by the acute accent ('). This sign is used to indicate any deviation from the accepted rules of Spanish accentuation. 3. These rules are : All words ending in a vowel or n or s are accented on the penult : ca b 0j cantan, imagen, vecinos, crisis. All words ending in a consonant (except n or s) are accented on the last syllable : general, senor, verdad, alcatraz, can tar. 4. Any deviation from the above must nave the written papa, cafe, rincon, atras, linea. agil, aziicar, alferez, item, alcazar. NOTE. Patronymics are regularly accented on the penult: Perez, Sanchez, Fernandez, Rodriguez, Jimenez. ACCENTS. 21 5. For the purposes of accentuation a diphthong or a triph- thong is always considered as one syllable. tragedia, aire, pausa, arduo, ruido, envainan, preciais. Thus if the syllable requiring the written accent be a diph- thong or triphthong, such accent must be placed upon the accented vowel the strong vowel in combinations of a strong and weak, or the second in combinations of two weak : despues, pielago, preciais, Caucaso. Otherwise there is no diphthong, and each vowel represents a syllable : Garcia, serian, reir, leido, rio, fliiido, continue, Riu. 6. The addition of the plural signs does not change the tonic accent of a word : mujer, mujeres. empleo, empleos. mascara, mascaras, action, acciones. canape, canapes. EXCEPTION. Begimen becomes regimenes, and oaracter, caracteres. 7. Monosyllabic preterit forms are always accented : di, fui, fue, rio, vi, vio. 8. When, in the conjugation of verbs, certain forms (gener- ally the preterit) bear the written accent, this is preserved, even though the addition of personal pronouns would bring them under the regular rule : fuime, riose, casose, pareciome, habianse. The addition of one or more pronouns to a regularly accented form (and which in consequence bears no written accent) requires the insertion of such accent to indicate the new pronunciation : gustabanme, exhortaronme, dandomelo, comanselos. 9. The preposition a and the conjunctions e, <5, u, are ac- cented arbitrarily. 10. The written accent is * used to distinguish two words having the same form. A list follows giving some of the prin- cipal cases : 22 INTRODUCTION. de (subj. of dar), give. de, of. di (pret. of dar), gave. di (imperat. of decir), say. bajo, / descend. bajo, low. c6mo, 1 eat. como, as. el, he, him. el, the. he, behold. he, I have. mi, we. mi, ra?/. mas, wore. mas, bid. se, / /biow ; be thou. se, one's se^f. si, ?/es ; one's seZ/. si, if. solo, OTifo/. solo, alone. son, sound. son, are. sobre, exceeds (verb). sobre, over (prep). suefto, I dream. sueno, dream (noun). te, tea. te, te. tii, thou. tu, 2%. uno, una, unite (verb). uno, una, a, one. 11. The written accent is marked on demonstrative adjec- tives used as substantives : este, esta, this one. este, this. ese, esa, that one. ese, that. aquel, aquella, that one. aquel, aquella, that. NOTES. 1. The neuter forms esto, eso, aquello, are never accented. 2. The plural of the above pronouns is also accented in accordance with the usage in the singular : stos, aquellos, ciiyos. esos, cuantos, cuales. estas, aquellas, ciiyas. esas, cuantas, quienes. 12. The written accent is marked on pronouns and adverbs used interrogatively or emphatically, even in indirect questions. como, how? como, as. cual, which? cual, which. cuan, how! cuan, as. cuando, when? cuando, when. cuanto, cuanta, how much ? I cuan to, cuanta, as much. ciiyo, whose? cuyo, whose. donde, where ? donde, where. que, what?! que, what, which. quien, who? ! whom? ! quien, who, whom. PUNCTUATION. 23 13. Aun is unaccented when coming before, or used without, a verb: Aun no ha llegado. It is accented after a verb : No ha llegado aun. 7. Punctuation. Funtuacidn. 1. Punctuation is in Spanish the same as in English. How- ever, as it often happens in the Spanish language, that punctua- tion alone indicates the interrogative sense of the sentence, and that, if the period be long, the reader is informed too late of the interrogation, the Spanish make use of a reversed sign of inter- rogation ($) at the beginning of the sentence, besides the regular sign (?) at the end of the same : i Seran perdidos tantos ejemplares Are all those examples and expe- y escarmientos como presencia- riences which we daily see, and mos cada dia para persuadirte a which ought to persuade you to mudar de vida y entrar en la change your life and enter the senda del honor y de la virtud ? path of honor and virtue, to be lost on you ? 2. The same rule is observed with regard to the exclamation- point, and an inverted sign(j) is placed at the beginning of an exclamative sentence : j Quanta debio ser la confusion y What must have been the confusion el sentimiento de los que creyen- and regrets of those who thought do encontrar el oro a montones, they would find gold in large no encontraron sino hambre, pe- quantities, and met only hunger, nalidades y peligros ! sufferings, and dangers ! 8. Capital Letters. Letras mayiisculas. The use of capital letters is the same in Spanish as in English, with the following exceptions : 1. No adjective of nationality occurring in the middle of a phrase can begin with a capital letter unless used substantively : El ejercito frances. Una Franccsa. 24 INTRODUCTION. 2. To is always written with a small letter, except at the beginning of a sentence : Mi hermano y yo, 3. The names of months and days are written in small letters. 9. Exercises in Pronunciation. 1 Universe. I. Con el nomhre de universo se designa cuanto existe en el mundo entero, es decir, el sol, las estrellas, la tierra, cuanto nuestra vista akianza en las profundidades del aire, y cuanto hay todavia mas alia de lo que podemos ver. For mas pequenos que seamos, y por mas debil que nuestra vista sea, podemos admirar una parte de este in- menso espectaculo. El sol, en medio de esos mirnerosos globos que brillan, en toda la boveda celeste, es entre todas las obras de Dios la que se presenta con mayor lucimiento y majestad, es una eterna lum- brera colocada en el centro del mundo para esparcir la luz por todas partes, y a una distancia que no nos es posible determinar. Es como el rey de los astros. II. El sol, que nos parece tan pequeno, d causa de la suma distancia suya, es, segiin los astronomos, mil y cuatrocientas veces mayor que la tierra. Su figura es la de un globo ; y el calor y la luz que el esparce en el universo nos dan a conocer que su materia es el fuego mismo 6 que esta inflamada de continuo. Le vernos parecer todas las mananas en el oriente, elevarse en el cielo hasta medio dia, bajar despues y desa- parecer del horizonte por el occidente. El sol no muda de sitio, y permanece en el centro del mundo para dar luz d cuanto le rodea. Se han notado ciertas manchas sobre este cuerpo tan reluciente, y se ha descubierto que el giraba sobre si mismo, como giraria una bala atra- vesada con un asador. Estas manchas se rlescubren desde luego en una estremidad de este astro, se adelantan, se ven despues en la otra estremidad, y desaparecen finalmente por detras para volver a parecer de nuevo de alii a algun tiempo. Se ha observado que para volver al punto de que ellas partieron, le son necesarios veinte y siete dicis, tiempo necesario al sol por consiguiente para dar una vuelta completa EXERCISES IN PRONUNCIATION. 28 sobre el eje suyo. Se valua que el sol dista de nosotros treinta y cuatro millones trescientas cincuenta y siete mil cuatrocientas y ochenta leguas. III. Se distinguen estos tan numerosos astros en estrellas fijas, porque no las vemos mudar de lugar, y en planetas 6 estrellas errantes, porque giran en mayor 6 menor tiempo alrededor del sol. Se presume que las estrellas fijas son unos globos luminosos se in ej antes al sol, y que dan luz a varios mundos muy remotos para que nuestra vista pueda alcanzarlos a ver. Si las estrellas nos parecen mas pequenas que el astro que nos dispensa el dia, nace de que ellas estan infinitamente mas apartadas de nosotros. Juzgad de su magnitud e inmensa dis- tancia por la que esta mas inmediata a la tierra, y que se llama Sirio: se cree que esta estrella fija dista de nosotros cuatrocientas mil veces mas que el sol, y que su dianietro 6 anchura es de treinta y tres millo- nes de leguas. Los planetas son en mimero de siete y se diferencian de las estrellas fijas, a causa de que giran alrededor del sol, y no tienen luz de si mismos: aquella con que brillan, les viene del sol. Se presume que estos inmensos globos son, al modo de la tierra, unos mundoa habitados. IV. La tierra es redonda como una bola. Sus montanas y valles, que nos parecen tan considerables, pueden compararse, cuando mas, con las desigualdades que se ven en la cdscara de una naranja, y que no impiclen que este fruto tenga una figura redonda. Ella gira sobre si misma como una bola que estd atravesada con un asador de hierro. Este movimiento, que se llama rotacion, le propor- ciona alternativamente el dia y la noche ; es decir, que la parte que esta" vuelta hacia el sol goza de la luz, mientras que la parte opuesta esta en la obscuridad. Pero, como la tierra da esta vuelta sobre si misma en veinte y cuatro horas, resulta de esto, que ella tiene en este espacio de tiempo el dia y la nocbe. La tierra, ademds de este movimiento de todos las dias, tiene otro que se ejecuta en un ano ; ella da una vuelta inmensa alrededor del sol. Este ultimo movimiento produce las diferentes estaciones del ano. 26 LESSON 1. Leccidn I. Lesson I. ARTICLES, DIFFERENT FORMS. El, La, \tfie Lo, Un, Una, aw, one. Ejemplos. El hombre tiene el libro. La raujer tiene la mesa, j Quien tiene la pliuna ? El padre tiene un caballo. La madre tieue una casa. El general es prudente. La senora es amable. Examples. The man has the book. The woman has the table* Who has the pen ? The father has a horse. The mother has a house. The general is prudent. The lady is amiable. Vocabulario. El amigo, the friend. El caballo, the horse. El caballero, the gentleman. El dinero, the money. El hermano, the brother. El hi jo, the son. El jar din, the garden. El libro, the book. Vocabulary. El nino, the child. El panadero, the baker. El tio, the uncle. La casa, the house. La hermana, the sister. La hija, the daughter. La Have, the key. Carlos, Charles. Es, is. Luisa, Louisa. Mi, my. Muy, very. Pobre, poor. Quien, who, whom. Tiene, has. Y, and. Exercise 1. 1. El nino tiene un libro. 2. Carlos es mi hermano. 3. Luisa es mi hermana. 4. i Quien tiene la Have ? 5. Mi amigo tiene la Have y la pluma. 6. El caballo es grande. 7. Mi tio es pobre. 8. La casa es grande. 9. El panadero tiene un hijo y una hija. 10. Mi amigo tiene una casa y un jardin. 11. El jardin es muy grande 12. El caballero tiene el dinero. ARTICLES, DIFFERENT FORMS. 27 Exercise 2. 1. My house is very large. 2. My brother has a horse. 3. The gentleman has a house. 4. The baker is my friend. 5. The general is very poor. 6. Charles has my pen. 7. My table is very large. 8. My uncle is very prudent. 9. The daughter has a house, and the son has a garden. 10. The woman is very amiable. 11. My brother is a child. 12. The book is very large. Gramatica. Grammar. 1. There are three genders in the Spanish language: the masculine, the feminine, and the neuter. The definite article has in the singular a distinct form for each gender : masculine el ; feminine, la ; neuter, lo : El padre, the father. La madre, the mother. Lo bueno, the good. KEMARKS. 1. The neuter gender is only applicable to adjectives (numeros adjetivos) taken in an unlimited or indefinite sense, as: lo bueno, the good or what is good ; lo peor, the worst or what is worst ; etc. This NEUTER GENDER, which has no plural, is therefore never applied to persons or things, but only to adjectives taken substantively, and to sub- stantives taken adjectively : Todo era grande en San Luis, lo rey, lo santo, lo capitan, everything was great in St. Louis (Louis IX.), the king, the saint, the captain. 2. The neuter article is not placed indifferently before all adjectives taken substantively. Thus, in the following sentences: El malo sera castigado, the wicked shall be punished ; El azul de este pano es demasia- do oscuro, the blue of this cloth is too dark, we could not make use of the neuter article lo, because those adjectives are taken substantively and are sufficiently determinate. It is evident, in fact, that in the first sen- tence, the word hoxnbre, man, is understood before malo, wicked; and in the second sentence, the word color, color, before azul, blue. 2, Although the article el belongs only to the masculine gen- der, it may be placed, for the sake of euphony, before feminine nouns beginning with an accented a: el agua, the water; el alma, the soul; el ala, the wing ; el dguila, the eagle ; el ave, the bird. It must be observed, however, that this change of article is only admitted in the singular, and that we must say in the plural las aguas, las almas, las alas, etc. 28 LESSON 1. Adjectives accompanying the singular of such nouns must be placed in the feminine : el agua <3 fria, the water is cold ; etc. The same rules are to be observed in reference to words begin- ning with an h followed by an accented a, as: el hacha es pesada, the axe is heavy ; las hachas, the axes ; etc. Nouns like America, America; abeja, bee; alegria, joy; habitation, habitation; etc., take the feminine article la, because the first a is not accented: La America, la habitacion, etc. 3, The indefinite article a, an, or the numeral one, is ren- dered by un before a masculine noun (the o of uno being dropped before a noun), and by Una before a feminine noun : Un hermano, a brother. Una hermana, a sister. Un libro, a book. Una mesa, a table. NOTE. The indefinite article is not used before a word in the predi- cate expressing condition, quality, or character : Soy Americano. / am an American. Es negociante. He is a trader. Son generales. They are generals. 4, Adjectives should always be repeated before the nouns they qualify : El padre y la madre. The father and (the) mother. La casa y el jardin. The house and (the) garden. El buen lapiz y la buena pluma. The good pencil and (the good) pen. NOTE. Some writers do not always observe this rule. GENERAL OBSERVATIONS ON THE GENDERS. 5, Nouns denoting men, or their rank, titles, and professions are masculine, irrespective of ending : El papa, the pope. El profeta, the prophet. El cura, the priest. El alguacil, the constable. Those denoting women or their condition are feminine : La reina, the queen. La emperatriz, the empress. 6* The gender of nouns may often be known by their termi- nations (except as above) : 1 , Nouns ending in are masculine : Except mano, hand; nao, vessel; seo, church. PLURAL. 29 2. Nouns ending in a are generally feminine : Except dia, day ; mapa, map. EXCEPTIONS. Those ending in -a derived from the Greek neuter, as clima, climate ; idioma, idiom; poema, poem; dilema, dilemma; diploma, diploma; dogma, dogma; etc. 3. Nouns ending in -d, -ion, -timbre, -ie are feminine : La puridad, the purity. La cuestion, the question. La libertad, the liberty. La nacion, the nation. La virtud, the virtue. La serie, the series. La lumbre, the fire. GENERAL RULE FOR LATIN SCHOLARS. Nouns derived from the Latin generally preserve in Spanish the same gender they have in Latin, except that those which are neuter in Latin are masculine in Spanish. 4. Compound nouns generally take the gender of the second word if the same is in the singular. Thus, the words aguamiel. honey and water, contrahaz, wrong side, are feminine ; whilst archilaud, a kind of lute, and portafusil, gunbeh, are masculine. 5. Compound words of which the second word is in the plural are generally masculine, even if the second word is femi- nine, as cortaplumas, ;?ew&m/e ; mondadientes, toothpick ; saca- botas, bootjack; etc. OBSERVATION ON OTHER TERMINATIONS. Nouns having other termi- nations are subject to so many exceptions that it is impossible to establish satisfactory rules in regard to them. Thus, mar, sea, is of both genders, but words compounded with mar are always feminine, as bajamar, low tide; pleamar, high tide. Mar, joined to a proper noun, should be in the masculine, as el mar Baltico, the Baltic sea, etc. Leccion II. Lesson II. PLURAL. Los, plural of e Las, plural of la, Ejemplos. Examples. El caballo es grande. The horse is large. Los caballos son grandes. The horses are large. 30 LESSON 2. Enrique tiene un libro. Maria tiene dos libros. Mi tio tieiie tres casas. El general tiene cuatro caballos. Las senoras son araables. Los ninos tienen dos plumas. El general es rico. Los general es son ricos. El reloj 1 es hermoso. Los relojes son hermosos. El Ingles es bueno. Los Ingleses son buenos. El paraguas es grande. Los paraguas son grandes. El juez es justo. Los jueces son justos. Vocabulario. El abanico, the fan. El Americano, the American. El centavo, the cent. El cuarto, the room. El Frances, the Frenchman. El Ingles, the Englishman. El lapiz, the pencil. El muchacho, the boy. El oro, the gold. El pajaro, the bird. El perro, the dog. El sombrero, the hat. El teatro, the theater. La ciudad, the city. La muchacha, the girl. Exercise 3. 1. Carlos y Enrique son los amigos de mi hermano. 2. El general tiene tres hermosos caballos. 3. Los sombreros son negros. 4. Los muchachos tienen dos centavos. 5. Las senoras tienen un abanico. 6. Los Franceses y los Ingleses son amigos. 7. Los pajaros son her- mosos. 8. La seiiora tiene dos hijos y tres hijas. 9. Mi amigo tiene dos hermanas. 10. Los Americanos son industriosos. 11. Los dos Henry has a book. Mary has two books. My uncle has three houses. The general has four horses. The ladies are amiable. The children have two pens. The general is rich. The generals are rich. The watch is fine. The watches are fine. The Englishman is good. The Englishmen are good. The umbrella is large. The umbrellas are large. The judge is just. The judges are just. Vocabulary. Cuatro, four. De, of, from. Dos, two. Enrique, Henry. Hermoso, handsome, fine. Industrioso, industrious. Joven, young. Juan, John. Negro, black. Pequeno, small, little. Son, are. Tienen, have. Tres, three. Vigilante, watchful. Ya, 1 The final consonant is not pronounced. PLURAL. 31 amigos son pobres. 12. Las tres muchachas son amables. 13. Los perros son vigilantes. 14. Los lapices son de oro. 15. i Quien tiene los libros ? 16. Juan tiene los iibros y las plumas. 17. Las hijas de mi amigo son jovenes. 18. Los cuartos de la casa son pequenos. 19. Las hijas de mi tio son ya grandes. 20. Los teatros de la ciudad son hermosos. Exercise 4. 1. The two horses are black. 2. The brothers of my friend are young. 3. The two gentlemen are English. 4. Henry has two hand- some dogs. 5. The friends of my brother are very poor. 6. The city has three theaters. 7. Charles and John are friends. 8. The Ameri- can has two brothers and three sisters. 9. My uncle has four houses. 10. The two Frenchmen are very amiable. 11. The fans of the ladies are very fine. 12. The English have handsome horses. 13. The houses of the city are very large. 14. The generals are very prudent. 15. The hats are black. 16. The boys have three pencils. 17. John and Henry are small. 18. The rooms of my house are large. 19. The bakers are poor. 20. Charles has two pencils. Gramatica. Grammar. 1. The plural of the article el is los, and that of the article la is las. 2, Nouns ending in an unaccented vowel form their plural by adding s : El hermano, the brother ; La hermana, the sister. Los hermanos, the brothers ; Las hermanas, the sisters. 3* Nouns ending in accented e, 0, U (also pie), add S : El cafe, the coffee ; Los cafes, the coffees. El pie, the foot ; Los pies, the feet. El fricando, the fricandeau ; Los fricandos, the fricandeaus. El tisii, the tissue ; Los tisiis, the tissues. 4i Nouns ending in a consonant, in y, or in accented a, i, form their plural by adding es ; El general, the general ; Los generales, the generals. La mujer, the woman ; Las mujeres, the women. El aleli, the gilliflower ; Los alelies, the gillijlowers. El albala, the certificate ; Los albalaes, the certificates. El rey, the king ; Los reyes, the kings. Papa, papa ; mama", mamma ; sof&, sofa, take s for the plural. 32 LESSON 2. 5, Nouns ending in S, of which the last syllable is unaccented^ remain unchanged. Those which have the last syllable accented add es : El lunes, the Monday ; Los lunes, the Mondays. La hipotesis, the hypothesis ; Las hipotesis, the hypotheses (pi.). El Frances, the Frenchman; Los Franceses, the Frenchmen. El Ingles, the Englishman ; Los Ingleses, the Englishmen. El dios, the god ; Los dioses, the gods. 6. Nouns ending in z change this letter into c, and add es for the plural : El juez, the judge; Losjueces, the judges. La luz, the light ; Las luces, the lights. OBSERVATION. Except in patronymics : Perez, los Perez. . Jimenez, los Jimenez. 7 Proper nouns follow the same rules as common nouns : Los Cervantes y los Mendozas, The Cervantes and Mendozas. 8. Generally only the second part of a compound noun is put in the plural : El ferrocarril, the railway ; Los ferrocarriles, the railways. 9. Adjectives, as will be seen hereafter, agree in gender and number with the nouns which they qualify. The plural of adjectives is formed like the plural of nouns : El muchacko es bueno, The boy is good. Los muchachos son buenos, The boys are good. 10 In Spanish, as well as in English, there are nouns which are only used in the singular, and others which have no singular, as : albricias, presents ; angarillas, cruet stands ; viveres, pro- visions, etc. NOTE. There are a few words which have or have ; ^ot any singular according to their meaning, as esposas, handcuffs ; which \s not the plural of esposa, wife ; grilles, irons ; which is not the plural of grille, cricket ; and a few others. CONTRACTION OF PREPOSITION WITH ARTICLE. 33 Leccidn III. Lesson III. CONTRACTION OF PREPOSITION WITH ARTICLE. De, of, from. A, to, at. Del, masc. sing. *\ Al, masc. sing. "\ De la, fern. sing. I of the, A la, fern. sing. I to the, De los, masc. pi. [from the. A los, masc. pi. j at the. De las, fern. pi. J A las, fern. pi. J Declinacidn. Masculine Singular. El hombre, the man. Del hombre, of or from the man. Al hombre, to or at the man. Feminine Singular. Declension. Masculine Plural. Los hombres, the 'men. De los hombres, of or from the men. A los hombres, to or at the men. Feminine Plural. La mujer, the woman. Las mujeres, the women. De la mujer, of or from the woman. De las mujeres, of or from the women. A la mujer, to or at the woman. A las mujeres, to or at the women. Ejemplos. El sombrero del muchacho es nuevo. La hermana de mi amigo es pobre. El padre de Juan es rico. Los libros de los muchachos son bueuos. Las puertas de las casas son grandes. Carlos sale de la casa. El cazador viene del bosque. La lluvia viene de las nubes. El rico da dinero al pobre. La madre escribe a la hija. El general habla a los soldados. La senora habla a las muchachas El hombre llama a la puerta. Juan habla del hombre y de la mujer. Enrique escribe al padre y a la madre. Examples. The boy's hat is new. My friend's sister is poor. John's father is rich. The boys' books are good. The doors of the houses are large. Charles comes out of the house. The hunter comes from the wood. The rain comes from the clouds. ( The rich man gives money to the ( poor man. The mother writes to the daughter. The general speaks to the soldiers. The lady speaks to the girls. The man knocks at the door. John speaks of the man and woman. Henry writes to the father and mother. 34 LESSON 3. Vocabulario. Vocabulary. El arbol, the tree. El bosque, the wood. El buque, the vessel, the ship. El carnicero, the butcher. El carpintero, the carpenter. El cazador, the hunter. El comerciante, the merchant. El consejo, the advice. El dependiente, the clerk. El dinero, the money. El habitante, the inhabitant. El medico, the physician. El Norte, the North. El padre, the father. El principe, the prince. La carne, the meat. La cereza, the cherry. La cocinera, the cook. La madre, the mother. La manzana, the apple. Con, Da, Dulce, sweet. Escribe, writes* Habil, skillful. Nuevo, new. Rico, rich. Sale, goes out or comes out. Verde, green. Viene, comes. Exercise 5* 1. El medico del principe es mi hermano. 2. La senora de la casa es mi hermana. 3. La madre da un consejo a la hija. 4. [ Quien tiene el libro de Carlos ? 5. El hijo del panadero tiene el libro y la pluma de Carlos. 6. i Quie'n tiene la Have de la casa ? 7. Mi padre tiene la Have de la casa y del jardin. 8. La casa del padre de Juan es muy grande. 9. Los habitantes de la ciudad son industriosos. 10. El Ingles es el padre de las muchachas. 11. Los caballos de los Fran- ceses son hermosos. 12. El cazador sale del bosque con los perros. 13. Los hermanos del general son pobres. 14. El dependiente escribe al comerciante. 15. Los muchachos del Frances tienen manzanas. 16. Las cerezas del jardin son dulces. 17. El carnicero vende la carne a las cocineras. 18. El buque viene del Norte. 19. Los Americanos son amigos de los Franceses. 20. La hija del carpintero escribe a las amigas de mi madre. 21. La madre del carpintero es cocinera en la casa del comerciante. 22. La madre del medico da dinero al carni- cero. 23. Los buques de los Americanos son nuevos. 24. El padre del principe es rico. 25. El dependiente da cerezas a mi hijo. 26. [ Quien da dinero al carpintero ? 27. El comerciante da di- nero al hermano del carpintero. 28. Las manzanas del Norte son dulces. CONTRACTION OF PREPOSITION WITH ARTICLE. 35 Exercise 6. 1. Charles's brother is my father's clerk. 2. Louisa writes to my father and mother. 3. The horses of the Englishmen are large. 4. The apples of the garden are sweet. 5. Henry writes to the two friends. 6. The dog comes [out] of the garden. 7. The sons of the physicians are clerks. 8. The generals of the prince are very prudent. 9. The horses of the general are black. 10. Who gives money to the sons of the Frenchman 'I 11. My father gives money to the sons and (to the) daughters of the Frenchman and of the Englishman. 12. The trees of the forest are green. 13. The merchants of the city are very rich. 14. The ship of Charles's father is new. 15. The sailors of the vessel are skillful. 16. My friend's sisters are very young. 17. My uncle has the key of the houses. 18. Charles and Henry are the friends of the two Americans. 19. Who has the fans of the ladies? 20. Louisa's sisters have the fans. 21. The advice of the physician to the merchant is good. 22. The carpenter is the brother of the butcher. 23. The mother gives money to the cook for (para) the butcher. 24. The dog of the hunter is good. 25. The brothers of the clerk are rich. Gramatica. Grammar. 1 , Of the, from the, are rendered in Spanish in the masculine singular by del (instead of de el), while to the, at the, also in the masculine singular, are rendered by al (instead of a el): El libro del muchacho, The boy's book (the book of the boy). El general habla al soldado, The general speaks to the soldier. 2. Nouns undergo in Spanish no change of form in the pos- sessive case, possession being indicated by placing the name of the object possessed before de, of; and the name of the possessor after it : El libro de Carlos, Charles's book (the book of Charlei). La pluma de la muchacha, The girl's pen (the pen of the girl). La casa del hijo del me- The physician's son's house (the house of the dico, son of the physician). 36 LESSON 4. Leccion IV. Lesson IV. PRONOUNS. Verb, tener, to have. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. Yo, / Nosotros, nosotras, nos, we. Tii, thou. Vosotros, vosotras, vos (listed, 1 ustedes *), you. El, he. Ellos, they, masc. Ella, she. Ellas, they, fern. Present Tense of tener, to have. Affirmatively. Interrogatively. Yo ten go, I have. j Tengo yo ? have I? Tii tienes, thou hast. j Tienes tii ? hast thou ? El tiene, he has. i Tiene el ? has he ? Ella tiene, she has. i Tiene ella ? has she ? Usted tiene, you have. i Tiene listed ? have you ? Nosotros tenem os, we have. $ Tenemos nosotros ? have we ? Vosotros tenets, you have. i Teneis vosotros ? have you ? Ellos tienen, they (masc.) have, i Tienen ellos ? have they (masc.) ? Ellas tienen, they (fern.) have, i Tienen eilas ? have they (fern.) ? Ustedes tienen, you have. i Tienen ustedes ? have you ? Ejemplos, Examples. i Tiene el hombre dinero ? ) * ,. ,, , . f Has the man money ? i Tiene dinero el hombre ? ) El tiene dinero y credito. He has money and credit. i Que tiene V. ? What have you ? Tengo oro y plata. I have gold and silver. i Que tiene la mujer ? What has the woman ? Ella tiene manzanas y peras. She has apples and pears. i Que tienen VV. ? What have you ? 1 TTsted, sing., ustedes, pi., were abbreviated in the following way V m - ymd. or yd. (for the singular), and V ms - V mds - or V ds - (for the plural) ; but at present usted is represented by V., and ustedes by W. PRONOUNS. 37 Tenemos pan y queso. i Tienen fusiles los soldados ? Tie nen fnsiles y sables. i Tengo yo vino ? V. tiene poco vino. i Quien tiene las plumas ? Las muchachas tieneri las plumas. We have bread and cheese. Have the soldiers any guns ? They have guns and sabers. Have I any wine ? You have little wine. Who has the pens ? The girls have the pens. Interrogative Form used Affirmatively. Tiene V. un hermoso caballo. You have a fine horse. Tienen los Ingleses rauchos buques. The English have many ships. Tiene la senora dos hijos. The lady has two sons. Tiene Carlos un lapiz y una pluma. Charles has a pencil and a pen. Vocabulary. Mucho, a, much. Muchos, as, many. No, no. Pero, but. Poco, adv., little. Que, what. Senor, sir, Mr. Si, yes. Sobre, on, upon. Vocabulario. El amigo, the friend. La mesa, the table. El credito, the credit. La pera, the pear. El fusil, the gun. La plata, the silver. El hombre, the man. Algo, something, an El pan, the bread. Aqui, here. El polio, the chicken. Bueno, good. El queso, the cheese. Con, with. El sable, the saber. En, in. El vino, the wine. Hoy, to-day. Exercise 7. 1. [Tiene Y. algo sobre la mesa? 2. Si, senor, tengo un libro sobre la mesa. 3. j Tiene carne el carnicero ? 4. Tiene carne y po- lios. 5. i Tiene el Ingle's una casa en la ciudad ? 6. El tiene dos casas aqui. 7. i Tienen W. mucho dinero ? 8. Tenemos poco dinero, pero mucho credito. 9. Que tiene la hija del panadero 1 10. Ella tiene manzanas y peras. 11. Que tierien los muchachos ? 12. Tienen cerezas. 13. [ A quien escribe Carlos ? 14. J^l escribe d mi amigo. 15. i Habla V. a los muchachos ? 16. No, senor, mi hermano habla d los muchachos y a las muchachas. 17. i Con quien sale V.? 18. Con mi padre y mi madre. 19. j, Tiene el general un hijo ? 20. fil tiene un hijo y dos hijas. 21. Los comerciantes tienen buenos dependientes. 22. [ Que da V. al pobre hombre ? 23. Pan y dinero. 24. Los cazadores tienen buenos perros. 25. Tienen buenos fusiles ? 26. Si, tienen. 38 LESSON 4. Exercise 8. 1. Have the generals good horses 1 2. They have very good horses. 3. Has the Englishman much money ? 4. He has very little. 5. Have the merchants much wine ? 6. They have very little wine. 7. Are you Charles's friend 1 8. No, Charles is my brother's friend. 9. Have you (any) chickens to-day ? 10. Yes, sir, we have chickens and meat. 11. The English have many ships, and the French have many soldiers. 12. My brother has a horse, and I have a dog. 13. We have a very fine theater in the city. 14. Has my brother (any) books on the table ? 15. Yes, sir, he has books, pens, and pencils on the table. 16. Do you go out to-day 1 17. No, sir, but my brother goes out with my sister. 18. What do you give to Charles 1 19. A handsome hat. 20. The baker's sons have a room in my house. 21. To whom do you write 1 22. To Henry's brother. 23. We have two dogs in the garden. 24. Have the children a book 1 25. They have two. Gramatica. Grammar. 1, The pronoun til, thou, is used more frequently in Spanish than in English. It indicates familiarity, affection, intimacy, and is therefore frequently used among relations, intimate friends, and older persons when addressing children, etc. : i Que tienes tti, Juanito ? What have you, Johnny ? 2 1 We is rendered in Spanish by nos and nosotros, masc. ; nosotras, fern. ; but nos is used in the nominative case only by sovereigns, dignitaries, and tribunals in Church and State, in their official capacity : Nos, D. N., Obispo de N. . . We, D. N., Bishop of N. . . Nos los Inquisitores. . . We the Inquisitors. . . NOTE. In the usual style, nosotros, masc., nosotras, fern., is always used, 3. You is rendered in Spanish by VOS, VOSOtros, masc., VOSO- tras, fern. ; and also by listed (or V.) for the singular of both genders, and ustedes (or VV.) for the plural. Vos is used only in elevated style, or when addressing the Deity, saints, kings, and sovereigns when the title of Majesty is omitted : PRONOUNS. 39 De vos espero alivio, Senor, From thee I expect relief, Lord. A vos elevo mis siiplicas, Rey y To thee I raise my prayers, King and Senor, Lord. Vos, Senor, podeis remediar ini Thou, Lord, canst relieve my misery. desgracia, Vosotros is used by orators and speakers when addressing their auditors. Usted (V. or Vd.) in the singular, and ustedes (W., Vs., or Vds.) in the plural is the only form of direct address that a stranger is likely to use. It is the universal conversational expression, since vosotros is never used, and tu marks a decided intimacy. Usted is a contraction of vnestra merced, your grace, and requires the verb to be in the third person singular, as ustedes requires the third person plural : listed tiene, you (sing.) have. TTstedes tienen, you (plur.) have. Usted es, you (sing.) are. Ustedes son, you (plur.) are. Usted da, you (sing.) give. Ustedes dan, you (plur.) give. NOTK. We use, in fact, the same form of expressing ourselves in Eng- lish when we say, speaking to a judge, an archbishop, etc. : Your Honor knows . . . ; your Grace is ... \ etc., instead of the plain and usual: You know . . . ; you are . . . ; etc. 4. Verbs are conjugated interrogatively by placing the verb before its subject. This takes place in all cases of interrogation, as is the case with to have, to be, to will, etc. : i Tengo yo ? Have I? I Tiene el hombre ? Has the man ? i Sabe el padre ? Does the father know (lit. knows the father] ? I Van los muchachos ? Do the boys go ? i Que dice la senora ? What does the lady say ? i Que decian los hombres ? What did the men say ? i Sabe V. cuando viene mi Do you know when my father comes (lit. padre ? when comes my father) ? 5* In interrogative sentences it is considered an elegant way of expressing one's self, to place the object before the subject when the latter is not a pronoun : 40 LESSON 4. j Tiene dinero el hombre ? Has the man any money? j Es bueno el vino ? fs the wine good ? 6* Each person of the verb having generally in Spanish, as in Latin, a different termination, the accompanying pronouns may be and are generally left out in conversation, and even in the conjugation, when the sentence is otherwise sufficiently clear. But listed and ustedes should not be left out, however, as they accompany the verb in the third person singular and third per- son plural, as well as el, he; ella, she ; and ellos (masc.), ellas (fern.), they, and as their omission might create confusion : Tengo, / have. Tenemos, we have. Tienes, thou hast. Tienen, they have. Sale, he or she goes out. Salen, they go out. OBSERVATION. In interrogative sentences it is also better to preserve the pronouns. 7. As a sentence may be construed in different ways in Span- ish, as will be seen hereafter, the interrogative form may often be found in affirmative sentences : Tiene V. razon, You are right. Es V. muy bueno, You are very kind. Habla V. muy bien, You speak very well. 8. Some or any before nouns is generally not expressed in Spanish : j Tiene V. vino ? Have you (any) wine? No tenemos queso, We have n't (any) cheese. OBSERVATION. When some or any stands alone, algnno, alguna, algunos, algunas is used: Tengo alguno, I have some (vino). Tiene algunas, He has some (peras). VERBS SER AND ESTAR. 41 Leccion V. Lesson T. Verbs ser and estar, to be. Present Tense of ser, to be. Affirmatively. Interrogatively. Yo soy, Tu eres, El es, Ella es, listed es, Nosotros somos, Vosotros sois, Ellos son, Ellas son, Ustedes son, I am. thou art. he is. she is. you are. we are. you are. they (masc. ) are. they (fern.) are. you are. I Soy yo ? j Eres tii ? i Es el? i Es ella ? i Es usted ? i Somos nosotros ? i Sois vosotros ? I Son ellos ? i Son ellas ? j Son ustedes ? am I? art thou ? is he? is she ? are you ? are we ? are you ? are they (masc. ) \ are they (fern.) ? are you ? Ejemplos. La vida es corta. Somos mortales. Mi padre es medico. Mis hermanos son pintores. Carlos es bueno. Juan y Enrique son malos. El profesor es muy docto. V. es muy alto. Los muchachos son pequenos. Maria es mi hermana. La madre es vieja. El padre es ciego. La muchacha es bonita. La leche es blanca 1 . El plomo es pesado. El reloj es de oro. Los candeleros son de plata. El dinero es mio. Examples. Life is short. We are mortal. My father is a physician. My brothers are painters. Charles is good. John and Henry are bad. The professor is very learned. You are very tall. The boys are small. Mary is my sister. The mother is old. The father is blind. The girl is pretty. Milk is white. Lead is heavy. The watch is of gold. The candlesticks are of silver. The money is mine. See L. 8. 42 LESSON 5. La casa es del medico. Este vino es de Espana. La flor es para mi hermana. La maquina es para copiar cartas. i Quien es V. ? El amor de Dios es el principio de la sabiduria. The house belongs to the physician. This wine is from Spain. Ihe flower is for my sister. The machine is to copy letters. Who are you ? The love of God is the beginning of wisdom. Present Tense of estar, to be. Affirmatively. Interrogatively. Yo estoy, Tu estas, El esta, Ella esta, listed esta, Nosotros estamos, Vosotros estais, Ellos estan, Ellas estan, Ustedes estan, I am. thou art. he is. she is. you are. we are. you are. they (masc.) are. they (fern.) are. you are. i Estoy yo ? i Estas tii ? i Esta el ? i Esta ella ? i Esta listed ? i Estamos nosotros ? i Estais vosotros ? i Estan ellos ? i Estan ellas ? i Estan ustedes ? am I? art thou ? is he? is she ? are you ? are we ? are you ? are they (masc.) ? are they (fern.) ? are you ? Ejemplos. Mi hermana esta triste. Yo estoy muy contento. El cafe esta frio. La carne esta asada. Los muchachos estan en la calle. Mi amigo esta en Paris. Carlos esta enfermo. i Donde esta mi sombrero ? El sombrero esta de moda. Examples. My sister is sad. I am very pleased. The coffee is cold. The meat is roasted. The boys are in the street. My friend is in Paris. Charles is sick. Where is my hat ? The hat is in the fashion. Ser and estar compared. Ser bueno, to be good. Ser malo, to be bad (wicked). Ser vivo, to be lively. Ser cansado ? to be tiresome. Estar bueno, to be well (in health). Estar malo, to be ill (sick). Estar vivo, to be alive. Estar cansado ? to be tired, VERBS SER AND ESTAR. 43 Vocabulario. Vocabulary. El abogado, the lawyer. El campo, the country. La calle, the street. La puerta, the door. Agrio, sour. Ahora, now. Bueno, good, well. Cerrado, closed, shut. Contento, pleased, satisfied. Donde, where. Gracias, thank you. Joven, young. Exercise 9. Lejos,/ar. Londres, London. Malo, bad, ill. Nadie, nobody, no one. Triste, sad. iSabe V.? do you know? 1. Los dos hermanos de Carlos estan ahora en Paris. 2. Quien es V. ? 3. Soy el hijo del medico. 4. [ Donde estan los libros ? 5. Estan sobre la mesa en mi cuarto. 6. j, Es V. medico 1 7. No, senor, soy abogado. 8. Es bueno el vino ? 9. Esta agrio. 10. Las muchachas estan en el jardin, y los muchachos estan en la calle. 11. La hija del panadero es muy joven. 12. Juan y Maria estan en la casa del general. 13. Mi casa esta muy lejos de aqui. 14. Los dos medicos son Franceses. 15. j Es V. Americano ? 16. No, senor, soy Ingles. 17. i Es V. de Londres ? 18, Si, senor, soy de Londres, y mi padre es de Liverpool. 19. Los dos hijos del carpintero estan muy malos. 20. j Donde esta Juan ? 21. Esta con mi hermano. 22. El cafe es bueno, pero esta frio. 23. [ Estan VV. contentos ? 24. Esta- mos muy contentos ahora. 25. [ Quien esta en mi cuarto 1 26. Nadie, el cuarto esta cerrado. 27. La hija del general es muy amable. 28. i Con quien esta mi madre ? 29. Ella esta con mis (my) dos herrnanas. 30. Los cazadores estan en el bosque. Exercise 10. 1. Do you know where the book is (where is the book) 1 2. The book is on the table. 3. Where is the father now ? 4. He is in London. 5. Is he well '? 6. He is very well, thank you. 7. Are the Americans and the English friends ? 8. They are friends now. 9. Who are you? 10. I am Charles's friend. 11. Where is he? 12. He is in the country. 13. The two sons of the physician are small, but they are very bad. 14. Here is my book. 15. Is the cheese good ? 16. The cheese and the bread are very good. 17. Is the baker an American ? 18. No, sir, he is a Frenchman. 19. The two hunters are brothers. 20. Are you pleased here 1 21. Yes, we have money, and we are pleased. 22. My brother's friend is a lawyer. 44 LESSON 5. 23. Who is at the door ? 24. A boy with apples. 25. John and Henry are in the city. 26. Where are the chickens ? 27. The chickens are now in the garden. 28. The wine is sour and bad. 29. Who is sad? 30. Nobody is sad here. Gramatica. Grammar. 1. Although the two Spanish verbs ser and estar are both rendered in English by the verb to be, they cannot be used indifferently one for the other ; each has its distinct meaning. Ser is used when the attribute of the subject is inherent, essential, or lasting, while estar is to be used when the attribute is only accidental or temporary. The usage will be shown iu the following examples : Es general, He is a general. Es profesor, He is a professor. Es bonita, She is pretty. Son grandes, They are tall. La miel es dulce, Honey is sweet. Es tarde, It is late. Esta bueno, He is well. El agua esta caliente, The water is warm. Estamos de priesa, We are in a hurry. El nino es feo, The child is homely. El nino esta cansado, The child is tired. La muchacha es buena, The girl is good. La muchacha esta buena, The girl is well. La mujer es alegre, The woman is of a jolly nature. La inujer esta alegre, The woman feels jolly. NOTE. Position, even though permanent, is indicated by estar (which here has its original Latin meaning, stare = to stand). Esta en Francia, He is in France. Mi casa esta en el campo, My house is in the country. Madrid esta en Espana, Madrid is in Spain. NOTE 2. A predicate noun requires ser. VERBS T)E AND PARA. 45 2t Ser is used to express possession, origin, destination, apt- ness, in combination with certain prepositions : Este jardin es de mi ti'o, Este vino es de Francia, El libro es para V., fil no es para trabajar, This garden is my uncle's. This wine is from France. The look is for you. He is not fit to work. 3. Estar is used to express occupation, intention, or willing- ness, and futurity, in combination with certain prepositions : Hoy estoy de guardia, Yo estoy para salir, La casa esta por acabar, To-day I am on duty. I intend to go out. The house is not yet finished. lecci&n VI. Lesson YL USE OF THE PREPOSITIONS DE AND PARA. Ejemplos. Pablo tiene un reloj de oro. j Tenemos dos mesas de marmol. i Tienen VV. plumas de acero ? Tenemos plumas de oro y de acero. Adolfo tiene un chaleco de seda. El medico tiene una casa de madera. Los muchachos tienen un tintero ) de plomo. ) Tenemos una maquina de lavar. Compania de Reloj es de Nueva York. Carruages de prim era clase. Una bomba de vapor. Agua de Florida. Un maestro de escuela. Una maquina de coser. Examples. Paul has a gold watch (a watch of gold). We have two marble tables. Have you any steel pens ? We have gold and steel pens. Adolphus has a silk waistcoat. The physician has a wooden house. The boys have a leaden inkstand. We have a washing machine. New York Watch Company. First-class carriages. A fire engine. Florida water. A schoolmaster. A sewing machine. Dining room tables (tables for din- ing rooms). 46 LESSON 6. Tiutepara el pelo. Polvos para insectos. Efectos para marineros. Vocabulario. El algod6n, the cotton. El almacen, the store. El arce, the maple. El aziicar, the sugar. El billar, the billiard. El cuchillo, the knife. El extinguidor, the extinguisher. El fabricante, the manufacturer. El fuego, the fire. El hierro, the iron. El instruments, the instrument. El joyero, the jeweler. El pedazo, the piece. El plomo, the lead. El tiempo, the time. El tintero, the inkstand. El vapor, the steam. El vidrio, 1 the glass. Hair dye (dye for the hair). Insect powders (powder for insects). Sailors' goods (goods for sailors). Vocabulary. La caja, the safe, the box. La cana, 2 the cane. La caoba, the mahogany. La cerveza, the beer. La hacienda, the estate. La seda, the silk. Alii, there. Celebre, celebrated. Champafia, Champagne. Desde, since. Escribo, / write. Para, for. i Quiere V. T Will you have ? Do you wish ? Quiero, / wish, I will have. Senor, sir. Senora, madam, Mrs. Vende, sells. Exercise 11. 1. i Qu6 vino tiene V. en la casa ? 2. Tengo vino de Champana. 3. Las plumas de acero de Spencer son muy celebres. 4. Tenemos una caja de hierro en el almacen. 5. Tenemos tambien un extingui- dor de fuego. 6. [ Tienen W. una mesa de billar 1 7. Tenemos dos. 8. Mi hermano vende instrumentos para joyeros. 9. j Y que vende V. 1 10. Soy fabricante de mesas para comedor. 11. Mi hermano es depend iente en la Compafiia de Manhattan. 12. Tienen W. una maquina de vapor en la hacienda ? 13. Si, seiior, tenemos una desde mucho tiempo (a long time). 14. [Quiere V. un paraguas de seda 6 de algodon ? 15. Quiero uno de seda. 16. El padre de Enrique tiene una casa de campo. 17. Mi hermana tiene un traje de seda. 18. Tenemos una mesa de caoba. 19. Quiere V. aziicar de cana ? 20. Quiero azucar de arce. 1 Vidrio, glass, refers only to the substance called glass, while vaso is used for a glass to drink from. 9 Cana, cane, does not refer to a walking stick, which is un bast6n. DE AND PARA. 7 Exercise 12. 1. What will you have ? 2. I wish a piece of bread. 3. Do you write with a gold pen 1 4. No, sir, I write with a steel pen. 5. In what company are you (a) clerk ? 6. In the New York Watch Corn- pan y. 7. What does your (su) brother sell ? 8. He sells silk hats. 9. Have you a glass inkstand ? 10. No, sir, I have a leaden ink- stand. 11. What knife will you have ? 12. I wish a butcher's knife. 13. What hat has Henry ? 14. He has a hunter's hat. 15. Does the merchant sell wine? 16. He sells wine and beer. 17. With whom are the hunters in the wood 1 18. They are there with the young soldier. 19. Have the ladies a fan ? 20. They have two fans. Gramatica. Grammar. 1, The material of which a thing is made is indicated by the preposition de, of, from, between the name of the thing and that of the material : Un sonibrero de seda, A silk hat (lit. a hat of silk). Un reloj de oro, A gold watch (a watch of gold). 2, The word representing the nature, species, locality or qual- ity of a thing, which in English is placed first, comes second in Spanish, and is joined to the first noun by de, of, from : Un traje de verano, A summer dress. Agua de lluvia, Rain water. Vino de Burdeos, Bordeaux wine, claret. Cana de azucar, Sugar cane. 3, The word representing a particular use, appendage, pur- pose, physical or moral property, place where things are kept, etc., comes second in Spanish, and is generally joined to the first noun by the prepositions para, for ; or de, of, jrom : Maquina para gas, . Gas machine. Jaulas para pajaros, Bird cages. Estante para sombreros, Hai stand. Maquinas de coser, Sewing machine*. 48 LESSON 7. Leccion VII. Lesson TIL THE NEGATIVE. No tener, not to have. Negatively. Yo 110 tengo (no tengo), I have not. Tii no tienes, thou hast not. El no tiene, he has not. Ella no tiene, she has not. listed no tiene, you have not. Nosotros no tenemos, we have not. Vosotros no teneis, you have not. Ellos no tienen, they (masc.) have not. Ellas no tienen, they (feru.) have not. Ustedes no tienen, you have not. Negatively and Interrogatively. i No tengo yo ? have I not ? i No tienes tii ? hast thou not f i No tiene el ? has he not ? I No tiene ella ? has she not ? i No tiene usted ? have you not ? i No tenemos nosotros ? have we not ? i No teneis vosotros ? have you not ? i No tienen ellos ? have they (masc.) not? i No tienen ellas ? . have they (fern.) not ? I No tienen ustedes ? have you not ? THE NEGATIVE. 49 Ser and estar, to be. Negatively. Yo no soy, Yo no estoy, etc. I am not. etc. Negatively and Interrogatively. i No soy yo ? ) \T f a j No estoy yo ? ) etc. etc. Negative with Jama's, never, ever. Nada, nothing, not anything. Nadie, nobody, not anybody. Ni, neither ', nor. Yo no tengo nada, or nada tengo. < Yo no quiero ninguno, or ninguno ) quiero. ) $1 no esta jarnas en casa, or jamas ) esta el en casa. ) El no tiene nunca dinero, or nun- ) ca tiene el dinero. ) No sale nadie, or nadie sale. No tengo ni pan ni queso, or ni ) pan ni queso tengo. ) Ejemplos. a Es pobre el hombre ? No es pobre, es rico. i No tiene V. dinero ? Ni dinero ni credito tengo. i No quiere V. pan ? Nada quiero hoy. i No sale mi padre hoy ? l no sale. Luisa no es amable. * i Vende sombreros el comerciante ? El no vende ningunos. i Que tiene V. en la caja ? Nada tengo. Nadie sabe la leccion. Isabel no es dichosa. Ni libros ni plumas tengo. Ninguno, (sing.) ) no one, none^ no, Ningunos, (pi.) j not any. Nunca, never. I have nothing ; I don't have any- thing. I don't wish any. He is never at home. He never has any money. Nobody goes out. I have neither bread nor cheese. Examples. Is the man poor ? He is not poor, he is rich. Have you no money ? I have neither money nor credit. Don't you wish any bread ? I don't wish anything to-day. Does not my father go out to-day ? He does not go out. Louisa is not amiable. Does the merchant sell hats ? He does not sell any. What have you in the box ? I have nothing. Nobody knows the lesson. Isabel is not happy. I have neither books nor pens. 50 LESSON 7. Vocabulario. Vocabulary. El aceite, the oil. La lampara, the lamp. La leccidn, the lesson. La luz, the light. Aba jo, downstairs. Alguno, some, any, some one, any one, somebody, anybody. Aquello, that t that thing. Compra V. ? do you buy ? Compro, / buy. Esto, this, this thing. Jamas, never, ever. Listo, ready. Nada, nothing, not anything. Nadie, nobody, not anybody. Ni, neither, nor. Ninguno, not any, none, no. Nunca, never. i Porque ? why ? Porque, because. i Sabe V. 1 do you know ? Yo se, I know. Sin, without. Todavia, yet. Vendo, I sell. Exercise 13* 1. l Tiene V. dinero hoy ? 2. Tengo dinero, pero no tengo pan en la casa. 3. [ Esta raalo el muchacho ? 4. No esta malo boy, esta muy bueno. 5. [ Esta aqui el panadero ? 6. El panadero no esta aqui, pero el carnicero esta aqui. 7. j Es Y. el amigo de Carlos 1 8. No, senor, soy el amigo de Enrique. 9. j, Quiere V. un pedazo de pan con queso ? 10. Quiero pan, pero sin queso. 11. i Quiere V. el dinero ? 12. Todavia no. 13. [ Donde esta Juan 1 14. No esta aqui, esta abajo. 15. i No esta la casa del general en la calle de Madrid 1 16. El general no tiene casa aqui. 17. (, Quiere V. esto 6 aquello 1 18. Quiero esto, pero no aquello. 19. [ Tienen pan los muchachos ? 20. Tienen pan, pero no tienen carne. 21. No tiene V. oro ? 22. No tengo oro, pero tengo plata. 23. i Porque no esta V. en el jardin con los muchachos 1 24. Porque no quiero. 25. Es rico el medico ] 26. No es rico, pero tiene una casa en Nueva York. 27. [Porque' no tiene V. luz en el cuarto ? 28. Porque no tengo aceite para mi lampara. 29. [ Compra V. vino 6 cerveza ? 30. No compro ni vino ni cerveza ; no compro nada. 31. Nunca sabe V. la leccion. 32. i Tiene alguno mi libro ? 33. Nadie tiene el libro. Exercise 14. 1. Have you a silk umbrella? 2. I have two umbrellas, but not of silk. 3. Are you a physician ? 4. No, sir, I am a merchant. 5. Have you not a store in Broadway ? 6. No, sir, my store is not in Broadway. 7. Are you not ready ? 8. No, sir, not yet. 9. The Frenchman and the Englishman are not friends. 10. Have the sol- diers any guns? 11. They have no guns, but they have sabers. THE NEGATIVE. 51 12. The wine is not good ; do you know why ? 13. I don't know why. 14. Have you a theater in the city 1 15. We have no theater yet. 16. Who is in the garden ] 17. Nobody is in the garden. 18. Have you anything for my brother } 19. I have nothing to-day. 20. Has John any friends 1 21. He has neither friends nor money. 22. Do you know the lesson to-day ] 23. Nobody knows the lesson. 24. Why not ? 25. Because we are sick. 26. Are the boys in the room 1 27. The boys are not in the room, but the girls are there. 28. What do you sell to Henry 1 29. I don't sell anything to any- body. 30. The trees of the garden are not green. 31. Is Charles with any one in the room ] 32. No, sir, with no one. Gramatica. Grammar. 1. In negative sentences, no is placed before the verb : Yo no tengo, 1 have not. i No quiere el ? Does he not wish ? l No han llegado ? Have they not arrived? El no quiere, He does not wish. 2. The Spaniards use a double negative to render the nega- tion stronger: No quiero nada, I wish for nothing. I don't wish anything. No tengo ninguno, / have none. No le hablo nunca, / never speak to him. OBSERVATION. The adverb no is, however, omitted when we place another negative before the verb, or when the verb is not expressed (a literary construction) : Nada quiero. Ninguno tengo. Nadie. 3* Jamas and nunca have the same meaning in the nega- tive, and are generally placed at the beginning of the sentence, without the adverb no : Jamas vi tal cosa or nunca vi tal cosa, I never saw such a thing. 4, Jamas is often used with siempre, ever, and nunca, never, io strengthen them : 52 LESSON 7. Nunca jamas lo dire, / shall never tell it. For siempre jamas me acordare 1 shall remember him for ever and de el, ever. NOTE. Jamas, when not accompanied by no, and not at the beginning of the sentence, means ever : i Ha visto V. jamas tal cosa ? Have you ever seen such a thing ? 5. Nadie, no one, and nada, nothing, are used with the nega- tive meaning either before the verb, after it in combination with no, or when used alone : Nadie veo, I see no one. I don't see anybody. i No ve V. nada ? Do you see nothing ? Don't you see anything. Nada, Nothing. NOTE. Nadie, nada, jamas (also ninguno and nunca) are used in the positive sense after verbs when a negative idea is implied : j Ha visto V. nada ? Did you see anything ? \ Yo hablar a nadie ! 1 speak to anybody ! Sin ver a nadie, Without seeing anybody. 6. Although no is used to form the negative, it is sometimes used redundantly in positive sentences : * Mejor es el trabajo que no la ociosidad, Labor is preferable to idleness. No partire hasta que no llegue V. 1 shall not leave until you come. 7 1 Ninguno (ninguna, ningunos, ningunas) may be used alone, or with a noun. In the former case it means none, no one, etc., in the latter, no (not any). No tengo ninguno, , I}Mven\A wicked man. Un justo, ) Un malvado, ) 4. When the adjective does not express a special or essential property pertaining to the noun : Una calle ancha, A "broad street. Un hombre feo, An ugly man. Una casa vieja, An old house. 5. When two or more adjectives qualify the same noun, it is preferable to place them after the noun : Es un hombre sabio, justo y pode- He is a wise, just, and powerful roso, man. 4. Certain adjectives have different meanings according to their place before or after the noun : Una cierta cosa, A certain thing. Una cosa cierta, A sure thing. Un pobre hombre, A poor man (poor in wits). Un hombre pobre, A poor man (poor in money). x\ 5, The Spaniards use the same word to designate Englishman and English, Frenchman and French, Spaniard and Spanish, 62 LESSON 9. etc. ; but they write the word with a capital letter when used substantively, and with a small letter in other cases : Un Espanol, a Spaniard; un libro espanol, a Spanish book. Un Ingles, an Englishman ; un buque ingles, an English ship. 6. The Spaniards use instead of Mr. and Mrs., Don, m., and Dona,/., before Christian names, and el Senor, m., la Senora,/., before family names : Don Juan, Mr. John. El Sehor Hernandez, Mr. Hernandez. Dona Maria, Mrs. Mary. La Senora Smith, Mrs. Smith. El S r - !> Carlos Marty, Mr. Charles Marty. REMARKS ON CERTAIN ADJECTIVES. 1. Alguno, any one, anybody, some one, somebody ; bueno, good ; malo, bad, ill ; ninguno, none, no one, nobody ; postrero, last; primero, first; tercero, third; uno, a, an, one} drop the o before a masculine noun in the singular : Buen amo, good master. El primer hombre, the first man. Ningiin libro, no book. Un habil medico, a skillful physician ; etc. But if they come after the noun they preserve the o : Un hombre malo, a bad man. Libro tercero, third book ; etc. The o is also preserved whenever the noun referring to the adjective is not expressed : Es bueno, He is good. El primero de todos, The first of all. Uno de estos senores, One of these gentlemen ; etc. 2. Santo, saint, drops the last syllable before proper names of saints : San Pedro, St. Peter ; San Juan, St. John ; etc. OBSERVATION. If the name of the saint begins with To or Do, the full form is used : Santo Domingo, St. Dominic ; Santo Tomas, St. Thomas. However, when speaking of the island of St. Thomas, we say, la isla de San Tomas. DIMINUTIVE AND AUGMENTATIVE NOUNS. 63 3. Grande drops the last syllable before a noun beginning with a consonant, whenever it means great in merit or qualities, celebrated or famous : Una gran mujer, A distinguished woman. Un gran poeta, A great poet. Un gran caballo, An excellent or famous horse. NOTE. If the noun begins with a vowel or an h, grande or gran may be used indiscriminately. Grande preserves the last syllable if it only expresses extent or dimension, and is then placed preferably after the noun : Un campo grande, a large field. The large theater in Bordeaux is a Una casa grande, a large house. El teatro grande de Burdeos es un gran teatro, splendid theater. Leccion X. Lesson X. DIMINUTIVE AND AUGMENTATIVE NOUNS. Ejemplos. Juanito tiene un perrito. i Que bonita casita ! I Donde esta mi hermanita ? Esta con la mujercita. El caballito de mi hermanito es un bonito animalito. Dos lamparitas ardian en el cuar- tito. Hay pececitos en el rio. El pobrecito esta malo. El hombrecillo quiere dinero. Yo no quiero ese perrillo. Mi mesa es muy chiquita. Tenemos un jardincito en el cam- po. 1 senorito y la senorita estan aqui. Enrique es un muchachon y su padre un hombronazo. La hermana de Pedro es una mu- ) jerona. \ Examples. Johnny has a little dog. What a pretty little house ! Where is my little sister ? She is with the little woman. My little brother's little horse is a pretty little animal. Two small lamps were burning in the little room. There are little fishes in the river. The poor little fellow is sick. The miserable little man wants money, I don't wish that ugly little dog. My table is very small. We have a little garden in the coun- try. The young gentleman and the young lady are here. Henry is a big fat boy and his father a big strong man. Peter's sister is a big stout woman. 64 LESSON 10. Vocabulario. El autor, the author. El bastonazo, the blow (with a stick), El gusto, the pleasure. El Iadr6n, the thief. El pajaro, the bird. El patio, the yard. El picaro, the rogue. El pueblo, the town, village. El ricachon, the very rich man. El talento, the talent. Los contornos, the suburbs. La boca, the mouth. La callejuela, the lane. La cara, the face. La cruz, the cross. Vocabulary. La especulacion, the speculation. La flor, the flower. La legua, the league. La mano, the hand. Lapelea, the fight. La pieza, the piece. La punalada, the stab (with a poniard) Aqui, here. Arriba, upstairs. Chiquito, little. Ignorante, ignorant, Solo, alone. Su, -his, her. Todo, all. Vive, lives. Exercise 19. 1. La hermanita de Carlos esta mala. 2. [ Que tiene el muchacbito ? 3. El no tiene nada. 4. El comerciante tiene una casita de campo en los contornos de la ciudad. 5. [ Donde esta Juanito ? 6. Esta en el jardin con su amiguito. 7. [ Donde estan las dos senoritas ? 8. Estan en el cuartito arriba. 9. [ Estaba Y. (were you) solo en el cuarto ? 10. Si, sefior, yo estaba (was) solito. 11. [ Quien es el hombrecito ? 12. Es el hermano de Luisita. 13. Maria tiene una crucecita de oro. 14. Los arboles del jardin son todavia chiquititos. 15. El amigo de Enrique es un picaron. 16. Y Enrique es un ladronzuelo. 17. El perro recibio (received) dos bastonazos. 18. Mi amigo recibio dos punaladas en la pelea. 19. El general es un hombrachon. 20. Los dos jovencitos son primos. 21. Tenemos tres pajaritos en el jardin. 22. i Quiere V. un pedazito de carne ? 23. Si, senor, con mucho gusto. 24. Pedro vive en una callejuela de la ciudad. 25. [ Porque no compra el ricach6n una casa grande ? 26. Porque tiene todo su dinero en grandes especulaciones. 27. La hermana del panadero es una mujercilla muy fea. 28. Los pollitos estan en el patio. Exercise 20. 1. The little boy and the little girl are sick. 2. The little tailor is very ignorant. 3. The brothers Ramirez have two small houfees in the city. 4. Who is in the little garden 1 5. Louisa and myilittle DIMINUTIVE AND AUGMENTATIVE NOUNS. 65 friend. 6. The merchant's sons have two small horses. 7. The little child has a pretty little face. 8. There are (hay) many birds on (en) the small island. 9. With whom were you in Paris 1 10. With my little brother. 11. Charles has an ugly little dog. 12. The general's brother is a very rich man. 13. Little John and little Louisa are in the country now (desde) two days. 14. Here is a pretty little book for you. 15. What a pretty little flower ! 16. Is Henry an author ? 17. Yes, but a miserable author without talent. 18. Mary has a pretty little mouth and pretty little hands. 19. Julia is a pretty young lady. 20. The baker is a big stout man, but his sister is a very small woman. 21. My aunt has a very, very small dog. 22. The banker's children are yet very small. 23. Where do you live now ? 24. In a very pretty little town not far from here. 25. Charles re- ceived (recibio) a short letter from his friend. 26. The captain of the small vessel is an ugly little man. 27. Have you a table in your room ? 28. Yes, sir, I have a very small table. Gramatica. Grammar. 1, The Spanish language abounds in diminutives and aug* mentatives. 2. The diminutives serve to decrease or soften the significa- tion of the word from which they are derived. Those most in use end in ico, illo, cillo, ito, cito, uelo, zuelo. and ejo, for the masculine, as : hombrecico, hornbrecillo, horn- brecito, hombrezuelo, little man; and in ica, ilia, cilia, ita, cita, zuela, eta, eja, for the feminine, as : mujercilla, mujer- cita, mujercica, mujerzuela, little woman ; etc. 1. Diminutives ending in uelo always denote contempt or irony. 2. Diminutives ending in illo and cillo often express contempt, pity, or ugliness ; while those in ito generally express ajfectiw gentleness, or beauty : Mujercilla, Contemptible little woman. Pobrecillo, Poor little fellow. Hijito mio, My dear little son. Pobrecito, Poor good little fellow. 5 66 LESSON 10. NOTE. Some Spanish words have the termination of the diminutive, without being diminutive, as : Acerico, needle cushion. Anzuelo, fishhook, etc. 3. The diminutives ito, ita, may be used with different parts of speech to give a special expression to the words : Vengo solito, / come quite alone. 4. Diminutives in etc, ejo, etc., are comparatively little used. 3, The augmentative* serve to increase the signification of th, words from which they are derived. They end in on, achon, azo, onazo, or ote for the masculine ; and in ona, aza, onaza, or Ota for the feminine, as : Hombron, hombrachon, hombronazo (from hombre, man), big, strong man. Grandon, grandote, grandazo, grandonazo (from grande, large), very large. Mujerona, mujeraza, mujeronaza (from mujer, woman), large, strong woman. 1. There are many words, however, ending in azo, which express an action, motion, or result, and are, therefore, not augmentatives : Fusil, rifle, gun ; fusilazo, a shot from a rifle. Pistola, pistol ; pistoletazo, a shot from a pistol. Canon, gun; canonazo, a shot from a gun. 2. Words which express a blow struck with a blunt instrument or object also end in azo, as bastonazo or garrotazo, blow with a stick; while those expressing a wound made by a sharp instru- ment or weapon end in ada, as : Punalada, stab with a dagger; lanzada, a wound from a lance ; etc. EXCEPTIONS. Hacha, ax ; machete, cutlass ; and sable, saber ; form, however, hachazo, machetazo, and sablazo. 4. FORMATION OF DIMINUTIVES AND AUGMENTATIVES. 1. Words ending in or a drop the last letter and add ito, ita; ico, ica ; illo, ilia ; according to their gender : Herman-ito, herman-ico, herman-illo, little brother ; from hermano, brother. Cas-ita, cas-ica. cas-illa, little house; from casa, house. DIMINUTIVE AND AUGMENTATIVE NOUNS. 67 NOTE. Words ending in go besides dropping the o, insert a u aftei the g to preserve the hard sound of this letter : Un amigo, a friend ; un amiguito, a little friend. Those ending in co change the c into qu, also to preserve the hard sound f the c : Un barco, a ship ; un barquito, a little ship. A few words ending in o and a, after dropping the last letter, add, how- ever, the termination ecico, ecillo, etc. : Un huevo, an egg ; un huevecillo, a small egg. Una mano, a hand; una manecita, a small hand. 2. Monosyllables ending with a consonant form their dimin- utive by adding ecito, ecico, ecillo, or ezuelo : Una flor, a flower ; una florecita, a little flower. Una cruz, a cross ; una crucecita, a little cross. Un pez, a fish ; un pececito, a little fish. Un rey, a king ; un reyezuelo, a king (with a small kingdom). NOTE. Observe that cruz and pez change the z into c. 3. Words of two or more syllables ending with a consonant form their diminutive by adding ito, ico, illo, ejo : Un papel, apn^er ; un papelito, a small paper. Un reloj, a watch; un relojito, a small watch. 4. Words of two syllables ending with an e, arid those of several syllables ending with an n or a z, add cito, cico, cillo, or zuelo : Un sastre, a tailor ; un sastrecillo, a little tailor. Una nube, a cloud ; una nu bee ilia, a little cloud. Un capitan, a captain; un capitancillo, a little captain. Un autor, an author ; un autorzuelo, an insignificant author. Una mujer, a woman ; una mujercita, a little woman. EXCEPTIONS. Juanito, from Juan, John ; volcanejo, from volca"n, vol- cano ; and all words ending in in, form an exception to this rule, the latter adding ito, etc. Thus : Jardin, garden ; ruin, worthless ; Rocin,jade; seisin, seraph; form in the Diminutive jardinito, rocinito, ruinito, and aeraftnito. Jar dincito is, however, often used. 68 LESSON 10. 5. Diminutives may be yet decreased in the following way : From chico, small : chiqtiillo or clr'^uito, chiquitillo, chiquitito, chiqui- tuelo, chiquitilluelo, chiquitillito, chiquirritin, chiquirritito, chiquirritillo, chiquirrituelo, etc. The English would say in such cases, very, very small. Even augmentatives may be decreased in the same way : Picaron, big rogue; piearonzillo or picaronzuelo, little rogue ; etc. 6. Many diminutives as well as augmentatives drop or pre- serve the letter i in the diphthong ie : Un ciego, a blind man; un cieguecillo, or ceguecillo, a little blind man* Un diente, a tooth ; un dientecillo or dentecillo, a small tooth. Una piedra, a stone ; una piedrezuela or pedrezuela, a small stone. 7. Other words change the diphthong lie into or remain unchanged : Un buey, an ox; un bueyecillo or buyecillo, a small ox. Un hueso, a bone ; un huesecillo or osecillo, a small bone. 8. There are words in Spanish with diminutive and augmen- tative terminations, which may have been used formerly as such, but which at present have a determined signification : Maton, bravo, cutthroat. Islilla, side. Cegato, shortsighted. Peluquin, wig. Espadm, sword of the state; etc., etc. 9. Augmentatives are formed by adding the terminations given in Rule 2 to the word, when the same ends with a consonant : Leon, lion; leonazo, big lion; etc. When the words end, however, with a vowel, the latter is dropped before adding the given termination : Gigante, giant ; gigantazo, large giant. Libro, book ; librote, large book. GENERAL OBSERVATIONS. The words pequeno, small, and grande, large, may be used at all times with the noun, but in many cases they would not answer to the genius of the Spanish language, which would require the diminutive or augmentative. This is specially the case with the diminutives. ADJECTIVES. COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE RELATIVE. 69 The pronunciation of diminutives or augraentatives is gen- erally different from that of the word from which they are de- rived, and the written accent of the primitive word is left out in the derived word, as : jfrbol, tree ; arbolito, small tree. Pajaro, bird ; pajarito, small bird ; etc. 5. Verb tener, to have. The verb tener is often rendered in English by to be some- thing the matter : i Que tiene V. ? What is the matter with you ? Yo no tengo nada, Nothing is the matter with me. Leccion XI. Lesson XL ADJECTIVES. COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE RELATIVE. Adjectives compared regularly : Positive. Comparative. Superlative. Hermoso, m. ) hand- mas hermoso, ) hand- el mas hermoso, ) the hand- Hermosa, f. ) some; mas hermosa, ) somer ; lamas hermosa, ) somest. Prudente,m. | Prudente, ;e,m. ) , mas prudente, ) more el masprudente, | the most e, f. ) ' mas prudente, ) prudent ;la mas prudente, ) prudent. Rico, m. ) . mas rico, ) . el mas rico, ) the _,. . \rwh; , . \rwher; . , . ? . , Rica, f. ) mas rica, ) la mas rica, ) richest. TJ tiles, pi. useful; masutiles, more useful; losmasiitiles,m. ) the most las mas utiles, f. j useful. .Facil, n. easy ; mas facil, easier ; lo mas facil, the easiest thing. Adjectives compared irregularly: Bueno, good; mejor, better; optimo, best. Malo, bad; peor, worse; pesimo, worst. Grande, great, large ; mayor, greater, larger; maximo, greatest, largest. TO LESSON 11. Pequeho, small ; menor, less, smaller ; minimo, smallest. Bajo, low; inferior, lower; infimo, lowest. Alto, high; superior, higher"; supremo, Adverbs : Bien, well; Mai, bad, badly ; Poco, little; Mucho, much; mejor, better; peor, worse; men os, less; mas, more; lo mejor, the best. lo peor, the worst. lo nienos, the least. lo mas, the most. Comparative of Inferiority : the least hard. Duro, m. ) . _ menos duro, ) el menos duro, ) . } Aard; > less hard; > t Dura, f. ) menos dura, ) la menos dura, ) Fuertes, pi. strong ; menos fuertes, less strong; los menos fuertes, m. ) the least las menos fuertes, f. ) strong. Bien, well ; menos bien, less well ; lo menos bien, the least welL menos. ..que..., less or fewer... than... No tan to, m...como... No tanta, /....como... not so much no tantos, ra....como... ) not so many ...as... notantas,/. como... } ...as... no tan. ..como..., not so. ..as... Comparative of Equality : Tan to, m. ...como as much. ..as... lanta, /.....como... ) tan., como... Cuanto mas tan to mas... Cuantos mas tantos in as. . Cuanta mas tanta mas... Cuantas mas tantas mas.. Cuanto menos tanto menos Cuanto mas tanto menos tantos, m, ...como... j tantas, /.....como... ! as. ..as.... so ..as.... as many., the more ...the more . . . the less... the less... the more... the less... Cuanto menos tanto mas the less. ..the more... Ejemplos. Carlos es rico, Juan es mas rico ; pero Enrique es el mas rico de los tres herrnanos. Luisa es mas joveri que Maria. Nueva York es mas grande que Paris. Juan habla bien, pero su hermano habla mejor. Examples. Charles is rich, John is richer ; but Henry is the richest of the three brothers. Louisa is younger than Mary. New York is larger than Paris. John speaks well, but his brother speaks better. ADJECTIVES. COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE RELATIVE. 71 Soy mas viejo que V. Julia es la menos bonita de las her- manas. Tenemos menos dinero que el. No tengo tanto tiempo como V. Ellas no tienen tantas amigas como nosotras. Yo no hablo tan bien como V. El medico no es tan viejo como el abogado. Soy tan alto como V. Tengo tantas plumas como lapices. Cuaiito mas virtuosos sou los hombres, tanto mas felices son. Cuanto mas sale, tanto menos estu- dia. Cuantos mas amigos tenga V. tanto mas poderoso sera. I am older than you. Julia is the least pretty of the sisters. We have less money than he. I have not as much time as you. They have not so many friends as we. I do not speak as well as you. The physician is not so old as the lawyer. I am as tall as you. I have as many pens as pencils. The more virtuous men are, the happier they are. The more he goes out the less he learns. The more friends you have the more powerful you wfll be. Vocabulario. El amo, the master. El banquero, the banker. El merito, the merit. El regimiento, the regiment. La clase, the class. La suerte, the luck. La escuela, the school. La fruta, the fruit. La parte, the part. Vocabulary. Atento, attentive. Berne V., give me. Dulce, sweet. Eduardo, Edward. Estudioso, studious. Felipe, Philip. Fresco, cool. Frio, cold. Fuerte, strong. Gana, earns. Gasta, spends. Habla, speaks. Otro, other. Pasado, past, last. Soberbio, haughty. Temprano, early. Tonto, foolish. Todo, all. Exercise 21. 1. Carlos es mas rico y Felipe mas pobre que Juan. 2. El hijo es mas joven que la hija. 3. El amo no tiene tantos amigos como el criado. 4. El hermano es tan habil como la hermana, y la madre no menos que el padre. 5. El tiene mas suerte que merito. 6. El prfn- cipe no es tan soberbio como el conde. 7. El comerciante no tiene tanto dinero como el banquero, pero tiene mas amigos que este (the latter). 8. Mi hermano es mas estudioso y mas atento que yo. 72 LESSON 11. 9. i Tiene V. un buen Quarto ? 10. Tengo el cuarto mas frio en la casa. 11. Tenemos la casa mas grande de la ciudad. 12. Maria es mas amable que Luisa. 13. Julia es rnenos atenta que mi hermana. 14. Mi amigo tiene la casa mas hermosa de la calle. 15. Deme V. algo mejor. 16. No tengo nada mejor. 17. Eduardo es mas peque- no que su hermano, pero es mas fuerte que el. 18. Maria es la mejor amiga de mi hermana. 19. Carlos y Enrique son los mas grandes, pero los menos atentos de la clase. 20. Cuanto menos dinero gana, tanto masgasta. 21. i Es la bija tan grande como el padre ? 22. Es menos grande que el padre, pero es mas grande que la niadre. 23. La bija no es tan amable como la mad re. 24. Las manzanas no son menos dulces que las peras. 25. El hermano de Felipe es el hombre mas rico de la ciudad. 26. [ Habla V. espanol tan bien como su her- mano 1 27. ll habla mejor que yo. Exercise 22. 1. The more money he earns the less he spends. 2. Charles is a bad boy, but Henry is the worst boy in the school. 3. The son is as rich as the father; he has four houses in the best part of the city. 4. Is Edward attentive 1 5. He is more attentive than the other boys. 6. Are you well now 1 7. I am better in the country than in the city. 8. My mother is not so old as my aunt. 9. Philip is the youngest officer of the regiment. 10. He is not less brave than the old officers. 11. I have as many books as iny brother. 12. The small room is cooler than the large one. 13. The green apples are not so sweet as the others. 14. We have not so much fruit this (este) year as last year. 15. Henry, Peter, and John are three good boys, but John is the best of all. 16. The dog is the most faithful of all animals. 17. Is your daughter young 1 18. She is younger than my son. 19. Have you any flowers in the garden ? 20. We have the most beautiful flowers in the city. 21. The new theater is much larger than the old theater. 22. The French baker has the best bread here. 23. Will you have a piece of bread 1 24. Give me the small- est piece. 25. We are less rich than the English, but we are as happy as they. 26. Do you go out earlier than I ? 27. Yes, much earlier. 28. Here is the largest house in the city. ADJECTIVES. COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE RELATIVE. 73 Gramatica. Grammar. 1. The comparative is usually formed in Spanish by means of adverbs, and not, as in many cases in English, by a change of termination : V. es mas rico que yo, You are richer than I. ,?, The comparative of superiority is formed by placing mas, more, before the positive, and que, than, after it : Es mas habil que su hermano, He is more skillful than his brother. fil tiene mas libros que yo, He has more books than L 3* The comparative of inferiority is formed by placing menos, less, fewer, before the positive, and que, than, after it : Es menos prudente que V., He is less prudent than you. Tengo menos libros que V., / have fewer books than you. NOTE. De is used in place of que before numerals. Quiero mas de once naranjas, / want more than eleven oranges. 1. If the comparison refers, however, to a verb different from the first one, de lo que takes the place of que : El tiene menos dinero de lo que V. cree, He has less 'money than you think. 2. If the comparison depends on a noun, del que (de la que, de los que, de las que) is used in place of que, varying with the gender of the noun : Tenia mas soldados de los que creia, He had more soldiers than he thought. 3. If the comparative of inferiority is expressed by no. . .tanto (or tanta, tantos, tantas), or by no... tan, then the second part of the comparative is rendered by como : 74 LESSON 11. El no tiene tanto dinero corno V., He has not so much money as you, Ellos no tienen tanta plata como nosotros, They have not as much silver as we. El no es tan joven como yo, He is not so young as I am. i t The comparative of equality is expressed by tanto (or tanta, tantos, tantas, according to the gender and number of the noun) and como, as ; or by tan... como with an adjective or an adverb : El hijo es tan docto como el padre, The son is as learned as the father. El obra con tanta prudencia como He acts with as much prudence as valor, courage. 1. Not less than is always translated by no...menos que... : Yo no trabajo meiios que V., I do not work less than you. 2. In regard to verbs, as much as is rendered either by tanto como or by tanto cuanto : Pago tanto como or tanto cuanto vale, I pay as much as it is worth. OBSERVATION. From the above examples it will be seen that menos is always invariable, whilst tanto and cuanto agree in gender and number with the noun to which they refer. Cuanto, the same as tanto, drops the last syllable before an adjective or adverb and becomes cuan. 5. When several nouns or adjectives follow each other, it is sufficient to use the words mas, menos, tan, or tanto before the first adjective only : Enrique es mas joven, timido y ere- Henry is younger, more timid, and dulo que su hermano, more credulous than his brother. NOTE. It would not be a mistake, however, to repeat the adverb be- fore every adjective in order to give more expression to the sentence. 6* The superlative relative which generally ends in English in est is rendered in Spanish by the adverbs mas or menos joined to the positive and accompanied by the definite article, a posses- sive adjective, or a personal pronoun : El mas hermoso libro or ) , _ > The handsomest book. El libro mas hermoso, ) El muchacho menos obediente, The least obedient boy. Su mas interesante obra, His most interesting work. ADJECTIVES. COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE RELATIVE. 75 OBSERVATION. The superlative relative of those adjectives which are placed before the noun may come ill the superlative before or after the noun: El mas bonito muchacho or ) _-. . . , . Hie prettiest boy. JLl muchacho mas bonito, ) But in the case of those adjectives which are placed after the noun, the superlative must also come last : El clima mas frio, The coldest climate, 7i When the superlative relative is an adverb modifying the verb, it is expressed by the adverbs mas or menos without the definite article : j Que estrella luce mas ? Which star shines the most ? Yo creo que Venus luce mas, / think Venus shines the most. OBSERVATION. These superlative relatives do not properly belong to the Spanish language, although they are always considered as comparatives, and they require a cultivated ear to be used correctly. 8. The comparatives 'of the adjectives bueno, good ; malo, bad; grande, large; pequeiio, little, small; bajo, low; alto, high ; which is irregular, may also be formed regularly by means of the adverb mas, more : Bueno, good ; mas bueno, better. Grande, large ; mas grande, larger. OBSERVATION. When speaking, however, of the differences of ages of two persons, mayor and menor must be used : La hija mayor, the eldest daughter ; el hijo menor, the youngest son. Inferior and menor are never used when speaking of physical size, that is, of the volume or size of the objects. 9. Cuanto mas. . .tanto. . ., the more. . .the. . .; cuanto menos. . . tan to..., the less... the... , used adjectively, must agree in gender and number with the noun to which they refer : Cuantas mas reflexion es hace, tan- The more he reflects (he makes reflec- tas mas faltas comete, tions), the more mistakes he makes. NOTE. Instead of cuanto mas..., mientras mas may be used. 76 LESSON 12. Leccion XII. Lesson XII. SUPERLATIVE ABSOLUTE. ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS. Formation of the Superlative Absolute* Pequeno, small ; pequenisim-o, 7??,., a,/, or ) > very small, smallest* rnuy pequen-o, m., a, /., ) * Prudente, prudent ; prudentisinio, very prudent. Feliz, happy; felicisimo, very happy. Cortes, polite; cortesisimo, very polite. Adjectives ending in co and go : Rico, rich ; riquisimo, very rich. Vago, vague ; vaguisimo, very vague. Adjectives ending in ble : Amable, amiable ; araabilisimo, or muy amable, very amiable. Afable, affable ; afabilisimo, or muy afable, very affable. Adjectives ending in iente : Ardiente, ardent; ardeutisimo, very ardent* Ferviente, fervent ; ferventisimo, very fervent. Luciente, shining; lucentisimo, very shining. Valiente, brave ; valentisimo, very brave. Adjectives ending in io : Limpio, clean; limpisimo, very clean. Sucio, dirty ; sucisimo, very dirty. Irregular Superlatives. Acre, bitter ; acerrimo, very bitter. Amigo, friendly ; araicisimo, very friendly. Antiguo, ancient ; antiquisimo, very ancient. Aspero, harsh ; asperisirno or asperrimo, very harsh Benefico, benevolent ; beneficentisimo, very benevolent. AJUECTIVKS. SUI'ERLATIVE ABSOLUTE. 77 Bueno, good ; Celebre, celebrated ; Fiel, faithful ; Fuerte, strong; Integro, upright; Libre, free ; Magnifico, magnificent; Misero, miserable; Pobre, poor ; Sagrado, sacred; Salubre, healthy ; Sabio, wise; Venefico, poisonous ; Dulcemente, sweetly; Sabiamente, wisely ; Amablemente, amiably ; bonisimo, very good. celeberrimo, very celebrated, tidelisimo, very faithful. fortisimo, very strong. integenlmo, very upright. liberrirno, very free. magnificen tisimo, miserrimo, very miserable. pauperrimo, pobrisimo, very poor. sacratisimo, very sacred. saluberrimo, very healthy. sapientisimo, very wise. veneficentisimo, very poisonous. Adverbs. dulcisimamente, very or most sweetly. muy sabiamente, very wisely. amabilisimamente, most amiably. Ejemplos. Pedro es rico, pero Juan es riquisimo. Paris es una ciudad muy hermosa. El comerciaate es honradisimo. La inadre de Maria es viejisima. La torre es altisima. El maestro es sapientisimo. El caballero es cortesisimo. El general es prudentisiino. La senora es hermosisima. Es segurisimo. El camino es larguisimo. P]l clirna es friisimo. Luisa es amabilisima. Mi hermana dibuja hermosisimamente. l obra prudentisimamente. Vocabulario. El amor, the love. El camino, the road. El clima, the climate. El comportamiento, the behavior. Examples. Peter is rich, but John is very rich Paris is a very handsome city. The merchant is very honest. Mary's mother is very old. The tower is very high. The teacher is very wise. The gentleman is very polite. The general is very prudent. The lady is very handsome. It is very sure. The road is very long. The climate is very cold. Louisa is very amiable. My sister draws most beautifully, He acts very prudently. Vocabulary. Contento, satisfied. Femenil, effeminate. Filial, filial. Gloriosamente, gloriously. 78 LESSON 12. El Ie6n, the lion. El maestro, the teacher. El pozo, the well. La acci6n, the action. La aldea, the village. La comedia, the comedy. La hormiga, the ant. La iglesia, the church. La lluvia, the rain. Afable, a/able. Agrio, sour. Benefico, benevolent. Comun, ordinary , low. Honrado, honest. Inteligente, intelligent. Interesante, interesting. Largo, long. Lejos, far. Paternal, paternal. Pio, pious. Profundo, deep. Sabiamente, wisely. Salubre, healthy. Sucio, dirty. Valiente, brave. Exercise 23. 1. Los dos hermanos del general son riquisimos, pero el general es muy pobre. 2. La torre de la iglesia es altisima. 3. Luisa y Maria son amabilisimas. 4. Los caminos estan malisimos desde la lluvia. 5. El oficial es un valentisimo soldado. 6. El clima de la isla es saluberrimo. 7. El hombrecito tiene una casa grandisima. 8. La hermana de Juan es hermosisima. 9. Las comedias de Moratin son muy hermosas. 10. Socrates era sapientisimo. 11. Las primas de Enrique son muy pias. 12. Las calles de la ciudad son larguisimas. 13. El panadero tiene una hija muy bonita. 14. Las horinigas son pequemsimas. 15. Juan es muy feme.nil. 16. El maestro habla muy sabiamente. 17. Su (his) amor es muy filial. 18. El principe es muy benefico. 19. El vino del comerciante no es bueno; esta muy^agrio. 20. Los habitarites de la aldea son muy industriosos y muy afables. 21. El padre y la madre de Pedro son viejisimos. 22. Las dos senoras son muy jovenes. 23. El soldado murio (died) muy gloriosamente. 24. Su comportamiento es muy comiin. 25. El monumento es antiquisimo. Exercise 24. 1. The merchant is a very honest man. 2. My father is very benevolent. 3. My brother's friends are very poor. 4. His action is very paternal. 5. His love is very filial. 6. The banker's house is very large. 7. New York is a very rich city. 8. The physician has very good sons. 9. The climate of the island is very cold. 10. The lion is very strong. 11. Henry's sister is very amiable, but his cousin ADJECTIVES. SUPERLATIVE ABSOLUTE. 79 (fern.) is more affable. 12. The apples are very sweet. 13. The rooms in (de) the house are very small. 14. The river is very deep. 15. The trees in the (del) garden are very green. 16. The two boys are very sick. 17. We have now a very good servant. 18. The water in the well is very cold. 19. Mary's brothers are very intelligent. 20. I am- very happy to-day. 21. The two Frenchmen are very far from here. 22. The soldiers of the general are very brave. 23. The streets are now very dirty. 24. My book is very interesting. Gramatica. Grammar. 1. The superlative absolute is either formed by placing the adverb muy, very, before the positive, or by adding to the same the termination isimo (isima, isimos, isimas, according to the gender and number of the noun to which the adjective refers) if it ends with a consonant. If the positive ends with a vowel, however, this last letter is dropped and the same terminations added : Grande, large ; muy grande, or grandisirno, very large. Cortes, polite; muy cortes, or cortesisimo, very polite. 2. Adjectives ending in CO and go form their superlative in quisimo and guisimo to preserve the hard sound of c and g, which they have in the positive : Rico, rich; riquisimo, very rich. Vago, vague ; vaguisimo, very vague. 3. Adjectives ending in ble change this last syllable into bilisimo : Amable, amiable; amabilisimo, very amiable. Afable, a/able ; afabilisimo, very a/able. 4* Adjectives ending in iente drop the i in the superlative, and change the termination iente into entisimo : Ardiente, ardent ; ardentisimo, very ardent. Valiente, brave ; valentisimo, very brave. 5, Adjectives ending in io drop these two letters to avoid the repetition of the i, and add isimo : Limpio, clean ; limpisimo, very clean. 80 LESSON 12. EXCEPTIONS. The adjectives frlo, cold, and pio, picnts, make, how- ever, friiflimo and piisimo in the superlative. 6, The superlative absolute of adverbs ending in mente is also formed by placing the adverb muy, very, before them, or by changing the termination entente or amente into isimamente * Dulcemente, sweetly ; dulcisimamente, very or most sweetly. Amablemente, amiably ; amabilisimamente, very or most amiably. 7 It must be observed that the superlative formed with the termination isimo is stronger than that formed with the adverb muy, very. Riquisimo expresses, therefore, a higher degree than muy rico, very rich. Elegance requires also the termina- tion isimo instead of the adverb muy when the superlative is preceded by the indefinite article un, uno, Una. Therefore, es un valentisimo soldado, he is a very brave soldier, is preferable to es un muy valiente soldado. 8, Certain adjectives and adverbs do not admit of the termi- nation of the superlative. This is more especially the case with those ending with 1, i, n, and a few with r, as : Paternal, paternal ; maternal, maternal; filial, filial; femenil, effemi- nate; igual, equal; varonil, manly; turqui, dark blue; ruin, low; co- rn un, ordinary. In case of doubt the student will, therefore, adopt preferably the adverb, muy. 9t Some adjectives form their superlative most irregularly, as is seen by the list given above. POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. 81 Leccidn XIII. Lesson XIII. PREPOSITIVE. Singular. Masculine. Feminine. Mi, Tu, Su, Nnestro, nuestra, Vuestro, vuestra, Su, POSTPOSITIVE. Mio, mia, Tuyo, tuya, Suyo, suya, Nuestro, nuestra, Vuestro, vuestra, Suyo, suya, Ejemplos. Mi padre es bueno. Mi madre es buena. Tu hermano es pequeno. Tu hermana es pequena. Su hermano es alto. Su hermana es alta. Nuestro tio es bueno. Nuestra tia es buena. Su amigo es joven. \ Su amigo de V. es joven. > El amigo de V. es joven. ) Su casa es grande. Su casa de ellos es grande. Mis amigos son felices. Sus hermanos son ricos. Sus libros estan aqui. Sus libros de V. estan aqui. Los libros de V. estan aqui. POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. Plural. Masculine. Feminine. mis ; my. tus ; thy. sus ; his, her, its. nuestros, nuestras ; our. su, vuestros, vuestras, sus; your. sus; their, your. mios, mias ; my. tuyos, tuyas ; thy. suyos, suyas ; his, her, its. nuestros, nuestras ; our. vuestros, vuestras ; your. suyos, suyas; their, your. Examples. My father is good. My mother is good. Thy brother is small. Thy sister is small. His or her brother is tall. His or her sister is tall. Our uncle is good. Our aunt is good. Your friend is young. Their house is large. My friends are happy. His (her or their) brothers are rich. Your books are here. 82 LESSON 13. Mi hermano y mi hermana son jo- ) veries. ) Su tio, su tia, y sus priraos estaii malos. Aqui esta uno de mis amigos. El perro esta con su amo. El arbol pierde sus hojas. Deme V. la mano. l tiene su sombrero en la mano. El soldado ha perdido el brazo. My brother and sister are young. His (or her) uncle, aunt, and cous- ins are sick. Here is one of rny friends. The dog is with its master. The tree loses its leaves. Give me your hand. He has his hat in his hand. The soldier has lost his arm. Su, his, her, your, their. Su libro or el libro de 1. His book. Su libro or el libro de ella. Su (or el) libro de,V., sing. Su (or el) libro de VV., pi. Su (or el) libro de ellos, masc. Su (or el) libro de ellas,/em. Sus libros or los libros de el, His books, etc. etc. etc. Adios, padre mio. Si, madre mia. No, hijo mio. Son amigos nuestros* Son enemigos snyos. Un amigo mio. Un criado nuestro. Un amigo suyo. Vocabulario. El bast6n, the cane. El bollo, the cake. El condiscipulo, the fellow -scholar. El discipulo, the scholar, pupil. El ejemplo, the example. El marido, the husband. El padrino, the godfather. El papel, the paper. El privilegio, the privilege. La familia, the family. La leche, the milk. La libertad, the liberty. Her book. Your book. Their book. Good-by, father. Yes, mother. No, my son. They are our friends. They are his enemies. A friend of mine. A servant of ours. A friend of his. Vocabulary. La madrina, the godmother. La pizarra, the slate. La propiedad, the property. La rienda, the bridle. La silla, the saddle. Al contrario, on the contrary. Caliente, warm. En casa, at home. Mas, more. Sagrado, sacred. Siguen, follow. Tambien, too. also. POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. 83 Exercise 25. 1. Mi hermano y mi nermana estan en casa. 2. Mis padres (par- ents) estan en el jardfn, 3. Nuestras casas son hermosas. 4. i Quien tiene mi papel, mi pluma y mis lapices '? 5. No tenemos ni el papel, ni la pluma ni los lapices de V. 6. La mujer de nuestro medico es la hermaria de mi banquero. 7. i Tienen los discipulos sus libros f 8. Tienen sus libros y sus pizarras. 9. El marido de mi prima esta en Paris. 10. i Buenos df as, tia, donde estan mis primos 1 11. Estan en el jardm. 12. i Donde estas, hijo info ? 13. Estoyaqui en el cuarto. 14. Mi amigo es pobre, pero un hermano suyo es muy rico. 15. Nues- tro tfo quiere comprar la casa de mi amigo. 16. [ Donde esta su padre de V. ahora? 17. Yo no se donde esta. 18. Los sombreros de W. son muy pequenos. 19. Nuestro cuarto esta caliente. 20. Las casas de ellos son muy grandes. 21. i Es V. mi amigo 1 22. Si, senor, soy el amigo de V. y de toda su familia. 23. Los primos de Juan son los condiscfpulos de mi hermano. 24. [ Quien quiere un pedazo de mi bollo ? 25. Yo, deme V. un pedacito. 26. [ Que tiene V. en la mano f 27. Tengo un bastoncito. 28. Los hijos siguen el ejemplo de su padre. 29. Nuestra libertad, nuestra propiedad y nuestros privilegios son sagrados. 30. Adios, amigo mfo. Exercise 26. L Where is your cousin (/.) 1 2. She is with her husband. 3. Where is your slate ] 4. My sjate is on the table. 5. Who is your godfather ? 6. Mr. Harris is my godfather, and his sister is my godmother. 7. Who is in your father's room ? 8. A friend of his. 9. Give me your hand, my friend. 10. Is Henry the friend of your brothers ? 11. He is their friend. 12. Is your physician tall or little? 13. Our physician is very tall. 14. Who is upstairs in our room ? 15. No- body is in your room, but some one is in your brother's room. 16. With whom are your children ? 17. They are with their mother. 18. Is your father at home ? 19. He is in his store (tiendd). 20. Are the little boys with their aunt? 21. They are with their uncle and aunt. 22. My sister's friend (/".) is very amiable, and her brothers too. 23. Our physician is already an old man. 24. Will you have more milk in your coffee ? 25. On the contrary, give me more coffee. 26. Who is in the garden 1 27. My father and mother. 28. Have you the saddle of my horse ? 29. I have its bridle, but riot its saddle* 84 LESSON 13. Gramatica. Grammar. 1. Possessive adjectives do not agree in gender and number with the antecedent or possessor, as in English, but with the object possessed. Every possessive adjective must, therefore, agree in gender and number with the noun to which it refers. Mi libro, my book. Nuestra mesa, our table. Mis amigos, my friends. 2. The possessive adjective must be repeated with every noun, unless it refers to the same person or object : Mi padre, mi madre, y mi hermana My father, mother, and sister are estan malos, sick. Senor mio y amigo, Sir and friend. 3. The possessive adjective vuestro, masc. sing., vuestra, fern, sing., vuestros, masc. pi., vuestras, fern. pL, your, is only used in the elevated style, or when addressing the divinity, the saints, or persons in elevated situation : Principe, imploro vuestro amparo, Prince, I implore your protection. In place of vuestro the Spaniards use in the usual style the possessive adjective su, which also means his, her, their. Vues- tro may, in fact, be compared with the personal pronoun VOSO- tros, instead of which we use usted, sing., and ustedes, pl. 9 with the verb in the third person singular or plural. In the same way, instead of vuestro, the Spaniards use the possessive adjec- tive in the third person singular or plural. Su sombrero, your hat, is therefore used instead of vuestro sombrero ; but as it might also be translated by his hat, her hat, their hat, the expression de V. is added after the noun, and we would therefore have to say SU sombrero de V. This addition of de V., or de VV. may, however, be left out when the sense of the sentence sufficiently indicates to what person SU refers : i Tiene V. su sombrero ? Have you your hat ? REMARK. The omission of de usted when addressing respectable per- sons is, however, considered vulgar and impolite. POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. 85 4. Instead of SU or sus, el, la, los, or las may be used with de listed, de ustedes : El libro de V., your book. La mesa de V., your table. Los libros de V., your books. Las mesas de V., your tables. 5 1 In order to avoid the ambiguity which might arise from the use of SU and SUS, the definite article is used with de 61, de ella, de ellos, de ellas : El libro de el, his book. La casa de ellos, their (m.) house. El libro de ella, her book. La casa de ellas, their (f. ) house. 6. The possessive its must be rendered by SU or SUS accord- ing to the number of the following noun : Mi padre tiene un hermoso caballo, My father has a pretty horse, its su color es negro, color is black. El arbol pierde sus hojas, The tree loses its leaves. 7. The definite article is substituted in Spanish for the pos- sessive adjective whenever the sense of the sentence sufficiently indicates who the possessor is. Tins is more especially the case, when parts of the body are mentioned : Tengo algo en el ojo, / have something in my eye. Que tiene V. en la mano, What have you (got) in your hand. 8 Whenever addressing a relative or friend, the Spaniards use the noun alone, as in English, or with the possessive after the same : Buenos dias, padre (or padre mio), Good morning, father. Hijo (or liijo mio), ven aqui, Son, come here. 9. The possessive adjectives mi, tu, SU, etc., when coming after the noun are replaced by mio, tuyo, suyo, masc. sing. ; mios, tuyos, suyos, masc. pi. ; mia, tuya, suya, fern. sing. ; mias, tuyas, suyas, fern. pi. : \ Padre mio ! my father ! Madre mia, my mother; etc. These adjectives are placed after the noun : 1. In the vocative: jhijos mios! my sons! If, however, an adjective or a participle precedes the noun, both forms may be used : Mi querido padre or querido padre mio, My dear father. t> LESSON 14. 2. When an article precedes the noun ? El caballo tuyo es mayor que el mio, Thy (your) horse is larger than mine. Un criado mio or uno de mis criados, A servant of mine. 3. When an adverb precedes the noun: Tan amigos nuestros se mostraron, They showed themselves so muck om friends. Leccitfn XIV. Lesson XIV. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. Singular. Plural. Masculine. Feminine. Masculine. Feminine. El mio, la mia, los mios, las mias, mine, my own. El tuyo, latuya, lostuyos, lastuyas, thine, thy own. El suyo, la suya, los suyos, las suyas, his, hers, its. Elnuestro, lanuestra, los nuestros, lasnuestras, ours, our own. Elvuestro, lavuestra, los vuestros, las vuestras, ) Eltuyo, lasuya, lossuyos, lassuyas, El suyo, la suya, los suyos, las suyas, theirs, their own. Eldeel, lade el, losdeel, lasdeel, his. El de ella, la de ella, los de ella, las de ella, hers. Eldenosotros, ladenosotros, losdenosotros, lasdenosotros, ours. Eldeusted, ladeusted, losdeusted, lasdeusted, 1 ) El de ustedes, ladeustedes, los de ustedes, las de ustedes, 2 ) El de ellos, la de ellos, los de ellos, las de ellos, 3 > . El de ellas, la de ellas, los de ellas, las de ellas, 4 ) Declension. Masculine Singular. Feminine Singular. El mio, mine ; la mia, mine. Del mio, of mine ; de la mia, of mine. Al mio, to mine ; a la mia, to mine. 1 Singular. 9 Plural. 3 Masculine. 4 Feminine. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 87 Masculine Plural. Los mios, mine ; De los mios, of mine ; A los mios, to mine ; ETC., etc., Ejemplos. Mi padre y el tuyo son amigos. Tu hermano y cl mio estan aqui. Tengo el libro de V. y el mio. Mi lapiz y el de V. son de oro. Su amigo de V. y el nuestro son altos. Su caballo de V. y el de ellos son negros, Mi casa y la suya (la de el) son nuevas. Su pluma (la pluma de el) y la nuestra son de acero. Mis libros y los suyos son hermosos. Nuestros araigos y los de V. estan en Francia. Nuestras sillas y las de ellos son de caoba. i Tiene el mi lapiz ? Tiene el suyo. i Tiene ella mi libro ? Tiene el suyo. i Tiene V. mi pluma ? Tengo la mia, i Tiene ella su aguja ? Tiene la suya. Hablo de mi padre y del suyo (del deV.). Escribo a mi madre y a la de V. El habla de mis hermanos y de los suyos. Escribimos a nuestros amigos y a los de ellos. Quiero lo mio. Cada uno quiere lo suyo. Feminine Plural las mi as, mine. de las mias, of mine. a las mias, to mine. ETC., etc. Examples. My father and thine are friends. Thy brother and mine are here. I have your book and mine. My pencil and yours are of gold. Your friend and ours are tall. Your horse and theirs are black. My house and his are new. His pen and ours are of steel. My books and his are handsome. Our friends and yours are in France. Our chairs and theirs are of ma- hogany. Has he my pencil ? He has his own. Has she my book ? She has her own. Have you my pen ? I have mine. Has she her needle ? She has her own. I speak of my father and of yours. I write to my mother and to yours. He speaks of my brothers and of his. We write to our friends and to theirs. I wish for what is mine. Every one wishes for what is his. 88 LESSON 14, Vocabulario. 1 baile, the ball. El cocinero, the cook. El guante, the glove. El maestro, the teacher. El prof esor, the professor. La escritura, the writing. La familia, the family. [where. En algnna parte, somewhere, any- A lo menoB, at least. Alto, tall. Como, how. Vocabulary. i "onoce V. ? Z>0 2/ / must go to the city. Debo ir a la ciudad, 3. The object of an active verb requires the preposition a before it when this object is a person, a rational animal, or a thing personified : Veo d un bombre, / see a man. Vemos al hombre, We see the man. Conocemos d estos caballeros, We know these gentlemen. I A quien conoce V. ? Whom do you know ? 4. The preposition a, which is not translated in English, must, however, be left out in Spanish after an active verb and a person, if by the addition of this preposition the sentence should not be clearly expressed : Envio el hijo al padre (not : envio al bijo al / send the son to the padre), father. Han robado un nino, They have stolen a child. Han robado d un nino would mean They have robbed a child. Quiero un criado, " " / want a servant. Quiero d un criado, " " / love a servant. I GERUND. 107 5 Pero and sino are both rendered by but. Pero is used when a verb is expressed in the second part of the sentence, while sino is used when the first part of the sentence is nega- tive and no verb is expressed in the second part. Sino has also the meaning of except, and is used with the negative : Hablo frances, pero no hablo ingles, / speak French, but I do not speak English. No hablo frances, sino ingles, I don't speak French, but English. El no habla sino aleman, He speaks nothing but (except) German. 6, Solamente, only, but, may be used instead of sino in the affirmative : No tengo oro, tengo solamente papel, I have no gold, 1 have only paper. NOTE. Instead of solamente, solo may be used. Lecclon XIX. Lesson XIX. THE GERUND. 1st Conjugation: Amar ; amando, to love ; loving. Hablar; hablando, to speak ; speakings Comprar ; comprando, to buy ; buying. Tomar ; tomando, to take ; taking. 2d Conjugation: Comer ; comiendo, to eat, to dine ; eating, dining. Beber ; bebiendo, to drink ; drinking. Hacer ; haciendo, to do, to make ; doing, making. Perder ; perdiendo, to lose ; losing. 3d Conjugation: Reeibir ; recibiendo, to receive ; receiving. Salir; saliendo, to go out : going out. Partir ; partiendo, to divide ; dividing. Subir \ subiendo, to ascend, to go up ; ascending, going up. 108 LESSON 19. Verbs in eer and uir : Leer ; leyendo, Instruir; instruyendo, to read ; reading. to instruct ; instructing* Irregular Verbs. Decir ; diciendo, to say, to tell ; saying, telling. Dormir ; durmiendo, to sleep ; sleeping. Morir ; muriendo, to die ; dying. Pedir; pidiendo, to ask for; asking for. Poder ; pudiendo, to be able, can ; being able. Sentir ; sintiendo, to feel, to hear ; feeling, hearing. Venir ; viniendo, to come ; coming. Ejemplos. i De quo* esta V. hablando ? Estoy hablando del tiempo. Los muchachos estan jugando. j Que esta V. haciendo ? Estoy escribiendo una carta. i Que estan diciendo estos hombres ? No estan hablando. Mi madre esta durmiendo. Los ninos vienen llorando. He estado leyendo todo el dia. Aprendo estudiando y leyendo. i Que estan VV. leyendo ? Estamoa leyendo un libro frances. Examples. Of what are you speaking f I am speaking of the weather, The boys are playing. What are you doing ? I am writing a letter. What are these men saying ? They are not speaking. My mother is sleeping. The children are coming crying. I have been reading the whole day, I learn by studying and reading. What are you reading ? We are reading a French book. Vocabulario. El albanil, the mason. El barco, the vessel. El capitan, the captain. El gusto, the pleasure. El vaso, the glass. La f onda, the hotel. La tarde, the afternoon. La noche, the night. Abierto, opened. Alemania, f., Germany. Almorzar, 1. to breakfast. Bebo, I drink. Vocabulary. Cantar, 1 . to sing. Concluir, 3. to finish. Conocer, 2. to know. Correr, 2. to run. Estudiar, 1. to study. Hasta, until. Importante, important. Jugar, 1. to play. Lie gar, 1. to arrive. Llorar, 1. to cry, to weep. Mandar, 1. to send. Muchas gracias, /(oi we) thank you. Nosotros, us. Pasar, 1. to pass. Por, through, by. Prestar, 1. to lend. Tarde, late. Tomar, 1. to take. Va, goes. Venir, 3. to come, Ya, already. GERUND. 109 Exercise 37. 1. [ Que estan haciendo los muchachos en el cuarto ? 2. Estan jugando con sus amiguitos. 3. i Quien esta cantando en la calle ? 4. Una pobre ruujer esta cantando. 5. Mi hermano esta leyendo, y mi hermana esta escribiendo. 6. i Ha hablado V. al capitan ] 7. Yo no he hablado d nadie, he estado en mi cuarto hasta ahora. 8. j A quien ha prestado V. dinero ? 9. He prestado dinero a su hermano de V. 10. i Sabe V. si el general esta en casa 1 11. Esta en su cuarto, pero esta durmiendo. 12. El muchacho va corriendo por las calles. 13. i De que esta V. hablando ? 14. Estoy hablando de una cosa muy importante. 15. i Quiere V. comer hoy con nosotros ? 16. Con mucho gusto. 17. i En que pais ha vivido Y. ? 18. He vivido dos anos en Francia, y tres anos en Aleniariia. 19. i Cuantas cartas han escrito YV. ? 20. Hemos escrito dos 6 tres. 21. j, Quiere Y. tomar un vaso de vino ? 22. Muchas gracias, yo no bebo vino. 23. [ Que ha dicho el medico ? 24. No se lo que ha dicho, porque ha hablado con mi hermano. 25. [ Porque esta llorando ese muchacho ? 26. El llora por nada. 27. He estado escribiendo desde esta manana, y todavia no he concluido mis cartas. 28. i Donde ha pasado Y. la noche ? 29. He pasado la noche en la fonda, no conociendo a nadie aqui. 30. [ Porque no ha venido Y. a mi casa ? 31. Porque no sabia (/ did not know) donde Y. vivia (lived). Exercise 38. 1. Where are the children ? 2. They are playing in the garden. 3. Have they studied their lessons ? 4. They have been studying all the- morning. 5. With whom were you (estaba V.) speaking in the garden ? 6. I was speaking with a French gentleman. 7. Were you sleeping this afternoon 1 8. No, I was writing in my room. 9. Who is crying in the other room ? 10. The little boy is crying. 11. What is your brother doing now 1 12. I don't know where he is now. 13. Where are you going to 1 14. I am going home. 15. Why have you eaten my bread ? 16. Because I had (habia) not eaten anything since this morning. 17. Has your father gone out ? 18. No, sir, he is in the house ; he is breakfasting. 19. The masons are building a splendid house in our street. 20. What was (estaba) that man say- ing ? 21. He was speaking of the weather. 22. Why are you run- ning ? 23. Because it is already late. 24. Have you sent the money 11U LESSON 19. to the tailor ? 25. Not yet, I have not received my money. 26. This poor boy has lost his father and mother. 27. Do you know if the vessel has arrived ? 28. Yes, sir, k has arrived ; I have spoken to the captain. 29. Who has been in my room this morning ? 30. Your brothers and sisters have been here and have opened your room. 31. What is that man asking for 1 32. He is asking for money. Gramatica. Grammar. 1. The gerund ends in Spanish in ando, for the 1st Conju- gation ; and in iendo for the 2d and 3d Conjugations. These terminations are added to the present of the infinitive after sup- pressing the terminations ar, er, and ir. This is the case in regular verbs and also in most of the ir- regular verbs : the termination never changes, but the radical part of a few irregular verbs undergoes a slight change : Hablar, hahlando ; to speak, speaking. Comer, comiendo ; to eat, eating. Escribir, escribiendo ; to write, writing. Pedir, pidiendo ; to ask for, asking for. ' . Dormir, durmiendo ; to sleep, sleeping. 2. Verbs ending in eer and uir change the i into y : Leer, leyendo ; to read, reading. Instruir, instruyendo ; to instruct, instructing. 3. The gerund used with the verb estar, to be, corresponds to the progressive form in English, and expresses the action of the verb as continuing and unfinished : Estoy leyendo, I am reading. i Que esta V. haciendo ? W. hat are you doing ? Esta lloviendo, It is raining. 131 estaba escribiendo, He was writing. He estado leyendo todo el di'a, I have been reading the whole day. 4. The verb estar is not used with the gerund of the verbs ser, to be ; ir, to go ; venir, to come. Thus we would not say: estoy yendo, / am going, but voy, / go ; nor esta viniendo, he is coming, but viene, he comes ; etc. GERUND. Ill 5. When other verbs are used as auxiliaries of the gerund, they sufficiently explain themselves : El nino sigue durmiendo, The child continues sleeping. El viene corriendo, He comes running. 6. The gerund indicates a certain continuation of the action : Andan entrando y saliendo, They continue coming in and going out. 7. The gerund is also used to express the way in which a thing happens : La tos se cura sudando, Coughing is cured by perspiring. Se aprende estudiando, One learns by studying. 8t It is also used with the preposition en, in; and refers then to the action of the other verb : En acabando ira, When he has finished he will go. OBSERVATION. The preposition, may, however, be left out in most cases, without altering the sense of the sentence. 9i The gerund of the verb estar often precedes that of an- other verb : Estando comiendo, recibi6 la carta, Whilst he was dining he received the letter. 10. The gerund is used very frequently in Spanish for the sake of brevity and euphony, and in cases where the English use adverbs, conjunctions, and prepositions, as : when, as, while, whilst, since, if, by, etc. : Habla durmiendo, He talks while he sleeps. Se aprende leyendo, One learns by reading. Siendo asi, no quiero ir, Since it is so, I shall not go. Dandole yo licencia, saldra, If I give him permission, he will go out. Viendo que su hermano no When he saw that his brother was not com- venia, se fue. ing, he went away. 112 LESSON 20. leccion XX. Lesson XX. CARDINAL NUMBERS. The Cardinal Numbers are: Uno, m., una,/. Dos, Tres, Cuatro, Cinco, Seis, Siete, Ocho, Nueve, Diez, Once, Doce, Trece, Catorce, Quince, Diez y seis, 1 Diez y siete, Diez y ocho, Diez y nueve, Veinte, Veiute y uno, Veinte y dos, Veinte y tres, Veinte y cuatro, Veinte y cinco, Veinte y seis, Veinte y siete, Veinte y ocho, Veinte y nueve, Treinta, Treinta y uno, Cuarenta, Cincuenta, One. Two. Three. Four. Five. Six. Seven. Eight. Nine. Ten. Eleven. Twelve. Thirteen. Fourteen. Fifteen. Sixteen. Seventeen. Eighteen. Nineteen. Twenty. Twenty-one. Twenty-two. Twenty-three. Twenty-four. Twenty-five. Twenty-six. Twenty-seven. Twenty-eight. Twenty-nine. Thirty. Thirty-one. Forty. Fifty. 1 These numhers are also written in one word, as : Dieciseis, veintiuno, treintainno, etc. CARDINAL NUMBERS. 113 Sesenta, Setenta, Ochenta, Noventa, Ciento, 1 Ciento y uno, Ciento y diez, Doscientos (-as, /. ), Trescientos (-as, /. ), Cuatrocientos (-as,/.), Quinientos (-as,/.), Seiscientos (-as,/.), Setecientos (-as,/.), Ochocientos (-as,/.), Novecientos (-as,/.), Mil, Mil y ciento, Mil y doscientos (-as, /.), Dos mil, Cien l mil, Doscientos (-as,/.) mil, Un millon, Dos millones, Cero, Sixty. Seventy. Eighty. Ninety. One hundred. One hundred and one. One hundred and ten. Two hundred. Three hundred. Four hundred. Five hundred. Six hundred. Seven hundred. Fight hundred. Nine hundred. One thousand. One thousand one hundred. One thousand two hundred. Two thousand. One hundred thousand. Two hundred thousand. One million. Two millions. Zero or cipher. Dfas de la semana. Domingo, Lanes, Martes, Miercoles, Jueves, Viernes, Sabado, Sunday. Monday. Tuesday. Thursday. Friday. Saturday. El domingo, Los lunes, El martes por la manana, El miercoles por la noche, El jueves proximo, ) El jueves que viene, ) El sabado pasado, Days of the week. On Sunday. On Mondays. Tuesday morning. Next Thursday. Last Saturday. Divisiones del dia. La manana, El dia, La tarde, Divisions of the day. The morning. The day. The afternoon. 1 Ciento drops tbe syllable to before a noun. Cien hombres, One hun- dred men. 8 114 LESSON 20. La nocha, Mariana por la manana, Manana por la noche, De dia, Por la noche, de noehe, Buenos dias, Bueiias tardes, Buenas noches, Vocabulario. El ano, the year. El banco, the bank. El bocoy, the hogshead. El correo, the post office. El dia, the day. El hotel, the hotel. El mes, the month. El minuto, the minute. El saco, the lag. La biblioteca, the library. La caballeria, the cavalry. La caballeriza, the stable. La carne de vaca, the beef. La estacion, the season. La hora, the hour. La libra, the pound. La persona, the person. La semana, the week. The evening, the night. To-morrow morning. To-morrow evening. In daytime. In the evening, at night. Good morning, good day. Good afternoon. Good evening, good night. Vocabulary. La tripulacion, the crew. Anoche, last night. Como, about how. Con tar, to count. Contiene, contains. Convidar, to invite. Cuando, when. En casa, at home. Lo siento, / am sorry for it. Mas, more. Matar, to kill. i Puede V. ? can you ? Puedo, / can. Necesitar, to need. Nosotros, us. Publico, public. Solamente, only. Unos pocos, a few. Exercise 39. 1. He comprado doscientos bocoyes de azucar y trescientos sacos de cafe*. 2. I Que ban comprado VV. hoy 1 3. Hemos comprado diez polios y cinctienta libras de carne de vaca. 4. i Cuanto dinero ha recibido Y. ? 5. He recibido cuatrocientos noventa y nueve duros. 6. I Y porque no quinientos ? 7. Porque hemos pagado un duro en el correo. 8. Un rnes tiene veirite y ocho, veinte y nueve, treinta, 6 treinta y un dias. 9. El dia tiene veinte y cuatro horas ; la bora tiene sesenta minutos. 10. Un ano tiene trescientos sesenta y cinco, 6 trescientos sesenta y seis dias., 11. i Cuando va Y. a casa de su her- mano? 12. Yoy los miercoles. 13. El general tenia (had) cincuenta mil hombres de infanteria y diez mil hombres de caballeria. 14. Esta CARDINAL NUMBERS. 115 aldea no tiene sino dos calles. "15. El prmcipe tiene mas de cincuenta caballos en sus caballerizas.v' 16. i Cuando esta Y. en casa ? 17. Estoy en casa por la manana y por la noche. 18. Hemos matado mas de veinte pajaros en el jardm. 19. Una semana tiene siete dias, ciento sesenta y ocho boras, y diez mil y ochenta minutos. 20. Un ano tiene cin- cuenta y dos semanas, doce meses, y cuatro estaciones. 21. [ Ha contado V. todo el dinero ? 22. He contado ties mil duros en oro, y dos mil duros en papel. 23. [ A cuantas personas ha convidado V. para el domingo ? 24. No he convidado todavia a nadie. 25. Ha perdido soldados el general? 26. Ha perdido dos mil de sus mejorea soldados. 27. j Cuanto dinero quiere V. ? 28. Deme V. doscientos y cincuenta duros. 29. [ Es bastante ? 30. Es bastante con los ochenta duros que ya tengo.^ Exercise 40. 1. Our city has now twenty thousand inhabitants ; in 1860, it had (tema) only a few houses, and about five hundred inhabitants. 2. The vessel has a crew of twenty-two men. 3. Charles's father is one of the richest men in (de) our town ; he has at least two millions of dol- lars. 4. Have you bought apples or pears 1 5. I bought a hundred apples, but no pears. 6. Washington was born (naci6) in 1732, and died (murid) in 1799. 7. Where are you going on Monday next 1 8. I don't know yet. 9. I go to school on Mondays, Tuesdays, Wed- nesdays, Thursdays, and Fridays ; on Saturdays I go to the country, and on Sundays to church. 10. Do you work in daytime or in the evening ? 11. I always work in the evening. 12. Can you come to-morrow morning 1 < 13. No, but I can come to-morrow evening. 14. Have you any money for us ? 15. I have twenty-five dollars for you, and fifty dollars for your brother. 16. It is not enough ; I need twelve dollars more. 17. I am sorry for it, but I have not one dollar more. 18. Mr. Felix Konda has more than twenty houses in the city. 19. This hotel has more than two hundred rooms. 20. We have a hotel in our city which (que) contains three hundred. 21 . How many dollars do you need to (para) buy that horse ? 22. I need one hundred and twenty dollars, having already one hundred and eighty dollars in the bank. 23. My father has given five hundred pounds of meat to the poor. 24. There are (hay) more than twenty thou- sand volumes in our Public Library. 25. There were Qiabia) at least four thousand persons at (en) the theater last night. 116 LESSON 20. Gramatica. Grammar. 1, Uno, one, a, an, has for feminine Una. Both add 8 in the plural when used substantively : Los unos y los otros, m.. ) _ , , > The ones and the others. Las unas y las otras, /., J 2 From dos, two, up to ciento, hundred, the numbers are plural and common to both genders ; but from doscientos, two hundred, to novecientos, nine hundred, the termination OS is changed into as for the feminine : Tres hombres y cuatro mujeres, Three men and four women. Doscientos hombres y trescientas Two hundred men and three hundred mujeres, women. 3. The conjunction y, and, is placed only before the last number : Doscientos noventa y ocho, Two hundred and ninety-eight. 4. Giento drops the last syllable before a noun. [In the same way uno drops also the before a noun.] Cien hombres y cien mujeres, One hundred men and one hundred women. Veinte y un muchachos, Twenty-one boys. 5. Although mil, one thousand, has neither gender nor num- ber, it may be used in certain cases in the plural, as in English, and is then a noun : Este hombre ha gastado muchos miles, This man has spent many thousands. 6. The preposition a is left out after an active verb when the object of the sentence is preceded by a cardinal number : He visto veinte hombres (not a veinte hombres), / have seen twenty men. 7 More than, less than, are rendered in Spanish by mas de, and menos de before a cardinal number : Mas de cien duros, More than a hundred dollars. Menos de tres dias, Less than three days. 8t JZleven hundred, twelve hundred, thirteen hundred, etc., cannot be expressed as in English, but must be translated : Mil y ciento, One thousand one hundred. Mil y doscientos, One thousand two hundred. Mil y trescientos, One thousand three hundred. ORDINAL NUMBERS. 117 Leccidn XXL Lesson XXL ORDINAL NUMBERS. Primero (primo), Segundo, Tercero, Cuarto, Quinto, Sexto (sesto), Septimo (setimo), Octavo, Noveno or nono, Decimo, Undecimo, Duodecimo, Decimo tercio, 1 Decimo cuarto, Decimo quinto, Decimo sesto, Decimo septimo, Decimo octavo, Decimo nono, Vige"simo, Vigesimo primo, Vigesimo segundo, Vigesimo tercero, Trigesimo, Cuadragesimo, Quincuagesimo, Sexagesimo, Septuagesimo, Octogesimo, Nonagesimo, Centesimo, Centesimo primo, Centesimo undecimo, Ducentesimo, First. Second. Third. Fourth. Fifth. Sixth. Seventh. Eighth. Ninth. Tenth. Eleventh. Twelfth. Thirteenth. Fourteenth. Fifteenth. Sixteenth. Seventeenth. Eighteenth. Nineteenth. Twentieth. Twenty-first. Twenty -second. Twenty -third. Thirtieth. Fortieth. Fiftieth. Sixtieth. Seventieth. , Eightieth. Ninetieth. Hundredth, Hundred and first. Hundred and eleventh. Two hundredth. 1 These numbers are also written in one word, as dfoimotercio, deci- moonarto, etc. 118 LESSON 21. Trecentesimo, TAree hundredth. Cuadragentesimo, Four hundredth. Quingentesimo, Five hundredth. Seiscentesimo, Six hundredth. Septengentesimo, Seven hundredth. Octogentesimo, Eight hundredth. Nonageiitesiiuo, Nine hundredth. Milesimo, Thousandth. Dos milesimo, Two thousandth. Diez milesimo, Ten thousandth. Millonesimo, Millionth. Ntimeros fraccionarios. Fractional numbers. La mitad, The half. Un decimo, One tenth. Un medio, One half. Un onzavo, One eleventh. Uno y medio, ) T , i . r 0ft owa half. Una y media, ) Un dozavo, One twelfth. Un trezavo, One thirteenth. Un tercio, One third. Dos catorzavos, Two fourteenths. Dos tercios, Two thirds. Ocho quinzavos, Eight fifteenths. Un cuarto, One fourth. Un dieziseisavo, One sixteenth. Tres cuartos, Three fourths. Un diezisietavo, One seventeenth. Un quinto, One fifth. etc. etc. Un sexto, Cfoe s&tfA. Un veintavo, One twentieth. Un septimo, 0T&6 seventh. Once treintavos, Eleven thirtieths. Un octavo, or ) Unochavo f *** Un centavo, or } ^ -L j j^ TT , , . One hundredth. Un centesimo, ) Un noveno, 0?id ni^A. Un milesimo, One thousandth. Collective Numbers. Un par, Una docena, A pair. A dozen. Una quincena, Una sesentena, Multiplicative Numbers. Simple, Single. Doble, Double. Triple, Treble. Cuadruplo or cuadruple, Quadruple. Quintuple or quintuple, Fivefold. Una vez, once. Dos veces, twice. Tres veces, three times. Sextuple, Septuplo, Octuplo, Decuplo, Centuplo, Fifteen. Sixty. Sixfold. Sevenfold. Eightfold. Tenfold. A hundredfold. Esta vez, this time. Aquella vez, that time. Todas las veces, every time. ORDINAL NUMBERS. 119 Varias veces, several times. Algunas veces, sometimes. La primera vez, the first time. La ultima vez, the last time. Meses del ano. Cada vez, each time. Muchas veces, many times. Otra vez, another time. La proxima vez, next time. Months of the year. Enero, January. Julio, July. Febrero, February. Agosto, August. Marzo, March. Setiembre, September. Abril, April. Octubre, October. Mayo, May. Noviembre, November. Junio, June. Dicieinbre, December. Las estaciones. La primavera, the spring. El verano or el estio, the summer. Ejemplos. * i A cuantos estambs ? i A como estamos (hoy) ? i Que" dia del mes teuemos ? 1 Hoy es el primero. Manana es ei cinco. Estamos a dos de Febrero. Naci el quince de Mayo. El vapor sale el diez de este mes. i Que tomo tiene V. ? Tengo el primer tomo. Enrique es el quinto en la cl "tfocabulario. El almuerzo, the breakfast. El capitulo, the chapter. El cuaderno, the copybook. El emperador, the emperor. El huevo, the egg. El ingenio, the genius. El jamon, the ham. 1 pavo, the turkey. 311 periodico, the newspaper. lase. The seasons. El otono, the autumn, the fall. El invierno, the winter. Examples. What day of the month is it T To-day is the first. To-morrow is the fifth. It is the second of February. I was born on the fifteenth of May. The steamer leaves on the tenth of this month. Which volume have you ? I have the first volume. Henry is the fifth in the class. Vocabulary. El vapor, the steamer. La onza, the ounce. La parte, the part. Asi, therefore. Cada, each. Comer, to eat. Corto, short. Cuando, when. Dar, to give. Despues de, after. Leer, to read. Pedro, Peter. Pertenece, belongs. Karo, rare. Busia, Russia. Sale, leaves. Siempre, always. Viene, comes. 120 LESSON 21. Exercise 41. 1. Febrero es el segundo mes del ano. 2. Enrique y Eduardo son los dos primeros discipulos de la clase. 3. [ Cuando ha escrito V. a su padre ? ' 4. He escrito la primera vez el tres de enero de mil ocho- cientos sesenta y cinco, y la segunda vez en el mes de mayo del mismo ano. 5. i Ha dado V. libros a los muchachos de la primera clase ? 6. He dado libros y cuadernos a los de la segunda clase. 7. El mes de Julio tiene tantos dias como el mes de agosto. 8. Cuando ha recibido Y. sus cartas ? 9. He recibido una el dos de abril, y la otra el cinco de setiembre. 10. Hemos tenido mucha lluvia el treinta de octubre. 11. [ Que pan han coinprado VV. ? 12. Hernos comprado cinco libras y media de pan frances. 13. Cada soldado ha recibido media libra de carne. 14. Estaremos (we shall be) en nuestra casa nueva el primero de mayo proximo. 15. El muchachito ha dado la mitad de su almuerzo al pobre. 16. He comprado una docena de polios, y mi hermano ha comprado media docena de pavos. 17. $ A cuantos estamos ? 18. Estamos a once 6 doce. 19. Carlos Quinto fue (was) un gran emperador. 20. Cuantas veces ha sido V. el pri- mero en su clase ? 21. He sido dos veces el primero ; tres veces, el segundo ; y cuarto veces, el tercero. 22. No ha sido V. nunca el ultimo ? 23. No, senor, mi primo es siempre el ultimo. 24. [ Que mes viene despues del mes de abril 1 25. El mes de mayo, por supuesto. 26. $ Es frio el invierno en este pais ? 27. El invierno es frio, pero corto. Exercise 42. 1. Have you read the newspaper of the first of December ? 2. No, but I read that of the thirtieth of November. 3. My brother will be (estard) here in July or (in) August. 4. What day of the month is it ? 5. It is the thirteenth. 6. One half and one third are (hacen) five sixths. 7. This poor woman is sick for the third time this month. 8. The Seventh Regiment is a fine regiment. 9. How many chapters have you read 1 10. I have read the first two (two first). 11. December is the last month of the year. 12. That child is in his sixth year. 13. Have you been sick here ? 14. I have been very sick the first month, but I am very well now. 15. A half ounce is the thirty-second part of a pound ; therefore, eight ounces are the half, and four ounces the fourth part of a pound. 16. One third of ORDINAL NUMBERS. 121 the money belongs to the father ; one sixth, to the children ; and one half, to the mother. 17. I have bought a dozen hams and sixty eggs. 18. Peter the First, emperor of Russia, had (tenta) a rare genius. 19. When does the steamer leave ? 20. It leaves on the twenty- third of this month. 21. How many times have you been in Paris ? 22. I have been once in Paris, and twice in London. 23. Has your father bought another horse ? 24. He bought three horses. 25. When are you going to the country ? 26. I go in the month of June. 27. Give me the half of your bread. 28. I cannot, I have eaten all the bread. 29. Where is your house ] 30. My house is the seventh house after the church. Gramatica. Grammar. 1. Ordinal numbers are considered as adjectives, and agree in gender and number with the noun to which they refer : Este muchacho es el primero, Estas muchachas son las primeras, La quinta avenida, This boy is the first. These girls are the first. The fifth avenue. 2, Primero, first, tercero, third, and postrero, last, drop the in the singular when they precede a masculine noun, or its adjective : El primer horabre, The first man. El postrer discipulo, The last scholar. El tercer buen emperador, The third good emperor. 3. Primo is used instead of primero, after another ordinal number: Vige*simo primo, Twenty-first. ! Ordinal numbers are used in Spanish as in English after the names of sovereigns, but without the article: Fernando segundo, Ferdinand the Second. Felipe cuarto, Philip the Fourth. OBSERVATION. The Spaniards generally use, as being shorter, the car- dinal numbers after the names of sovereigns when their order of succession exceeds ten. Thus, they prefer to say : Luis Catorce, Louis the Fourteenth. Carlos Doce, Charles the Twelfth. 122 LESSON 22. 5. After the number eleven the cardinal or ordinal numbers may be used with equal propriety to indicate the divisions of a book or other works : Capitulo quince or de"cimo quinto, Fifteenth chapter. Pagina veinte or vigesima, Twentieth page. 6. In Spanish the cardinal numbers are used by abbreviation before the names of months. Primero, first, forms, however, an exception, and must be used instead of uno : El primero de enero, The first of January. El cinco 6 seis de mayo, The fifth or sixth of May. 7 Mitad is synonymous with medio, half; but medio is an adjective, while mitad is a noun. Medio and the other fractions take the feminine form when speaking of libra, pound, vara, yard^ etc., even if these nouns are not expressed : Media libra de aziicar, A half pound of sugar. Una cuarta de arroz, A quarter pound of rice. Media vara de pano, Half a yard of cloth. Tres cuartas de muselina, Three fourths of a yard of muslin. 8i While the names of months regularly begin with small letters, there is much variation in this usage. Leccidn XXII. Lesson XXII. 10, LE, LA, LOS, LAS, AS PRONOUNS IN SIMPLE TENSES. Yo lo (or la) tengo, I have it. Tii lo (or la) tienes, thou hast it. El lo (or la) tiene, he has it. Ella lo (or la) tiene, she has it. Nosotros lo (or la) tenemos, we have it. Vosotros lo (or la) teneis, you have it. Ellos lo (or la) tienen, they (masc.) have it. Ellas lo (or la) tienen, they (fern.) have it. PRONOUNS IN SIMPLE TENSES. 123 Yo no lo (or la) tengo, Tii no lo (or la) tienes, El no lo (or la) tiene, Ella no lo (or la) tiene, Nosotros no lo (or la) tenemos, Yosotros no lo (or la) tenets, Ellos no lo (or la) tienen, Ellas no lo (or la) tienen, i Lo (or la) tengo yo ? etc. i No lo (or la) tengo yo ? etc. Yo los (or las) tengo, Tu los (or las) tienes, Id los (or las) tiene, Ella los (or las) tiene, Nosotros los (or las) tenemos, Vosotros los (or las) teneis, Ellos los (or las) tienen, Ellas los (or las) tienen, Yo no los (or las) tengo, Tii no los (or las) tienes, El no los (or las) tiene, Ella no los (or las) tiene, Nosotros no los (or las) tenemos, Vosotros no los (or las) teneis, Ellos no los (or las) tienen, Ellas no los (or las) tienen, i Los (or las) tengo yo ? etc. i No los (or las) tengo yo ? etc. I have it not. thou hast it not he, has it not. she has it not. we have it not. you have it not. they (masc. ) have it not. they (fern.) have it not. have lit? etc. have I it not f etc. I have them. thou hast them. he has them. she has them. we have them. you have them. they (masc. ) have them. they (fern. ) have them. I have them not. thou hast them not. he has them not. she" has them not. ive have them not. you have them not. they (masc. ) have them not. they (fern.) have them not. have I them f etc. have I them not \ etc. Lo, le, la, los, las, as Pronouns in Compound Tenses. Yo lo (or la) he tenido, etc. I have had it. etc. 124: LESSON 22. i Lo (or la) he tenido yo ? have I had it ? etc. etc. V Yo no lo (or la) he tenido, / have not had it. etc. etc. I No lo (or la) he tenido yo ? have I not had it t etc. etc. Yo los (or las) he tenido, / have had them. etc. etc. Yo no los (or las) he tenido, / have not had them. etc. etc. l Los (or las) he tenido yo ? have I had them ? etc. etc. i No los (or las) he tenido yo ? have I not had them f etc. etc. Lo, le, la, los, las, joined with the Infinitive and the Gerund* Tenerlo, tenerla, to have it. Tenerlos, tenerlas, to have them. Teniendolo, teniendola, having it. Teniendolos, teniendolas, having them. Lo, le, la, los, las, placed after the Verb. Tengolo, tengola, / have it. Tengolos, tengolas, I have them. Ejemplos. Examples. i Quien tiene mi libro ? Who has my book ? Yo lo tengo. I have it. j Ha visto V. mi lapiz ? Have you seen my pencil ? Lo he visto. I have seen it. I Tiene V. mis plumas ? Have you my pens ? Las tengo. I have them. l Ha tenido V. mis plumas ? Have you had my pens ? Las he tenido. I have had them. j Vende V. su casa ? Do you sell your house ? La vendo. I sell it. i Quien ha tornado mis papeles ? Who has taken rny papers ? PRONOUNS IN SIMPLE TENSES. 125 Nadie los ha tornado. j Lo tiene su amigo de V. ? El no lo tiene. j Los tienen sus amigos ? Ellos no los tienen. j Lo tiene la senora ? Ella no lo tiene. a Los tienen las senoritas ? Ellas no los tienen. j Quien los tiene ? Nadie los tiene. i A quien lo da V. ? Lo doy a mi amigo. j Lo sabe V. ? Lo se. Tomelo V. No lo tome V. Nobody has taken them. Has your friend it ? He has it not. Have your friends them ? They have them not. Has the lady it ? She has it not. Have the young ladies them ? They have them not. Who has them ? Nobody has them. To whom do you give it ? I give it to my friend. Do you know it ? I know it. Take it. Do not take it ? Lo, Declinable and Undeclinable. \ Esta V. mala, senora ? Lo estoy. i Es V. la enferma ? La soy. i Estan VV. satisfechos ? Lo estamos. i Son VV. los hijos del Senor Pable ? Los somos. i Son VV. las hijas de Maria ? Las somos. Vocabulario. El armario, the closet. El boton, the button. El zapato, the shoe. El zapatero, the shoemaker. La bodega, the cellar. La cama, the bed. La cocina, the kitchen. La gallina, the fowl, the chicken. La lavandera, the washerwoman. La manana, the morning. La sabana, the sheet. Ann, even. Are you sick, madam ? I am (so). Are you the patient (fern.) ? I am (she). Are you pleased ? We are (so). Are you the sons of Mr. Paul ? We are (they). Are you the daughters of Mary ! We are (they). Vocabulary. Ausente, absent. Bien, well. Donde, where. Demasiado, too, too much. Necesitar, to need. No... mas, no... more. Tampoco, not either, neither. Tarde, late. Traer, to bring. i Ve V. 1 do you see f Veo, 1 see. i Vende V. 1 do you sell ? 126 LESSON 22. Exercise 43. 1. i Carlos, tiene V. mis botones de oro ? 2. Yo no los tengo ; su hermano de V. los tiene. 3. [ Porque los ha tornado el ? 4. Yo no lo se. 5. [Eduardo, sabe V. su leccion? 6. Yo no la se muy bien. 7. [ Ha visto V. el caballo de mi tio 1 8. i Que caballo ? 9. Su ca- ballo bianco. 10. Lo he visto esta mafiana. 11. [ Tiene su hermanc todavia su casa ? 12. No la tiene mas ; la ha vendido. 13. i Iklt tenido V. mi libro ? 14. No lo he tenido ; V. lo ha tenido V. mismo 15. i Tiene su hermana de V. mis cuadernos ? 16. Si, ella los tien My brother arrived three days ago. Tres dias ha que mi hermano llego, ) Murio mucho tiempo ha, He died a long time ago. Haber expressing an ACTION, or a STATE WHICH STILL CONTINUES : Dos afios ha que esta malo, He has been sick these two years. Mucho tiempo ha que estoy aqui, / have been here a long while, i Cuanto (tiempo) ha que Y. esta aqui ? How long have you been here ? Haber used to express MEASURE OF DISTANCES : j Cuanto hay de Paris a Londres ? How far is it from Paris to London? No hay lejos, It is not far. Hay cinco minutos de aqui a la It is five minutes' walk from here to the church. 158 LESSON 27. Ser used IMPERSONALLY : Es verdad que es pobre, Es inutil decir eso, Sera tiempo de ir alia, It is true that he is poor. It is useless to say that. It will be time to go there. Hay and alii esta compared: Hay un horabre a la puerta, Alii esta el hoinbre que vende pan, Todos, Todos los dias, every day. Todos los meses, every month. Todas las mananas, every morning. Todas las tardes, every afternoon. Todas las noches, every evening. Todas las seraanas, every week. Todos los anos, every year. Todos los limes, every Monday. Vocabulario. El Aleman, the German. El baile, the ball. El conocido, the acquaintance. El estrangero, the foreigner. El ferro carril, the railroad. El incendio, the conflagration. El parque, the park. El periddico, the newspaper. El duro, the dollar. La gente, the people. La milla, the mile. La persona, the person. There is a man at the door. There is the man (pointing out} who sells bread. every : Todo el dia, the whole day. Todo el raes, the whole month. Toda la mafiana, the whole morning. Toda la tarde, the whole afternoon. Toda la noche, the whole night. Toda la seinana, the whole week. Todo el ano, the whole year. Todo el mundo, everybody. Vocabulary. La semana que viene, next week. La vez, the time. Cerca de, nearly. Esperar, 1. to wait. Hecho, done. Inutil, useless. Muerto, died. Tambien, also, too. Todo, all, everything. Quiere, wishes. Ultimo, last. Ver, 2. to see. Exercise 53. 1. j Hay cartas para mi (me) hoy 1 2. Hay una para V., y doa para su hermano. 3. j Habia nmcha gente en el baile ? 4. Habia mas que la ultima vez. 5. j Cuanto hay de aqui a la ciudacl '? 6. Hay muy lejos, pero ahora tenemos un ferro carril. 7. [ Cuanto tiempo ha que ha muerto el general 1 8. Habra un ano maiiana. 9. i Quien IMPERSONAL VERBS HABER AND SER. 159 estaba en el baile ? 10. Habfa nmchos de nuestros conocidos. 11. Es; inutil decir eso, todo el mundo lo sabe. 12. it. one's self, himself, herself, themselves, itself. Conjunctive. With Verbs. Me, me, to me. Nos, us, to us. Te, thee, to thee. Os, you, to you. Le, la, you, to you. Les, las, you, to you. Le, him, her, to him, to her. Les, them, to them. Lo, la, le, it, him, her. Los, las, them. Se, one's self, himself, herself, themselves, itself, each other. Ejemplos. Esta carta es para mi. Yo hablo de el y de ella. Juan va con nosotros. Tengo algo para ellos. Yo hablo de ello\ Cada uno para sj. Pienso -en el. fil me ama y yo le amo. Yo la veo, pero ella no me ve. jQueleda V. ? Nada. i Que les da V. ? Yo les doy dinero. Yo no quiero verle. El quiere vernos. El nos quiere ver, Examples. This letter is for me. I speak of him and of her. John goes with us. I have something for them. I speak of it. Every one for himself. I think of him. He loves me and I love him. I see her, but she does not see me. What do you give him (or her) ? Nothing. What do you give them ? I give them money. I do not wish to see him. He wishes to see us. 172 LESSON 30. Viendolos alii, les hable. Seeing them there, I spoke to them I Quiere V. comprarlo ? Will you buy it ? Yo no quiero comprarlo. I will not buy it. Demelo. Give it to me. i Los ha visto V. ? Have you seen them ? No los he visto. I have not seen them. El no rne ha hablado. He has not spoken to me. Ellos no pueden verse. They cannot see each other. Yo le veo a V. I see you. Conmigo, with me. Contigo, with thee. Consigo, with one's self (himself, herself, itself, or themselves). Vocabulario. Vocabulary. El sombrerero, the hatter. El tio, the uncle. Los vestidos, the clothes. Aqui tiene V. , here is. Comido, eaten. Cortar, 1. to cut. Dado, given. Debo, I owe. Dice, says. Dicho, said. Doy, I give. Enviado, sent. Enviar, 1 . to send. i Habla V.? singJcfo you i Hablan VV. 1 ? pi. ) speak ? Hallado, found. Exercise 59. Irse, 3. to go away. i'NQcesit&V.ldoyouneed ? Pide, asks for. Prestar, 1. to lend. Salir, 3. to go out. Sin, without. Sin embargo, however. Visto, seen. 1. [ Quien tiene dinero para mi ? 2. Tengo dinero para Y., pero no para su hermano. 3. j Para quien es eso ? 4. Para V., si V. quiere. 5. i Va V. al parque con los muchachos (children)^. 6. Voy, pero sin ellos. 7. [Va V. al teatro con su hermana ? 8. Voy con ella. 9. i Es el libro para mi 6 para mi hermano ? 10. No es ni para V. ni para el. 11. i De quien habla V. ? 12. De el y de ella. 13. i Con quien hablan VV. ? 14. Con ellas. 15. i Quien era rey de Francia en 1700 ? 16. Era (it was) Luis Catorce, hijo de Luis Trece. 17. [ Que le da V. a este hombre ? 18. Le doy algo bueno. 19. [ Conoce V. a esta senora ? 20. La conozco muy bien. 21. i Los ve V. ? 22. Los veo, pero no les hablo. 23. Me ha visto V. 1 24. No he visto a V., pero he visto a su padre. 25. i Cuando ha escrito V. a su tio 1 26. Le he escrito esta manana. 27. i Quien le da a V. dinero ? 28. Carlos nos da un duro. 29. i Ha hallado V. sus libros ? 30. Los he hallado en el cuarto de Pedro. 31. i Que quiere V. enviar a su amigo ? 32. Quiero enviarle el dinero que me pide. 33. j Ha dicbo V. algo a este hombre 1 34. No le he dicho nada. PERSONAL PRONOUNS WITH PREPOSITIONS AND VERBS. 173 Exercise 60. i. What does that man tell you ? 2. He tells me that he wishes to speak to you. 3. Has the tailor sent me my clothes ? 4. He has not sent them yet. 5. Have you seen Mrs. Norris ? 6. I saw (have seen) her this morning. 7. Can you lend me twenty dollars ? 8. I lent (have lent) you ten dollars yesterday ; why do you want twenty dollars now 1 9. I owe money to my hatter, and I wish to pay him. 10. I have no money to-day. 11. Will you cut me some bread 1 12. Yes, if you will lend me your knife. 13. To whom have you written 1 14. I have written to him and to her. 15. Give me some- thing for this poor man. 16. I have given him something already. 17. I have never seen my uncle ; I have written several times to him, however. 18. To whom will you give this beautiful book ? 19. To him. 20. Have you nothing for her] 21. Yes, I have something for her too. 22. How do you know that ? 23. I know it, because he has said so. 24. Have you eaten all the apples ? 25. Charles has eaten them. 26. Do you know that gentleman 1 27. I don't know him very well. 28. Do you speak German ] 29. I speak it a little, but my brother speaks it better than I. 30. Will you go out with me? 31. I cannot go out now, I have something to (que) do. 32. Where has your brother bought his handkerchiefs 1 33. He has bought them in Paris. 34. Have you learned your lesson ? 35. I have learned it, but I don't know it very well. Gramatica. Grammar. It The object personal pronouns are divided into two classes, the disjunctive and the conjunctive. The former are used when accompanied by a Spanish preposition : A mi, to me. Para el, for him. The conjunctive pronouns are used in close connection with a verb, and without a Spanish preposition. Me ama, he loves me. La veo, / see her. 2. The conjunctive pronouns are used as either the direct or the indirect objects of a verb. Their form, however, is the same, except for the pronouns of the third person. Me ama, he loves me. Me habla, he speaks to me. La veo, / see her. Le doy, / give to him. 174 LESSON 30. 3. Used with an infinitive, an affirmative imperative, or a gerund, the conjunctive pronouns follow the verb, and are united with it: Vino ayer a* verme, He came to see me yesterday. Dadme, give me. Hablandoles, in speaking to them. NOTE. The third person forms of the present subjunctive when used as an affirmative imperative come under the above rule : Delo, give it. Diganlo, let them say it. 4. Elsewhere the conjunctive pronouns precede the verb, and are not united to it : La conozco, / know her. Los ve, he sees them. NOTE. Instances are not uncommon where this usage is disregarded, especially in connection with an imperfect or preterite form of the verb at the beginning of a phrase: Sen tose, he sat down. Llevome, he took me away. Llam abase, he was named. 5* When there are two verbs in the phrase, the pronoun is better put with the verb to which it logically belongs : El quiere verme, He wants to see me. NOTE. There is much divergence in this usage. 6. The conjunctive pronouns are placed before the auxiliary in compound tenses : Le he visto, / have seen him. Lo hemos comprado, We have bought it. 7. The pronoun le generally accompanies the noun in the third person, and consequently V. and VV. (See p. 36.) Yo le doy a V. (rather than Yo doy a V.), / give you. Yo le doy a su hermano, / give (to) your brother. 8. When the pronoun nos is joined with the first person plural of a verb, the latter drops the s : Unimonos, we unite, instead of unimosnos. PERSONAL PRONOUNS WITH PREPOSITIONS AND VERBS. 175 9. The disjunctive pronouns may be added to the conjunctive to give more emphasis to the sentence : A mi me vio, he saw me. It is more especially the case : 1. When the verb governs more than one object : Le amo a el, a su herraano, y a su / love him, his brother, and his hermana, sister. 2. When the object pronouns are emphasized by the word self or selves : Te vi a ti mismo, / saw thee. 10 When the object precedes the verb, the conjunctive pro- noun is often redundantly used : Los mas bellos edificios, los he visto / have seen the finest buildings in en Italia, Italy. A los Franceses les han costado The wars of the French have cost mucho sangre sus guerras, them much blood. lit When mi, ti, si, are governed by the preposition con, with, they form conmigo, with me ; contigo, with, thee ; con- sigo, with himself, herself, itself, them ; and admit no change for either gender or number. 12. The preposition must be repeated before every pronoun : Este dinero es para ti, para el y para This money is for you (thee), for ella, him, and for her. 13. The genitive case takes the place of the nominative in exclamations : j Desdichado de mi ! /, unfortunate creature / 176 LESSON 31. Leecidn XXXI. Lesson XXXL THE RESPECTIVE PLACES OF PRONOUNS. Me lo (le or la), it to me. Te lo, it to thee. Se lo, it to him or her. Nos lo, it to us. Osl0 ' \ Selo (4V.), / Se lo (& ellos or ellas), it to them. \ to you. Me los (las), them to me. Te los, them to thee. Se los, them to him or her. Nos los, them to us. Oslos, ) 01 /x TT \ r them to you. Se lOS (a V.), ) Se los (a ellos or ellas), them to them. Ejemplos. El me lo da. Ella nos lo ha dicho. i Quien se lo da a V. ? Ellos ine lo dan, i Quiere V. darmelos ? ) i Me los quiere V. dar ? j Quiero prestarselos a V. Se los quiero priestar a V. Yo se los doy a V. Yo se lo doy a ellos. Examples. He gives it to me. She has said it to us. Who gives it to you ? They give it to me. Will you give them to me ? ! I will lend them to you. I give them to you. I give it to them. Imperative affirmative. Demelos V. Deselo V. Prestemelos V. Presteselo V. Comanselos VV. Give them to me. Give it to him. Lend them to me. Lend it to him. Eat them. PLACES OF PRONOUNS. 177 Imperative negative. No me lo de V. No nos lo de V. No me los mande V. No se los mande V. Do not give it to me. Do not give it to us. Do not send them to me. Do not send them to him. Vocabulario. El correo, the mail. El cortaplumas, the penknife. El crimen, the crime. El jardinero, the gardener. La muneca, the doll. i Ama V. 1 do you love ? Amo, I love. Desea, wishes. De V., give. Devolver, 2. to return. Dice, says, tells. Diga V. , say, tell. Doy, I give. Guillermo, William. Hablado, ; Vocabulary. Hay, there is. Llegado, arrived. Mandar, 1. to send. Mande V. , send. Matar, 1. to kill. Mismo, same. Necesita, needs. Perdido, lost. Quieren, wish. Recibido, received. Kobar, 1. to steal, to rob. Traido, brought. Traiga V., bring. Ve, sees. Vende, sells. Exercise 61. 1. [ Quiere V. enviar esta carta a su hermano ? 2. Yo quiero envia"r- sela. 3. i Cuando puede V. enviarsela 1 4. Se la puedo enviar manana por la manana. 5. [ Cuando puede V. escribir a su tio ? 6. Puedo escribirle ahora, si V. lo quiere. 7. i A quien quiere V. dar este libro ? 8. Quiero darselo a mi hermanita. 9. [ Quien le ha dado esto a V. ? 10. Guillermo me lo ha dado. 11. i Como sabe V. que Juan esta aqui? 12. Mi hermano me lo ha dicho. 13. Si V. tiene mi libro, demelo. 14. Yo se lo he dado a su hermano. 15. Los muchachos quieren sus libros, deselos Y. 16. Se los he dado ya. 17. Hay un libro en mi cuarto, traigamelo Y. 18. Este joven necesita un cortaplumas ; tiene Y. uno ? 19. El mio esta sobre la 12 178 LESSON 31. mesa ; Y. puede prestarselo. 20. Este dinero es para ti, para el , y para ella. 21. Robar a un honibre y matarle son dos crimenes. 22. A quien ama V. ? 23. Le amo a el, a su hermano, y a su hermana. 24. i Puede Y. decirme quien es el que ha hecho esto ? 25. No puedo decirselo a Y. ; porque yo inismo no lo se. 26. No le de Y. nada a ese hombre, ya ha estado aqui esta manana. 27. No es el inismo. 28. Si Y. tiene cartas para mi, rnandemelas Y. a mi casa. 29, No puedo mandarselas, porque no tengo nadie con quieri mandarlas. 30. La sefiora Castro quiere saber si Y. puede darle su dinero hoy. 31. No puedo darselo hoy, porque todavia no lo he recibido. 32. Hay aqui un hombre que desea verle a Y. 33. No tengo tiempo ahora, tengo que escribirle d mi hermana. 34. Sabe V. si ha llegado el correo 1 35. Ha llegado esta manana. Exercise 62. 1. Who can give me money for that ? 2. Your brother can give you some ; I have none. 3. Who gave (has given) that doll to Mary 1 4. Her mother has given it to her. 5. Can you lend me some money ? 6. I can lend you five dollars ; when can you return them to me ? 7. I don't know yet when I shall be able (podrtf) to return them. 8. If you cannot tell me, I cannot lend you anything. 9. What will you send to your brother ? 10. I will send him two letters which I have received for him. 11. Bring me the book which is on the little table. 12. What has that man said to you ? 13. He has riot said anything to me ; he has spoken to my cousin (masc.). 14. Have you told (to) your friend that his father was (imperf.) here ? 15. I have not seen him yet. 16. Can the gardener send us some flowers ? 17. He can send you some roses if you wish (it). 18. If you see your sister tell her that I have received some French books. 19. She knows it already. 20. You do not need your knife now ; lend it to me. 21. I don't wish to lend it to you. 22. Can I see Mr. Bravo ? 23. You cannot see him now. 24. Does our baker sell you any bread ? 25. He does not sell us any. 26. Do you know if the tailor has sent my coat ? 27. He has not sent it yet. 28. What have you brought us to-day? 29. I have not brought anything for you, but I have something for the children. 30. Why don't you tell (to) your uncle that you have lost your money ? 31. I am afraid to tell it to him, 32. My friend has given me this pencil, and I give it to you. PLACES OF PRONOUNS. 179 Gramatica. Grammar. 1, When a verb governs two personal pronouns, the indirect object must precede the direct whenever the latter is a pronoun of the third person : El me lo da, he gives it to me. Damelo, give it to me. 2* If the conjunctive pronouns are in the first and second person, the direct must precede the indirect : Rendeterne, Surrender to me. 3. The pronoun se precedes all the other object pronouns, whether these are placed before or after the verb : Se me escape, He escaped from me. slo V., Give it to him. 4. When both pronouns are in the third per son , the indirect object pronoun, whether singular or plural, is changed into se, and we say therefore : Se lo, it to him, her, or them. Se los, them to him, her, or them. To all these pronouns we may add the disjunctive pronouns to give more expression or precision to the sentence : Se lo dire a el a ella / will tell it to him to her to a ellos a ellas, them, masc. to them. fem. 180 LESSON 32. Leccidn XXXIL Lesson XXXIL REGULAR VERBS. Present Tenses of the Indicative Mood. 1st Conjugation. 2d Conjugation. 3d Conjugation. Habl-ar, to speak. Com-er, to eat. Recib-ir, to receive. Habl-ando, speaking. Com-iendo, eating. Recib-iendo, receiving. Habl-ado, spoken. Com-ido, eaten. Recib-ido, received. Terminations of the Present Idincative. Habl-o, I speak. Com-o, I eat. Recib-o, I receive. Habl-as, thou speakest. Com-es, thou eatest. Recib-es, thou receives^. Habl-a, he speaks. Com-e, he eats. Recib-e, he receives. Habl-amos, we speak. Com-emos, we eat. Recib-imos, we receive. Habl-als, you speak. Corn-eis, you eat. Recib-is, you receive. Habl-an, they speak. Com-en, they eat. Recib-en, they receive. Vocabulario. El agua, f., the water. El almacen, the store. El baile, the ball. El gusto, the pleasure. El pano, the doth. Las tijeras, the scissors. Griego, Greek. Latin, Latin. Pues, as. Aprender, 2. 1 to learn, Bailar, 1. to dance. Cantar, 1. to sing. Comprender, 2. to un derstand. Deber, 2. to owe. Estudiar, 1. to study. Gastar, 1. to spend. Exercise 63. Vocabulary. Mandar, 1. to send. Pagar, 1. to pay. Kecibir, 3. to receive. Residir, 3. to reside. Tocar, 1. to play on. Vender, 2. to sell. Via jar, 1. to travel. Vivir, 3. to live. 1. i Quien ha tornado mi libro ? 2. Yo no se quien lo ha tornado. 3. i A qu6 bora comen W. ? 4. Comemos a las seis y media los 1 The number put after each Spanish verb given in this vocabulary, or in the following vocabularies, indicates the conjugation to which that verb belongs. REGULAR VERBS. 181 dias de la semaria ; pero los domingos, comemos d las dos. 5. Donde estd su hermano ahora? 6. Esta viajando en Europa. 7. Necesito zapatos ; donde compra V. los suyos ? 8. Cornpro mis zapatos en Broadway. 9. [ Quien vive en aquella casa ? 10. El sefior Robinson vive alii con su familia. 11. i Toca V. el piano ? 12. No toco ningun instrument, pero canto un poco. 13. i Cantan tambien BUS her- manas ? 14. Ellas cautan uiuy bien. 15. i Con que cortan VV. este pafio ? 16. Lo cortamos con las tijeras grandes. 17. [Cuando recibe V. su dinero ? 18. Lo recibo todos los meses, y asi pago lo que debo. 19. [ Quiere V. beber algo ? 20. No, gracias, he bebido ya. 21. i Cuando llega su padre ? 22. No se, el no ha escrito. 23. [ Va Y. al baile esta noche ? 24. No, seiior, yo nunca bailo. 25. i Quiere V. comprar libros franceses ? nuestro amigo ha recibido muchisimos. 26. No puedo comprar ninguno ahora, he gastado todo mi dinero el mes pasado. 27. [ Habla Y. francos ? 28. Hablo un poco ; pero mi hermano lo habla niuy bien, pues ha residido mucho tiempo en Paris. 29. i Y donde vive ahora ? 30. ]U esta en Alemania, donde esta estudiando el aleman. 31. [En donde ha aprendido Y. el italiano 1 32. Yo no hablo italiano, lo comprendo un poco. 33. i Quiere Y. venderme su caballo negro ? 34. Ya lo he vendido, pero todavia no he recibido el diuero. Exercise 64. 1. Who lives now in your old house ? 2. Nobody lives there now. 3. Does your brother speak Spanish ? 4. We all speak (speak all) Spanish in the family. 5. What do you study in your school ? 6. I study Latin and Greek. 7. Do you know if your friend has received any money ? 8. Yes, he receives his money every Monday. 9. At what time does your father dine ? 10. He dines at six o'clock. 11. Have you bought anything for us ? 12. Yes, I have bought apples and pears for you. 13. What are you eating 1 14. I am eat- ing bread and cheese. 15. And what are you drinking ? 16. I am drinking water ; T never drink wine or beer. 17. Does your sister sing ? 18. She sings and dances very well. 19. Will you cut me a piece of bread ] 20. With much pleasure ; give me your knife. 21. Here it is, but I don't know if it cuts well. 22. Have you spent all your money ? 23. Not yet, I have spent only five dollars. 24. Will you buy a handsome little dog 1 25. I don't spend my money in dogs. 26. Do you learn French ? 27. We learn French and Italian. 182 LESSON 32. 28. Do you speak Italian well? 29. We don't speak it, but we understand it. 30. What do they se 1 ! in that store '? 31. They sell sugar, coffee, and tea. 32. Do you receive your wine from France ? 33. We receive some from France and some from Germany. Gramatica. Grammar. 1, The present of the indicative expresses in Spanish, as well as in the other languages, whatever exists, happens, or is being done: Yo soy, lam; til escribes, thou writest ; llueve, it is raining ; etc. 2. The present of the indicative is also very frequently used instead of the future tense to express a proximate futurity : Mi amigo viene al instante, My friend will come in a moment. Partimos manana, We shall leave to-morrow. 3* The same tense is sometimes used instead of the past tense, especially in a narrative, to give it more animation, and to place it vividly, as it were, before the reader : Oye el general que el enemigo ha The general heard (hears) that the echado el puente, y al punto da enemy had (lias) built the bridge, la senal de la pelea, se arma, sube and he immediately gave (gives) a caballo y sale al f rente de sus orders for the battle, armed (arms) tropas a encontrar los Franceses. himself, mounted (mounts) his QUINTANA. horse, and sallied (sallies) forth to meet the French. 4* The root or the stem of the verb is obtained by dropping the last two letters which form the endings proper to the con- jugation to which the verb belongs, namely : ar, for the first conjugation; er, for the second conjugation; and ir, for the third conjugation. To this stem are added, to form the present of the indicative of the regular verbs, and of many irregular verbs, the following terminations : For the 1st Conjugation : o, as, a, amos, a~is, an. For the 2d Conjugation : o, es, e, emos, eis, en. For the 3d Conjugation : o, es, e, imos, is, en. IRREGULAR VERBS. 183 S The present of the indicative of certain regular verbs. In those verbs ending in the a. Present infinitive in cer and cir, the c is replaced by a Z before o and a to preserve the sound of the consonant in the stem : Veneer, to conquer. Venzo, I conquer. Resarcir, to compensate. Eesarza, he compensates. b. Present infinitive in ger and gir, change g into j before and a for the sanie reason as above : Coger, to take. Co jo, / take. Exigir, to exact. Exijo, / exact. C. Present infinitive in quir, change qu into c before o and a : Delinquir, to offend. Delinco, / offend. d. Present infinitive in gllir, drop u before and a : Extinguir, to extinguish. Extingo, / extinguish. e. Present infinitive in uir (except as above in guir and quir) insert y when u is accented : Atribuir, to attribute. Atribuyo, / attribute. Atribuye, he attributes. Constituir, to constitute. Constituyo, / constitute. Destruir, to destroy. Destruyo, / destroy. Distribuir, to distribute. Distribuyo, / distribute. Huir, tojlee. Huyo, 1 flee. Argiiir, to argue. Arguyo, / am, arguing. leccion XXXIII. Lesson XXXIII. IRREGULAR VERBS OP THE 1st CONJUGATION. Present Tense of the Indicative Mood. 1. Calentar, to warm. 2. Empezar, to begin. Caliento, I warm. Empiezo, I begin. Calientas, thou warmest. Empiezas, thou beginnest. Calienta, he warms. Empieza, he begins. Calentamos, we ivarm. Empezamos, we'begin. Calentais, you warm. Empezais, you begin. Calientan, they warm. Empiezan, they begin. 184 LESSON 33. Principal Irregular Verbs of the 1st conjugation which take an i before the e and are conjugated like caleutar and empezar. Apretar, to squeeze. Arrendar, to hire. Asentar, to place. Atravesar, to cross. Gegar, to blind. Cerrar, to shut. Comenzar, to commence. Concertar, to agree. Conf esar, to confess. Despertar, to awake. Desterrar, to banish. Empedrar, to pave. Encerrar, to lock up. Encomendar, to recommend. Enmendar, to correct. Enterrar, to bury. Escarmentar, to take warning. 3. Almorzar, to breakfast. Almuerzo, I breakfast. Alrauerzas, thou breakfastest. Almuerza, he breakfasts. Almorzamos, we breakfast. Almorzais, you breakfast. Almuerzan, they breakfast. Fregar, to rub. Gobernar, to govern. Helar, to freeze. Herrar, to shoe. Mentar, to mention. Negar, to deny. Nevar, to snow. Pensar, to think. Quebrar, to break. Recomendar, to recommend. Eeventar, to burst. Segar, to cut down. Sembrar, to sow. Sentar, to set. Temblar, to tremble. Tentar, to tempt. Tropezar, to stumble. 4. Contar, to count. Cuento, I count. Cuentas, thou countest. Cuenta, he counts. Contamos, we count. Centals, you count. Cuentan, they count. Principal Irregular Verbs of the ue and are conjugated Acordar, to remind. Amolar, to grind. Apostar, to bet. Aprobar, to approve. Avergonzar, to shame. Consolar, to console. Desollar, to skin. Encontrar, to meet. Forzar, to force. Hollar, to tread. Mostrar, to show. Poblar, to people. 1st conjugation which change the o into like almorzar and contar. Probar, to prove. Renovar, to renew. Kodar, to roll. Soldar, to solder. Soltar, to let loose. Sonar, to sound. Sonar, to dream. Tostar, to toast. Trocar, to barter. Tronar, to thunder. Volar, to fly. Volcar, to overturn. IRREGULAR VERBS. 185 5. Dar, to give. Doy, I give. Das, thou givest. Da, he gives. Damos, we give. Dais, you give. Dan, they give. Vocabulario. El aire, the air. El estado, the state. El labrador, the farmer. El trabajo, the work. La cocinera, the cook. La funcidn, the ceremony. La ignorancia, the ignorance. Despues, afterwards. Imposible, impossible. Temprano, early. Anadir, 3. to add. Apostar, 1. to bet. Aprobar, 1. to approve. Calentar, 1. to warm. Cerrar, 1. to shut. Confesar, 1. to confess. Consolar, 1. to console. 6. Jugar, to play. Juego, I play. Juegas, thouplayest. Juega, he plays. Jugamos, we play. Jugais, you play. Juegan, they play. Vocabulary. Creer, 2. to believe. Encerrar, 1. to lock up. Encontrar, 1. to meet. Enterrar, 1. to bury. Helar, 1. to freeze. Ir, 3. to go. Mostrar, 1. to show. Fasar, 1. to pass. Pensar, 1. to think. Poblar, 1. to people. Probar, 1, to prove. Becomendar, 1. to recommend. Sembrar, 1. to sow. Sonar, 1. to dream. Temblar, 1. to tremble. Volar, 1. to fly. Exercise 65. 1. [ Quo* piensa V. de eso ? 2. No se que pensar. 3. [ A que bora almuerzan W. ? 4. Almorzamos a las siete de la manana. 5. [ D6nde estan los muchachos 1 6. Estan jugando en el jardm. 7. [ Cuanto dinero da V. a este hombre ? 8. Yo le doy cien duros. 9. [ A que bora empieza la funcion ? 10. Creo que erapieza muy temprano. 11. [ Porque tiembla ese muchacbo ? 12. Porque tiene miedo. 13. El principe gobierna sus estados con moderacion y justicia. 14. i Cuanto quiere V. apostar que puedo hacer eso ? 15. Yo nunca apuesto dinero. 16. [Como pasan VV. el tiempo 1 17. Almorzamos temprano, despues estudiamos; a la una salimos ; a las seis comemos, y jugamos basta las diez. 18. Confieso que no se nada de eso. 19. [ C6mo piensan VV. hacer eso 1 20. Pensamos bacerlo asi. 21. Los pdjaros pueblan los aires. 22. Apuesto que V. no encuentra 186 LESSON 33. la casa de mi hermano y que yo encuentro la de su hermano de V. 23. Yo no apruebo lo que V. ha hecho. 24. Esos hombres muestran mucba ignorancia. 25. Esta mujer encierra todo el dinero que tiene. 26. [ Tiene Y. algo que anadir ? 27. Si, senor, le recomiendo a Y. mis bermanos y bermanas. 28. j Ha cerrado V. las puertas 1 29. La criada las cierra todas las nocbes. 30. Esta belando. Exercise 66. 1. I meet your brotber every day in our street 2. Wbere does your brother breakfast 1 3. He never breakfasts (breakfasts never) with us. 4. What do you give to the children ? 5. I give them apples and cakes. 6. Why do you not commence your work now 1 7. I cannot commence now ; I have some letters to write. 8. The general has been buried this morning. 9. Do you think that your brother will be here to-night ? 10. I don't think so. 11. I recom- mend you to go to-morrow to the house of that lady. 12. Do you approve the conduct of your brother ? 13. I do not approve of it ; it is impossible to approve it. 14. Do you dream sometimes ? 15. I never dream. 16. What does this prove? 17. It does not prove anything. 18. You show your ignorance when you speak so. 19. The birds fly in the air. 20. Who warms my coffee 'I 21. The cook warms it. 22. He bets that I cannot do this, and I bet that I can. 23. We give all our money to that poor man. 24. That poor woman cannot console herself (se). 25. Will you play with me? 26. I never play when I have to study. 27. The farmers sow their fields in this season. 28. Why do you tremble ? 29. I do not tremble ; you tremble yourself. 30. It was freezing. Gramatica. Grammar. 1, There are in Spanish verbs several kinds of irregularities; but as they are limited in most cases to certain moods, tenses, and persons, and almost always occur in the same places, they have a certain regularity in their irregularity, which facilitates the task of the student. It has been shown by the conjugation given above that the irregularity in the present indicative occurs in tbe 1st, 2d, and 3d person singular, and tbe 3d person plural. It will be shown hereafter in other tenses that the irregularities of verbs of the IRREGULAR VERBS. 187 1st conjugation are the same throughout the whole conjugation excepting four verbs which will be mentioned in their appro- priate place. 2. A large number of the Spanish verbs are irregular only when the vowel of the stem is accented. Consequently when this change is mastered, they present no further difficulty. Verbs like calentar and empezar, whose stem vowel is e, insert i before the e in the 1st, 2d ? and 3d persons singular, and in the 3d person plural of the indicative, while verbs like almorzar and contar, whose stem vowel is o, replace the o by Tie in the same persons. Jugar and dar stand alone, no other verbs being conjugated like them, unless we except estar, to be, which has in the pres- ent indicative the same terminations as dar. 3. The gerund and the past participle of the irregular verbs of the 1st conjugation are formed regularly, as : Calent-ar, to warm; calent-ando, warming; calent-ado, warmed. Empez-ar, to begin ; empez-ando, beginning ; empez-ado, begun. Almorz-ar, to breakfast; almorz-ando, breakfasting; almorz-ado, breakfasted. Cont-ar, to count; cont-ando, counting; cont-ado, counted. D-ar, to give ; d-ando, giving ; d-ado. given. Jug-ar, to play ; jug-ando, playing; jug-ado, played. 4. The verb errar, to err, may be added to the list of the irregular verbs already given. This verb inserts an initial y in the same tenses and persons where calentar, to warm, inserts an i : Yerro, / err. err ar, to err. Yerras, thou errest. Yerra, he errs. err ando, erring. Erramos, we err. Errais, you err. err ado, erred. Yerran, they err. 5i Since the present subjunctive is formed from the first per- son of the present indicative, the above changes will be found there as well. The same is true of the imperative, and it is only in these three tenses that the stem vowel receives the accent. 188 LESSON 34. Leccion XXXIV. lesson XXXIV, IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE 2d CONJUGATION. ( to know. 1. Conocer I . . . , 7 . _ ( to be acquainted with. Conozco, I know. Couoces, ihou knowest. Conoce, he knows. Conocemos, we know. Conoceis, you know. Conocen, they know. 2. Nacer, to be born. Nazco, 1 am born. Naces, thou art born. Nace, he is born. Nacemos, we are born. Naceis, you are born. Nacen, they are born. 3. Perder, to lose. Pierdo, I lose. Pierdes, thou losest. Pierde, he loses. Perdemos, we lose Perdeis, you lose. Pierden, they lose. 4. Encender, to light. Enciendo, I light. Euciendes, thou lightest. Enciende, he lights. Encendemos, we light. Encendeis, you light. Encienden, they light. 5. Hacer, to make, to do; haciendo, making, doing ; hecho, made, done. 6. Caer, to fall; cayendo, falling ; caido, fallen. Hago, / make or do. Caigo, I fall. Haces, thou makest or doest. Caes, thou f oiliest. Hace, he makes or does. Cae, he falls. Hacemos, we make or do. Caemos, we fall. Haceis, youma.ke or do. Gaels, you fall. Hacen, they make or do. Caen, they falL 7. Poner, to put ; 8. Querer, to wish, to be willing t Pongo, I put. Pones, thou puttest. Pone, he puts. Ponemos, we put. Poneis, you put. Ponen, they put. poniendo, putting ; puesto, put. queriendo, wishing ; querido, wished. Quiero, / wish, I am willing, Quieres, thou wishest, etc. Quiere, he wishes, etc. Queremos, we wish, etc. Quereis, you wish, etc. Quieren, they wish, etc. IRREGULAR VERBS. 189 9. Saber, to know, to know how to ; sabiendo, knowing ; sabido, known. 10. Poder, to be able ; pudiendo, being able ; podido, been able. Se, / know. Puedo, / am able, I can. Sabes, thou knowest. Puedes, thou art able, etc. Sabe, he knows. Puede, he is able, etc. Sabemos, we know. Podemos, we are able, etc. Sabeis, you know. Podeis, you are able, etc. Saben, they know. Pueden, they are able, etc. 11. Cocer, to boil; cociendo, boiling; cocido, boiled. 12. Traer, to bring; trayendo, bringing; traido, brought. Cuezo, / boil. Traigo, / bring. Cueces, thou boilest. Traes, thou bringest. Cuece, he boils. Trae, he brings. Cocemos, we boil. Traenios, we bring. Coceis, you boil. Traeis, you bring. Cuecen, they boil. Traen, they bring. 13. Caber, to be contained ; cabiendo, being contained ; cabido, been contained. 14. Valer, to be worth ; valiendo, being worth ; valido, been worth. Quepo, / am contained. Valgo, / am worth. Cabes, thou art contained. Vales, thou art worth. Cabe, he is contained. Vale, he is worth. Cabemos, we are contained. Valemos, we are worth. Cabeis, you are contained. Valeis, you are worth. Caben, they are contained. Valen, they are worth. 15. Ver, to see ; viendo, seeing ; visto, seen. 16. Absolver, to absolve ; absolviendo, absolving ; absuelto, absolved. Veo, I see. Absuelvo, I absolve. Ves, thou seest. Absuelves, thou absolvest. Ve, he sees. Absuelve, he absolves. Vemos, we see. Absolvemos, we absolve. Veis, you see. Absolveis, you absolve. Ven, they see. Absuelven, they absolve. 17. Volver, to return ; volviendo, returning ; vuelto, returned. 18. Morder, to bite; mordiendo, biting ; mordido, bitten. Vuelvo, / return. Muerdo, 1 bite. Vuelves, thou returnest. Muerdes, thou bitest. Vuelve, he returns. Muerde, he bites. Volvemos, we return. Mordernos, we bite. Volveis, you return. Mordeis, you bite. Vnelven, they return. Muerden, they bite. 190 LESSON 34. 19. Oler, to smell ; Huelo, I smell. Hueles, thou smellest. Huele, he smells. oliendo, smelling ; olido, smelt. Olemos, ice smell. Oleis, you smell. Huelen, they smell. Vocabulario. El haul, the trunk. El diente, the tooth. El gas, the gas. El negocio, the business. El olor, the smell. El pueblo, the town. El saco, the bag. La estrella, the star. La luna, the moon. La nuez, the nut. La ropa, the clothes. La tarde, the afternoon. Algunas veces, sometimes. A lo menos, at least. Desde, since. Durante, during. Vocabulary. Generalmente, generally. Mariana, to-morrow. Pasado manana, the day after to- morrow. Ventajoso, profitable. Devolver, 2. to return (give back). Disponer, 2. to dispose. Encender, 2. to light. Llover, 2. to rain. Morder,2. to bite. Perder, 2, to lose. Proponer, 2. to propose. Traer, 2. to bring. Valer, 2. to be worth. Ver, 2. to see. Exercise 67. 1. [ Sabe V. si el perro muerde ? 2. No puede morder, es demasia- do viejo, y no tiene dientes. 3. [ Cuanto puede valer este reloj ? 4. Si es de oro, vale a lo menos cien duros. 5. [ Ye Y. a menudo a la senora Marti ? 6. La veo todas las semanas. 7. Como hace V. esto ? 8. Lo hago asi. 9. j, Pueden V V. hacer esto tan bien como nosotros ? 10. Podemos hacerlo mejor. 11. [ Que quieren VV. 1 12. Queremos dinero para ir al teatro. 13. V. sabe muy bien que el teatro esta cerrado. 14. [ Que pone V. en el baiil 1 15. Pongo mi ropa en el baiil grande, y mis libros en el pequeno. 16. j, Cuando piensa V. volver del campo ? 17. Yuelvo manana 6 pasado manana. 18. j Co- iioce V. a este caballero 1 19. Le conozco desde muchos anos. 20. j Que mal olor hay en este cnarto! 21. Yo no huelo nada. 22. [ Ha perdido Y. algo ? 23. Nunca pierdo nada. 24. [ Que me propone Y. 1 25. Le propongo algo de muy ventajoso para Y. 26. [ Sabe Y. lo que quieren estos muchachos 1 27. Yo no se lo que quieren. 28. [ Que trae Y. en aquel saco ? 29. Traigo manzanas y IRREGULAR VERBS. nueces. 30. Durante la noche vemos la luna y las estrellas. 31. [ Qne iKiceii VV. los domingos por la tarde ? 32. Salimos general men te. 33. i A quie'n conocen V V. en el pueblo ? 34. Conocemos a casi todo el mundo. 35. Mi ainigo no sale todavia. Exercise 68. 1. Will you do this for me ? 2. I don't know how to do it, I have never learned. 3. Does the dog bite ? 4. He barks, but he never bites. 5 . Is that book worth anything ? 6. It is not worth any- thing. 7. Whom do you know here ? 8. I do not know anybody. 9. Can you do what I do I 10. I cannot do it. 11. At what time do you light the gas ? 12. I light it at six o'clock. 13. Why do you not return the money to that man ? 14. Because I have no money now. 15. Does it rain ? 16. It rains a little. 17. Our brothers return to-morrow from the city. 18. Can your brother go with me ? 19. He cannot go now, but I can go with you if you wish. 20. Where do you put your books ? 21. I put them in the small room. 22. What do you wish here ] 23. I wish to see your father. Where is he ? 24. I don't know where he is. 25. Can you bring me my books to- morrow ? 26. I bring them now in my bag. 27. Do you see Mr. Brown very often ? 28. I see him every Thursday. 29. Do you know this lady ? 30. Yes, I see her sometimes at her house. 31. Of how much money can you dispose for this business ? 32. I can dis- pose of three hundred dollars, but not of one cent more. 33. Edward will not come with us because it rains. 34. Do you know that I wish to be obeyed ] 35. I don't obey any one here. Gramatica. Grammar. 1. Perder, to lose, and the following verbs whose stem vowel is e insert an i before the e in the three persons singular and also in the 3d person plural of the present of the indicative. Ascender, to ascend. Entender, to understand. Atender, to mind. Extender, to spread. Cerner, to sift. Heder, to smell badly. Condescender, to condescend. Render, to split. Contender, to contend. Reverter, to overflow. Defender, to defend. Tender, to stretch. Desatender, to disregard. Trascender, to transcend. Descender, to descend. Verter, to spill. Encender, to light. And their compounds. 192 LESSON 34. NOTE. This irregularity in the accented stem vowel should be com- pared to that in the first conjugation (p. 187, 2) and occurs in the same place. 2 Volver, to return, and the following verbs, change the o of the radical into ue in the three persons singular, and also in the 3d person plural of the present of the indicative, like almorzar, to breakfast, of the 1st conjugation : Absolver, to absolve. Doler, to ache. Hem order, to sting. Conmover, to aject. Envoi ver, to involve. Resolver, to resolve. Demoler, to demolish. Llover, to rain. Revolver, to revolve. Desenvolver, to unfold. Moler, to grind. Soler, to be wont. Devolver, to give back. Morder, to bite. Solver, to loose. Disolver, to dissolve. Mover, to move. Torcer, to twist. And other of their compounds. NOTE. Compare note to 1. 3* Verbs ending in acer, ecer, and ocer like nacer, to be born, empobrecer, to grow poor, conocer, to know, insert a z before the c in the 1st person singular of the present of the indicative : Nazco, I am lorn; empobrezco, I grow poor ; couozco, I know. 4 1 The verbs mecer, to stir, to rock (which is a regular verb), empecer, to hurt, coeer, to boil (and compounds), yacer, to lie, and hacer, to make, to do, and its compounds, as des- hacer, to undo, rehacer, to do over, contrahacer, to imitate, etc., form an exception to the above rule : Mezo, I stir ; hago, I make, I do. 5, Cocer, to boil, recocer, to boil again, and escocer, to smart, differ from the verbs given above ending in acer, ecer, and ocer ; and instead of inserting a z before the c like conocer, they change the accented o into ue like volver, to return, and replace the c by a Z : Cuezo, I boil. Escuezo, I smart. 6. The following verbs have the same irregularity as poner f to put : Anteponer, to place before. Deponer, to depose. Cumpouer, to repair. Descomponer, to discompose. IRREGULAR VERBS. 193 Disponer, to dispose. Proponer, to propose. Exponer, to expose. Reponer, to replace. Imponer, to impose. Sobreponer, to place over. Indisponer, to indispose. Suponer, to suppose. Oponer, to oppose. Trasponer, to transpose. Posponer, to postpone. 7. The following verbs are conjugated like traer, to bring : Abstraer, to abstract. Distraer, to distract. Substraer, ) , ? to suotract. Atraer, to attract. Estraer, to extract. Sustraer, ) Coiitraer, to contract. Retraer, to retract. Detraer, to detract. Retrotraer, to refer to former times. 8 Equivaler, to be equal to, is conjugated like valer, to be worth. 9. The following verbs are conjugated like tener, to have, which is also an irregular verb : Contener, to contain. Mantener, to maintain. Sostener, to sustain. Detener, to detain. Obtener, to obtain. Entretener, to entertain. Retener, to retain. 10i Caber corresponds also to the English verb to contain, to hold; but in order to use caber in the sense of these verbs, the English accusative must become the Spanish nominative, while the preposition en must also be used : En este teatro cabe mas gente que This theatre contains more people eii aquel, than that one. Leccidn XXXV. lesson XXXV. IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE 3d CONJUGATION. Present of the Indicative. 1. Conducir, to conduct ; conduciendo, conducting ; conducido, conducted. 2. Lucir, to shine ; luciendo, shining ; lucido, shone. Conduzco, I conduct. Luzco, I shine. Conduces, thou conductest. Luces, thou shinest. Conduce, he conducts. Luce, he shines. Conducimos, we conduct. Lucimos, we shine. Conducis, you conduct. Lucis, you shine. Conducen, they conduct. Lucen, they shine. 194 LESSON 35. 3. Seutir, to feel; 4. Divertir, to amuse ; Siento, I feel. Sientes, thoufeelest. Siente, he feels. Sentimos, we feel. Sentis, you feel. Sienten, they feel. sintiendo, feeling ; sentido, felt. divertiendo, amusing; divertido, amused. Divierto, I amuse. Diviertes, thou amusest. Divierte, he amuses. Divertimos, we amuse. Divertis, you amuse. Divierten, they amuse. 5. Dormir, 6. Morir , to die ; Duermo, I sleep. Duermes, thou sleepest. Duerme, he sleeps. Dormimos, we sleep. Dormis, you sleep. Duermen, they sleep. durmiendo, muriendo, dying ; Mnero, I die. Mueres, thou diest. Muere, he dies. Morimos, we die. Moris, you dit. Mueren, they die. dormido, slept. muerto, dead. 7. Pedir, to ask for ; pidiendo, asking for ; pedido, asked for. 8 Medir, to measure ; midiendo, measuring ; medido, measured. Pido, I ask for. Mido, I measure. Pides, thou askestfor. Mides, thou measurest. Pide, he asks for. Mide, he measures. Pedimos, we ask for. Medimos, we measure. Pedis, you ask for. Medis, you measure. Piden, they ask for. Miden, they measure. 9. Venir, to come ; 10. Decir, to say, to tell ; Vengo, I come. Vienes, thou comest. Viene, he comes. Venimos, we come. Venis, you come. Vienen, they come. 11. Salir, to go out ; 12. Ir, to go ; Salgo, / go out. Sales, thou goest out. Sale, he goes out. Salimos, we go out. Salis, you go out. Salen, they go out. viniendo, coming ; venido, come. diciendo, saying ; dicho, said. Digo, I say. Dices, thou sayest. Dice, he says. Decimos, we say. Decis, you say. Dicen, they say. saliendo, going out ; yendo, going salido, gone out. ido, gone. Voy, I go. Vas, thou goest. Va, he goes. Vamos, we go. Vais, you go. Van, they go. IRREGULAR VERBS. 195 13. Oir, to hear ; Oigo, I hear. Oyes, thou hearest. Oye, he hears. Vocabularlo. oyendo, hearing ; Oimos, we hear. Ois, you hear. Oyen, they hear. oido, heard. El canto, the singing. El cuento, the tale. El estudiante, the student. La aventura, the adventure. Indiferente, indifferent. Por cierto, certainly. Telemaco, Telemachus. Aborrecer, 2. to hate. Bendecir, 3. to bless. Cantar, 1. to sing. Complacer, 2. to please. Conducir, 3. to conduct, to take. Desde que, since. Diver tir, 3. to amuse. Vocabulary. Dormir, 3. to sleep. Esperar, 1. to wait, to hope. Ganar, 1. to earn. Ir, 3. to go. Mantener, 2. to support. Medir, 3. to measure. Morir, 3. to die. Oir, 3. to hear. Pedir, 3. to ask for. Podrir, 3. to rot. Provenir, 3. to come from (to origi- nate). Kepetir, 3. to repeat. Traducir, 3. to translate. Exercise 69. 1. i A que bora sale V. todos los dias 1 2. Salgo generalmente a las diez 6 a las diez y media. 3. i Que dice este hombre ? 4. No se lo que dice, babla aleraan. 5. [ Que libro traducen VV. del francos al espanol 1 6. Traducimos las averituras de Telemaco. 7. Va V. al concierto esta noche 1 8. No, senor, voy al teatro. 9. [, Donde esta Juan 1 10. Todavia esta durmiendo. 11. [ Oye V. lo que digo ? 12. Oigo muy bien, pero no puedo hacer lo que V. quiere, porque tengo que salir abora mismo (this very minute). 13. A donde van estos muchacbos ? 14. Van a la escuela. 15. [ Quiere V. ir por pan ? 16. Si, senor, quiero ir. 17. Los estudiantes van cantando por las calles. 18. Todas las manzanas que V. ha comprado, estan podridas. 19. i Como puede V. decir tal cosa ? 20. Lo digo porque lo se. 21. [ A donde conduce V. a este muchacbo ? 22. Le conduzco a casa de su tio. 23. [ Cuanto pide V. por este caballo 1 24. No pido sino lo que vale. 25. El viejo Andres nos divierte todas las nocbes con sus cuentos. 26. Dice el medico que mueren mucbos ninos en este mes. 27. [ Duerme V. 1 28. No, senor, no duernio, oigo todo lo que V. dice. 29. [ Ha medido V. el pano 1 30. Voy a medirlo abora. 31. i Porque aborrece V. a este hombre ? 32. Yo no le aborrezco, el me es indiferente. 33. [ Porque no me obedece V. "? 34. Yo le L96 LESSON 35. obedezco a V>, y hago todo lo que puedo para complacerle a V. 35. Este pobre hombre no puede mantener a su familia con lo que gana. 36. Yo mantengo a mis hermanitas desde que mi padre ha niuerto. Exercise 70. 1. How do you sleep now ? 2. I sleep much better, thank you. 3. What does your mother tell your brother ? 4. She tells him that he cannot go out without a hat. 5. Do you hear the music from here 1 6. We hear the music and the singing from our room. 7. What do you wish to-day 1 8. I have come to (a) see if you need any- thing. 9. Yes ; I need coffee, sugar, and tea. 10. Do you ( pi.) go to (the) church every Sunday ? 11. We go twice on (los) Sundays, and also sometimes in the week. 12. Do you go out to-day ? 13. I never go out when it rains. 14. Why don't you measure the cloth ? 15. I have measured it already. 16. Who takes your little sister to school ? 17. I take her sometimes, but she generally goes (goes generally) alone. 18. Why don't you ask that man for your money ? 19. He says that he has no money now, and that I must wait till next month. 20. Will you go for some bread for me 1 21. I cannot go now ; will you wait a few minutes ? 22. Certainly, you may go in a half hour if you wish. 23. Are the children still sleeping ? 24. Yes, they are all sleeping yet. 25. Why don't you tell (to) your tailor that you cannot pay him now ? 26. Who says that I cannot pay him ? I can, but I will not, because he owes money to my brother and will not pay him. 27. Can you translate this ? 28. I don't translate very well yet. 29. Will you repeat what he has said ] 30. Why don't you repeat it yourself? 31. I don't understand German. 32. Where does it come from ? 33. It conies from the old house. 34. The father blesses his children. 35. I am going this evening to the city, but I don't know yet if my friends can go with me. Gramatica. Grammar. 1, The following verbs conjugated like sentir, to feel, and divertir, to amuse, whose stem vowel is e, have in the present of the indicative the same irregularities as the verb empezar (p. 187, 2), to begin, of the 1st conjugation, that is, they insert an i before the e in the 1st, 2d, and 3d persons singular, and in the 3d person plural of said tense : IRREGULAR VERBS. 197 Adherir, to adhere. Desmentir, to belie. Mentir, to lie. Adquirir, to acquire. Diferir, to differ. Pervertir, to pervert. Advertir, to notice. Digerir, to digest. Preferir, to prefer. Arrepentirse (reflex. ) to repent. Disentir, to dissent. Presentir, to foresee. Asentir, to consent. Divertir, to amuse. Proferir, to utter. Conferir, to confer. Herir, to wound. Referir, to refer. Consentir, to consent. Hervir, to boil. Requerir, to notify. Convertir, to convert. Inferir, to infer. Sugerir, to suggest. Deferir, to defer. Ingerir, to interfere. Trasferir, to move. OBSERVATION. The same verbs change the e into an i in the Present Participle, as ; sintiendo, feeling ; advirtiendo, noticing ; etc. 2. Pedir, to ask for, and medir, to measure, and the follow- ing verbs whose stem vowel is e, change the e into i in the 1st, 2d, and 3d persons singular, the 3d person plural, and the gerund : Elegir, to elect. Embestir, to attack. Envestir, to invest. Expedir, to forward. Freir, to fry. Gemir, to groan. Impedir, to prevent. Investir, to invest. Perseguir, to pursue. Proseguir, to continue. Regir, to rule. Reir, to laugh. Rendir, to surrender. Renir, to fight, to scold. Repetir, to repeat. Seguir, to follow. Servir, to serve. Sonreir, to smile. Tenir, to dye. Vestir, to dress. Cenir, to gird. Colegir, to collect. Competir, to compete. Concebir, to conceive. Conseguir, to obtain. Constrenir, to force. Corregir, to correct. Derretir, to melt. Deservir, to harm. Despedir, to dismiss. Destenir, to discolor. 3. Dormir, to sleep, and morir, to die, change the o of the stem into ne in the same cases as the verb almorzar (p. 187 2) of the 1st conjugation. The o is also changed into a U in the gerund : Durmiendo, sleeping. Muriendo, dying. ! Verbs ending in ucir, like conducir, to conduct, to take ; lucir, to shine, etc., have in the present of the indicative the same irregularity as the verbs of the 2d conjugation ending in acer, ecer, and ocer (p. 192 3), that is, they insert a Z before the c in the first person singular of said tense : Conduzco, I conduct. Luzco, I shine. 198 LESSON 35. 5. The following verbs are conjugated like venir, to come, oi which they are compounds : A venir, to happen. Provenir, to originate. Contravenir, to transgress. Reconvenir, to charge. Convenir, to agree. Revenirse, to return. Desconvenir, to disagree. Sobrevenir, to come between. Desaveriir, to disagree. Subvenir, to aid. Intervenir, to interfere. Supervenir, to supervene. Pre venir, to arrange beforehand. OBSERVATION. Venir por means to come for , to fetch. 6. The following compounds of decir have the same irregu- larities in the present indicative as has the simple verb : Antedecir, to predict. Interdecir, to interdict. Ben decir, to bless. Maldecir, to curse. Contradecir, to contradict. Predecir, to foretell. Desdecir, to retract. Rebendecir, to bless again. Entredecir, to prohibit. 7. Although the meaning of ir is to go, this verb accom- panied by an adverb corresponds also to the verb andar, to walk : Voy despacio, I walk slowly. Voy deprisa, / walk quickly. OBSERVATION. When accompanied by the preposition por the verb ir is used instead of buscar, to fetch : 'Voy por pan, I go for bread, I fetch bread. 8t The verb asir, to seize, makes asgo in the 1st person sin- gular of the present of the indicative, but this verb is hardly ever used, except metaphorically. 9. The verb podrir, to rot, of which the present of the indicative is : Pudro; / rot. Podrimos, we rot. Pud res, thou r attest. Podris, you rot. Pudre, he rots. Pudren, they rot. and the gerund pudriendo, rotting, is hardly ever used except in the infinitive and the past participle podrido, rotten. The regular verb pudrir has taken its place in all other cases. THE IMPERFECT TENSE, INDICATIVE MOOD. 19P Leecion XXXVI. Lesson XXXVI. THE IMPERFECT TENSE, INDICATIVE MOOD. The imperfect indicative is formed by adding the following terminations to the stem of the verbs : For the 1st Conjugation : -aba abas -aba -abamos -abais -aban For the 2d and 3d Conjugations: -ia las la -iamos -fais -fan NOTE. The verbs ser, 2. to be, ver, 2. to see, and ir, 3. to go, are the only verbs that form an exception to the rule, which refers to all other regular and irregular verbs. 1st Conjugation. Habl-aba, / spoke or / was speaking. Habl-abas, thou spokest or thou wast speaking. Habl-aba, he spoke or he was speaking. Habl- abamos, we spoke or we were speaking. Habl- abais, you spoke or you were speaking. Habl-aban, they spoke or they were speaking. 2d Conjugation. Vend-ia, / sold or / was selling. Vend-ias, thou soldest or thou wast selling. Vend-ia, he sold or he was selling. Vend-iamos, we sold or we were selling. Vend-iais, you sold or you were selling. Vend-ian, they sold or they were selling. 3d Conjugation. Ven-ia, / came or / was coming. Ven-ias, thou earnest or thou wast coming. Ven-ia, he came or he was coming. Ven -iamos, we came or we were coming. Ven-iais, you came or you were coming. Ven-iau, they came or they were coming. 200 1. Iba, Ibas Iba, Ibais, Iban, 2. Vei'a, Veias, Veia, Veiamos, Veiais, Veian, 3. Era, Eras, Era, frames, Erais, Eran, LESSON 36. Exceptions. I went or / was going. thou wentest or thou wast going, he went or he was going. we went or we were going. you went or you were going. they went or they were going. thou sawest or thou wast seeing, he saw or he was seeing, we saw or we were seeing, you saw or you were seeing. I was. thou wast, he was. we were, you were, they were. Vocabulario. Vocabulary. El enemigo, the enemy. El escritorio, the office. El modo, the way. El negocio, the business. El oso, the bear. El paraguas, the umbrella. El tiempo, the time. La elegancia, La fortaleza. the fortress. La limonada, the lemonade. La luz, the light. La puerta, the door. Caro, dear. Diferente, different. Creer, 2. to believe. Entrar, 1. to enter. Gastar, 1. to spend. Llamar, 1. to call. Llegar, 1. to arrive. Mandar, 1. to send. Mirar, 1. to look at. Ocupar, 1. to occupy. Tocar, 1. to play on. Vestir, 3. to dress. Exercise 71. 1. Yo sabia que su bermano de V. estaba malo la semana pasada, pero yo creia que el estaba bueno abora. 2. Estaba V. en Francia en aquel tiempo ? 3. Si, seiior, yo estaba alii desde dos anos. 4. Que hacia V. entonces ? 5. Yo estudiaba para ser medico. 6. Como estaban vestidas las dos senoras ? 7. Estaban vestidas con mucha elegancia. 8. Yo no sabia lo que querian estos bombres. 9. Querian entrar en la casa para robar. 10. Hablabamos muy bien el frances cuando eramos jovenes. 11. [ Que hacia su hermano de V. cuando IMPERFECT TENSE, INDICATIVE MOOD. 201 estaba en Inglaterra 1 12. No hacfa nada, pero gastaba mucho dinero. 13. [ Cudnto recibia por mes 1 14. Mi padre le mandaba doscientos duros todos los meses. 15. i Que estaban VV. mirando en la calle ? 16. Estabamos mirando a un hombre que hacfa bailar un oso. 17. i Que le decia a V. aquella senora ? 18. Me decia que esperaba a su marido y a sus hijos esta noche. 19. (A quien conocian VV. en aquella ciudad ? 20. No conociamos d nadie. 21. i Que querian estos caballeros ? 22. Querian verle a V. 23. Juan queria comprar mi caballito, pero no tenia bastante dinero. 24. i A que bora iba V. a casa del medico ? 25. Yo iba todas las maiianas a las diez y media. 26. i A quie*n veia V. en su casa ? 27. Yo veia a su senora y a sus hijos. 28. [ Que vendia aquella mujer ? 29. Ella vendia muy buenas peras. 30. j A quien daba V. todo su dinero ? 31. Yo no lo daba a nadie, yo lo prestaba a mi primo que hacia muy buenos negocios. 32. Nuestros soldados ocupaban todas las fortalezas del enemigo. 33. i A qu hora almorzaban VV. ? 34. Almorzdbamos muy tem- prano, pero comiamos muy tarde. Exercise 72. 1. Who was the man at the door ? 2. It was not a man, it was a little boy. 3. What did he want ? 4. He wished to know if Mr. Charles Marti lived in this house, as (pues) he had a letter for him. 5. Was not the gentleman in his room 1 6. He was there this morn- ing, but he has gone out. 7. Did you not know that my brother had arrived ? 8. I did not know it. 9. Were you acquainted with Mr. Arroyo? 10. I knew him very well when he was young. 11. He was very poor then, but now he is very rich. 12. Why did you not wish to buy that house ? 13. Because it was too dear, and I had not money enough. 14. With whom were you in Paris ? 15. I was there with my mother and sisters. 16. Do you know what Charles was telling me ? 17. I could see that he was speaking to you, but I could not hear a word. 18. He was telling me that he knew who had stolen your umbrella. 19. Where were you going this morning ? 20. I was going to my office ; I go there now very early. 21. To whom were you writing this morning ] 22. I was writing to all my friends. 23. Could you see any one in the house ? 24. I could see no one, because there was no light in the room. 25. Who was play- ing on the piano ? 26. My sisters were playing, and rny brothers were singing. 27. Where were you when I was calling you 1 28. I 202 LESSON 36. was in the garden with the children. 29. My friend used to come every day, but I don't know where he is now. 30. What did you drink when you were sick 2 31. I drank lemonade. Gramatica. Grammar. 1* The use of the imperfect, past definite, and past indefi- nite, which in many cases would have but one form in English, presents one of the greatest difficulties met by those learning the Spanish language. The following rules are calculated to facilitate the task of the student. Practice, reading, and rea- soning must also be depended upon as the best auxiliaries for the correct use of the imperfect tense. 1. The imperfect is used to express an action or event which has already occurred, but which was existing or going on when another action or event took place : 131 estudiaba cuando entraron, He was studying when they entered. 2. This tense is also used to express what was customary or habitual at a certain past time, and in that case may generally be rendered in English by prefixing " used to " to the infinitive mood, as : Cuando viviamos en el campo, estu- When we lived (used to live) in diabainos mucho, the country we studied (used to study) a greed deal. OBSERVATION. We should not use the imperfect, however, in speak- ing of an accidental occurrence: Sin embargo, una vez, jugamos todo Once, however, we played the whole el dia, day. 3. The imperfect is also used to describe the qualities of per- sons or things, and the state, place, or disposition in which they were in past time. This tense may, therefore, be called the descriptive tense of Spanish : Las muchachas estaban vestidas de The girls were dressed in white, and bianco, y teuton flores en los ca- had flowers in their hair. bellos, THE PAST DEFINITE AND INDEFINITE. leccion XXXVII. Lesson XXXVII. THE PAST DEFINITE OR PRETERIT, AND THE PAST INDEFINITE. 1, The terminations of the past definite are the following for most verbs : For the 1st Conjugation, -e -aste -6 -amos -asteis -aron For the 2d and 3d Conjugations, -f -iste -16 -imos -isteis -ieron 1st Conjugation. Hablar, to speak. Habl-e, 1 spoke or / did speak. Habl-aste, thou spokest or thou didst speak. Habl-6, he spoke or he did speak. Habl-amos, we spoke or we did speak. Habl-asteis, you spoke or you did speak. Habl-aron, they spoke or they did speak. Amar, to love. Am-6, / loved or / did love. Am-aste, thou lovedst or thou didst love. Am-6, he loved or he did love. Am-amos, we loved or we did love. Am -asteis, you loved or you did love. Am -aron. they loved or they did love. 2d Conjugation. Vender, to sell. Vend-1, / sold or / did sell. Vend-iste, thou soldest or thou didst selL Vend-i6, he sold or he did sell. Vend-imos, we sold or we did sell. Vend-isteis, you sold or you did sell. Vend -ieron, they sold or they did sell. 204 Com-f, Com-iste, Com -16, Com-imos, Com-isteis, Coin-ieron, LESSON 37. Comer, to eat. I ate o. / did eat. thou atest or thou didst eat. he ate or he did eat. we ate or we did eat. you ate or you did eat. they ate or they did eat. 3d Conjugation. Kecibir, to receive. Recib-1, I received or I did receive. Recib-iste, thou receivedst or thou didst receive. Recib-i6, he received or he did receive. Recib-imos, we received or we did receive. Recib-isteis, you received or you did receive. Recib-ieron, they received or they did receive. Salir, to go out. Sal-i, / went out or / did go out. Sal-iste, thou wentest out or thou didst go out. Sal-i6, he went out or he did go out. Sal-imos, we went out or we did go out. Sal-isteis, you went out or you did go out. Sal-ieron, they went out or they did go out. Past Indefinite. He hablado vendido recibido, / have spoken sold received, etc. etc., Has hablado vendido recibido, thou hast spoken sold received, etc. , etc. Ha hablado vendido recibido, he has spoken sold received, etc. etc., Hemos hablado vendido recib- we have spoken sold received, ido, etc., etc. Habeis hablado vendido recib- you have spoken sold received, ido, etc., etc. Han hablado vendido recibido, they have spoken sold received, etc., etc. THE PAST DEFINITE AND INDEFINITE. 205 Vocabulario. Vocabulary. El bosque, the wood. El embajador, the ambassador. El enemigo, the enemy. El Iadr6n, the thief. El lugar, the place. El veneno, the poison. La deuda, the debt. La fonda, the hotel. La posteridad, the posterity. Cansado, tired. Colon, Columbus. Dios, m., God. Romano, Roman. Abrir, 3. to open. Aconsejar, to advise. Andar, 1. to walk. Asegurar, 1. to assure. Comprender, 2. to understand. Derrotar, 1. to defeat. Entrar, 1. to enter. Esperar, 1. to expect. Ofrecer, 2. to offer. Pelear, 1. to fight. Perder, 2. to lose. Preguntar, 1. to ask. Presentar, 1. to introduce. Promoter, 2. to promise. Besponder, 2. to answer. Salir, 3. to leave, to go out. Veneer, 2. to conquer. Exercise 73. 1. Don Juan me pregunto si Y. estaba en su cuarto. 2. respondio Y. ] 3. Respondi que yo no sabia, pero que el podia subir a ver. 4. El general presento los oficiales al principe. 5. Mi padre vendi6 su casa al tio de Y. 6. [ Sabe Y. lo que pago por ella ? 7. Pago mucho menos de lo que valia. 8. [ Cuanto dinero recibieron VY. 1 9. Recibimos como trescientos duros. 10. Dios prometio a Abrahan una grande posteridad. 11. [ Conoce Y. a este caballero ? 12. Le he conocido en Paris. 13. [ Cuando vio Y. a Carlito ? 14. Le vi el mes pasado en Boston donde estaba con su padre. 15. [A qu^ hora comieron YY. aver ? 16. Comimos a la misma hora que los otros dias. 17. [ Con quien hablo Y. en el escritorio ? 18. Hable con el dependiente del banquero. 19. [ Han escrito YY. sus cartas ? 20. Las escribimos anoche ; i sabe Y. si ha salido el vapor ? 21. Salio ' ayer a las cuatro de la tarde. 22. [ Quie*n bebio el vino ? 23. Yo no se quien bebio el vino, pero se muy bien quien comio los bollos. 24. Los enemigos perdieron diez mil hombres en aquella batalla. 25. Jose (Joseph) me aseguro que el habia pagado todas sus deudas, pero yo le respondi que no lo creia. 26. Cuando Anibal vi6 a los einbaj adores romanos, tomo veneno. 27. El enfermo queria salir esta manana, pero el medico no lo permitio. 28. Los muchachos abrieron la puerta del jardm y entraron en el. 29. Colon descubrid la America en el afio 1492. 30. El pobre Felipe perdio todo su dinero 206 LESSON 37. en aquella especulacion. 31. Los ladrones entraron en aquella casa y robarori todo lo que hallaron. 32. Trabajamos muchisimo hoy, y estamos muy cansados. 33. $A quien vieron VV. en el teatro? 34. Vimos a todos nuestros amigos. 35. Los Romanes vencieron a todas las naciones del mundo. Exercise 74. 1. Why did you not write to yon? brother ? 2. I wrote to him but he did not answer me. 3. Did you see Mr. Martin ? 4. I did not see him, I was not in the city when he was here. 5. The general lost the battle, but his soldiers fought with much courage. 6. Have you studied your lessons ? 7. We studied them last night. 8. Did you go out with your sister when she was here ? 9. We went out every day. 10. Who took my book ? 11. Nobody took it ; it is in the same place yet. 12. Did you receive what you were expecting ? 13. We have not received anything yet. 14. Did you understand that man ? 15. I understood everything, although he spoke French. 16. Did you ever study French ? 17. I spoke it very well when I was younger. 18. Did your brother sell his horses 1 19. He sold two of them, and he sent the other to the country. 20. Why did he not lend it to you ? 21. Because I have a horse myself. 22. Why did not your sister dance at the ball 1 23. Because she was not very well, and she only stayed (se quedd) half an hour. 24. Does she know how to dance 1 25. She learned all the new dances during the win- ter. 26. The thieves killed a poor man in the forest. 27. Our soldiers defeated the enemy and took their principal cities. 28. That little boy ate too much last night ; and to-day he is sick. 29. My brother saw your mother when he was in England ; did she reside a long time in that country 1 30. She resided there for two years. 31. The man killed the dog because he bit his little boy. 32 Where did you breakfast this morning ? 33. I breakfasted in the French hotel where you saw me last week. 34. Did you drink anything at his house ? 35. He did not offer us anything. Gramatica. Grammar. 1, The past definite or preterit and the past indefinite are used in all those cases of past time where the imperfect cannot THE PAST DEFINITE AND INDEFINITE. 207 be used. The preterit, however, is used more especially to ex- press an action which took place but once, and when the time at which the action took place has entirely elapsed. The preterit is, therefore, especially used in narrative style, and is also designated as the preterito historico : Pedro el Cruel no respeto las leyes, Peter the Cruel did not respect the y se porto mal con sus aliados. laws, and acted dishonorably towards his allies. 2 The preterit may, however, be used when there is con- tinuation of time ; but, in this case, the action must have taken place at a remote period, and the time must be designated : Roma fue por mas de dos siglos la Rome was for more than two centu- senora del orbe, ries the mistress of the world. 3. The same tense is also very often used to express cus- tomary and repeated actions or qualities, when it is intended to express the time rather than the action. When we say : Napoleon, era (imperf. ) gran, guerrero, Napoleon was a great warrior , we express the quality, but when we say : Napole6n fue (preterit) gran guerrero, we think of tbe time in whicb he was living. 4, The preterit may be rendered in English according to the meaning of the sentence by its corresponding form, or by the auxiliary did, which lias no equivalent in Spanish : Comimos ayer en su casa, We dined yesterday at Ms house. No sail anoche, / did not go out last night. 5. The past indefinite is used to express a past action when the time at which it took place belongs to a period of time (day, week, month, year, etc.) not entirely elapsed : Hoy he estado en la iglesia, I have been to church to-day. No he ido al teatro este ano, I have not been to the theater this year. 6, The past indefinite is also used to express an action but lately performed : He leido los papelas, I have read the papers. 208 LESSON 37. It is furthermore used to express the successes or merits of a person when we wish to give more expression to the sentence : Napoleon ha conquistado en poco Napoleon (has) conquered in a short tiempo Italia y Alemania, time Italy and Germany. 7 General Observations on the imperfect, preterit) and past indefinite. The imperfect can seldom be rendered in English by the past tense which takes did as an auxiliary except when in interrogative sentences did is used as an auxiliary to used to, either expressed or understood. The preterit never corresponds like the imperfect to the English imper- fect, composed of the auxiliary and the gerund, nor can it be rendered by a verb preceded by used to. The three tenses above mentioned offer in their application a certain difficulty, as they are sometimes obligatory, and sometimes optional; or, in other words, their use is sometimes a question of grammar, and sometimes only a question of style. When several sentences concur to the same end, as in the following nar- rative, it is not always an easy matter to determine whether the student should use the imperfect or another tense, the preterit for instance, as he has to take into consideration not only the special shade of meaning of each verb, but also the general tenor of the other sentences forming the whole of the narration. As already stated, the imperfect is used as a descriptive tense, while the preterit is only used as a narrative tense. All the imperfects of the following Spanish translation are printed in italics. Era poco mas de mediodia cuando It was a little more than midday entraron los Espanoles en su alo- when the Spaniards entered their jamiento, y hallaron prevenido un lodgings, and found a delicate banquete regalado y esplendido and splendid banquet prepared for para Cortes y los cabos de su Cortes and the captains of his ejercito, con grande abundancia army, and at the same time a de bastimentos menos delicados great abundance of less delicate para el resto de la gente, y mu- provisions for the remainder of chos Indios de servicio que su- the people, while many Indians, ministraban los man j ares y las attending to the service, brought iv, bebidas con igual silencio y pun- the eatables and beverages with tualidad. Por la tarde vino Mon- equal silence and punctuality. IRREGULARITIES OF THE PRETERIT. 209 tezuma con la misma pom pa y acorapanamiento, a visitar a Cortes, que, avisado poco antes, salio a recibirle hasta el patio principal, con todo el obsequio debido a semejante favor. Acom- panole hasta la puerta de su cuarto, donde le hizo una profunda reverencia, y el paso a tomar su asiento con despejo y gravedad. Man do luego que acercasen otro a Cortes: hizo sena para que se apartasen a la pared los caballeros que andaban cerca de su persona, y Cortes advirtio lo mismo a los capitanes que le asistian. Llegaron los interpretes, y cuando se prevenia Cortes para dar prin- cipio a su oracion, le detuvo Mote- zuma, dando a entender que tenta q>:e hablar antes de oir, y se refiere as soon as. Pluperfect. Habia hablado, / had spoken. Habias hablado, thou hadst spoken. Habia hablado, he had spoken. Habiamos hablado, we had spoken. Habiais hablado, you had spoken. Habian hablado, they had spoken. Vocabulary. Tan pronto coxno, ^ Luego que, Asi que, Al punto que, ) Ya, already. Comer, 2. to dine. Consultar, 1. to consult. Contener, 2. to contain. Entregar, 1. to hand. Llevar, 1. to take. Merecer, 2, to deserve. Montar, 1. to mount. Olvidar, 1. to forget. Pronunciar, 1. to pronounce. Toxnar, 1. to take. Visitar, 1. to visit. Exercise 77. 1. i Que hizo V. cuando hubo almorzado ? 2. Tan pronto como hube almorzado, volvi a mi escritorio. 3. Asi que me hubo visto, me did el dinero. 4. Apenas me hubo dicho estas palabras, cuando salid. 5. Luego que hubo leido la carta, montd a caballo y salid de la ciudad. 6. [ Ddnde habia olvidado V. su bastdn ? 7. Yo no habia olvidado mi bastdn, habia olvidado mi paraguas, lo que era peor, pues comenzd a Hover muchisimo. 8. Cuando hubo visitado la casa, dijo que no queria comprarla. 9. Yo habia salido cuando entraron los ladrones en mi cuarto. 10. Cuando hubieron abierto la puerta, 216 LESSON 39. vieron que no habia nada que robar. 11. Guillermo no habia apren- dido su leccidn, y habia sido castigado como lo merecia. 12. Despues que hubo visto a su amigo, estuvo ma's satisfecho. 13. i Habia re- cibido su padre la carta cuando salid ? 14. Aiin no la habia recibido. 15. Cuando hubo comido, tomd su sombrero y dijo que tenia que salir. 16. Me entregd el dinero tan pronto como lo hubo recibido. 17. Cuando hubo vendido su casa, compro otra mas grande. 18. Cuando le hube dicho mi nombre, me recibid con la mayor urbariidad. 19. Al punto que me hubo visto, rne saludo muy cor- tesmente. 20. Me presto el libro asi que le hube dado otro. 21. Despues que hubo llegado, me escribid una carta muy amistosa. 22. Luego que hubo muerto el general, vendieron los herederos la casa. 23. Ya habia yo leido la carta cuando llegd mi hermano. 24. i Habia hablado V. al medico? 25. Si, yo le habia consultado varias voces. Exercise 78. 1. When he had said what he had to say, he left (sali6 de) the house. 2. As soon as the father had read what the letter of his son contained, he handed it to me. 3. Hardly had he said that when his friend entered. 4. What did you do when you had dined ? 5. I went to my friend's, who took me to the theater. 6. When I had written my letters I went out. 7. As soon as I had finished my work I gave it to him. 8. After he had visited the city he returned to the country. 9. We had hardly breakfasted when we heard the news. 10. Had you seen my lawyer? 11. I had seen yours and mine. 12. The children had told me that you had gone out. 13. I wished to go out, but I had no umbrella and it was raining. 14. When they heard that I had received good news they all came to (a) see me. 15. When they had read the newspapers they wrote their letters. 16. After they had seen our house they wished to buy it, but my father would not sell it. 17. The steamers had arrived, but we had not received any letters. 18. The father had died without seeing (ver) his sons. 19. Why had you opened the door 1 20. Be- cause I was too warm with the door closed. 21. Mr. Martin had not arrived this morning when I was at his house. 22. Had you not heard that he was yet in Boston ? 23. I had not heard anything. 24. To whom had you spoken ? 25. I had spoken to the servants. THE PAST ANTERIOR AND THE PLUPERFECT. 217 Gramatica. Grammar. 1, The past anterior is formed from the preterit of the auxiliary haber, to have, and the past participle of the verb ; while the pluperfect of the indicative is composed of the imper- fect indicative of the same auxiliary, and the past participle of the verb : Cuando hube reconocido (past ante- When I had perceived my error, I rior) mi error, me avergonze de lo was ashamed of what I had que habia hecho (pluperfect). done. 2 The past anterior generally expresses that an action took place immediately before another past action or event. This tense is principally used after one of the conjunctions ; despues que, after; luego que, asi que, al memento que, al punto que, as soon as; apenas, hardly, scarcely, no sooner. Despues que asi que cuando After as soon as when he had hubo comido, salio, dined, he went out. Se embarco luego que hubo recibido He embarked as soon as he had re- el pasaporte, ceived the passport. OBSERVATIONS. 1. As seen by the examples given, the verb of the principal sentence must be in the preterit when the tense of the subordi- nate sentence is in the anterior. 2. The conjunctions and conjunctive locutions above given do not neces- sarily require the verb to be put in the past anterior tense ; they may be frequently used with other tenses : Asi que hemos comido, vamos a pa- As soon as we have dined we go and sear, take a walk. Apenas tuvo el dinero cuando me He hardly had the money when he pago, paid me. 3, The pluperfect marks an action or event not only as past in itself, but also past with regard to some other past action or event : Habiamos pensado que V. vendria We had thought that you would temprano, come early. OBSERVATION. Nearly all the rules given for the imperfect may be applied to the pluperfect. 218 LESSON 40. Leccion XL. Lesson XL* THE FUTURE AND FUTURE ANTERIOR. Regular Verbs. 1st Conjuqation. j j Amar, to love. Hablar, to speak. Amar-e, I shall or will love. Hablar- e, I shall or will speak. Amar-ds, thou shalt or wilt love. Hablar-a"s, thou shalt or wilt speak. Amar-d, he shall or will love. Hablar-6, he shall or will speak. Amar-emos, we shall or will love. Hablar-emos, we shall or will speak. Amar-eis, you shall or will love. Hablar-eis, you shall or will speak. Amar-an, they shall or will love. Hablar-an, they shall or will speak. 2d Conjugation. Comer, to eat. Beber, to drink. Coiner-e, I shall or will eat. Beber-e, I shall or will drink. Comer-as, thou shalt or wilt eat. Beber-as, thou shalt or wilt drink. Comer-a, he shall or will eat. Beber-d, he shall or will drink. Comer-emos, we shall or will eat. Beber-emos, we shall or will drink. Comer-e'is, you shall or will eat. Beber-6is, you shall or will drink. Comer-an, they shall or will eat. Beber-a"n, they shall or will drink. 3d Conjugation. Eecibir, to receive. Partir, to depart. Reeibir-e, / shall or will receive. Partir-e, / shall or will depart. Recibir-a"s, thou shalt or wilt receive. Partir-a"s, thou shalt or wilt depart. Recibir-a", he shall or will receive. Partir-d, he shall or will depart. Recibir-emos, we shall or will receive. Partir-emos, we shall or will depart Recibir-6is, yon shall or will receive. Partir-eis, you shall or will depart. Recibir-a"n, they shall or win receive. Partir-&n, they shall or will depart. Irregular Features. 1. Hacer, 2. to do, to make. 2. Poder, 2. to be able. Hare, / shall or will do. Podr, / shall or will be able. Haras, thou shalt or wilt do. Podras, thou shalt or wilt be able. Hard, he shall or will do. Podra, he shall or wi?l be able. Haremos, we shall or will do. Podremos, we shall or will be able, Hareis, you shall or will do. Podreis, you shall or will be able. Haran, they shall or will do. Podvdn, they shall or will be able. THE FUTURE AND FUTURE ANTERIOR. 219 3. Poner, 2. to put. Poudre, / shall or will put. Pondras, thou shall or wilt put. Pondra, he shall or will put. Pondremos, we shall or will put. Pondreis, you shall or will put. Pondran, they shall or will put. 5. Saber, 2. to know. Sabre, I shall or will know. Sabras, thou shalt or wilt know. Sabra, he shall or will know. Sabremos, we shall or will know. Sabreis, you shall or will know. Sabran, they shall or will know. 7. Venir, 3. to come. Vendre, / shall or will come. Vendras, thou shalt or wilt come. Vendra, lie shall or will come, Vendremos, we shall or will come. Vendreis, you shall or will come. Vendran, they shall or will come. 9 Salir, 3. to go out. Saldre, / shall or will go out. Saldras, thou shalt or wilt go out. Saldra, he shall or will go out. Saldremos, we shall or will go out. Saldreis, you shall or will go out. Saldran, they shall or will go out. 11. Tener, 2. to have. Tendre, / shall or will have. Tendras, thou shalt or wilt have. Tendra, he shall or will have. Tendreinos, we shall or will have. Tendreis, you shall or will have. Tendran, they shall or will have. 4. Querer, 2. to wish, to be willing. Querre, / shall or will wish. Querras, thou shalt or wilt wish. Querra, he shall or will wish. Querreinos, we shall or will wish. Querreis, you shall or will wish. Querrau, they shall or will wish. 6. Valer, 2. to be worth. Valdre, I shall or will be worth. Valdras, thou shalt or wilt be worth. Valdra, he shall or will be worth. Valdremos, we shall or will be worth. Valdreis, you shall or will be worth. Valdran, they shall or will be worth. 8. Decir, 3. to say, to tell. Dire, / shall or will say. Diras, thou shalt or wilt say. Dira, he shall or will say. Diremos, we shall or will say. Direis, you shall or will say. Diran, they shall or will say. 10. Caber, to be contained. Cabre, / shall be contained. Cabras, thou shalt or wilt be contained. Cabra, he shall or will be contained. Cabremos, we shall oTwill be contained. Cabreis, you shall or will be contained. Cabran, they shall or will be contained. 12. Haber, 2. to have. Habre, / shall or will have. Habras, thou shalt or wilt have. Habra, he shall or will have. Habremos, we shall or will have, Habreis, you shall or will have. Habran, they shall or will have. NOTE. The verb ir, 3. to go, although one of the most irregular verbs in Spanish, forms its future regularly. 220 LESSON 40. Vocabulario. Vocabulary. El merito, the merit. El negocio, the business. La procesion, the procession. Asi que, so that. Junio, m., June. Kecesario, necessary. Pronto, soon. Segtin, according to. Siempre, always. Acabar, 1. to finish. Asegurar, 1. to assure. Enriquecer, 2. to enrich. Exercise 79. Pasar, 1. to pass. Pensar, 1. to think. Perdonar, 1. to for give Prometer,2. topromise. Tratar, 1. to treat. Veneer, 2. to conquer. 1. i Cuando vendra V. a vernos ? 2. Iremos un dia de estos, cuando no estemos tan ocupados. 3. Corno lo sabra V. ? 4. Mi herniano me lo dira. 5. Vere muy pronto si V. sabra sus lecciones. 6. Le aseguro a V. que las sabre. 7. El panadero vino esta manana y dijo que no podra volver hoy. 8. j Cuando tendra V. el dinero ? 9. Lo tendre esta tarde. 10. j A quo* hora comeremos hoy ] 11. Come- remos muy temprano. 12. [ Cuando habra acabado Y. su trabajo 1 13. Lo habre acabado manana por la manana. 14. [ Que bebera V.? 15. Bebere agua si V. no tiene vino. 16. Hoy recibiremos todo lo que necesitamos. 17. [Que haran VV. si no tienen dinero 1 18. Haremos lo que siempre hemos hecho. 19. Vendra su her- niano de V. hoy? 20. Vendra si tiene tiempo. 21. [Que dira su padre si sabe esto ? 22. Dira que V. ha hecho muy mal en no con- sultarle. 23. j Cuando saldran los muchachos ? 24. No saldran hoy, pues el tiempo esta malisimo. 25. [ No ira V. al concierto de la senorita Abel 1 26. No podre ir, pues no estare en la ciudad. 27. Dios nos tratara segiin nuestros meritos. 28. V. no habra acabado su trabajo manana, porque V. no trabaja bastante ; y yo habre acabado el mio, porque trabajo sin perder (losing) un momento. 29. j Cree V. que Juan hara lo que le he dicho ? 30. El no querra hacerlo. 31. Mis hermanas ban ido al campo, pero volveran la semana que viene. 32. Espero que mi amigo me perdonara. 33. V. podra salir tan pronto como habra acabado lo que tiene que hacer. 34. Que diran VV a estos hombres '? 35. No les hablaremos. Exercise 80. 1. When will you receive letters from your family ? 2. I shall re- ceive one to-morrow. 3. This business will enrich us all. 4. Will you write to me 1 5. 1 will write to you every week. 6. When will you go out with the children 1 7. I will go out this afternoon THE FUTURE AND FUTURE ANTERIOR. 221 8. They will conquer or die. 9. Will you be able to do it without me ^ 10. I don't know if I shall be able to do it. 11. How much money will you give to your brother ? 12. I will give him enough for his journey. 13. Will it be necessary to tell him anything ? 14. It will be better (valdrd mds) not to say anything. 15. If we go to his house, he will treat us well. 16. Do you think that I shall be able to speak Spanish in two years ? 17. You will speak pretty well, if you are will- ing to study. 18. When will the procession pass 1 19. It will pass at three o'clock. 20. I will go and (a) see them as soon as I shall have finished this work. 21. If we go out now, our teacher will see us. 22. When will your cousin go to the country ? 23. He will go in the month of June. 24. When will you send me the book that you promised me ? 25. I will send it to you to-morrow morning. 26. Shall you be at home this afternoon ? 27. Yes, sir, I shall be (there). 28. My friend has not received any letter, so that he will not be able to tell you anything. 29. Will it be necessary to go to your house this evening 1 30. It will not be necessary. 31. How much money shall you receive? 32. I don't know how much I shall receive. 33. Have the boys finished their lessons ? 34. They will soon have done (finished). 35. I know what he has said, but I shall not say a word. Gramatica. Grammar. 1. The future of regular verbs is regularly formed by adding to the present infinitive the following terminations: -e -as -a -emos -eis -an The termination of the future is the same for all verbs, whether regular or irregular, the stem alone being changed foi the latter. 2. The verb satisfacer, 2. to satisfy, is conjugated like hacer, 2. to do, to make; the f being, however, preserved through the conjugation: satisfago, I satisfy, satisfare, I shall or will satisfy, etc. 3. Caber, 2. to contain, to be contained, has the same irregu- larity as poder, 2. to be able, and makes cabre, etc., in the future. 222 LESSON 40. 4, All the other verbs which form their future irregularly, have been given above. Their derivatives are conjugated in the same way. Thus : componer, 2. to mend, deponer, 2. to lay down, dis- poner, 2. to dispose, oponer, 2. to oppose, etc., are conjugated in the future like poner, 2. to put. Contener, 2. to contain, detener, 2. to detain, obtener, 2. to obtain, etc., are conjugated like tener, 2. to have. Equi valer, 2. to be equivalent, is conjugated like valer, 2. to be worth. OBSERVATION. Valer ma's, lit. : to be worth more, is often rendered in English by to be better. Avenir, 3. to happen, convenir, 3. to agree, intervenir, 3. to interfere, etc., form their future like venir, 3. to come. Predecir, 3. to foretell, contradecir, 3. to contradict, desdecir, 3. to deny, form their future like decir, 3. to say, to tell. Bendecir, 3. to bless, and maldecir, 3. to curse, of which the past participle is bendecido (or bendito), and also maldito, form, however, their future regularly : Bendecire*, I shall or will bless. Bendeciremos, we shall or will bless. Bendeciras, thou shall or wilt bless. Bendecireis, you shall or will bless. Bendecira, he shall or will bless. Bendeciran, they shall or will bless. 5* The future is often used in Spanish instead of the im- perative : Iras a la plaza y compraras un polio, Go to the market and buy a chicken. 6. The future anterior is formed from the past participle of the verb conjugated with the future of the auxiliary haber, to have ; Habre acabado esta noehe, i shall have finished to-night. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 223 Lecclon ILL Lesson ILL SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. It The present subjunctive is formed by adding the follow ing endings to the stein of the first person present indicative : For the 1st Conjugation. For the 2d and 3d Conjugations. 6 -emos -a -amos es -eis -as -ais -e -en -a -an 1st Conjugation. Hablar, to speak. Que yo habl-e, that I may speak. Que tii habl-es, that thou mayest speak. Que el habl-e, that he may speak. Que nosotros habl-emos, that we may speak. Que vosotros habl-eis, that you may speak. Que ellos habl-en, that they may speak. 2d Conjugation. Vender, to sell. Que yo vend-a, that I may sett. Que tii vend-as, that thou mayest sell. Que el vend-a, that he may sell. Que nosotros vend-amos, that we may sell. Que vosotros vend-als, that you may sell. Que elloa vend-an, that they may selL 3d Conjugation. Kecibir, to receive. Que yo recib-a, that I may receive. Que tii recib-as, that thou mayest receive, Que el recib-a, that he may receive. Que nosotros recil>amos, that we may receive. Que vosotros recib-ais, that you may receive. Que ellos recib-an, that they may receive. 224 LESSON 41. Que yo sea, etc. Exceptions. Ser, 2. to be. that I may fa etc. Estar, 1. to be. Que yo este, that I may be. etc. etc. Haber, 2. (auxiliary) to kave. Que yo haya, that I may have, etc. etc. Bar, 1. to give. Que yo de, that I may give. etc. etc. Saber, 2. to know. Que yo sepa, that I may know etc. etc. Ir, 3. to go. Que yo vaya, that I may go. etc. etc. Vocabulario. Vocabulary. El carbon, the coal. El ejercito, the army. El empleo, the employment. El invierno, the winter. El momenta, the moment. La lengua, the language. La lena, the wood. A menos quo, unless. Aunque, although. Con tal que, provided. Contrario, contrary. Desgraciado, unfortunate. Hasta que, until. Listo, ready. Menester, necessary. Natural, natural. Por mas... que, however. Satisfecho, satisfied. Sorprendido, surprised. Tonto, foolish. Buscar, 1. to look for. Convenir, 3. to be proper, Convidar, 1. to invite. Desear, 1. to desire. Esperar, 1. to wait. Marchar, 1. to march Preferir, 3. to prefer. Preparar, 1. to prepare, Pretender, 2. to pretend Querer, 2. to grant. Sentir, 3. to regret. Suplicar, 1. to entreat* Temer, 2. to fear. Ver, 2. to see. Exercise 81. 1. l Que quiere V. que yo haga ? 2. Quiero que V. escriba a su amigo y que le diga que venga. 3. Me alegro (/ am glad) que V. este satisfecho de mi trabajo. 4. Estoy sorprendido de que V. no sepa SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 225 nada de eso. 5. Es necesario que salgamos temprano, pues debemos llegar a la ciudad antes de la noche. 6. Siento que V. 110 tenga el dinero que V. me prometio. 7. Es posible que las cartas lleguen hoy. 8. Es de desear que acabemos hoy. 9. Es mejor que V. no le diga nada. 10. No coiiviene que V. hable tanto. 11. Deseo que V. vaya en seguida a su casa. 12. Dios quiera que no lleguemos demasiado tarde. 13. i Cree V. que el pueda venir la semana que viene 1 14. No creo que lo pueda. 15. Es tiempo que acabe el invierno, pues ya no tenemos carbon ni leiia. 16. Si es verdad (true) que su padre llegue mafiana, sera menester prepararle un cuarto. 17. Derae V. una leccionque sea mas facil. 18. i Cuando quiere V. que yo le devuelva el dinero ? 19. Devuelvamelo tan pronto como V. pueda. 20. He suplicado a mi amigo que venga a mi casa, pero el prefiere ir a la fonda. 21. Este hombre pretende que le den uu empleo. 22. Que venga si quiere. 23. Queremos que W. trabajen mas. 24. El maestro desea que aprendamos la lengua inglesa. 25. Tememos que este hombre sea nuestro enemigo. 26. No apruebo que V. saiga todas las noches. 27. Puede ser que el vaya a Paris. 28. Quiero que V. me diga lo que sea la verdad. 29. Quiero un maestro que no sea demasiado joven. 30. Nuestro padre no quiere que durmamos tan tarde. 31. No encuentro a ninguno que pueda prestarme el dinero que necesito. 32. Don Juan Morales es el mejor hombre que conozca. 33. ste es el mejor vino que haya bebido. 34. El me dara dinero hasta que yo haya encontrado un buen empleo. 35. Lo hare aunque no sepa muy bien hacerlo. Exercise 82. 1. Captain Henry is the bravest officer I know in the army. 2. It is the best bread we have had this year. 3. Here is, I think, the last book he has written. 4. I am surprised that your brother should come at (en) this moment. 5. He wishes ine to return to-morrow, but I don't think that I shall be able to do it. 6. It is unfortunate that you should have lost all your money. 7. It is better for you to arrive in the morning. 8. Is it true that he has said that ? 9. I don't think he has said it. 10. At what time do you think he will be here 1 11. I don't think he can be here before eleven. 12. It is im- possible for me to go out so early. 13. Although he is poor he has more friends than you. 14. Do you think that I am foolish enough to believe that ? 15. Is it possible that you should have spent so much 15 226 LESSON 41. money 1 16. My father wishes me to go to the country with him. 17. We wish you to study your lessons. 18. The general wishes that every soldier be ready to march. 19. Grod grant that he may live long(muchos anos)\ 20. I wish him to come and to bring the money. 21. It is very natural that he should think that I am his friend. 22. It is well (bueno) that he should know it. 23. I am looking for a man who may be willing to lend me some money. 24. See that everything is ready. 25. I do not believe it, although he may say the (lo) contrary. 26. Wait till he comes. 27. I shall go out unless it rains. 28. We will wait for you, provided you do not come too late. 29. However rich he may be, he is unhappy. 30. Unless he invites me, I shall not go to his house. 31. I will buy that house when I have money enough. 32. He says he will come, provided they send him a carriage. 33. I do not wish you to speak so. Dramatic a . Grammar. 1. The subjunctive mood in Spanish is usually found in a dependent clause, and expresses doubt or uncertainty as to the facts or the result. The necessity for its use is oftenest indicated by the idea in the principal clause, but this is not always the case. The principal cases of the use of the subjunctive are: after words expressing a. Command,, request, etc. : Mando que venga, I order him to come. Ije pido a V. que saiga, / beg you to go out. Qtiiero que VV. trabajen, I wish that you should work. b. Suggestion, permission, approval, prohibition : Propongo que V. venga, / suggest that you come. Permito que el se vaya, I allow him to go away. Tengo a bien que V. permanezca, / approve of your staying. Prohibo que lo hagan, I forbid their doing it. c. JZmotion (such as desire, joy, surprise, fear, etc.): Deseo que V. venga, / want you to come. Temo que el caiga, / am afraid he will fall. Me alegro que haga sol, / am glad that the sun is shining. Sienten que V. hay a venido, They are sorry that you came. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. d. Doubt, denial, etc. : 227 Pudo que sea el, Negamos que sepan, i Cree V. que el este malo ? No pienso que sea verdad, / doubt if it be he. We deny that they know. Do you think that he is ill ? I don't think it is true. 2. The subjunctive is also used in Spanish after an imper- sonal verb expressing an idea of volition, doubt, necessity, contin- gency, uncertainty, etc. (See Rule I.), as : Es propio (conveniente or a proposito), Es de desear que venga, Conviene, Es bueno, Es inalo, Es necesario, ) Es menester, j Es lastiraa, Es sorprendente, Es facil, Es imposible que el no sepa, Es tierapo, Es suficiente. Es natural, etc. Basta, It is proper. It is desirable for him to come. It becomes. It is proper or well. It is wrong. It is necessary. It is a pity. It is surprising. It is easy or possible. It is impossible that he does not know. It is time. It is sufficient. It is natural, etc. 3* The subjunctive is also used when the verb of the second proposition expresses some contingent or future effect: Lo comprare cuando tenga dinero, Le hablare asi que le vea, Lo hare antes que el venga, / will buy it when I have money. I will speak to him when I see him. I will do it before he comes. 4. A relative pronoun, either used alone or preceded by a noun, and any of the words solo, alone, ninguno, no, none, no one, pocos, few, cualquiera, whatever, quienquiera, whoever, nadie, nobody, no one, linico, only thing, primero, first, ultimo, last, mas, more, mejor, lest, requires the subjunctive when there is an idea of uncertainty : 228 LESSON 41. Busco d un hombre que quiera pres- lam looking for a man willing to tarme dinero, lend me money. Esto es, creo, lo unico que le per- This is, I think, the only thiig be- tenezca, longing to him. Hay pocos que lo sepan, There are few who know it. Quienquiera que lo vea, pensard Whoever sees it will think as I do. como yo, Cualquiera que sea su fortuna, el Whatever be his fortune, he will morira pobre, die poor. 5, A few conjunctive expressions require the subjunctive mood when they express a doubt or uncertainty. Such are : A fin que, in order that. Hasta que, until. A menos que, unless. Lejos de que, far from. Antes que, before. Por poco que, however little. Aunque, although. Por nmcho que, \ , _ > however. Aun cuando, although. Por mas que, ) Bien que, though. Para que, in order that. En caso que, in case that. Siempre que, whenever. Con tal que, provided that. Supuesto que, supposing that. Dado que, granting. \ Ojala ! would to God! 6, The perfect of the subjunctive is formed from the pres- ent of the subjunctive of the auxiliary haber, 2. to have, and the past participle of the verb : Que yo haya hablado, That I may have spoken. Que hayamos salido, That we may have gone out. OBSERVATION. All the general rules given on the use of the present subjunctive apply to the perfect of the subjunctive. 7 The present subjunctive is generally used when the preceding verb is in the present or future indicative, and in the imperative. Le ruego que venga, / beg him to come. Le rogare que venga, / will beg him to come. Ruegale V. que venga, Beg him to come. Quiero que VV. trabajen, I wish that you should work. Es posible que yo vaya, / may possibly go. IMPERATIVE MOOD. 229 Leccion XLII. Lesson XLII. IMPERATIVE MOOD. 1, The imperative is formed by adding the following ter- minations to the stem of the verbs : 1st Conjugation. 2d Conjugation. 3d Conjugation. -a -e -e -ad -ed -id 1st Conjugation. 2d Conjugation. Habl-a, speak (thou). Com-e, eat (thou). Habl-ad, speak (ye). Com-ed, eat (ye). 3d Conjugation. Recib-e, receive (thou). Recib-id, receive (ye). 2t The present subjunctive is used for the imperative in the first and third persons (for the formation of these forms see Lesson XLI.) : 1st Conjugation. Hablar, 1. to speak. Comprar, 1. to buy. Cantar, 1. to sing. Yo habl-o I speak - \ Hab1 " 6 V * ^^ ^ habl " en VV ' (pL) > Sp6ak ^ you ^ ' ( Habl-emos, let us speak. Yocompr-o I buy [ Com P r " e V ' ( sin ^ or com P r - en VV. G^X *uy (you), ' ( Corapr-emos, let us buy. Yo cant-o I sinq - I Cant " 6 V " (singm) T Cant " en VV * (pL) > sing (you ^ I Cant-emos, let us sing. 2d and 3d Conjugations. Coiner, 2. to eat. Beber, 2. to drink. Vender, 2. to sell. Decir, 3. to say, to tell. Venir, 3. to come. Salir, 3. to go out. Yo com-o Teat- | C m " a V> ^^ T com ' an VV ' (P L )> eat \ Cora-amos, let us eat. b " a V ' ^^^ r beb-an YV * f^-) drink Yo beb-o I drink Beb-amos, let us drink. 230 LESSON 42. Yo vend-o I sell \ Vend ' a V - ( sin( J-) " r vend-an VV. (^.), sell (you). ( Vend-amos, let us sell. SDig-a V. (ring.), say or tell (you). Dig-an VV. (pi.), say or tell (you). Dig-amos, let us say or tell. , T ( Veng-a V. (sing.) or veng-an VV. (pi.), come (you). Yo veng-o, / come ; < ,, _ ' ( Veng-amos, let us come. Yo sal-o I go out; \ ^* V ' <***> T "* \ Salg-amos, let us go out. RULE. The of the 1st person of the present indicative is changed into e and en for the 1st conjugation, and into a and an for the 2d and 3d conjugations. Exceptions. ( Sea V. (sing.) or sean VV. (pi.), be (you). Ser, 2. to 06 f \ , , ( Searaos, let us be. _ x ( Este V. (sing.) or esten VV. (pi.) be (you). xiiStar. 1. to oe ; < . . . 7 C Estemos, let us be. ( De V. (sing.) or den VV. (pi. ), give (you). Dar, 1. to aive : < , ( Demos, ^^ us give. ( Sepa V. (sing.) or sepan VV. (Z. ), know (you). Saber, 2. to know ; < ., r ( Sepamos, tec ^5* know. ^ ( Vaya V. (sm0.) or vayan VV. (^.), ^ ( Vayamos, (contract, vamos), let us go. Imperative with Pronouns. Traigame V. esto, Bring me this. No se lo de V., Do not give it to him. Vendanos V. su caballo, Sell us your horse. Prestemelo V., Lend it to me. Biisquelos V., Look for them. No lo corte V. , Do not cut it. Vengan VV. esta noche, Come this evening. No salgan VV. ahora, Do not go out now. Digaraelo V., Tell it to me. No se lo diga V. a nadie, Do not tell it to anybody. Salgamos un rato, Let us go out for a moment. IMPERATIVE MOOD. 231 Ven aqui, Juanito, Vuelva V. esta noche, No hablen VV. tanto, Trabajemos, No hagas eso, Conformate con tu suerte, Ponga V. el libro sobre la mesa, Digale V. a Juan que su padre ha llegado, Hablad a este hombre, Come here, Johnny. Return this evening. Do not speak so much. Let us work. Do not do that. Be satisfied with your lot. Put the book on the table. Tell John that his father has arrived. Speak to that man. Vocabulario. El asunto, the matter. El boticario, the drug- gist. El coche, the coach. El correo, the post, the mail. El estado, the condition. El favor, the favor. El ruido, the noise. Eltemor, the fear. La canci6n, the song. La patria, the country. La verdad. the truth. La virtud, the virtue. Alto, loud. Enfadado, angry. Ligero, quick. Pronto, quickly. Quieto, quiet. Turbulento, boisterous. Amar, 1. to love. Abrir, 3, to open. Cantar, 1. to sing. Correr, 2, to run. Vocabulary. Emplear, 1. to employ. Encender, 2. to light. Llevar, 1. to take. Obedecer, 2. to obey. Oir, 3. to hear. Olvidar, 1. to forget. Pagar, 1 . to pay. Practicar, 1. to practise- Prestar, 1. to lend. Salir, 3. to leave. Saltar, 1. to jump. Tomar, 1. to take. Exercise 83. 1. No tenga V. miedo, el perro no muerde. 2. Eraplee V. bien el tiempo. 3. Amemos nuestra patria. 4. Sepa V. sus lecciones mana- na. 5. No digas todo lo que haces, pero hagas todo lo que dices. 6. Este V. quieto. 7. Mandeme V. mis libros por el muchacho. 8. Seamos amigos. 9. Deme V. esto, lo necesito. 10. Pregunte Y. si el Senor Martinez esta en casa. 11. Yaya V. a casa del Senor Guti- errez y digale que le quiero ver. 12. Saiga V. de aqui y no vuelva mas. 13. Venga V. pronto, yo le necesito a V. 14. Digame V. quien ha hecho esto. 15. Hagame Y. el favor de (to) decirme ddnde vive el medico. 16. Hay uno que vive en esta casa. 17. Sepa Y. que soy el mejor amigo que Y. tiene. 18. Tome Y. este dinero y deselo a este pobre. 19. Hable Y. sin temor, y diga la verdad. 20. Muchachos, 232 LESSON 42. no jueguen en la calle. 21. Corra V. pronto y traigame mi paraguas, 22. Hable V. a ese horabre, y pregiintele lo que quiere. 23. Hablele V, mismo, yo no hablo trances. 24. Tome V. un coche, si V. no quiere ir a pie. 25. No hagas eso, amiguito. 26. Deme V. la inano ; muy bien, ahora salte V. 27. No me hable V., estoy enfadado con V. 28. Digamos sienipre la verdad. 29. Piense V. en (of) inf. 30. Es- cribaine V. de Paris. 31. Creame, ainigo, la cosa no es asi. 32. Sal- gamos, ya es tarde. 33. Denos V. nuestro dinero, lo necesitamos. 34. Lleve V. esa carta al correo ; ya es tiempo. 35. Vamonos tern- piano. 36. No venga V. tan tarde inanana, pues teugo que salir. Exercise 84. 1. Take this key, open my room, and bring me my stick. 2. Let us write our letters, the mail leaves to-night. 3. Come early to-mor- row morning, we have a great deal to do. 4. Do not go out without me. 5. Write to us every week from Paris. 6. Give something to that poor man ; he is hungry. 7. Be my friend. 8. Go out, I don't need you here. 9. Don't speak to that man, he is not your friend. 10. Take this letter to your father, and tell him that I wish to see him. 11. Speak louder, I cannot hear you. 12. Do me the favor to (de) give me a piece of bread. 13. Call that gentleman, he has forgot- ten something. 14. Give me something to (que) drink, I am very thirsty. 15. Ask that woman if Mr. Zamora is at home. 16. Do not run so fast, it is not late. 17. Do not believe what that man says, he never tells the truth. 18. Light the gas ; we don't see anything here. 19. Shut the door ; we do not wish to be seen. 20. Don't buy that house, it is in very poor (mal) condition. 21. Take this and give it to your sister. 22. Do not make so much noise, your little brother is sleeping. 23. Tell me all that you know about (de) this matter 24. Write to this merchant and tell him that we need blue cloth* 25. Go to the druggist's, but return quickly. 26. If you do not need your book, lend it to me. 27. I will tell you something, but do not tell it to anybody. 28. Obey your masters. 29. Let us love and practise virtue. 30. Let us see who is at the door. 31. Here is a dollar; take it and pay that man. 32. Do not be so boisterous, your mother is not well. 33. Come here, I have something to tell you. 34. Do not give her that, she is too small yet. 35. Let us sing a Spanish song. IMPERATIVE MOOD. 233 Gramatiea. Grammar. 1, The regular second person forms of the imperative are little used, since the polite form of address (almost uni- versal) requires the use of the third person forms of the present subjunctive. It will be noticed that the first person plural is also from the present subjunctive, and is not a true imperative form. 2. The second person singular of the imperative is the same as the third person singular of the present indicative (see Les- sons XXXII. to XXXV.). NOTE. Exceptions to the above rule are : decir, habor, ir, poner, salir, tener, venir. 3* The second person plural is made from the infinitive by changing the final r to d. There are no exceptions to this rule. 4. The subject pronoun may be expressed or omitted with the true imperative forms. Usted or ustedes are, however, gen- erally expressed. When used, the subject pronouns generally follow the verb. NOTE. If two or more imperatives occur in the same sentence, it is sufficient that the pronoun should accompany the first imperative : Vaya V. a mi cuarto, y traigame mi Go to my room and bring me my libro, book. 5. The negative imperative of the second person is expressed by means of the subjunctive : No hables, do not speak. No lo hagais, do not do it. No vengas, do not come. 6. The second person singular is generally used in proverbs, maxims, etc. : Ama a tu projimo como a ti mismo, Love thy neighbor as thyself. 7. For rules referring to the place of the pronouns accom- panying the imperative see L. 22, 30, 31. The student will have to bear in mind, however, that the pronouns listed and ustedes are always placed last in the imperative. 234 LESSON 43. Leccion XLIII. Lesson XLIII. IMPEKFECT AND PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. Regular Verbs. 1st Conjugation. Que yo habl-ara or habl-ase, that / might or should speak. that thou mightest or shouldst speak, that he might or should speak. Que tu habl-aras or habl-ases, Que el habl-ara or habl-ase, Que nosotros habl-dramos or habl- that we might or should speak. asemos, Que vosotros habl-arais or habl- that you might or should speak. aseis, Que ellos habl-aran or habl-asen, that they might or should speak. 2d Conjugation. Vender, to sell. Que yo vend-iera or vend-iese, Que tu vend-ieras or vend-ieses, Que el vend-iera or vend-iese, Que nosotros vend-ieramos or vend- iesemos, Que vosotros vend-ierais or vend- ieseis, Que ellos vend-ieran or vend-iesen, that / might or should sell, that thou mightest or shouldst sell, that he might or should sell, that we might or should sell. that you might or should sell, that they might or should sell. 3d Conjugation. Eecibir, to receive. Que yo recib-iera or recib-iese, Que tu recib-ieras or recib-ieses, Que el recib-iera or recib-iese, Que nosotros recib-ie*ramos or recib- igsemos, Que vosotros recib-ierais or recib- ieseis, Que ellos recib-ieran or recib-iesen, that / might or should receive, that thou mightest or shouldst receive. that he might or should receive, that we might or should receive. that you might or should receive, that they might or jhould receive. IMPERFECT AND PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. 235 Que yo tuviera or tuviese, Que tii tuvieras or tuvieses, Que el tuviera or tuviese, QUB nosotros tuvieramos or tuvie- semos, Que vosotros tuvierais or tuvieseis, Que ellos tuvieran or tuviesen, Irregular Verbs. Tener, 2. to have. that I might or should have, that thou mightest or shouldst have, that he might or should have, that we might or should have. that you might or should have, that they might or should have. Haber, 2. (auxiliary) to have. Que yo hubiera or hubiese, Que tii hubieras or hubieses, Que el hubiera or hubiese, Que nosotros hubieramos or hubie- semos, Que vosotros hubierais or hubieseis, Que ellos hubieran or hubiese n, Estar, 1. Que yo estuviera or estuviese, Que tii estuvieras or estuvieses, Que el estuviera or estuviese, Que nosotros estuvieramos or estu- viesemos, Que vosotros estuvierais or estuvieseis, Que ellos estuvieran or estuviesen, that I might or should have, that thou mightest or shouldst have, that he might or should have, that we might or should have. that you might or should have, that they might or should have. to be. that I might or should be. that thou mightest or shouldst be. that he might or should be. that we might or should be. that you might or should be. that they might or should be. Que yo fuera or fuese, Que tii fueras or fueses, Que el fuera or fuese, Que nosotros fueramos or fuesemos, Que vosotros fuerais or fueseis, Que ellos fueran or fuesen, Ser, 2. to be. that I might or should be. that thou mightest or shouldst be that he might or should be. that we might or should be. that you might or should be. that they might or should be. Bar, 1. to give. Que yo diera or diese, etc. that I might or should give, etc. 236 LESSON 43. Andar, 1. to walk. Que yo anduviera or anduviese, that I might or should walk. etc. etc. Hacer, 2. to make, to do. Que yo hiciera or hiciese, that I might or should do. etc. etc. Caer, 2. to fall. Que yo cayera or cayese, that I might, or should fall. etc. etc. Poder, 2. to be able. Que yo pudiera or pudiese, that I might or should be able. etc. etc. Poner, 2. to put. Que yo pusiera or pusiese, that I might or should put. etc. ec. Querer, 2. to be willing. Que yo quisiera orquisiese, that 1 might or should be willing etc. ec. Saber, 2. Que yo supiera or supiese, that I might or should know. etc. etc. Traer, 2. to bring. Que yo trajera or trajese, that I might or should bring. etc. etc. Conducir, 3. to conduct, to take. Que yo condujera or condujese, that I might or should conduct. etc. eZc. Pedir, 3. to ask for. Que yo pidiera or pidiese, /iat I might or should ask for. etc. e*c. IMPERFECT AND PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. 237 Venir, 3. to come. Que yo viniera or viniese, etc. that I might or should come, etc. Decir, 3. to say, to tell. Que yo dijera or dijese, , etc. that I might or should say. etc. Que yo fuera or fuese, etc. Ir, 3. to go. that 1 might or should go. etc. Vocabulario. El articulo, the article. El asunto, the business. El espejo, the mirror. El gasto, the expense. El idioma, the language. El lugar, the spot. El medio, the means, the way. Aprobar, 1. to approve. Arreglar, 1. to arrange. Convidar, 1. to invite. Dedicar, 1. to devote. Devolver, 2. to give back. Dudar, 1. to doubt. Vocabulary. Encontrar, 1. to meet. Enganar, 1. to deceive. Fabricar, 1. to manufacture. Llorar, 1. to weep, to cry. Permitir, 3. to allow. Recomendar, 1. to recommend. Suplicar, 1. to entreat. Suponer, 2, to suppose. A crddito, on credit. En seguida, immediately. En tiempo pasado, formerly. Por precision, by necessity. Teorico, theoretical. Exercise 85. 1. Mi maestro queria que yo aprendiese una leccion mas larga. 2. i Que queria V. que el hiciera sin diriero ? 3. Que comprase las mercancias a credito. 4. Estos dos caballeros querian que yo les vendiese mi caballo. 5. Yo no creia que fuese tan tarde. 6. Temia V. que el saliese sin nosotros ? 7. Lo linico que yo temia era que el no nos esperase. 8. Era el unico almacen donde pudieramos hallar este articulo. 9. 6l queria que yo le dijera lo que yo debia, antes que me diera el dinero. 10. i Dudaba V. que el viniera como lo 238 LESSON 43. habia prometido ? 11. i Aprobaba Y. que e*l me hablase asi ? 12. Era menester que gastasemos muchisimo dinero para arreglar nuestra casa. 13. Yo no creia que Y. enganase a sus amigos. 14. Era el unico medio que nos quedase, pues nuestros asuntos no permitian que hicieramos nuevos gastos. 15. Cuando sail para Francia, mi padre me recomendo que viviese con personas que no hablasen otro idioma mas que el frances y con quienes tuviese que hablarlo por precision, bien 6 mal. 16. Tambien que leyese algunos buenos autores, y hecho todo esto por algun tiempo, me dedicase entonces al estudio teorico. 17. | Quien hubiera pensado que nos encontrariamos en un lugar como este, despues de tanto tiempo que no nos hemos visto ! 18. Yo le habia escrito a fin de que viniera. 19. He comido mucho, y mas de lo que hubiera debido. 20. Yo iba todas las mananas a su casa para que me diera una leccion de espanol. 21. Cantaban aunque tuviesen gana de llorar. 22. fil deseaba que yo fuese en seguida a su casa. 23, Yo le habia suplicado que viniese temprano, pero llego el ultimo de todos. 24. Aquel hombre pretendia que le pagasen mucho mas de lo que habia ganado. 25. 1^1 estaba muy sorprendido de que no supiesemos nada de esto. Exercise 86. 1. What did you wish me to do ? 2. I wished that you should write to your friend, and that you should tell him to return. 3. I was surprised that he had not sent me the money. 4. It was to be desired that they should finish in time. 5. When did he wish us to return the money ? 6. He wished that you should return it as soon as possible. 7. I did not think that he was so ill. 8. Our teacher wished that we would come earlier to school. 9. We were afraid that it would rain the whole day. 10. He was looking for a man who would lend him money. 11. I went to his house, although I was very tired. 12. Our father did not wish that we should go out so late. 13. He was the best friend I had in the city. 14. It was the best wine that I had ever drunk. 15. It was very unfortunate that he had lost all his money. 16. Although he was poor, he had many friends. 17. It was very natural that he should speak so. 18. He could not spend so much money, however rich he might be. 19. I would not go to his house unless he invited me. 20. He said he would come (vendria) provided you would send him a carriage. IMPERFECT AND PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. 239 21. The Venetians were formerly the only people who manufactured and sold mirrors. 22. I was afraid he would come without his brother. 23. I did not think that you were so foolish. 24. It was necessary for us to go every evening to his house. 25. We did not think that it was so late. 26. Mr. Martin did not wish me to go out without him. 27. He was the only one who spoke Spanish. 28. We did not suppose he would arrive in time. 29. My mother wished us to sing for her. Gramatica. Grammar. 1, The imperfect of the subjunctive has two forms: The first ending in : -ra -ras -ra -ramos -rais -ran and the second in : -se -see -se -semos -seis -sen While the true endings are -ara and -ase, -iera and -iese, to facilitate the construction the forms may be made from the 3d person plural of the past definite by changing the termina- tion ron into the terminations given above. Tuvie-ron, they had ; Hubie-ron, iheyhad; Estuvie-ron, they were ; Fue-ron, they were; Habla-ron, they spoke ; Comie-ron, they ate ; Examples. ( tuvie-ra, -ras, -ra, -ramos, -rais, -ran. 1 tuvie-se, -ses, -se, -semos, -seis, -sen. ihubie-ra, -ras, -ra, -ramos, -rais, -ran. hubie-se, -ses, -se, -semos, -seis, -sen. ( estuvie-ra, -ras, -ra, -ramos, -rais, -ran. ( estuvie-se, -ses, -se, -semos, -seis, -sen. ( fue-ra, -ras, -ra, -ramcs, -rais, -ran. 1 fue-se, -ses, -se, -semos, -seis, -sen. ( habla-ra, ras, -ra, -ramos, -rais, -ran. I habla-se, -ses, -se, -semos, -seis, -sen. !comie-ra, -ras, -ra, -ramos, -rais, -ran. comie-se, -ses, -se, -semos, -seis, -sen. 240 LESSON 43. . ., . ( recibie-ra, -ras, -ra, -ramos, -rais, -ran. Recibie-ron, they received ; < ... ( recibie-se, -ses, -se, -semos, -seis, -sen. ( pudie-ra, -ras, -ra, -ramos, -rais, -ran. Pudie-ron, they were able ; < r , . ( pudie-se, -ses, -se, -semos, -seis, -sen. ( supie-ra, -ras, -ra, -ramos. -rais, -ran. Supie-ron, they knew ; i - . I supie-se, -ses, -se, -semos, -seis, -sen. c dije-ra, -ras, -ra, -ramos, -rais, -ran. Diie-ron. they said; < ... I dije-se, -ses, -se, -semos, -seis, -sen. ( vinie-ra, -ras, -ra, -ramos, -rais, -ran. Vmie-ron, they came ; 4 . . ( vmie-se, -ses, -se, -semos, -seis, -sen. etc. etc. NOTE. The graphic accent must be inserted in these forms in accord- ance with the usage on pp. 234-235. 2, The imperfect subjunctive is used when the verb of the 1st proposition which requires a subjunctive after it, is in one of the past tenses of the indicative : Yo queria -\ 1 wished -s Yo desee I que el viniera / desired, \ that he would Yo he solicitado f 6 viniese. / have entreated f come. Yo habia solicitado-' / had entreated * OBSERVATION. All the general rules given on the use of the present subjunctive apply to the imperfect and pluperfect subjunctive. 3* The present subjunctive may, however, be used after the past indefinite, when the time of the action is not definitely stated : Le he suplicado que venga a mi / have entreated him to come to my casa. house. 4, The present or tbe imperfect subjunctive may be used when the verb of the 1st proposition is in the futuro perfecto : 131 habra pretendido que le dejen He will have pretended that they (dejaran 6 dejasen) libre. should let him free. 5. The imperfect subjunctive is used instead of the present when followed by a conditional clause : i Cree V. que me lo diesen, si les Do you think they would give it to ^idiera? me, if I should ask them. CONDITIONAL MOOD. 241 6. The pluperfect subjunctive is formed from the imperfect subjunctive of the auxiliary haber, to have; and the past parti- ciple of the verb : Que yo hubiera or hubiese hablado ; Que el hubiera or hubiese salido ; that I might have spoken, that I might have gone out Leccidn XLIV. Lesson XIIV. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Yo hablar-fa, Tu hablar-ias, El hablar-fa, Nosotros hablar-iamos, Vosotros bablar-iais, Ellos hablar-ian, / should or would speak. Thou shouldst or wouldst speak. He should or would speak. We should or would speak. You should or would speak. They should or would speak. Yo comer-ia, Tu comer-ias, El comer-ia, Nosotros comer-iamos, Vosotros comer-iais, Ellos comer-fan, / should or would eat. Thou shouldst or wouldst eat. He should or would eat. We should or would eat. You should or would eat. They should or would eat. Yo recibir-fa, Tu recibir-ias, El recibir-fa, Nosotros recibir-famos, Vosotros recibir-fais, Ellos recibir-fan, Yo daria, etc. I should or would receive. Thou shouldst or wouldst receive. He should or would receive. We should or would receive. You should or would receive. They should or would receive. I should or would give, etc. Yo tendria, etc. I should or would have, etc. 242 LESSON 44. Yo habria, etc. Yo estaria, etc. Yo seria, etc. Yo haria, etc. Yo sabria, etc. Yo pondria, etc. Yo podria, etc. Yo querria, etc. Yo valdria, etc. Yo diria, etc. Yo saldria, etc. Yo vendria, etc. / should or would have, etc. I should or would be. etc. I should or would be. etc. I should or would make (or do) etc. I should or would know, etc. 1 should or would put. etc. I should or would be able, etc. I should or would be willing, etc. I should or would be worth, etc. I should or would say. etc. I should or would go out. etc. I should or would come, etc. Ejemplos. Examples. i Quien diria que este hombre es tan Who would say that that man is rico ? so rich ? j Que haria V. si V. fuese rico ? What would you do if you were rich ? Yo compraria una casa grande. I would buy a large house. Si yo supiera hacerlo, lo haria. If I knew how to do it, I would do it. Yo escribiria en ingles si pudiera. I would write in English if 1 could CONDITIONAL MOOD. 243 Yo daria mucho para saber la ver- dad. i Que le escribiria V. ? Yo le escribiria todo lo que he oido. jCuanto dinero necesitaria V. ? Yo necesitaria a lo menos cien duros. i Estaria V. aqui si V. pudiera salir ? Yo saldria en seguida. V. deberia venir conmigo. Yo quisiera saber donde esta mi hermano. Deberiamos haber salido mas tem- prano. Vocabulario. El concepto, the opinion. El motive, the motive. El precio, the price. El socorro, the assistance. El viento, the wind. La clase, the class. La cosa, the matter of importance. La deuda, the debt. La fresa, the strawberry. La mentira, the falsehood. La recompensa, the recompense. Las seftas, the direction. Cansado, tired. Hast a, until, as far as. Haragan, lazy. I would give much to know the truth. What would you write to him ? I would write all I have heard. How much money would you need ? I would need at least one hundred dollars. Would you be here if you could go out ? I would go out immediately. You ought to come with me. I should like to know where my brother is. We ought to have gone out sooner. Vocabulary, i Ojald ! would to God! For cierto, certainly. Adelantar, 1. to be fast. Cambiar 1, to exchange. Descubrir, 3. to discover. Dirigir, 3. to direct. Examinar, 1. to examine. For mar, 1. to form. Jugar, 1. to play. Marchar, 1. to go. Molestar, 1. to trouble. Qbligar, 1. to oblige. Pagar, 1. to pay. Pegar, 1. to strike. Bepetir, 3. to repeat. Exercise 87. 1. Yo aprenderia el frances si tuviera tiempo de estudiar. 2. Col6n t prometi6 una recompensa al primero que descubriera la tierra. 3. Si V. fuera al campo este aiio, yo iria tambien. 4. Los muchachos ha- brian comido todas las fresas del jardin si no hubieran temido ser casti- gados. 5. Y. podria saber la verdad si V. qnisiera. 6. Yo le habria mandado su carta si hubiera sabido donde V. vivia. 7. j, Quema V. nacerme un favor I 8. Con mucho gusto; [ que desea V.? 9. Quisiera 244 LESSON 44. que V. me llevase esta carta al correo. 10. Nada mas facil, deme V, la carta. 11. Podria V. hacer eso sin mi ? 12. Podria hacerlo si no estuviese tan cansado. 13. Lloveria si no hiciera tanto viento. 14. Seria bueno que V. fuese a verle. 15. Si hubieramos recibido el dinero que esperabamos, habriamos salido con el vapor frarices. 16. Si V. supiera lo que el ha dicho de su amigo, V. no estaria satisfecho. 17. i Cree V. que si el no viniese, iria yo a verle ? 18. \ Ojala no hubiera yo perdido mi dinero ! 19. Si lloviese esta tarde, y no pu- dieramos ir al campo, iriamos al teatro esta noche. 20. Este hombre tendria mas dinero, si lo hubiese querido. 21. Aunque fuesemos ricos, no pagariamos el precio que nos pide. 22. Beberiamos si tuviesemos mejor agua. 23. El S. D. Pedro Molina me dijo que dejaria a V. sus senas para dirigirle sus cartas en Paris, y con este motivo me he tornado la libertad de molestar a V. 24. Yo no cam- biaria mi caballo por el suyo. 25. Quisiera que V. examinase mi reloj, pues no marcha bien. 26. j, Marchaba bien, antes ? 27. Adelantaba un poco, pero no era cosa ; cinco minutos cada veinticuatro boras. 28. [ Porque no me escribio V. cuando estaba eu Pans ? 29. Yo le habria escrito, si no hubiese pensado que V. habia salido de la ciudad. 30. Si tnvieramos tiempo, iriamos con V. hasta la ciudad. Exercise 88. 1. What would you do, if you were invited to that ball ? 2. I should certainly not go. 3. I should tell a falsehood if I said that. 4. Would you like to go with me ? 5. I would go, if I had time. 6. That poor man would have died without assistance, if I had not come in time. 7. Would you have received my letter in time, if I had written to you ? 8. No, your letter would have arrived too late. 9. What would you have done, if he had struck you 1 10. He never would have struck me; he is afraid of me. 11. Would you repeat what he said ? 12. I would repeat it, if you wished. 13. We would buy that house, if it were not too small for us. 14. Would you buy mine 1 15. I would buy it, if you sold it. 16. You would be now in the first class, if you had not been so lazy. 17. I should like to see your brother; where is he now 1 18. He must be in his room, if he has not gone out. 19. You ought to have spoken to that man when he was here. 20. Were you not afraid that he would go out without you ? 21. Yes, I was afraid he would forget me. 22. I should wish CONDITIONAL MOOD. 245 them to be here to-inorrow morning early. 23. It would be necessary for him to give me at least two hundred dollars. 24. I wish that I had never known him. 25. Had I seen the new comedy, I would have told you how it was. 26. If you always worked as much as to-day, you would soon be rich. 27. What opinion would you have formed of me, if I had done what they wished me to do ? 28. That young man would not pay his debts, if he were not obliged. 29. If I had thought that you were sick, I would not have gone out. 30. I would not speak to that man, although he were rich. Gramatica. Grammar. ! The conditional tense is regularly formed by adding the endings : -fa, -fas, -fa, -famos, -fail, -fan, to the whole infinitive, taken as stem : Hablaria, 1 should or would speak. Comeria, / should or would eat. Recibiria, / should or would receive. etc. etc. This conditional has therefore all the irregularities of the future. 2* The conditional is used after a past tense to express an idea which would be in the future, if the principal verb were present : Dijo que lo compraria, he said he would buy it. (Dice que lo comprara, he says he will buy it.) Pensaba que vendria, / used to think that he would come. (Pienso que vendra, / think he will come. ) 3. It is used to express a conclusion after a condition with implied negation : Si tuviese (tuviera) dinero, compraria If he had money, he would buy the la casa, house. Me iria, si viniera, If he should come, I should go away. NOTE. The condition may be replaced by some equivalent expression, or omitted altogether. 246 LESSON 44. Haciendo eso, V. tendria razon, In, doing that, you would be right i. e., if you did that, etc. No lo diria, / would rit say that (if I thought as you do}. 4. The first form of the imperfect subjunctive (-ra) may be used iu conditional sentences instead of the conditional. Thus we may say : Si tuviese dinero, compraria la casaA Si tuviera dinero, compraria la easa, f . . . ,. , > If I had money, I would buy the house. Si tuviese dinero, comprara la casa, I Si tuviera dinero, comprara la casa, ) NOTE. The second form of the imperfect subjunctive (-se) can only be used in the condition. 5. The conditional may be used to express past probability : Tendria V. frio, you must have been cold. 6. The past conditional is formed from the conditional of haber, and the past participle of the verb. 11 habria hablado, he would have spoken. 7. Potential Mood. 1 . May and can may be translated either by the present in- dicative or by the present subjunctive of the verb poder, 2. to be able; and also by the present subjunctive of the verb used in the sentence : Puedo venir, / can come. Se puede que venga, / may come. Deme V. el dinero para que pueda Give me the money, that I may pagar lo que debo or Deme V. el pay what I owe. dinero para que pague lo que debo, 2. Could, might, should, would. Could is rendered by the conditional of the verb poder, when a condition is implied, and by the imperfect or preterit of the same verb when it implies power : Yo podria ir si quisiera, / could go if I wished. Yo no podia ir solo, J / / could not (was not able to) qo alone. Yo no pude ir solo, ) CONDITIONAL MOOD. 247 3. Might is translated by the conditional of the verb podei when power is implied : 1S1 podria venir si quisiera, He might come if he wished. When implying possibility it is expressed in the same way as may: Se puede que venga, He may or might come. 4. Should, implying duty, or meaning ought to, is rendered by the conditional of the verb deber : V. deberia venir conraigo, You ought to come with me. Deberiau obedecer, They should obey. 5. Should like to is rendered by the imperfect subjunctive or conditional of the verb querer : Quisiera or querria verle, / should like to see him. 6. Would, implying willingness, is rendered by the imper- fect indicative or preterit of the verb querer : No queria (or no quiso) hablar, He would not speak. 7. Might have and should have are in most cases translated by the conditional of the verbs poder and deber with the infinitive of haber : El podria haber venido, He might have come. Ill deberia haber venido, He should have come. The imperfect subjunctive may be used in exclamations: i Quien rue diera a coiiocer ! / should like to know I 248 LESSON 45. Leceion XLV. Lesson XLV. SUBJUNCTIVE FUTURE AND FUTURE PERFECT. 1. Haber, 2'. 2. Tener, 2. to have. Hubiere tuviere, Hubieres tuvieres, Hubiere tuviere, Hubieremos tuviereraos, Hubiereis tuviereis, Hubieren tuvieren, / shall or will have, thou shalt or wilt have, he shall or will have, we shall or will have, you shall or will have, they shall or will have. 3. Estar, 1. 4 Ser, 2. to be. Estuviere fuere, Estuvieres fueres, Estuviere fuere, Estuvieremos fuerernos, Estuviereis fuereis, Estuvieren fueren, / shall or will be. thou shalt or wilt be. he shall or will be. we shall or will be. you shall or will be. they shall or will be. 5. Hablar, 1. to speak. 6. Comer, 2. to eat. 7. Recibir, 3. to receive. Hablare comiere recibiere, Hablares comieres recibieres, Hablare comiere recibiere, Hablaremos coraieremos re- cibieremos, Hablareis comiereis recibie- reis, Hablaren comieren recibie- ren, Vocabulario. El alojamiento, the lodging. El invierno, the winter. El lugar, the place. La amistad, the friendship. La noticia, the news. Frio, cold. Acabar, 1. to finish. I shall or will speak eat receive, thou shalt or wilt speak eat receive, he shall or will speak eat receive, we shall or will speak eat receive. you shall or will speak eat receive. they shall or will speak eat re- ceive. Vocabulary. Aeons e jar, 1. to advise. Acontecer, 2. to happen. Encontrar, 1. to find, to meet. Mandar, 1. to order. Olvidar, 1. to forget. Padecer, 2. to suffer. Prescribir, 3. to prescribe. SUBJUNCTIVE FUTURE AND FUTURE PERFECT. 249 Exercise 89. 1. Si el proximo invierno fuere tan frio como el ultimo, los pobres padeceran muchisimo. 2. [ Ira V. a pasar el domingo conmigo en el campo 1 3. Si yo hubiere acabado lo que tengo que hacer, ire con mucho gusto. 4. Tu padre me ha dicho que si tu estudiares bien, te dar& un bonito reloj. 5. No saldre manana, si el tiempo fuere tan malo como hoy. 6. Si viere Y. a su padre manana, no olvide lo que le he dicho. 7. Llevaremos a su hermano con nosotros, si fuere posible. 8. Comprare la casa en que vivo, cuando tuviere dinero. 9. Si al- morzare temprano manana, ire a ver a mi amigo. 10. No olvidare- mos nada de lo que la amistad prescribiere. Exercise 90. 1. They have promised to tell me all that shall happen while I shall be (am) absent. 2. Tell your friend when you (shall) meet him, that I have good news for him. 3. If you breakfast to-morrow at (en) the same place, bring me the umbrella which I forgot there. 4. You must do, my friend, all that your father (shall) commands you. 5. The physician has advised my brother to go to the country, if the weather is not any better. 6. If you are unwell in the country, come back to the city. 7. If we should have money next month, we will send you some. 8. When I find a good teacher, I will learn Spanish. 9. We will write to you if we should be satisfied with (de) our new lodging. 10. We will go out, when we have dined. Gramatica. Grammar. 1. The future of the subjunctive, of which the termina- tions are -re, -res, -re, -remos, -reis, -ren, expresses a positive future conditional action, and is therefore used in conditional phrases with si, if, to denote a future time. It is also used with cuando, when, and other relatives, when future time is expressed. The rules given for the use of the present of the subjunctive are applicable to the future of the subjunctive when the sense is conditional or future. The future of the subjunctive is not 250 LESSON 46. of frequent use, and occurs in the sentence to give more energy and precision to the idea expresped. The future perfect of the subjunctive is formed from the future of the subjunctive of the auxiliary haber, to have; and the past participle of the verb. Leceion XLVI. Lesson XLVI. INFINITIVE MOOD. 1, Government of the infinitive without preposition: Some of the principal verbs requiring no preposition before the following infinitive : Aconsejar, 1. to advise. Acostumbrar, 1. to accustom. Afirmar, 1. to affirm. Concebir, 3. to conceive. Confesar, 1. to confess. Contar, 1. to relate. Creer, 2. to believe. Deber, 2. to owe, must. Declarar, 1. to declare. Dejar, 1. to let, to leave. Desear, 1 . to desire. Esperar, I. to hope. Gustar, to please, to like. Hacer, 2. to make, to do. Imaginar, 1. to imagine. Intent ar, 1. to intend. Mandar, 1. to order. Manifestar, 1. to manifest. etc. etc. Ejemplos. Deseo tener dinero. El afivma haber dicho la verdad. Temo ver a mi amigo. Veo venir mucha gente. Ose decirle la verdad. Oigo llamar a la puerta. Necesitar, 1 . to need. Negar, 1. to deny. Oir, 3. to hear. Parecer, 2. to appear. Pensar, 1. to think, to intend. Poder, 2. to be able. Preferir, 3. to prefer. Presumir, 3. to presume. Pretender, 2. to pretend. Prohibir, 3. to forbid. Prometer, 2. to promise. Protestar, 1. to protest. Querer, 2. to be milling. Sentir, 3. to feel, to regret. Soler, 2. to be accustomed. Temer, 2. to fear. Ver, 2. to see. etc. etc. Examples. I wish to have money. He affirms that he has told the truth. I fear to see my friend. I see many people coming. I dared to tell him the truth. I hear (some one) knocking at the door. INFINITIVE MOOD. 251 2* Government of the infinitive with the preposition a : Some of the principal verbs requiring the preposition & before the follow ing infinitive : Animar, 1. to encourage. Aprender, 2. to learn. Aspirar, 1. to aspire. Ayudar, 1. to help. Comenzar, 1. to commence. Condenar, 1. to condemn. Consentir, 3. to consent. Convidar, 1. to invite. Echar, 1. to begin. Empezar, 1. to begin. Enseilar, 1. to teach. Ejemplos. Autorizo a V. d hablar. 121 vino d visitarme. Sali d ver los soldados. 1S1 me ensena d cantar. Nos convido d comer con el. Habituar, 1. to accustom. Inclinar, 1. to incline. Invitar, 1. to invite. Obligar, 1. to oblige. Pasar, 1. to pass. Principiar, 1. to begin. Salir, 3. to go out. Tender, 2. to aim. Venir, 3. to come. Volver, 2. to return. v< Examples. I authorize you to speak. He came to visit me. I went out to see the soldiers. He teaches me to sing. He invited us to dine with hirn. 3 Government of the infinitive with the preposition de \ Some of the verbs requiring the preposition de before the following infinitive : Cesar, 1. to cease. Dejar, 1. to leave. Disuadir, 3. to dissuade. Encargar, 1. to commission. Excusar, 1 . to excuse. Eximir, 3. to free. Jurar, 1. to swear. Babiar, 1 . to rage. Tratar, 1. to try. Ejemplos. Examples. Ceso de venir aqui. He ceased coming here. Me encargo de darle a V. esta carta. He requested me to give you this letter. 4, Government of the infinitive with the preposition para : Lo hago para complacerle a V. I do it to please you. Trahajo para ganar dinero. I work to earn money. 5. Government of the infinitive with the preposition en: Le ocnpo en escrihir una carta. I employ him to write a letter. Persiste en querer salir. He insists on going out. 252 LESSON 46. 6* Government of the infinitive with the preposition con: Le entretengo con leerle algo in- I amuse him by reading something teresante. interesting to him. 7. The infinitive used with the article: Mucho temo el verle venir. El perfecto tocar de este musico me encanta. No es tan facil el escribir un buen poem a. Al verle, me fui. Al salir, recibio una carta. Enferm6 del mucho beber. Al ir a verle, le encontre. I much fear to see him come. The perfect playing of this musician delights me. It is not so easy to write a good poem. On seeing him I went away. On going out, he received a letter. He became sick from much drinking. In going to see him, I met him. Vocabulario. El centavo, the cent. El paseo, the walk. El viaje, the journey. La autorizaci6n, the authorization. La dificultad, the difficulty. La intenci6n, the intention. La pagina, the page. La traducci6n, the translation. Bajo, low. Dispuesto, disposed. Inocente, innocent. Seguro, sure. Tal, such as. Acostumbrar, 1. to accustom. Acusar, 1. to accuse. Autorizar, 1. to authorize. Ayudar 1. to help. Complacer, 2. to please. Consistir, 3. to consist. Gopiar, 1. to copy. Vocabulary. Bar (1.) un paseo, to take a walk, Deber, 2. must. Descansar, 1. to rest. Dibujar, 1. to draw. Encargar, 1. to charge. Entender, 2. to understand. Excusar, 1. to excuse. Esperar, 1. to expect. Gobernar, 1. to manage, to govern. Gritar, 1. to cry. Inducir, 3. to induce. Obligar, 1 . to compel. Osar, 1. to dare. Partir, 3. to leave. Pensar, 1. to intend. Eesolver, 2. to resolve. Soler 2. to be in the habit. Visitar, 1. to visit. Volver (2.) hacer, 2. to do again. Exercise 91. 1. Oreo haher visto a su hermano en el concierto, pero no estoy seguro si era el. 2. j Me promete V. venir manana ? 3. Yo se lo pro- meto d V. 4. Acostumbro comer y dormir poco. 5. V. no me deja INFINITIVE MOOD. 253 trabajar con su mucho hablar. 6. No podremos salir hoy, porque tenemos nmchisimo que hacer. 7. Su amigo de V. debe saber a que bora llega el correo. 8. i Quien le ba autorizado a V. a hacer eso ? 9. Nadie me ha autorizado, pero yo creia poder hacerlo sin autoriza- cion. 10. No estoy acostumbrado comer tanto. 11. Mi amigo vino a" visitarrne ayer, pero no estdbamos en casa. 12. El comenzo hablando bajo y acabo gritando. 13. Mi padre me ha encargado de decirle a V. que sentia mucho no poder mandarle el dinero hoy. 14. Nunca le excusare de haber hablado asi. 15. Vengo a ver si ha llegado de la Habana el senor Alvarez. 16. No puedo decirselo, porque no lo Be. 17. [ Porque trabaja V. tan tarde ? 18. Lo hago para complacerle a mi padre. 19. Este hombre no entiende gobernar su casa. 20. He resuelto no salir de la ciudad este verano. 21. [A donde va V. ahora 1 22. Voy a visitar a algunos amigos que ban llegado de Francia. 23. La dificultad consiste en saber donde hallar al senor Romero. 24. Anduve todo el dia para ver si encontraba una casa bastante grande para mi familia. 25. Preste dos libros a su amigo de Y., pero el no ha vuelto a traermelos. 26. Acabo de ver al Senor Juliano en la calle. 27. Me dijo que acababa de llegar de Europa. 28. Mis hijas aprenden a dibujar con el Senor Rondel. 29. El banquero nos convido a comer, pero no pudimos ir. 30. Aquel profesor fue el que me enseii6 a hablar ingles. Exercise 92. 1. We went out this morning to see the procession, but we did not see anything ; for we arrived too late. 2. My brother begins to speak Spanish 3. I went to see your brother last Sunday, but they told me that he was not in (the) town. 4. I am working now to rest this evening. 5. I intend to leave at the end of this week. 6. What have you resolved to do ? 7. I have resolved to sell my house, and to buy a larger one. 8. When are you going to bring me my books ? 9. I am going to bring them to-morrow. 10. The physician has advised me not to go out to-day. 11. He continued to sing and I to write. 12. I am in the habit of writing every week to my family. 13. If you will help me to finish my translation, I will help you to copy these pages. 14. You cannot compel me to do this. 15. I am dis- posed to pay what is right, but not one cent more. 16. Nothing will induce me to visit him. 17. He thought that he could do it without me, but he very soon saw that it was impossible. 18. I dared to tell 254 LESSON 46. him the truth, and he forgave me. 19. We were invited to go to the country, but we could not leave our work. 20. If I do it, it is only to please you. 21. We wish to nave money to go to the theater. 22. He protests that he never had such an intention. 23. I fear not to have money enough for my journey. 24. Will you promise me never to do that again 1 25. I cannot promise that. 26. Will you tell your brother that we expect him to-morrow 1 27. We are going to take a walk this evening, will you come with us ? 28. We cannot go, we have too much to do. 29. Do you know how to speak French ] 30. No, sir, I only speak English. 31. He accuses me of having done that, but I assure you that I am innocent. Gramatica. Grammar. 1, Some Spanish verbs require no preposition before another verb in the infinitive mood. Such are principally the verbs which indicate desire, wish, fear, doubt, need, duty, and also those which express a thought or speech, command, advice, prohibition, and a few others as given above. Many of these verbs may also be used with the present indicative and the con- junction que : l5l cuenta que ha ganado mucho He says that he has earned much dinero, money. 2. Although according to the Spanish Academy the verb decir, 3. to say, to tell, must never be followed by an infinitive, many writers do not adhere to this rule : Anadian el perjuicio que decian They added the prejudice which recibir. QUINTANA. they said they were receiving. NOTE. The verb decir requires the preposition & before a person. Dije a mi hermano que viniese, / told my brother to come. 3* Other verbs require in Spanish the preposition a before another verb in the infinitive mood. Such are principally those which express a destination, en- couragement, habit, propriety, etc., and others given above. INFINITIVE MOOD. 255 Verbs which indicate motion, as venir, 3. to come / salir, 3. to go out ; belong to tfre same category. 4, The verb comenzar, 1. empezar, 1. and acabar, 1. require the preposition por in the sense of to begin with, and to end by : La diversion comenzo por cantar, y The amusement began with singing acabo por llorar, and ended with crying. NOTE. In cases like the above, the gerund is more generally used : Comenzo hablando bajo y acabo He began speaking low and ended gritando, by shouting. 5, Those verbs which govern the infinitive with the prepo- sition de are principally those which express distance, cessation, accusation, discussion, and a few others : 6, The preposition para is used before the infinitive to ex- press more forcibly an intention, and whenever the English preposition to may be rendered by in order to : Trabajo ahora para descansar luego, / am working now to rest later. 7 1 Those verbs which express occupation or insistence require the preposition en before the infinitive : Me ocupa en leer, He occupies me in reading. Persiste en decirlo, He persists in saying so. 8. The preposition con governs in the infinitive those verbs which indicate entertainment, diversion, amusement, etc. : Le entretengo con contarle cuentos, / amuse him by telling him stories. NOTE. The gerund is oftener used, however, in such cases : Le divierto tocando el piano, / amuse him by playing on the piano. 9. Some verbs may take or omit either of the prepositions according to their meaning : Este hombre no entiende hacer eso, That man does not understand how to do that. No entiendo de meterme en negocios / dont mean to meddle with other ajenos, peoples business. Acerte a verle al ir a su casa, / succeeded in seeing him on going to his house. 256 LESSON 46. He acertado en hablar con el, / have done right in speaking to him. NOTE. There are even verbs which have different meanings with the same preposition : Dejo de escribir cuando entre, He ceased writing when I entered. No deje V. de escribirme, Do not neglect writing to me. 10. The following rules -for the guidance of the student in the use of prepositions require special attention : 1. When the infinitive occurs in the sentence as subject or object of the determining verb, it is used without a preposition when the question who ? or what ? may be asked : He resuelto salir hoy, I have resolved (what ?) to go out to-day. El ofrecio ayudarme, He offered (what ?) to help me. 2. When the question to what? or where to? may be asked, the preposition a must be used : Yo le animare a hacerle, I will encourage him (to what ?) to do it. Voy a visitar mi tio, / am going (where to ?) to visit my uncle. 3. The preposition de is used in answer to the questions of what? from what? at what? from where? Se espanto de verle tan palido, He was alarmed (at what ?) at seeing him so pale. Su pobreza proviene de su gastar, His poverty is the result (of what ?) of his expenses. 4. The preposition en is used in answer to the questions in what? on what? La dificultad consiste en hallarle, The difficulty consists (in what ?) in finding him. fel insiste en salir, He insists (on what ?) on going out. 5. The preposition con is used in answer to the questions with what ? by what ? Este hombre ha destruido su salud This man has destroyed his health con mucho beber, (by what ?) by much drinking. NOTE. Although there are many cases in which the right use of the preposition cannot be indicated, the rules given above may be followed in most cases. INFINITIVE MOOD. 257 11. The verb acabar, 1. to end, to finish, followed by the preposition de and an infinitive, expresses an action which has just taken place : Acabo de verle, / have just seen him. Acababa de comer cuando yo entre, He had just dined when I entered. 12, The verbs mandar, 1. to send, to order, and hacer, 2. to make, to do, followed by an infinitive, have the meaning of the English verbs to cause, to let, to have : Hago hacer un sombrero, / have a hat made. * Mando lavar mi ropa, / have my clothes washed. Hace tenir el pano, He has the cloth dyed. NOTE. In such cases the Spanish active infinitive is often rendered in English by the passive. 13, The infinitive may be used in Spanish as a substantive and as the subject or object of the verb. It may, therefore, be preceded in this case by the article or by any other part of speech : No he olvidado el insoportable / have not forgotten the insupport- hablar de este hombre, able talking of that man. Al avanzar nuestro ejercito se re- Our army having advanced, the tiraron los enemigos, enemy retired. No ganara V. nada con ese hablar, You will gain nothing by this talk. 14. There are cases where the infinitive may be used with or without the article : Esinjusto acusar(or el acusar) este It is unjust to accuse this man of hombre de este crimen, this crime. 258 LESSON 47. Leccion XLVII. Lesson XLVII. Betides, although. THE INFINITIVE GOVERNED BY PREPOSITIONS. A mas de, Ademas de, Sobre, Tras de, A menos de, Unless. A pesar de, \ Sin embargo de, I No obstante de, J Despues de, Antes de, Sin, En cuanto a, For, En consecuencia de, Notwithstanding, however. After. Before. Without. As for. On account of, for, instead of. In consequence of. Ejemplos. mas de ) haberle visto, le he e ) de ) Ademas de ) hablado, A pesar de \ haberle yo pagado Sin embargo de ? no estuvo satisfe- No obstante de ' cho, Antes de salir, comio, Despue"s de haber comido, salio, Sail sin nadie verme. No file* admitido por ser estrangero, Tras de no pagarme, me insulta, Sobre ser Ingles, quiere pasar por Americano. En cuanto a dar dinero, no lo hare. No se c6mo acabar eso. Examples. Besides seeing him, I spoke to him. Notwithstanding that I paid him, he was not pleased. He dined before going out. He went out after having dined. I went out without anybody see- ing me. He was not admitted (on account of his) being a stranger. Besides not paying me, he in- sults me. Although he is an Englishman, he wishes to pass for an American. As for giving money, I shall not do it. I don't know how to finish that. THE INFINITIVE GOVERNED BY PREPOSITIONS. 259 Vocabulario. Vocabulary. El gasto, the expense. 1 obrero, the workman. El vestido, the dress. La colocacion, the situation. La divinidad, the divinity. La pregunta, the question. Generoso, generous. Tal, such as. Atacar, 1. to attack . Castigar, 1. to punish. Consult ar, 1. to consult. Contestar, 1. to answer. Continuar, 1. to continue. Descansar, 1. to rest. Entrar, 1. to enter. Examinar, 1. to examine. Invooar, 1. to invoke. Obedecer, 2. to obey. Obtener, 2. to obtain. Of ender, 3. t-o offend. Pagar, 1. to pay. Seguir, 3. to follow. Tr aba jar, 1. to work. Volver, 2, to return Exercise 93. 1. Despues de haber yo leido el libro, se lo preste mi amigo, 2. A pesar de no bien trabajar, quiere que le paguen bien. 3. Ademds de ser haragan, gasta mucho. 4. Sin embargo de ser muy pobre, quiere pasar por rico. 5. Antes de consentir yo a lo que el quiere, debo examinar si el tiene razdn. 6. Perdono a sus enemigos, antes de morir. 7. En consecuencia de haberle yo dicho que viniera, vino. 8. En cuanto a tener yo que haoer todos los gastos, lo veremos. 9. i Que contestar a tal pregunta I 10. i Como saber si mi amigo esta en la ciudad] 11. j A donde ir para encontrarle 1 12. Este hombre me ha ofendido demasiado por poder perdonarle yo. 13. El muchacho tomo el libro sin darselo yo. 14. Sin verme nadie, entre en mi cuarto. 15. No haga V. nada antes de consultarine. 16. [ Porque hizo V. eso ? 17. Lo hize sin saber lo que estaba haciendo. 18. Ade- mas de ser el mi amigo, lo es tambien de V 19. Quiero hacerlo sin decirselo a nadie. 20. Le di la carta por creer que era para 61. Exercise 94. 1. After having written his letters, he went out. 2. You cannot obtain that situation, unless you speak Spanish and English. 3. DC not go out without seeing me. 4. Michael (Miguel) is punished foi having spoken. 5. Do not speak without knowing. 6. Besides being very rich, he is also very generous. 7. Notwithstanding that I told him not to do it, he would not obey me. 8. How shall I do that ? 9. Where shall I look for my books ? 10. He could not follow us (on account of his) being too old. 11. Before going away, he said that he would not return. 12. Although he works badly (mat), he wishes to be paid like a good workman. 13. After he had rested, he con- 260 LESSON 47. tinned his journey. 14. Besides his not reading the letter, he tore it to pieces (la hizo pedazos). 15. Besides receiving him in my house, I gave him money and clothes. 16. They invoked their divinities before attacking the enemy. 17. He took the money without my giving it to him. 18. He is sick on account of having eaten too much. 19. Besides not paying us, he says that we owe him money. 20. I wish you to do it without saying a word to him. Gramatica. Grammar. 1, Some of the prepositions given above which govern the infinitive have different meanings. For, for instance, has the meaning of on account of or because in the following sentence : No me" admitido por ser estrangero, He was not admitted on account of his being a stranger, while in the next sentence it is to be rendered by instead of: Le df mi libro por darle el suyo, / gave him my book instead of giving him his own. 2, The infinitive is often governed also by the conjunctions como, how, and que, that, by the adverb donde, where, and by the interrogative pronouns : No ee c6mo acahar esto, I don't know how to finish that. Le traigo que comer, / bring you to eat. j C6ino decir lo que siento ! How shall I say wtytt I feel ! i No sahe V. a quien vender su Do you not know to whom you could caballo ? sell your horse f NOTE. The above examples can only be explained by an ellipsis, by which the natural object of the infinitive is omitted : No se como (puedo) acabar esto, I don't know how (lean) finish that. \ C6rao (podre) decir lo que siento ! How (shall I be able) to say what I feel! Le traigo (algo que V. pueda) co- / bring you (something that you mer, can) eat. THE GERUND AND PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 261 3. The infinitive sentences may also be rendered in Spanish by the present indicative or by the subjunctive mood, by adopting a different construction : Despues de haberle dado el dinero sa- ) . _., _ , , , , , , .(After I had given him the money, he ho or Despues que le hube dado el ( ... \ went out. dinero, saho, Tras de que no me paga no me saluda, Sail sin verme el or ) ~ , , . f Sail sin que el me viera, ) salute me. I went out without his seeing me. Leceidn XLVIII. Lesson XLVIIL THE GERUND AND PRESENT PARTICIPLE, 1. Amar, 1. to love; Causar, 1. to cause ; Habit ar, 1. to inhabit ; Participar , 1 . to participate ; Tocar, 1. to touch; Obedecer, 2. to obey ; Pertenecer, 2. to belong; Segnir, 3. to follow; amando, aniante, loving. causando, causante, causing. habitando, habitante, inhabiting. participando, participante, participating. tocando, tocante, touching. obedeciendo, obediente, obeying. ' perteneciendo, perteneciente, belonging. siguiendo, siguiente, following. Vocabulario. El almirante, the admi- ral. El capit&n, the captain. El colegio, the college. El enemigo, the enemy. El estudio, the study. El habitante, the inhab- itant. El lado, the side. El ojo, the eye. El palacio, the palace. El precepto, the precept. El puente, the bridge. El reino, the kingdom. La capital, the capital. La equivocaci6n, the mis- take. La escuadra, the squad- ron. La guerra, the war. La bora, the time. La imprenta, the press. La posada, the inn. La posesion, the posses- sion. La Tartaria, Tartary. La victoria, the victory. Dentro de, within. Vocabulary. For, through. Atravesar, 1. to cross over. Construir, 3. to construct. Desobedecer, 2. to disobey. Explicar, 1. to explain. Licenciar, 1. to disband. Montar, 1 . to mount. Eeir, 3. to laugh. Sacar, 1. to draw. Salir (2) de, to leave. Sublevar, 1 . to revolt. Suspender, 2. to suspend. 262 LESSON 48. Exercise 95. 1. Los muchachos llegaron liorando de la escuela, pues habian sido castigados. 2. Hablando de otra cosa, como esta su padre de V. ? 3. Esta muy bien hoy, gracias. 4. Pasando el otro dia por la calle nueva, vi a su amigo de V. 5. Saliendo yo de la iglesia, entraba el. 6. No sabiendo que hacer, dormi todo el dia. 7. Los estudiantes de nuestro colegio acabaran sus estudios dentro de pocos dias. 8. 6l entro riendo, pero salio llorando. 9. Diciendo esto, salio del cuarto. 10. Estando el padre en Francia, murio el hijo en Nueva York. 11. Habiendo el general ganado la victoria, tomo la fortaleza. 12. Temiendo el emperador que volviese a empezar la guerra, licencio solo una parte de su ejercito. 13. Habiendo el rey mandado que suspendiesen la libertad de imprenta, se sublevo el pais. 14. Habi- endo sabido que su hermano no habia venido, mando per el. 15. Los hombres habiendo de temer a Dios, desobedecen sus preceptos. 16. Los habitantes de esta ciudad son muy industriosos. 17. Creyendo yo encontrar a mi amigo, fui muy temprano a su casa. 18. Los hijos de este pobre hombre son muy obedientes. 19. Habiendo el general hecho construir un puente, pas6 todo el ejercito al otro lado del rio. 20. Cuando entre, estaba el durmiendo. 21. j Que estaban haciendo los muchachos en el cuarto ? 22. Algunos estaban jugando, y otros estudiando. 23. Queriendo sacar su reloj, vi6 que se lo habian robado. 24. Siendo capitan el almirante Blake, fue mandado con una pequefia escuadra contra las posesiones esparto! as. 25. Yiajando un extranjero por la Tartaria llego a la capital del reino y por equivocacidn tomo el palacio del rey por una posada piiblica. Exercise 96, 1. To whom were you writing this morning ? 2. I was writing to my brother in Paris. 3. My father having heard that you were in town, has sent me to invite you to his house. 4. As we were passing through your street, we met Miss Mary. 5. While we were in Paris, we heard that your father was very sick. 6. Not knowing what to do, we wrote to our friends. 7. When he opened his eyes he saw his brother near his bed. 8. I have been reading the whole morning. 9. I saw the boys stealing the apples in the garden. 10. If you ex- plain our lesson to us, we shall understand it. 11. To-morrow at this time, we shall be travelling. 12. If I have time, I will do it. THE GERUND AND PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 263 13. The general, having defeated the enemy, was received by the king. 14. The captain having mounted his horse, left the city. 15. When he saw the soldiers coining, he called me. 16. Hannibal having crossed the Alps, defeated the Romans. 17. Having studied the English language for several years, I speak it well now. 18. My brother is a student in that college. 19. When my father gave me the money, I paid all my debts. 20. As he was traveling through Eng- land, he met all our friends. 21. Those children are very disobedi- ent. 22. He has annoyed us by talking too much. 23. As I was not able to do it alone, I told my brother to help me. 24. Why are these little girls crying ? 25. Because they have lost their mother. Gramatica. Grammar. 1, In Spanish the gerund is clearly distinguished both in form and usage from the present participle. The latter may now be considered as forming no part of the verb, and the forms which remain are either adjectives or nouns. The present participle was formed by the addition of -ante or -ente to the verb stem : Diferente, different. (Diferir, to differ.) Obediente, obedient. (Obedecer, to obey.) El amante, the lover. (Amar, to love.) El presidente, the president. (Presidir, to preside.) NOTE. This form may be found taking the place of other parts of speech, or even of the gerund itself. Such are, however, rather rare. 2. We refer the student to Lesson 19 for the formation of the gerund and for some of the rules relating to this tense. 3, There are cases when the gerund and the infinitive may be used alike : Le vi cazando or cazar, I saw him hunting or hunt. 4. When a motion is expressed, either the gerund of the verb ir, 3. to go, or that of andar, 1 . to walk, may precede the other verbs : Yendo or Andandome paseando, le Going to take a walk, I met him. encontre, 264 LESSON 48. 5. The gerund is also used : 1st. When it indicates the s*ate of the subject : Habla durmiendo, He speaks while he sleeps. 2d. When the verb expresses the cause of an action : Temiendo el que le atacasen, tomo Fearing that they would attack him, sus pistolas, he took his pistols. * NOTE. In sentences like the above, the gerund may be replaced by the infinitive with por : Por temer el que le atacasen, etc. 3d. When the verb expresses means or instrumentality : Estudiando se aprende, One learns by studying. NOTE. The infinitive preceded by con, with, may be used in the above sentence : Con estudiar se aprende. 6. The compound gerund or participio de preterite is of the same nature as the gerund and is used in the same way : Habiendo el hijo perdido a su padre, The son, having lost his father, volvio a su pais, returned to his country. 7. The gerund is often used in Spanish in cases where the English use the Conjunctions as, since, if, and the adverbs when, while, whilst : Siendo asi, no saldre, Since it is so, I shall not go out. No teniendo dinero, no puedo ir al As I have no money, I cannot go to teatro, the theater. Viendome tan triste, se puso a When he saw me so sad, he began llorar, . to cry. Habiendo el de venir aca, se file" al While he was to come here, he went teatro, to the theater. NOTE. Many sentences rendered in Spanish by the gerund might, however, be used as in English with the tenses of the indicative or of the subjunctive with such words as como, as ; luego que, as soon as; cuando, asi que, when, etc. Viendome or Asi que me vio, When he saw me. THE GERUND AND PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 265 8. The gerund (simple or compound) is most elegantly used in Spanish at the beginning of the sentence, especially in short narrations, the subject being sometimes separated from its verb : Paseando un dia por la calle el As President Jefferson was one Presidente Jefferson, con un co- day walking through the street merciante, contesto al saludo de with^ merchant, he answered un negro que pasaba. i Porque, the salutation of a passing ne- le pregimto el comerciante, se presta gro. Why does your Excel- V. a saludar un esolavo ? lency deign to salute a slave ? Sentiria mucho, contesto el Presi- asked the merchant. / should dente, que un esclavo me excediese be very sorry, answered the Presi' en urbanidad. dent, that a slave should surpass 9. Verbs of the 3d conjugation ending in -chir, -llir and -nir form their gerund in endo and not in iendo, as the diph- thong ie very seldom stands after ch, 11 and n. We must there- fore say : cinendo, from cenir, 3. to gird; hinchendo, from henchir, 3. to Jill; riendo, from reir, 3. to laugh. The i is also omitted for the same reason in the 3d persons of the preterit of the indicative and in all the persons of the subjunctive of the same verbs: rino, from reiiir, 3. to quarrel; engulleres, from engullir, 3. to ingulf; etc. The verb volver, 2. followed by the preposition & before an infinitive, expresses the repetition of the action indicated by the infinitive : Vuelvo a saUr, / go out again. 266 LESSON 49. Leccion XLIX. Lesson XLIX. THE PAST PARTICIPLE. Ejemplos. Este libro esta bien escrito. Estos libros estan bien escritos. La casa esta acabada. Las casas estan acabados. He recibido una carta de Paris. Henios visto el teatro nuevo, Los muchachos han coniido las manzanas. Nuestros soldados han derrotado al enemigo. La leccion que V. nos ha dado, es muy dificil. El enemigo atacado por todas partes, se retir6. Bien sabido es, que este hombre es rico. Llamado un cirujano, examine la herida. Irregular Abrir, 3. to open ; Cubrir, 3. to cover ; Decir, 3. to say, to tell ; Escribir, 3. to write ; Hacer, 2. to make, to do ; Imprimir, 3. to print; Morir, 3. to die; Poner. 2. to put; Besolver, 2. to resolve; Ver, 2. to see ; Volver, to return ; Examples. This book is well written. These books are well written. The house is finished. The houses are finished. I have received a letter from Paris. We have seen the new theater. The boys have eaten the apples. Our soldiers have defeated the enemy. The lesson which you have given us is very difficult. The enemy, being attacked on all sides, retired. It is well known that this man is rich. A surgeon having been called, he examined the wound. Participles. abierto, opened. cubierto, covered. dicho, said, told. escrito, written. hecho, made, done. impreso, printed. muerto, died. puesto, put. resuelto, resolved. visto, seen. vuelto, returned. Participles having often an active meaning. Acostumbrado, accustomed. Atrevido, bold. Agradecido, grateful. Bien hablado, well spoken. THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 267 Callado, reserved. Cansado, tiresome. Comedido, well behaved. Desesperado, despairing. Disimulado, dissimulated. Entendido, experienced. Esforzado, bold. Leido, well read. Medido, prudent. Mirado, considerate. Moderado, moderate. Osado, bold. Parado, slow. Parecido, resembling. Partido, liberal. Pausado, cautious. Porfiado, obstinate. Precavido, cautious. Preciado, vain. Presumido, conceited. Recatado, wise. Sabido, learned. Sentido, sensible. Sufrido, patient. Trascendido, acute. Valido, influential. Vocabulario El Congreso, the Congress. El cuadro, the picture. El desuso, the desuetude. El dia festive, the holiday. El grande, the grandee. El Moro, the Moor. El mundo, the world. El refresco, the refreshment. La atencion, the attention. La cena, the supper. La comida, the eating, the dinner. La discordia, the discord. La inocencia, the innocence. La ley, the law. La memoria, the memory. La ociosidad, the idleness. La palabra, the word. La perdida, the loss. La prerogativa, the prerogative. La salida, the exit. Vocabulary. Agradable, agreeable. Cierto, certain. Enorme, enormous. Fernando, Ferdinand. Isabel, Isabella. For desgracia, unfortunately, Porfiado, obstinate. Presumido, conceited. Atrasar, 1. to delay. Casar, 1. to marry. Concluir, 3. to conclude. Convencer, 2. to convince. Defender, 2. to defend. Establecer, 2. to establish. Ofrecer, 2. to offer. Pintar, 1. to depict. Reinar, 1. to reign. Beparar, 1. to compensate. Sufocar, 1. to suffocate. Volver, 2. to turn. Exercise 97. 1. Concluida la cena, todo el mundo salid. 2. Sail de la casa resuelto a verle. 3. Derrotados los enemigos, volvieron a pasar el rio. 4. i Ha recibido V. la carta que yo le he escrito ? 5. La he recibido esta manana. 6. Vi a su amigo de V. d la salida del teatro. 7. La 268 LESSON 49. coraida es muy buena en esta fonda. 8. Debemos considerar conio perdidos los dias que pasamos en la ociosidad. 9. La discordia ha siernpre reinado en el uni verso. 10. Las puertas estaban abiertas y entraban todos los que querian. 11. j ife. oido V. cantar aquella seiiora? 12. La oi cantar el domingo pasado en nuestra iglesia. 13. [ Ha visto V. los cuadros que mi hermano ha comprado ? 14. To- davia no los he visto. 15. Esta ley ha sido establecida por el Con- greso. 16. Le hemos mandado a V. todos los libros que V. nos ha pedido. 17. Las cartas estaban tan mal escritas que no pudimos leerlas. 18. Este hombre es muy honrado, siempre me ha devuelto el dinero que le he prestado. 19. i Es verdad que ha muerto Pedro ? 20. Por desgracia es cierto. 21. [ Ha padecido mucho ? 22. No puede V. imaginar lo que ha padecido. 23. Es V., amigo Pablo, el hombre mas porfiado del mundo. 24. No podremos comprar hoy lo que necesitamos, pues los dias festivos estan cerrados los almacenes. 25. Tengo uua hermana casada en Madrid, con un medico espanol ; y coino la visite el ano pasado, he aprendido a hablar un poco espanol. 26. Me habian pintado el viaje como bastante desagradable ; pero fue al contrario muy agradable, menos el habernos atrasado unas ocho horas en el camino. 27. Don Juan ha dado el brazo a mi madre hasta el coche. 28. No se como reparar la enorme perdida que he hecho. 29. Las prerogatives de los grandes de Espana ban sido muchas, pero todas han caido en desuso. 30. Estamos sofocados con el calor que tenemos aqui desde que principio el verano. Exercise 98. 1. These things have passed from my memory. 2. We have read all the books you have lent us ; have you received any others ? 3. We can lend you those we bought the other day. 4. Where have you been ? 5. I have been to the ball. 6. Why have not the chil- dren gone to school to-day ? 7. Because one of their teachers has died. 8. I don 't know where I have put my gk|ves ; will you do me the favor to look for them for me ? 9. I believe that you have left them in your room. 10. Do you know what your father has re- solved ? 11. He has not resolved anything yet. 12. Whom have you seen in that house ? 13. I have not seen anybody. 14. You must not leave your windows open during the night. 15. John is loved by no one, because he is too conceited. 16. My friend will come after (the) dinner. 17. The war with Portugal being concluded, THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 269 Ferdinand and Isabella turned their attention to the Moors of Gran- ada. 18. I have lost one of my books, I don't know how. 19. That soldier has lost his arm while defending his country. -30. Have you heard what that man has said 1 21. I have heard every word. 22. Have you offered anything to those ladies I 23. Yes, sir, I have offered them refreshments. 24. Have you seen our new theater 1 25. I have not seen anything yet, I have not been out for (desde) three days. 26. How were your sisters dressed for the ball ? 27. They were dressed in (de) white. 28. I have been so busy this morning, that I have not been able to write to your father. 29. Our friends arrived this morning, but we have not seen them yet. 30. Being convinced of his innocence, I defended him. Gramatica. Grammar. 1. The past participle of the verbs of the 1st conjugation, as has been already said (L. 17, R. 5), ends in ado; and those of the 2d and 3d conjugations end in ido, the irregular participles being given above. 2. The past participle as well as the gerund is at the same time an adjective, being derived from the verb, as in this sen- tence : Una carta bien escrita, A well written letter. 3. The past participle is not limited to a certain definite time, but may refer to any past time, according to the tense with which it is combined. It loses its passive signification when connected with the verb haber, 2. to have ; to form the tenses of the verbo active, active verb. With intransitive, unipersonal, and reflexive verbs, it can only have an active signification, as these verbs do not admit the passive form. 4* It has already been observed (L. 18, R. 1), that the past participle joined to the verb haber, 2. to have, is invariable, although it had formerly a feminine termination, and agreed with its object. 270 LESSON 49. Joined with the verbs ser, 2. to be, and estar, 1. to be; the past participle is considered as an adjective, and agrees in gen- der and number with its subject : La casa esta acabada, The house is finished. Los buenos muchachos son amados, Good boys are loved. 5. The past participle often occurs in Spanish in an absolute construction, and corresponds then to the Latin ablative absolute. In such cases it is generally placed before the noun, with which it agrees in gender and number : Aprovechadas estas ventajas se fa- Through profiting by these advan- cilita el aprender, tages, learning is made easier. NOTE. The subject may, however, precede the participle, when both sentences have the same subject : El enemigo atacado de todas partes, The enemy, being attacked on all se retire, sides, retired. 6. A preposition may sometimes precede the past participle : Despues de restablecida la paz flo- After peace is reestablished the arts receran las artes, will flourish. NOTE. As seen by the above examples, the participle is in one case in an absolute construction, while in the other the auxiliary verb is omitted : Siendo aprovechadas estas ventajas, etc., despues de ser restablecida la paz, etc. 7. Past participles used as adjectives may govern the prepo- sition de or por, the preference being generally given to de : Es un hombre despreciado de todos, He is a man despised by all. 8. Those participles which have an active meaning, have also a passive one : Active sense. Passive sense. Hombre leido, a well read man. Libro leido, a book read. Mujer leida, a well read woman. Carta leida, a letter read. 9. Many past participles are used as nouns in the feminine form : bebida, drink, beverage ; entrada, entrance, salida, exit, departure; llegada, arrival; comida, dinner, eating; medida, measure ; corrida, race ; mirada, look ; vista, sight ; etc. THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 271 Leccion L. Lesson L. THE PAST PARTICIPLE (Continued). Principal Spanish Verbs having two Participles. Abstraer, 2. to abstract; Aceptar, 1. to accept; Astriugir, 3. to contract; Atender, 2. to heed ; Bendecir, 3. to bless; Compeler, 2. to compel; Completar, 1 . to complete ; Comprender, 2. to understand; Comprimir, 3. to compress; Concluir, 3. to conclude ; Confesar, 1. to confess ; Conf undir, 3. to confound ; Contentar, 1. to content; Contraer, 2. to contract ; Convencer, 2. to convince ; Convertir, 3. to convert ; Corregir, 3. to correct ; Corromper, 2. to corrupt; Cultivar, 1. to cultivate; Desertar, 1. to desert; Desnudar, 1. to lay bare; Despertar, 1. to awake; Dif undir, 3. to diffuse; Dirigir, 3. to direct ; Dispersar, 1. to disperse; Distinguir, 3. to distinguish; Dividir, 3. to divide ; Eligir, 3. to elect; Enjugar, 1. to wipe; Erigir, 3. to erect ; Exceptuar, 1. to except; Excluir, 3, to exclude ; Exentar, 1, to exempt ; Expeler, 2. to expel; Expresar, 1. to express; Extender, 2. to extend; abstraido, abstracto, abstracted. aceptado, acepto, accepted. astringido, astricto, contracted. atendido, atento, heeded. bendecido, bendito, blessed. compelido, compulso, compelled. completado, complete, completed. comprendido, comprenso, understood. comprimido, compreso, compressed. concluido, concluso, concluded. confesado, confeso, confessed. confundido, confuso, confounded. contentado, contento, contented. contraido, contracto, contracted. convencido, convicto, convinced. convertido, converse, converted. corregido, correcto, corrected. corrompido, corrupto, corrupted. cultivado, culto, cultivated. desertado, deserto, deserted, desnudado, desnudo, laid bare. despertado, despierto, awaked. difundido, difuso, diffused. dirigido, directo, directed. dispersado, disperse, dispersed. distinguido, distinto, distinguished. dividido, diviso, divided. elegido, electo, elected. enjngado, enjnto, wiped. erigido, erecto, erected. exceptuado, excepto, excepted. excluido, excluso, excluded. exentado, exento, exempted. expelido, expulso, expelled. expresado, expreso, expressed. extendido, extenso, extended. 274 LESSON 50. 18. Fue un accidente imprevisto, y a nadie podemos culpar. 19. To- das las mesas en la casa estaii rotas. 20. Estos libros han sido impresos en Paris. Exercise 100. 1. My friend invited me to dine with him, but I could not accept his invitation. 2. I was awake when your friends arrived in the night. 3. These two friends are always together. 4 The flowers you bought for your sister are already faded. 5. The roads are not dry yet, and we will have to take a carriage. 6. Fill the empty glasses with (de) wine. 7. More than fifty men were buried under the ruins of the old church. 8. The thieves were caught and taken to (the) prison. 9. The mob has been dispersed by the soldiers. 10. We have included all our expenses in the account we gave you. 11. Do you know if the fire has been extinguished ? 12. It was ex- tinguished when I passed through the street. 13. This young man has been exempted from military service. 14. He has confessed that he has spent all his money in buying trifles. 15. The inhabitants of the city have erected a statue to that great man. 16. I have been obliged to sell my favorite horse. 17. All these maxims were in- scribed on the walls of our school. 18. These men have been expelled from their country for their liberal opinions. Gramatlca. Grammar. 1. Many verbs have in Spanish two past participles, a regu- lar and an irregular one. The regular participle of such verbs must be used in compound tenses with the verb haber, 2. to have ; or when the sentence is passive : Le hem os convencido de su error. We have convinced him of his error. Fueexpulsado del pais, He was expelled from the country, The irregular participle is used as an adjective and can never be accompanied by the auxiliary haber, 2. to have. 2, The irregular past participles of the following verbs are perhaps oftener used with haber than are the regular : Freir, to fry, freido, Mto. Proveer, to provide, proveido, provisto. Prender, to take, prendido, preso. Romper, to break, rompido, roto. THE PASSIVE VERB. 275 Lcccion LI. Lesson LI, THE PASSIVE VERB (TOZ PA8IVA). INFINIT. PRES. : PRET. PERF. : FUTURO : PART. PAS. : GERUNDIO : PART. PRET. : PART. FUTURO : INDIC. PRES. : PRET. IMPERF. : PRET. DEFINIDO: PRET. INDEFIN. : PRET. ANTERIOR: PRET. PLUSCUAMP. FUTURO IMPERF. FUTURO PERF.: Ser alabado, to Ser alabad-o, -a, -os, -as, haber sido alabad-o, -a, -os, -as, haber de ser alabad-o, -a, -os, -as, alabad-o, -a, -os -as, siendo alabado, habiendo sido alabado, habiendo de ser alabado, yo soy alabado (a), nosotros (as) somos alabados (as), yo era alabado, yo fin alabado, yo he sido alabado, yo hube sido alabado, ) : yo habia sido alabado, ) yo sere alabado, yo habre sido alabado, to be praised. being praised, having been praised, having to be praised. I am praised. COND. SIMP. : yo seria alabado, IMPERATIVE : SUBJ. PRES. : SUBJ. IMPERF.: PRET. PERF. : PLUSCUAMPERF. : COND. COMP. : FUTURO IMP.: FUTURO COMP.: se alabado, que yo sea alabado, que yo fuere or fuese alabado, que yo haya sido alabado, qtie yo hubiera ) . ... > sido alabado, que yo hubiese ) yo habria sido alabado, yo fuere alabado, yo hubiere sido alabado, / was praised. I have been praised. I had been praised. I shall or will be praised. I shall or will have been praised. I should or would be praised, be praised. that I may be praised, that I might be praised, that I may have been praised, that I might have been praised. I should or would have been praised. I shall be praised. Ejemplos. La casa del general esta vendida. Los enemigos han sido derrotados. Examples. The general's house is sold. The enemy has been defeated. 272 LESSON 50. Extinguir, 3. to extinguish ; Extraer, 2. to extract; Favorecer, 2. to favor ; Fijar, 1. to fix: Fingir, 3. to feign; Freir, 3. to fry ; Hartar, 1. to satiate; Imprimir, 3. to impress; to print; Improvisar, 1. to extemporize ; Incluir, 3. to include ; Infectar, 1. to infect; Inscribir, 3. to inscribe ; Inserir, 3. ) T , } to insert ; Insertar, 1. J Invertir, 3. to invert ; Juntar, 1. to join; Limpiar, 1. to clear; Maldecir, 3. to curse ; Manifestar, 1. to manifest ; Marchitar, 1. to fade; Nacer, 2. to be born ; Ocultar, 1. to conceal ; Omitir, 3. to omit ; Oprimir, 3. to oppress ; Perfeccionar, 1. to perfect; Pervertir, 3. to pervert; Poseer. 2. to possess; Prender, 2. to catch ; Prescribir, 3. to prescribe ; Presumir, 3. to presume; Pretender, 2. to pretend; Profesar, 1. to prof ess ; Proscribir, 3. to proscribe; Proveer, 2. to provide ; Repletar, 1. to fill; Komper, 2. to break ; Salvar, 1. to save; Secar, 1. to dry ; Sepultar, 1. to bury ; Situar, 1. to place ; Soltar, 1. to let loose ; Sujetar, 1. to subject; extinguido, extinto, extinguished. extraido, extracto, extracted. tavorecido, favorite, favored. fijado, fijo, fixed. fingido, ficto, feigned. freido, f rito, fried. hartado, harto, satiated. imprimido, impreso, impressed, printed. improvisado, improviso, extemporized. incluido, incluso, included. infectado, infecto, infected. inscribido, inscrito, inscribed. inserido, inserto, inserted. invertido, inverto, inverted. juntado, junto, joined. limpiado, limpio, cleared. maldecido, maldito, cursed. manifestado, manifesto, manifested. marchitado, marchito, faded. nacido, nato, been born. ocultado, oculto, concealed. omitido, omiso, omitted. oprimido, opreso, oppressed. perfeccionado, perfecto, perfected. pervertido, perverse, perverted. poseido, poseso, possessed. prendido, preso, caught. prescribido, prescrito, prescribed. presumido, presunto, presumed. pretendido, pretense, pretended. prof esado, profeso, professed. proscribido, groscrito, proscribed. proveido, provisto, provided. repletado, repleto, filled. rompido, roto, broken. salvado, salvo, saved. secado. seco, dried. sepultado, sepulto, buried. situado, sito, placed. soltado, suelto, let loose. sujetado, sujeto, subjected. THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 273 Suprimir, 3. to suppress; Suspender, 2. to suspend; Sustituir, 3. to substitute ; Tender, 2. to spread ; Tenir, 3. to dye ; Torcer, 2. to twist; Vaciar, 1. to empty ; suprimido, supreso, suppressed. suspendido, suspense, suspended. sustituido, sustituto, substituted. tendido, tenso, spread. tenido, tinto, dyed. torcido, tuerto, twisted. vaciado, vacio, emptied. Vocabulario. El accidente, the accident. El cielo, the heaven. El colera, the cholera. El monte, the mountain. El monumento, the monument. El muro, the wall. El pescuezo, the neck. El populacho, the mob. El servicio, the service. La bagatela, the trifle. La carcel, the prison. La cuenta, the account. La estatua, the statue. La invitation, the invitation. Vocabulary. La liberalidad, the liberality. La lista, the list. La maxima, tJie maxim. La opinion, the opinion. La obra, the work. La ruina, the ruin. La silla, the chair. Bajo, under. Delante, before. Junto, together. Liberal, liberal. Militar, military. Vacio, empty. Exercise 99. 1. [Quien ha abierto la puerta y ha puesto una silla delante? 2. I No le he dicho yo a V. que habia visto a su hermana en el teatro ] 3. He escrito todo lo que V. me ha prescrito. 4. Estoy convencido que mi amigo llegara hoy mismo. 5. El colera ha infectado a raucha gente, y todavia hay muchos que estan infectos. 6. El cocinero ha torcido el pescuezo de la gallina. 7. El buque esta provisto de todo lo necesario. 8. Los ladrones estaban ocultos en el monte, pero han sido prendklos por los soldados. 9. Aunque estuviese yo despierto, el pretende que me ha despertado. 10. El cielo ha bendecido sus obras. 11. Estoy tan confuso que no se lo que estoy haciendo. 12. No me han permitido salir todavia. 13. Este cuadro no esta todavia completo. 14. Todavia no hemos comprendido lo que el queria decir. 15. Hemos corregido todos los ejercicios,y ahora estan correctos. 16. Son los hombres mas corruptos que hemos conocido. 17. No comprendo lo que esta inscrito en (on) este monuinento. 18 276 LESSON 61. El puente esta construido. Mi conducta ha sido aprobada. La carta ha sido escrita por el. Los muchachos ban sido castigados. Mi sombrero esta perdido. Hemos sido enganados. fil es estimado y amado. Queremos ser obedecidos. The bridge is built. My conduct has been approved. The letter has been written by him. The boys have been punished. My hat is lost. We have been deceived. He is esteemed and loved. We wish to be obeyed. Examples with the pronoun se : Esto se ve a menudo. El cafe se vende Men. Se ama al hombre de bien. Se admira la sabiduria de Socrates. Esto no se puede hacer asi. Aqui se habla espanol. No se puede ver cosa mas mara- villosa. Vocabulario. El diputado, the deputy. El gobierno, the government. El objeto, the object. El retrato, the picture. El terremoto, the earthquake. La cantatriz, the singer. La ciencia, the science. La comedia, the comedy. La conjuraci6n, the conspiracy. La juventud, the youth. La licencia, the license. La muerte, the death. La necesidad, the necessity. La obra, the work. La sentencia, the maxim. That is often seen. Coffee sells well. The honest man is loved. The wisdom of Socrates is admired. That cannot be done so. Spanish is spoken here. Nothing more wonderful can be seen. Vocabulary. La tienda, the shop. Barato, cheap. Escipidn, Scipio. Alabar, 1. to praise. Alquilar, 1. to let. Arruinar, 1. to ruin. Componer, 2. to compose. Destruir, 3. to destroy. Escoger, 2. to select. Eligir, 3. to elect. Favorecer, 2. to favor. Reconocer, 2. to know. Eepresentar, 1. to play. Reprimir, 3. to repress. Restablecer, 2. to reestablish. Exercise 101. 1. Este pano se vende en la tienda del Senor Palma. 2. Se ban admirado mucho las sentencias de Seneca. 3. Las ciencias ban siempre sido favorecidas por los buenos gobiernos. 4. Este principe no sera alabado despu.es de su muerte. 5. La cantatriz ha sido muy THE PASSIVE VERB. 277 aplaudida anoche. 6. Mi aniigo ha sido eligido diputado de su ciudad. 7. j Que se dice en la ciudad ? 8. Se dice que el azucar se vendera muy bien este ano. 9. Este retrato ha sido hecho por uiio de nuestros mejores pintores. 10. Esta senora es amada y estimada de todos los que la conocen. 11. Se ve que V. esta contento hoy. 12. No engaiiamos a nadie, pero somos engauados muy a menudo. 13. Estos muchachos han sido alabados por sus maestros. 14. No hemos sido convidados por su hermano, y asi no hemos ido a su casa. 15. i Se hubiera descubierto la conjuraci6n de Catilina, si Ciceron no hubiese sido consul ? 16. Se reconoce al verdadero amigo en la necesi- dad. 17. i Sabe Y. si se vende esa casa ? 18. No, senor, se alquila. 19. Esta obra ha sido coinpuesta por mi amigo. 20. La hacienda ha sido vendida despues de la muerte del dueno. 21. La licencia fu^ reprimida y la paz restablecida en el pais. 22. Estas cosas han sido escogidas por mi hermano cuando estaba en Paris. 23. No se puede saber como le fue posible al ladrdn entrar en la casa. 24. Estoy seguro que esta carta no ha sido escrita por el. 25. Se cree que el Presidente llegara esta manana. Exercise 102. 1. These goods have been received from England. 2. Where have these objects been found ? 3. They have been found in a carriage. 4. Those glasses have been broken by the children. 5. Those houses have been sold very cheap. 6. The general had been wounded sev- eral times in his youth. 7. This letter has been written by one of our friends. 8. What would you have done if you had known that ? 9. I would have done the same thing that I have done. 10. If you go to his house, you will be very well received. 11. This comedy has been played twice at (en) the large theater. 12. Have the thieves been caught ? 13. Two of them have been caught. 14. If I had been invited to the ball, I would have gone with my sister. 15. It is said that there has been a great fire in the city. 16. It was said yesterday that the general had died. 17. That city has been de- stroyed by an earthquake. 18. I think that coffee will sell very wel] this year. 19. Such things are often seen. 20. French goods are sold in that store. 21. Hannibal was conquered by Scipio. 22. The beautiful house of the banker will be sold this week. 23. Youi orother is seen every afternoon in the park. 24. They speak oni)- French in that school. 25. Our friends have been ruined by the war 278 LESSON 51. 26. All the sugar has been bought by that merchant. 27- I have been deceived several times by that man. 28. That child is loved by everybody. Gramatica. Grammar. 1. Passive verbs are conjugated in all their tenses with the auxiliary verb ser, 2. to be. To this auxiliary the past participle of active or transitive verbs is added, the same agreeing in gen- der and number with the subject : El muchacho es amado, The boy is loved. La muchacha es amada, The girl is loved. Los muchachos son ainados, The boys are loved. Las muchachas son amadas, The girls are loved. 2. Active verbs are often used passively with the pronoun se in the third person singular or plural (Of. Lesson LII.) : Estos libros se venden en aquella Those books are sold in that book- libreria, store. No se puede ver nadar, Nothing can be seen. El cafe se vende bien, Coffee sells well. 3. It is to be noticed, however, that when a passive sentence is formed with the pronoun se, this sentence may preserve the construction of the active : Se ama al hombre de bien, The honest man is loved. 4. The verb remains invariable in the singular when the passive subject is a person, and the acting ablative is not expressed : Es dolor el ver como se aprecia mas It is painful to see that infamous a los in fames aduladores que a flatterers are more esteemed than los hombres honrados. honorable men. 5* The past participle remains invariable with the compound tense of the verb : Se ha amado a Maria por sus vir- Mary has been loved for her virtues. tudes, REFLEXIVE VERBS. . 6. When the object of the sentence is a thing, or when the acting ablative is expressed, the verb agrees with the object, although the past participle remains invariable : \ Oh siglo miserable, en el cual se miserable century, in which virtue estiman las virtudes por bicocas, is considered as nothing when ac- cuando las acompana la pobreza ! companied by poverty ! Se ban admirado mucho las senten- The maxims of Seneca have been cias de Seiieca pqr sus proprios much admired, even by his ene- enemigos, mies. 7t The verbs quedar, 1. to remain, and ir, 3. to go, may sometimes be used instead of ser to give more expression to the sentence s Ha quedado verificado que eso no It has been proved that this is not es verdad, true. Va demostrado que la tierra rotura It is proved that the earth revolves alrededor del sol, around the sun. Leccion III. Lesson III. REFLEXIVE VERBS. Pronouns accompanying the Reflexive Terbg. Me, myself. Te, thyself. Se, himself, herself, itself, themselves, yourself, yourselves Nos, ourselves. Os, yourselves. Alabarse, to praise onds self. Infinitive. Alabarse, to praise one's self. Past. Haberse alabado, to have praised one's self, Past Participle. Alabadose, praised one*s self. 280 LESSON 52. Gerund. Alabandose, ^ praising one's self. Habiendose alabado, having praised one's self. Indicative Present. Me alabo, I praise myself. Te alabas, thou praisest thyself. g j , ( he praises himself. ( she praises herself. Nos alabamos, we praise ourselves. Os alabais, you praise yourselves* Se alaban, they praise themselves. V. se alaba (sing. ), you praise yo-urself. VV. se alabau (pl.) t you praise yourselves. etc. etc. Past Indefinite. Me he alabado, I have praised myself . Te has alabado, thou hast praised thyself. , , , , (he has praised himself. Se ha alabado, < _ ( she has praised Mrself. V. se ha (sing.) alabado, you have praised yourself. Nos hemos alabado, we have praised ourselves. Os habeis alabado, you have praised yourselves. Se han alabado, they have praised themselves. VV. se han (pi.) alabado, you have praised yourselves. etc. etc. Imperative. Alabate, praise thyself. Alabaos, Present Subjunctive. Me alabe, / may praise myself. Te alabes, thou mayest praise thyself. Se alabe, he may praise himself. Nos alabemos, we may praise ourselves. Os alabeis, you may praise yourselves. Se alaben, they may praise themselves. REFLEXIVE VERBS. 281 Reflexive verb conjugated with another verb. Yo quiero alabar-me, Tu quieres alabar-te, El quiere alabar-se, Ella quiere alabar-se, V. quiere (sing.) alabar-se, Nosotros queremos alabar-nos, Vosotros quereis alabar-os, Ellos(m.) Ellas (/.) VV. quieren (pi.) alabar-se, Ejemplos. Llamarse, 1. i Como se llama V. ? Me llamo Jose . Equivocarse, 1. V. se equivoca. Sentarse, 1. Sientese V., senora. Levantarse, 1. i A. que hora se le- vanta V. ? Me levanto a las seis. Acostarse, 1. j Porque no se acues- tan los muchachos ? Se acostaran pronto. Pasearse, 1. $ Quiere V. pasearse conmigo? No tengo tieinpo de pasearme. Divertirse, 3. Me divierto mucho aqui. Enfadarse, 1. No se enfade V. Los muchachos se han / will praise myself, thou wilt praise thyself, he will praise himself, she will praise herself, you will praise yourself* we will praise ourselves. they will praise themselves, you will praise yourselves. Examples. What is your name ? My name is Joseph. You are mistaken. Sit down, madam. At what time do you rise ? I rise at six o'clock. Why do not the boys go to bed ? They will soon go to bed. Will you take a walk with me ? I have no time to walk. I amuse myself very much here. Do not get angry. The boys have cut themselves. Cortarse, 1. cortado. Vestirse, 3. Nos vestiremos mas We will dress later. tarde. Caientarse, 1. Calientese V. Verse, 2. No puedo verme en el espejo. Arrepentirse, 3. El se arrepintio antes de inorir. Dirigirse, 3. A quien debo diri- girme ? V. puede dirigirse a mi. Warm yourself. I cannot see myself in the looking- glass. He repented before dying. To whom must I apply ? You may apply to me. Ellas se ban escrito. No nos hemos hablado. They have written to each other. We have not spoken to each other 282 LESSON 52. Vocabulario. El mercader, the merchant. La colocacion, the situation. La Client a, the account. La miseria, the misery. Ligero, quick. Parado, standing. Acordarse, 1. to remember. Acostarse, 1. to go to bed. Apoderarse, 1. to take possession. Banarse, 1. to bathe. Burlarse, 1. to laugh at. Caerse, 2. to fall. Calentar, 1. to warm. Casarse, 1. to marry. Comportarse, 1. to behave. Vocabulary. Defender, 2. to defend. Desmayarse, 1. to faint. Despertarse, 1. to awake. Divertirse, 3. to amuse one's self. Dormirse, 3. to fall asleep. Enfadarse, 1. to get angry. Equivocarse, 1. to make a mistake. Llamarse, 1 . to be called. Levantarse, 1. to rise. Pasearse, 1. to take a walk. Quedarse, 1. to remain. Que j arse, 1. to complain. Quemar, 1. to burn. Eendirse, 3. to surrender. Sent arse. 1. to sit down. Exercise 103. 1. i Porque* no se sienta Y. 1 2. No estoy cansado, prefiero que- darme parado. 3. [ Se divierten W. en el campo ? 4. Nos diverti- mos muchisimo ahi. 5. [ No se equivoca V. cuando V. dice eso ? 6. No me equivoco. 7. [ Porque no se pasea V. todas las mananas ? 8> Me paseo cuando el tiempo esta bueno. 9. Se levanta V. tem- prano ? 10. Me levanto tan pronto como me despierto. 11. Si V. tiene frio, calientese. 12. No se queme V. ; el plato esta muy ca- liente. 13. No se lo que tengo, pero no puedo dormir cuando me acuesto por la noche. 14. Es porque V. se acuesta dernasiado tem- prano, y se levanta demasiado tarde. 15. Como se llama su amigo de V. ? 16. Se llama Juan, y su hermana se llama Maria. 17. j Porque no va V. al jardin a divertirse con los muchachos? 18. No me siento bien, quiero ir a acostarme. 19. Los enemigos se apoderaron de una de nuestras fortalezas. 20. Toda la familia esta en el campo ; yo me he quedado solo en la ciudad. 21. Se acuerda V. de lo que dijo este hombre ? 22. Me acuerdo de todo lo que dijo. 23. Digale V. al mercader que se equivoco en la cuenta que nos mando. 24. [ Porque se queja V. de mi ? 25. Yo no me quejo de nadie. 26. j, Se han hablado estas senoras 1 27. Oreo que no se han hablado. 28. Donde ha conocido V. a este caballero 1 29. Nos hemos conocido en Madrid. 30. i Porque se burlan W. de este hombre ? 31. Porque es muy ridiculo. 32. El hijo de Juan se esta muriendo. 33. La pobre madre REFLEXIVE VERBS. 283 se desmayd cuando le hablaron de la muerte cle an hijo. 34. Mi her- niano se casara cuando tenga una buena colocacion. 35. Si V. no hubiese corrido tan ligero, no se habria caido. Exercise 104. 1 . Why do not the children go to bed ? 2. They will not go to bed. 3. How is that said in Spanish 1 4. I don't know how it is said. 5. What is your name, my friend 1 6. My name is Edward. 7. Why does not your brother get up ; is he sick ? 8. He is not sick, but he always gets up late. 9. Sit down ; I will be ready in a moment. 10. Will you take a walk with us 1 11. With pleasure ; where do you wish to go ? 12. Let us go to the park. 13. Why do you get angry so quickly ? 14. You are mistaken ; I never get angry. 15. Will you not go to the concert with us ? 16. I am so tired that I am afraid to fall asleep. 17. When I was in the country I rose very early, but since I have been (am) in town I rise very late. 18. Have the children taken a walk ? 19. Yes, sir, they take a walk every morning early. 20. What did you say when he complained to you ? 21.1 did not say anything. 22. He believed himself rich, but he was far from being so. 23. These soldiers defended themselves with the greatest courage. 24. That officer covered himself with glory. 25. Where have you known each other ? 26. We have known each other in France. 27. The enemy has surrendered. 28. The children have taken a bath in the river. 29. Don't laugh at that man, because he is poor and old. 30. 1 have never laughed at him. 31. That boy has behaved very badly. 32. She fainted on hearing that. 33. You have made a mis- take in saying that. 34. After having lost his fortune, he saw him- self in the greatest misery. 35. My sister will be married next week. Oramatica. Grammar. 1, Reflexive or pronominal verbs are conjugated in Spanish with two personal pronouns of the same person, i\\v first (ex- pressed or understood) being the subject, and the second, according to the active or neuter meaning of the verb, the direct or indirect object : Yo me divierto or me divierto, I amuse myself. Ill se alaba or se alaba, He praises himself. 284 LESSON 52. NOTE. The indirect pronoun may also be placed after the verb and form but one word with the same : Divertimonos muchisimo, We amuse ourselves much. 2. Eeflexive verbs are either essentially reflexive, that is, they cannot be used without the two personal pronouns } as arre- pentirse, 3. to repent ; acordarse, 1 . to remember, etc., or acci- dentally reflexive, that is, they may be formed as in English, from active or neuter verbs: quemarse, 1. to burn one's self, from quemar, 1. to burn; calentarse, 1. to warm one's self, from calentar, \. to warm, etc. The number of verbs essentially reflexive is limited, but accidentally reflexive verbs are unlimited, since in Spanish, as well as in English, almost any verb may be used reflexively. 3i Many verbs which are reflexive in Spanish are not so in English. Such are, among others, the verbs : Quejarse, 1. to complain. Arrepentirse, 3. to repent. Acordarse, 1. to remember. Apoderarse, 1. to take possession. etc. etc. 4. A reflexive verb, conjugated with another verb, takes the corresponding personal pronoun with the infinitive : Quiero divertirme, I wish to amuse myself. Vamos a banarnos, We are going to take a bath. NOTE. It is to be observed that in this case also the indirect pronoun may precede the first verb: Me quiero divertir, I wish to amuse myself; nos vamos a banar, we are going to take a bath, etc. This is not the better usage. 5* In compound tenses, the object pronoun is placed before the auxiliary : Me he cortado, / have cut myself. Se han burlado de V., They have made fun of you. ]l se ha comprado una casa, He has bought himself a house. 6* Reflexive verbs, when used with plural persons, also ex- press in Spanish a reciprocal or mutual action. When the reciprocal form is not plainly indicated by the simple reflexive, el uno ... el otro, or uno . . . otro must be added to the verb ; REFLEXIVE VERBS 285 Nos alabamos, We praise ourselves. Nos alabamos el uno al otro, We praise each other. Se vieron, pero no se hablaron, They saw each other, but, they did not speak to each other. Se han escrito muchas cartas, They have written many letters to each other. 7. The d of the second person is dropped in the imperative of reflexive verbs : Amaos instead of amados t Love each other. 8. When the present subjunctive forms are used for the im- perative, the object pronoun follows arid is united to the verb. In the first person plural the final s is then dropped : Alabese, let him praise hignself. Alabese V., praise yourself. Alabense, let them praise themselves. Alabense W., praise yourselves. Alabemonos, let us praise ourselves. Amemonos, let us love each other. NOTE. For further details, cf. Lesson XLII. 9. Accidentally reflexive verbs have often a different mean- ing from that of the primitive verb, as for instance : Burlarse de uno, To make fun of some one. Burlar las esperanzas de uno, To destroy the hopes of some one. Dorarirse, 3. to fall asleep. Dormir, 3. to sleep. Desmayarse, 1. to faint. Desmayar, 1. to lose courage. Caerse, 2. to fall. Caer en una falta, to commit a fault. 10. There are many Spanish verbs which may be used either reflexively or not, without altering their meaning : Fiarse or fiar de alguno, To trust somebody. Chancearse or chancear con alguno, To joke ivith some one. Beirse or reir de alguno, To laugh at some one. Se ha muerto or Ha rauerto, He has died. 286 LESSON sa leccion LIIL Lesson LIIL REFLEXIVE VERBS (Continued). Yo me voy, Tii te vas, El se va, Ella se va, V. (sing. ) se va, Nosotros nos vamos, Vosotros os vais, Ellos (m.) se van, Ellas (/.) se van, VV. (pi.) se van, Irse, 3. to go away. I am going away. Thou art going away. He is going away. She is going away. You are going away. We are going away. You are going away. They are going away. You are going away. Reflexive Verbs referring: to parts of the Body* Cortarse la mano, Yo me corto la mano Tii te cortas la mano, El se corta la mano, Ella se corta la mano, V. (sing. ) se corta la mano, Nosotros nos cortamos la mano, Vosotros os cortais la mauo, Ellos (m.) se cortan la mano, Ellas (/. ) se cortan la mano, VV. (pi.) se cortan la mano, Ponerse el sombrero, Yo me pongo el sombrero, Tu te pones el sombrero, fil se pone el sombrero, Ella se pone el sombrero, V. (sing.) se pone el sombrero, Nosotros nos ponemos el sombrero, Vosotros os poneis el sombrero, Ellos (m.) se ponen el sombrero, 1 Ellas (/.) se ponen el sombrero, f VV. ( pi. ) se ponen el sombrero, To cut one's hand. I cut my hand. Thou cuttest thy hand* He cuts his hand. She cuts her hand. You cut your hand. We cut our hand. You cut your hand. They cut their hand. You cut your hand. To put on one's hat. 1 put on my hat. Thou puttest on thy hat He puts on his hat. She puts on her hat. You put on your hat. We put on our hat. You put on your hat. They put on their hat. You put on your hat. REFLEXIVE VERBS. 287 Ponerselo, Yo me lo pongo, Tii te lo pones, El se lo pone, Ella se lo pone, V. (sing.) se lo pone, Nosotros nos lo ponemos, Vosotros os lo poneis, Ellos (m.) se lo ponen, ) Ellas (/. ) se lo ponen, ) VV. (pi.} se lo ponen, To put it on, I put it on. Thou puttest it on. He puts it on. She puts it on. You put it on. We put it on. You put it on. They put it on. You put it on. Compound Tensesc Yo me he cortado la mano, Tii te has cortado la mano, 131 se ha cortado la mano, Ella se ha cortado la mano, V. (sing. ) se ha cortado la mano, Nosotros nos hemos cortado la mano, Vosotros os habeis cortado la mano, Ellos (m.) se han cortado la mano, ) Ellas (/. ) se han cortado la mano, j VV. (pl) se han cortado la mano, Yo me he puesto el sombrero, etc. Yo me lo he puesto, etc. / have cut my hand. Thou hast cut thy hand. He has cut his hand. She has cut her hand. You have cut your hand. We have cut our hand. You have cut your hand. They have cut their hand. You have cut your hand. I have put on my hat. etc. I have put it on. etc. Ejemplos. Mateo se ensucio los dedos. Nos hemos quemado la mano. i Se ha quitado V. los zapatos ? No me los he quitado. i Se pondra V. el sombrero nuevo ? Me pondre el viejo. i Quien le corta a V. las unas ? Mi madre me las corta. i Cuando se va V. ? Me voy ahora. Examples. Matthew soiled his fingers. We have burned our hand. Have you taken off your shoes ? I have not taken them off. Will you put on your new hat ? I will put on the old one. Who cuts your nails ? My mother cuts them for me. When are you going away ? I am going away now. 288 LESSON 53. Vocabulario. El dedo, the finger. El guante, the glove. La bota, the loot. La cama, the bed. La camisa, the shirt. La cara, the face. La casaca, the coat. La media, the stocking. La pierna, the leg. La una, the nail. Adi6s, good-by. Vocabulary. Afuera, out. Hinchado, swollen. Pues, well. Afeitar, 1. to shave. Lavar, 1. to wash. Marcharse, 1. to depart. Ponerse, 2. to put on. Quitarse, 1. to take off. Seguir, 3. to continue. Sentar, 1. to become. Exercise 105. 1. Vayase Y. de aqui, V. hace demasiado ruido. 2. Me ire en un momento. 3. [ Se ha lavado V. las manos 1 4. Me he lavado las manos y la cara. 5. \, Cuando se marcha su hermano de V. ? 6. Se marchara est-a noche a las ocho. 7. i Porque no se corta V. las unas ? 8. Me las corto todas las semanas. 9. Los hombres quieren irse. 10. Pues, que se vayan. 11. i Porque no se quita V. las medias antes de acostarse 1 12. Yo me las quito en la cama. 13. Quitese V. el sombrero cuando V. entra en el cuarto. 14. Yo siempre me lo quito. 15. Vamonos, ya es tarde. 16. No puedo irme ahora; tengo todavia demasiado que hacer. 17. No puedo ponerme los zapatos, tengo los pies hinchados. 18. Ese muchacho se va a cortar los dedos si sigue jugando con el cuchillo. 19. Pongase V. otra camisa, la que V. tiene no esta limpia. 20. El pobre Juan se rompio la pierna, cuando cayo de su caballo. 21. j Cuantas veces se afeita V. 1 22. Me afeito todos los dias. 23. j Porque no se quita V. las botas ? 24. No puedo quitarmelas. 25. Adios, amigo, me voy. Exercise 106. 1. Why do you go away so soon ] 2. I have to go away, it is already late. 3. Johnny is a bad boy, he would not take off his hat in Mrs. Riera's house. 4. Wash that child's face and take him out. 5. I cannot write, I must first warm my hands. 6. Do not go away yet, I need you. 7. When can I go away ? 8. You may go away in half an hour. 9. Would you go away if you could remain longer? 10. I would not go away if I had not so much to do. 11. Wash your REFLEXIVE VERBS. hands and come with me. 12. Do not take off your hat, you have to go out yet. 13. I cannot put on these gloves, they are too small for me. 14. Poor Mr. Castro broke his arm the other day. 15. Which coat will you put on ] 16. 1 will put my blue coat on. 17. Let us go away, my father is waiting for us. 18. Which of your brothers is going away next week 1 19. They are both going away. 20. Take off that hat, it does not become you. 21. Good-by, sir, we are going away. 22. If you fall down, you will break your head. 23. I have burned my hand, and I cannot work to-day. 24. He put on his hat and coat, and went away without saying a word. 25. Felipe will not put on his shoes ; he says that he has sore feet. 25. Our friends are going away to-morrow. 27. Why do you not go with them? 28. You know very well that I am obliged to remain in town. Gramatica. Grammar. 1, The reflexive pronoun is used in Spanish when the object of the verb is a part of the body, and in such cases the article takes the place of the possessive adjective before the noun : Yo me corto el dedo, I cut my finger. ^1 se lava la cara, He washes his face. NOTE. Se is the pronoun which refers to the subject. If le were used the reference would be to some person other than the subject : Ella le lava la cara, She washes his face. 2. The verbs ponerse, 2. to put on, and quitarse, 1. to take off, follow the same rule as above when referring to articles of clothing i Me pongo el sombrero, I put on my hat. Me quito los guantes, / take off my gloves. ^90 LESSON 54. Leeeidn LIV. Lesson LIY. PERIPHRASTIC VERBS. Hacerse, Meterse a, Ponerse, Volverse, Llegar a ser, Venir a ser Irse haciendo, Venir a ser, Venir a parar, Haber de, Tener que, Haber menester de, }- must, shall. Tener menester de to become. Deber de, Placer, 2. Gustar, 1. [ to like, to please. Agradar, 1. Conjugation. Hacerse, 2. me terse, 2. ponerse, 2. volverse, 2. to become. Present Indicative. Yo me hago, I become. Tii te haces, * thou becomest. El se hace, he becomes. Ella se hace, she becomes. V. (sing.) se hace, you become. Nosotros nos hacemos, we become. Vosotros os haceis, you become. Ellos (m.) se hacen. ) _ ) ' f . ' S ^2/ become. Ellas (/.) se hacen, ) VV. (pi.) se hacen, you become. Preterit Indefinite. Me he hecho, / have become. Te has hecho, thou hast become. 131 se ha hecho, he has become. Ella se ha hecho, she has become. V. (sing.) se ha hecho, you have become. Nosotros nos heinos hecho, we have become. Vosotros os habeis hecho, you have become. Ellos (m.) se han hecho, ) > they have become. Ellas (/.) se han hecho, } V V. ( pi. ) se han hecho, you have become. PERIPHRASTIC VERBS. 291 Llegar, 1. venir a ser. Present Indicative. Yo llego a ser, TT ( I become. Yo vengo a ser, etc. etc. Preterit Indefinite. He llegado a ser, ) .... I / have become. He venido a ser, ) Irse haciendo. Present Indicative. Yo me voy haciendo, / am becoming. Tii te vas haciendo, thou art becoming. El se va haciendo, he is becoming. Ella se va haciendo, she is becoming. V. (sing.) se va haciendo, you are becoming. Nosotros nos vamos haciendo, we are becoming. Vosotros os vais haciendo, you are becoming. Ellos (m. ) se van haciendo, _,.. }.' , . , they are becoming. Ellas (/. ) se van haciendo, VV. (pi.) se van haciendo, you are becoming. Preterit Indefinite. Me he ido haciendo, I have become. Te has ido haciendo, thou hast become. Se ha ido haciendo, he or she has become. V. (sing.) se ha ido haciendo, you have become. Nos hemos ido haciendo, we have become. Os habeis ido haciendo, you have become. Se han ido haciendo, they have become. VV. (pi. ) se han ido haciendo, you have become. Haber, 2. tener menester de, haber de, deber de. Present Indicative. Yo he menester de salir, / must go out. etc. etc. Preterit Indefinite. He habido menester de salir, / have been obliged to go out. etc. etc. 292 LESSON 54. Gustar, 1. placer, 2. agradar, 1. to like, to please. Present Indicative (affirmatively). Me gusta or gustan, Te gusta or gustan, Le gusta or gustan, A V. le gusta or gustan (sing.), Nos gusta or gustan, Os gusta or gustan, Les gusta or gustan, A V V. les gusta or gustan ( pi. ) Present Indicative i Me gusta (or gustan) a mi ? i Te gusta (or gustan) a ti ? i Le gusta (or gustan) a el ? i Le gusta (or gustan) a ella ? i Le gusta (or gustan, a V. (sing. ) ? i Nos gusta (or gustan) a nosotros ? i Os gusta (or gustan) a vosotros ? i Les gusta (or gustan) a ellos (ra.) ? ) i Les gusta (or gustan) a ellas (/.) ? j j Les gusta (or gustan) a VV. (pi.) ? Vocabulario. El chaleco, the vest. El precio, the price. El prisionero, the prisoner. El sastre, the tailor. La lluvia, the rain. Los padres, the parents. Debil, weak. De repente, suddenly. Despacio, slowly. Honrado, honest. Loco, insane. Orgulloso, proud. I like or like to. thou likest or likest to. he or she likes or likes to. you like or like to. we like or like to. you like or like to. they like or like to. you like or like to. ( interrogatively ) . do I like (or do I like to) ? dost thou-like (or like to) ? does he like (or like to) ? does she like (or like to) ? do you like (or like to) ? do we like (or like to) ? do you like (or like to) ? do they like (or like to) ? do you like (or like to) ? Vocabulary. Otra cosa, something else. Sobre, about. Fusilar, 1. to shoot. Concluirse, 3. to end. Construir, 3. to build. Correr, 2. to run. Echarse, 1. to begin. Gritar, 1. to scream. Llamar, 1. to call. Odiar, 1. to hate. Eespetar, 1. to respect. Seguir, 3. to continue. Exercise 107. 1. Mi hermano se ha hecho negociante. 2. Este hombre no sabe nada, y se ha nietido a medico. 3. Por sus talentos llego aquel PERIPHRASTIC VERBS. 293 oficial a ser general. 4. El tiempo se ha puesto tan malo, que no hemos podido inarcharnos. 5. Juan se puso tau malo, que creiamos que se iba a morir. 6. Yo no se en que vendra a parar esta disputa. 7. Me es precise salir maiiana muy temprano. 8. Si el enfermo sigue raalo, habra que llamar al medico. 9. El hijo debe y ha de ispetar a sus padres. 10. El general maiido fusilar a los prisioneros. 11. Sobre eao, hay mucho que decir. 12. El muchacho se echo a correr despues de haber robado las manzahas. 13. i Le gusta a Y. la cerveza? 14. No me gusta mucho. 15. jQue se hara de nosotros si no recibimos dinero! . 16. Hemos menester de salir antes de las tres. 17. Nuestro amigo Felipe trabaja mucho, y se va haciendo rico. 18. Estando en la calle, se puso a gritar. 19. Muchos de mis amigos i han hecho ricos en America. 20. No me gustan estos libros, y asf no los leo. 21. Se dice que el padre de Enrique se ha vuelto loco. 22. Aquel hombre se volvio tan orgulloso que era odiado de todos. Tendremos que pagarle a este hombre el precio que pide. 24. Mejor quiero ser pobre que robar. 25. El ano que viene me hare construir una casa mas grande. 26. No me agrada la conducta de este hombre. 27. Yamos mas despacio, a mi no me gusta andar tan ligero. 28. i A que ha venido a parar aquello ? 29. Todavia no se sabe. 30. No nos place que YY. hagan eso. 31. Deje Y. entrar i este hombre. Exercise 108. 1. My brother would have become a general if the war had not nded. 2. What will become of those two men ? 3. A bad prince eldom becomes a good king. 4. Being in the street, he became very sick. 5. The poor man became so weak that he could not walk. 6. John is getting richer every day. 7. I do not like this man, I don't believe he is honest. 8. You will have to give him all the money he asks. 9. The thief began to run when he saw us. 10. What will become of those poor children ? 11. You will get sick if yon are not more prudent. 12. When iron is exposed to rain it becomes rusty. 13. What would you like to eat? 14. I should like to eat some chicken. 15. T believe that man has become insane. 16. He has become a physician after having studied several years in Paris. 17. You will have to speak to him, if he comes again. 18. I am having a new vest made by my tailor. 19. If you don't like this wine, I will give you something else. 20. The weather has suddenly 294 LESSON 54. become very cold. 21. I don't know what will become of that man. 22. Napoleon the First became great by his victories. 23. I have to stay at home until my brother returns. 24. He began to laugh when I told him that. 25. Are we going to read or to write 1 26. You are to read first. 27. If I call you, come immediately, and don't keep me waiting (make me wait). 28. Next year we are going to have a house built. 29. Henry has become rich in a few years. 30. My sister says that she does not like her new house. Gramatica. Grammar. 1, There are verbs besides the auxiliary verbs already men- tioned which may be called periphrastic verbs, because they are used not only to form the compound tenses of other verbs, but also to circumscribe the sentence. The verbs haber, 2. and tener, 2. followed by the preposition de, belong to this category, and so do certain active and neuter verbs taken reflexively or followed by the preposition a, as will be seen by the list above. 2, The verb to become, when expressing a change of condi- tion or profession by the subject, is rendered in Spanish by hacerse, 2. ponerse, 2. and meterse, 2. : Se ha hecho medico, "j Se ha puesto medico, > He has become a physician. Se ha metido a medico, ) 3, When the change of condition is not performed by the subject, but is a consequence of its merits, llegar a ser, venir a ser, or ser hecho are then used : For sus talentos llego a ser (vino a ser By his talents he became physician or fue hecho) medico de camara, of the court. NOTE. Irse haciendo, irse poniendo, and ir siendo, are used to express a progressing action. ! To become or to get is translated by ponerse, 2. to ex- press a change in health, and by the same verb and by vol- Verse, 2. or hacerse, 2. if we express a change in the physical or moral condition of a person, animal, or thing : Se ha puesto enfermo, He has become sick. Se volvio loco, He became insane. IMPERSONAL VERBS. 295 5. To result is best translated by ser, salir de, or venir a parar : Yo no se en que vendra a parar (que / dont know what the result of this saldra or que sera) de esta disputa, dispute will be. 6. To commence, when governing an infinitive and express- ing a motion, or the feeling of joy and sadness, is rendered by empezar, 1. ponerse, 2. and echarse, 1. with the preposition a : Empezo a correr, Se puso a reir, Se echo a llorar, He began to run. He began to laugh. He began to cry. Leccidn LV. Lesson LV. IMPERSONAL VERBS. Llover, 2. to rain. Llueve, Llovia, Llovio, Llovera, Lloveria, Que llueva, Que lloviese or lloviera, Ha llovido, Habia llovido, Hubo llovido, Habra llovido, Habria llovido, Que haya llovido, Que hubiese \ Que hubiera j Habiendo llovido, , i ' > llovido, t ) Helar, 1. to freeze; Granizar, 1. to hail; Deshelar, 1 . to thaw ; Nevar, 1 . to snow , It rains. It was raining. It did rain. It will rain. It should or would rain. That it may rain. That it might rain. It has rained. It had been raining. It had rained. It will have rained. It should or would have rained, That it may have rained. That it might have rained. Having rained. hiela, it freezes. graniza, it hails. deshiela, it thaws. nieva, it snows. 296 LESSON 55. Tronar, 1. to thunder ; Lloviznar, 1 . to drizzle ; Relampaguear 1. to lighten ; Ventear, 1. to blow ; Amanecer, 2. , Alborear, 1. Anochecer, 2. to grow dark ; to dawn ; truena, it founders. llovizna, it drizzles. relampagnea, it lightens, ventea, it blows. amanece, ) > it dawns. alborea, ) anochece, it grows dark, Hacer, 2. and Haber, 2. impersonally. i Que tiempo hace ? How is the weather ? Hace buen tiempo, ) Hace hermoso tiempo, ) It is fine weather. Hace mal tiempo, It is bad weather. Hace calor, It is warm. Hace frio, It is cold. Hace viento, It is windy. Hace sol ) Hay sol. ) The sun shines. Hay luna, The moon shines. Hace lodo, It is muddy. Hay polvo, It is dusty. Hace dia, It is daylight. Hace noche, It is night. Acaecer, 2. ~\ Importar, 1. to be important. Acontecer, 2, ? to happen. Parecer, 2. to appear t to seem. Suceder, 2. ) Convenir, 3. to be proper. etc. etc. Vocabulario. El invierno, the winter. El lodo, the mud. El puerto, the port. El quitasol, the sunshade. El sobretodo, the overcoat. El trineo, the sleigh. El trueno, the thunder. La carreta, the cart. La estaci6n, the season. La luna, the moon. La milla, the mile. Vocabulary. La sociedad, . La ventana, the window. Algo, rather. A menudo, often. Comedido, polite. Humedo, damp. Oscuro, dark. Preciso, necessary. Singular, singular. Alegrarse, 1. to rejoice. Vestirse, 3. to dress. IMPERSONAL VERBS. 297 Exorcise 109. 1. j Qu6 hermoso tiempo hace hoy ! [ no es verdad ? 2. Si, hace un tieinpo de primavera. 3. [ Hace calor en su pais de V.? 4. No hace tanto calor como aqui. 5. Hoy llueve demasiado, los muchachos no podran salir. 6. Esta noche habrd luna, podreinos dar un paseo en el parque. 7. Si sigue la lluvia, habra mucho lodo en las calles. 8. i Que tierapo hara manana ? V. puedo estar seguro que hard mal tiempo. 9. Hay mucho sol ; tome V. su quitasol. 10. Ayer hizo bastante frio. 11. No hizo demasiado frio. 12. [ Que fue*lo que sucedio ? 13. Sucedio que nadie tenia dinero, cuando fue preciso pagar. 14. Si hace frio, pdngase V. el sobretodo. 15. Nunca hace demasiado frio para mi. 16. Ni para mi tampoco. 17. Ha nevado muy a menudo este invierno. 18. Abra Y. la ventana, y vea V. que tiempo hace. 19. Esta helando. 20. Relampagueo muchisimo anoche. 21. Conviene ser comedido en la sociedad. 22. Importa que salgamos temprano manana. 23. Acaece muchas veces que llueve y hiela al mismo tiempo. 24. Es verdad que su hermano me ha dicho esto, pero yo no lo creo. 25. Yo amaneci en Toledo y anocheci en Madrid. 26. Me acaecieron muchas cosas en el viaje 27. Anochece muy temprano ahora. 28. Esta tronando i oye V. el trueno ? 29. No es el trueno, es una carreta que esta pasando en la calle. 30. Si hace buen viento, llegaremos manana temprano al puerto. Exercise 110. 1. It is important to know who was the last person who entered the room. 2. A singular thing has occurred. 3. It seems as if you had nothing to say. 4. As soon as it dawns we will dress and leave the house. 5. If I had known that it was so cold, I should not have gone out. 6. It was so hot here last summer that we all went to the country. 7. It hailed last night, and I thought that it would also hail to-day. 8. It thundered and lightened the whole day, but it did not rain. 9. Did it snow this morning? 10. No, but it will either snow or rain in a moment. 11. It dawns very early in this season. 12. I wish it would snow every day, that we might go in a sleigh. 13. How many miles are there from here to B. ? 14. It is too late to go there to-day. 15. Dear friend, how glad I am to see you again ! 16. It is too damp to-day to go out. 17. It is very dark here, open the windows. 18. It is not daylight yet. 19, It was very fine 2^8 LESSON 65. weather yesterday. 20. It was rather cold. 21. Was it cold when you were in the country ? 22. It was colder there than last year at the same time. 23. I think that it will be very warm this summer. 24. Do you know what happened to my brother ? 25. Yes, John told me what happened to him. 26. It is very muddy, put on your other shoes. 27. If it rains, I will lend you my umbrella. 28. It was raining, but it does not rain now. 29. It is very windy. 30. They say that it is just as warm in the country as in the city. Gramatica. Grammar. 9 \ t Impersonal verbs can only be used in the infinitive or in the third person singular without any pronoun : Llueve, it rains ; graniza, it hails. 2, Impersonal verbs are either essentially impersonal, that is, cannot be used otherwise, as llover, 2. to rain; nevar, 1. to snow; etc., or they are accidentally impersonal, that is, they may be formed from any active or neuter verb. 3, The verbs amanecer, 1. to dawn, and anochecer, 2. to grow dark y when used as neuter verbs, may be conjugated with all persons. We may therefore say : Amanecimos en Toledo, y anocheci- It was daylight when we reached To- mos en Madrid. ledo, and night when we reached Madrid. 4, The impersonal verbs acaecer, 2. acontecer, 2. convenir, 3. importar, 1. parecer, 2. suceder, 2. admit a subject and agree with the same when accompanied by the pronouns me, te, le, etc. : Me acaecieron muchas cosas, Many things happened to me. Le sucedieron varias desgracias, Several misfortunes happened to him GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 299 Leccion LVI. Lesson LYI. GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. Verbs requiring ^repositions after them. Ejemplos. Examples. V. abusa de nuestra amistad. El se acerca de (a) la ventana. Yo me acuerdo de el. Me alegro de ver a V. El se aleja de nosotros. You abuse our friendship. He approaches the window. I remember him. I am glad to see you. He goes away from us. El se inclina al vicio. Yo adhiero d mi opinion. El esta acostumbrado d la limpieza. Ha sido condenado d la prision. He inclines towards vice. I adhere to my opinion. He is accustomed to cleanliness. He has been sentenced to prison. El pais abunda en hierro. l ha caido en error. Yo confio en V. Hemos convenido en esto. Yo no creo en eso. The country is abundant in iron. He has fallen into a mistake. I trust to you. We have agreed to that. I do not believe in that. Se caso con mi hermana. Cumplo con mi obligacion. Me he excusado con el. Me molesta con sus visitas. He married my sister. I do my duty. I have apologized to him. He annoys me with his visits. El calla por miedo. Me doy por vencido. Estoy por el. Pecamos por orgullo. He is silent through fear. I consider myself as conquered. I abide by him. We sin through pride. 300 LESSON 56. Vocabulario. El avaro, the miser. El beneficio, the benefit. El consejo, the advice. El pleito, the lawsuit. El reo, the culprit. La costa, the expense. La fiebre, the fever. La friolera. the trifle. La lagrima, the tear. La sentencia, the judgment. La yerba, the grass. Acostumbrado, accustomed. Agradecido, thankful. Bordado, trimmed. Acercarse, 1. to approach. Vocabulary. Adherir, 3. to adhere. Ale j arse, 1. to leave. Apartar, 1. to remove. Apelar, 1. to appeal. Censurar, 1. to censure. Colmar, 1. to overwhelm. Condenar, 1. to condemn. Dedicar, 1. to devote. Descoufiar, 1. to distrust. Embarcar, 1. to engage. Entender, 2. to understand. Formalizarse, 1. to get vexed. Habituarse, 1. to accustom one's self. Interesarse, 1. to take interest. Jactarse, 1. to boost. Exercise 111. 1. Si V. adhiere a mi opinion, adherire yo a la suya. 2. El reo ha sido condenado a muerte. 3. Acuerdese V. de mi. 4. El rey colmo a su ministro de beneficios. 5. Este hombre padece de fiebres. 6. Censuran a este rico de avaro. 7. Con mis consejos le be apartado de malas compafiias. 8. Mi hermano ha sido condenado eri las costas del pleito. 9. No se acerque V. de la ventana, pues hace frio. 10. Estoy acostumbrado a estos trabajos. 11. V. no tiene razon de acusarme de esto. 12. Estoy agradecido a los beneficios que he recibido. 13. Me aleje de aquella tierra con las lagrimas en los ojos. 14. Me alegro de verle a V. bueno. 15. El negociante ha apelado de la sentencia. 16. El traje de la reina estaba bordado de oro. 17. V. no deberia burlarse de este hombre. 18. Yo no me burlo de nadie. 19. He cambiado mi caballo por otro. 20. Nos hemos cansado del viaje. 21. 6l se casara con aquella senora tan rica. 22. Aquel joven dedica todo su tiempo al estudio. 23. Desconfio de este hombre sin conocerle. 24. Temo que V. se embarque en malos negocios 25. No entendemos nada de eso. 26. VV. se ban formalizado por una frio- lera. 27. No tiene V. razon de gloriarse de esa accion. 28. No hemos podido habituarnos a ese pais. 29. Nos hemos interesado en este joven, pero el nos ha engafiado. 30. El pobre hombre se man- tenia de frutas y de yerbas. GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 301 Exercise 1. If yon make fun of me, I will tell it to your father. 2. Has the soldier been sentenced to death ? 3. He has been sentenced to (the) prison. 4. He boasts of a thing of which he ought to be ashamed. 5. Our teacher takes great interest in our studies. 6. Do you remem- ber my brother 1 7. I remember him very well, but I don't remem- ber your cousin. 8. I am doing something now to which I am not accustomed. 9. Why do you not come near the fire ? 10. I am not cold, I am very well here. 11. I am very glad to know that you have not lost your money in that business. 12. We have exchanged our coffee for tea. 13. I do not understand anything about this mat- ter. 14. You are wrong to distrust that man, he is your friend. 15. He accuses me of having deceived him, but he does not tell the truth. 16. I adhere to what I have said. 17. If you engage in that business you will lose all your money. 18. That young man sup- ports his family with his work. 19. Remember what I told you when you see your brother. 20. We are thankful for the benefits we have received. 21. Do not go away from the window. 22. He is very glad to see that his brother studies so much. 23. If you appeal from the judgment, you will be condemned a second time. 24. I have become tired of that house. 25. Do you think that Mr. Mar- tinez will marry Miss Ruiz ? 26. I think he will marry her next month. Gramatica. Grammar. 1, Many verbs which sometimes in English are not followed by any preposition, govern in Spanish either the genitive, the dative, or the ablative, with the prepositions de, a con, por, para, SObre, etc. Some of these verbs may even, without changing their meaning, govern different prepositions, as : Instruir a alguno de, en or sobre algo, To inform some one of something. Other verbs change their meaning according to the prepo- sition which follows them : Creo en el, 7 believe in him. Me creo de esta cosa, / am convinced of that thing. 302 LESSON 57. 2 Most reflexive verbs, and those which express the move- ments of the soul or mind, want, ^fulness, separation, accusation, blame, etc., generally govern the preposition de. OBSERVATION. It would be difficult to give definite rules for the gov- ernment of the other prepositions. The Grammar of the Spanish Academy contains a long list of verbs with their corresponding prepositions. We have omitted the same, as we consider that the student will have to de- pend principally on practice and reading to master these as well as other difficulties. leccidn LVII. lesson LVII. GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. Ejemplos. Este hombre es digno de su posicion. Estoy deseoso de verle. Mi hermano es alto de cuerpo. Aquella seiiora es palida de color. Nuestra casa esta cercana de la ciudad. Estoy cierto de su venida. Examples. This man is worthy of his position. I am anxious to see him. My brother is tall in size. That lady has a pale complexion. Our house is near the city. I am sure of his coming. Este vino es agrio al gusto. El es amable a todos. Esto es benefico a la salud. 131 es fiel a sus amigos. This wine is sour to the taste. He is amiable towards everybody. This is good for the health. He is faithful to his friends. 6l esta triste por la muerte de su hermano. Estoy alegre con la llegada de mi hermano. He is sad about the death of his brother. I am glad at the arrival of my brother. GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 303 Vocabulario. El companero, the companion. El heroe, the hero. El pesar, the grief. El poder, the power. El principio, the principle. El temor, the fear. La alabanza, the praise. La botella, the bottle. La costumbre, the manner. La mina, the mine. La naranja, the orange. La raz6n, the reason. La ruina, the ruin. La siiplica, the entreaty. Aceptable, acceptable. Ansioso, eager. Codicioso, greedy. Conforme, conformably. Vocabulary. Despreciado, despised* Digno, worthy. Encendido, red. Exento, exempted. Favorable, favorable. Incapaz, incapable. Indigno, unworthy. Inm6vil, immovable, Lleuo, full. Maduro, ripe. Penoso, hard, painful. Poderoso, poioerfuL Propenso, inclined. Propicio, propitious. Sorprendido, surprised, Descascarar, 1. to peel. Obrar, 1. to act. Exercise 118. 1. Este hombre es muy codicioso de dinero. 2. V. esta lleno de soberbia, y Y. no tiene motive para ello. 3. Mi hermano ha sido exento del servicio militar. 4, Es una cosa facil de hacer, y sin embargo V. la hace muy mal. 5. Los habitantes de aquella is! a son puros de costumbres. 6. Es penoso de ver a ese hombre correr a la ruina. 7. Hemos obrado conforme a la razon. 8. Don Pedro es un hombre despreciado de todos e indigno del empleo que ocupa. 9. Esta fruta no es buena para comer. 10. V. es incapaz de comprender nuestras ideas. 11. Estoy contento con lo que tengo, y no deseo nada mas. 12. La proposition que V. nos hace es aceptable para todos. 13. La pobre mujer se quedo inmovil de temor. 14. La action de ese hombre es digna de alabanza. 15. La vida humana esta lleha de pesares. 16. El heroe esta siempre ansioso de gloria ; y el avaro, codicioso de dinero. 17. Este muchacho es muy bonito de cara. 18. Esta lengua es facil de aprender. 19. Aquel pais es rico en granos, pero pobre en minas. 20. Estoy cierto de mi asercion. 21. El hombre verdaderamente liberal es fiel a sus principios. 22. La libertad es propicia a las ciencias y a las artes. 23. [ Porque esta V. tan encendido de cara ? 24. Porque acabo de correr, y tengo mucho calor. 25. La naranja madura es facil de descascarar. 304 LESSON 57. Exercise 114. 1. That fruit is not good to ea^, jt is not ripe yet. 2. If you act in (de) that way you will be despised by everybody. 3. You ought to be satisfied with what you have. 4. I am anxious to see your brother ; when does he arrive 1 5. He will be here to-morrow. 6. That action is unworthy of an honest man. 7. The mighty are inclined to abuse their power. 8. It is easy to say that, but it is not so easy to do as you think. 9. I am certain of what I say. 10. The weather is very favorable for our journey. 11. That bottle is full of wine. 12. That country is very rich in gold mines. 13. We are most anxious to know the truth. 14. I knew that you were incapable of acting thus. 15. That child is beloved by all his companions. 16. They have acted according to (the) reason. 17. Life is full of misery. 18. I am tired of the conduct of this man. 19. We are not accustomed to see so many people in our small town. 20. I am surprised at what that man has told us. 21. He is deaf to all our entreaties. 22. Those men are poor in means, but rich in credit. 23. They are very sad about the death of their father. 24. Your father's proposition is acceptable to everybody. 25. The poor servant was all his life faith- ful to his master. Gramatica. Grammar. 1, Many adjectives have in Spanish a meaning by them- selves, while others require a complement to their meaning, as digno, worthy; propenso, inclined; comparable, comparable; etc. : Es una acci6n digna (of what ?) de It is an action worthy of praise. elogio, Los poderosos son propensos (to The mighty are inclined to abuse what ?) a abusar de su poder, their power. 2 An adjective may govern a noun, an infinitive, or a sen- tence in the subjunctive mood : Fiel a sus amigos, Faithful to his friends. Diestro en saltar, Skillful in jumping. 131 es indigno de que le compadezcan, He is unworthy of being pitied. 3, Those adjectives which express worthiness, unworthiness, facility, difficulty, fullness, want, scarcity, eagerness, anxiety, de- GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 305 sire, exception, moral or physical qualities, moral or physical separation, distance, proximity, certainty, uncertainty, danger, etc., are generally followed by the preposition de: Digno de recompensa, Worthy of reward. Indigno de perdon, Unworthy of pardon. Facil de hacer, Easy to do. Penoso de hacer, Difficult to do. Lleno de soberbia, Full of pride. Escaso de conceptos, Poor in ideas. Deseoso de trabajar, Desirous of working. Codicioso de dinero, Eager for money. Gordo de talle, Stout in body. B Ian do de corazon, Soft in heart. Inseparable de sus amigos, Inseparable from his friends. Cercano de la ciudad, Near the city. Lejano de la ciudad, Far from the city. Cierto de su venida, Certain of his arrival. Seguro de peligro, Sure of danger. etc. etc. 4, Adjectives expressing the feelings of the soul or mind take the prepositions de, por, or con : Inm6vil de temor, Immovable with fear. Triste por su muerte, Sad at his death. Alegre con su llegada, Pleased at his arrival. NOTE. When the adjective precedes a verb in the Infinitive mood, the preposition de may always be used : Contento de ver, Glad to see you. 5* In most other cases the adjectives require the same prep- ositions as in English. 6. Past participles used as adjectives may be followed by de or por : Es un hombre despreciado de (por) He is a man despised by all. todos, 7. There are also adjectives which vary in meaning, accord- ing to the preposition which follows them : Esta fruta es buena para comer, This fruit is good to eat. Esta naranja es buena de descascarar,. This orange is easy to peel. 20 306 LESSON 58. Leccion LVIII. Lesson LVIII. THE ADVERB. Adverbs of Place. Ahi, there. Aqui, aca, here. Alii, there. Alia, yonder. Cerca (de), near. Lejos (de), far. Donde, where. Adonde, whereto. Dedonde, wherefrom. Adentro, within. etc. Dentro (de), in. Fuera (de), out. Arriba, up. Abajo, down. Adelante, forward. Atras, back. Delante (de), before. Detras (de), behind. Encima (de), upon. etc. Adverbs of Time. Hoy, to-day. Pronto, soon. Mafiana, to-morrow. Siernpre, always. Ahora, now. Nunca, ) , > never. Jamas, ) Luego, afterwards. Tarde, late. Temprano, early. Presto, quick. etc. Ya, already. Mientras, whilst. Aim, yet, still. etc. Adverbs of Manner. Bien, well. Recio, loud. Mai, badly. Despacio, slowly. Asi, so, thus. De prisa, quickly. Bajo, low. Alto, loud. etc. etc. Adverbs of Quantity. Mucho, much. Muy, very. Poco, little. Tan, so, as. Sobrado, \ Tan to, so much, as much. Harto, \ enough. Cuanto, how much. Bastante, ) Demasiado, too much. etc. etc. THE ADVERB. 307 Adverbs of Comparison. Mas, more. Mejor, better. Menos, less. Peor, worse. etc. etc. Adverbs of Order. Primeramente^rs^. tJltirnamente, lastly. Sucesivamente, successively. Antes (de), before. Despues (de), after. Adverbs of Affirmation. Si, yes. Ciertamente, certainly. etc. Verdaderamente, verily. Indudableraente, undoubtedly. etc. Adverbs of Negation. No, no. Nada, nothing, not anything. Tampoco, neither, not either. De niuguna manera, nowise. etc. Tal vez, Quiza, j Quizas, etc. etc. Adverbs of Uncertainty. Acaso, Por ventura, Por fortuna, etc. ) perhaps (in interro- { gations). Adverbial Expressions. Sobre poco mas 6 menos, About, more or less. A lo menos, al menos, A diestra y siniestra, A duras pen as, De aqui para alii, De aca para alia, Aqui y alii, Aca y alia, aculla, At least. Right and left. With great trouble. Here and there. Formation of Adverbs with mente (ly). Facil, facil mente, Easy, easily. Constante, constantemente, Constant, constantly. Triste, tristemente, Sad, sadly. Alegre, alegremente, Joitful, joyfully. Elegante, elegantemente, Elegant, elegantly. Sabio, sabiamente. . Wise, wisely. 308 LESSON 58. Pelicado, delicadamente, Claro, claramente, Verdadero, verdaderamente, Vocabulario. El bast6n, the cane. La desgracia, the misfortune. La fuerza. the strength. La groseria, the rudeness. La tarde, the afternoon. Acaso, perhaps. Afuera, without. Amargo, Utter. Bajo, low. Callado, silent. Ciego, blind. Glaro, clear. Concise, concise. Cortes, polite. Delicate, delicately. Clear, clearly. True, truly. Vocabulary. Cruel, cruel. Despues, after, afterward. Probable, probable. Tal vez, perhaps. Acompanar, 1. to accompany Arrepentirse, 3. to repent. Conseguir, 3. to obtain. Escuchar, 1. to listen to. Faltar, 1. to fail. Oir, 3. to hear. Provenir, 3. to result. Referir, 3. to relate. Besponder, 2. to answer. Exercise 115. 1. j Comome haenganado este hombre ! 2. Hemos siempre sabido nuestra leccion desde que vamos a la escuela. 3. He venido aca tem- prano para ver a su hermano de V. 4. Cicerdn hablo sabia y elo- cuentemente. 5. Ce*sar escribio clara, concisa y elegantemente. 6. Yo le hable cortesmente y el me respondio con groseria. 7. Los mucha- chos entraron calladitamente, pues la madre estaba muy mala. 8. Jamas vi tal cosa. 9. Si V. quiere, iremos manana al teatro. 10. Le referire a V. la historia, si ya no la sabe V. 11. Yo creo que V. podra conseguir facilmente el dinero que V. necesita. 12. Esta casa debe haber costado mucbo dinero. 13. Vengo de afuera, y he visto una cosa muy curiosa. 14. Aqui mataron d un hombre, segun he oido. 15. Primero vino su hermano de V. y despues los otros amigos. 16. [ Acaso vendra su padre hoy 1 17. Vendra tal vez esta noche a las diez. 18. iSl anda de aqui para alii sin saber donde sen- tai-se. 19. V. ha sido muy imprudente, y de ahi proviene su desgra- cia. 20. i A que hora vendra el medico? 21. Ya viene. 22. Lo hare siya no me faltan las fuerzas. 23. No ire* alia, pues estoy mejor donde estoy. 24. j Que tristisimamente llora esta mnjer ! 25. Hable Y. claro, si Y. quiere que yo le comprenda. 26. Nunca volvere a ver a mi querido amigo. THE ADVERB. 309 Exercise 116. 1. If you do not pay him, you will repent it bitterly. 2. These two friends are constantly together. 3. You must act prudently if you do not wish to lose your money. 4. Your friend has treated his sister very cruelly. 5. Your exercise is not well done ; you have written it badly. 6. You would have acted more wisely if you had not answered that man. 7. I could not listen politely to all he said about you. 8. I have blindly followed your instructions. 9. Speak low, iny friend, there is somebody in the other room. 10. How do you do to-day 1 11. I am pretty well, thank you. 12. When will your sister arrive 1 13. She will probably arrive this afternoon. 14. Look for my cane, I wish to go out now. 15. Shall you accom- pany your friends to Paris ? 16. I shall perhaps accompany them. 17. If you come to-morrow, do not come too late. 18. I shall not be able to come before nine o'clock. 19. Our house is already finished. 20. They walk the whole day here and there without doing an} T thing. 21. Do not speak so loud, I have a headache. 22. I was near him when he was wounded. 23. He was before me, and my brother was behind me. 24. Come quick, I have something to tell you. 25. This author writes very well. 26. We walked very slowly and arrived too late. Oramatica. Grammar. 1 , Place of the Adverb. 1. The adverb is generally placed in Spanish after the verb. In compound tenses it is placed after the participle, and never between the same and the auxiliary : El discipulo ha estudiado siempre The scholar has always studied his su leccion, lesson. Although, according to tbe rules of syntax, we may deviate from this rule, the student would do well to adhere to the same, and thus avoid the mistakes which may result from any deviation. 2. A few adverbs must always stand before the verb, as no, etc., and the adverbs of exclamation : cuanto, cuan, como, etc. : j Como me ha enganado ! How he has deceived me ! 310 LESSON 58. The following adverbs also precede the verb : apenas, hardly ; cuando, when ; luego que, us soon as ; asi que, so soon as ; mientras que, whilst ; donde, where ; de donde, whence, and a few others. 2. Formation of Adverbs. 1. Adverbs are formed from adjectives in two different ways: Adjectives having the same termination for both genders add mente (corresponding to the English termination ly). Facil, facilmente, Easy, easily. Dulce, dulcemente, Sweet, sweetly. Feliz, felizmente, Happy, happily. Igual, igualmente, Equal, equally. NOTE. If an adverb is formed from an adjective which has the written accent, this accent is preserved, even though it does not indicate the accented syllable of the adverb : Facilmente. Cortesmente. 2. Adjectives having a different form for the masculine and feminine add mente to the feminine form : Sabio, sabiamente, Wise, wisely. Claro, claramente, Clear, clearly. Honrado, honradamente, Honest, honestly. Rico, ricamente, Rich, richly. 3. Superlatives may be formed from all adverbs ending in mente : Tristisimamente, Most sadly. Dulcisimamente, Most sweetly. 4. When several adverbs follow each other in the same sen- tence, it is sufficient to add the termination mente to the last adverb, while all the preceding adverbs take the form of the feminine of the adjective : El habla sabia y elocuentemente, He speaks wisely and eloquently. El escribe clara, concisa y elegan- He writes clearly, concisely, and temente, elegantly. The same rule is to be observed for the superlative. THE ADVERB. 311 5. When different adverbs in mente occur in the same sen- tence without modifying the same verb, it is preferable, for the sake of euphony, to replace one of the adverbs by a noun con- nected with the preposition con : Hable cortesmente y el respondio / spoke courteously and he an- con groseria, swered rudely (with rudeness). 6. Adverbs ending in mente govern the same prepositions as the adjectives from which they are formed : Anteriormente a, etc. Anterior to, etc. 7. Adverbs cannot be formed from all adjectives. Such are : verde, green; azul, blue; enfermo, ill; poco, little; mucho, much, etc. 8. A few adverbs may be used diminutively or augmenta- tively, but only in a familiar way : Se entro calladitamente y la tomo He entered very quietly and took suavitamente por la mano, her very gently by the hand. 9. Certain adjectives may be used in Spanish as adverbs, and remain then invariable. Such are the adjectives: claro, clear, clearly ; oscu.ro, obscure, obscurely ; derecho, straight; torcido, twisted; fuerte, strong, strongly, etc. 10. The adverb ya, which is generally rendered by already, is sometimes rendered by indeed, since, now, etc. : Ya ha llegado, He has already arrived. Ya de dia, ya de noche, Now in daytime, now at night. Ya que V. lo sabe, Since you know it. Ya se arrepentira V., You will indeed repent it. 312 LESSON 59. Leccidn LIX. Lesson LIX. THE PREPOSITION. A, to, at. Ante, before. Con, with. Contra, against. De, of, from. Desde, from, since. En, in. Entre, between, among. Hacia, towards, to. Hast a, as far as, until, till, even. Para, for, in order to, to. Por, by, through, for. Begun, according to, as. Sin, without. Sobre, on, upon, about, above. Tras, behind, besides. Prepositions and Prepositional Phrases requiring de after them. Dentro, in. Despues, after. Detras, behind. Encima, on, upon. Enfrente, opposite. Fuera, out. Por medio, by means. Ademas, Alrededor, around. Antes, before (ref. to time). A pesar, notwithstanding. Cerca, near. Debajo, under. Delante, before. Prepositions followed by a. En cuanto. as far. Junto, next. Ejemplos. Vendre a las ocho. Comparecio ante el juez. Estoy con mi padre. Estamos contra V. Se habla de V. Saldre en el mes de Agosto. Eran entre quinze a veinte hombres. Mire V. hacia el norte. Voy hasta mi casa. Trabajo para ganar. Va a Madrid por un ano. Lo digo seaun me lo ban dicho. Examples. I will come at eight o'clock. He appeared before the judge. I am with my father. We are against you. They speak of you. I shall leave in the month of August. There were between fifteen and twenty men. Look towards the north. I am going as far as my house. I work to earn. He goes to Madrid for a year. I tell it as they told me. THE PREPOSITION. 313 Vive sin trabajar. El libro esta sobre la mesa. Voy tras V. Vendre despues de las tres. El esta detrds de mi. El perro esta debajo de la mesa. Vocabulario. 1 empleo, the employment, situation. El grito, the outcry. 1 marinero, the sailor. 1 ntimero, the number. El principiante, the beginner. La cadena, the chain. La carcel, the prison. La caridad, the charity. La cera, the wax. La comida, the dinner. La gota, the drop. La insolencia, the insolence. La mascara, the mask. La peseta, the shilling. La prueba, the proof. La vara, the yard. La vela, the candle. Abundante, abundant. Borracho, intoxicated. He lives without working. Tbe book is on the table. I go behind you. I will come after three o'clock. He is behind me. The dog is under the table. Vocabulary. Corto, short. Gulpado, guilty. Derecho, right. El reo, the culprit. El sueno, the drecm. El verso, the verse. La bondad, the kindness. Sentado, seated. Co j ear, 1. to limp, to be lame. Comparecer, 2. to appear. Contar, 1. to count. Costar, 1. to cost. Dirigir, 3. to direct. Disputar, 1 . to dispute. Exceder, 2. to exceed. Mover, 2. to move, to turn. Pararse, 1. to stand. Preguntar, 1. to inquire. Suministrar, 1. to offer. Exercise 117. 1. Esta carta va dirigida a mi hermano. 2. Andamos de calle a calle sin saber donde vamos. 3. Este pano se vende a cinco pesetas la vara. 4. He tornado el dinero a tres por ciento. 5. El vino se per- dio gota a gota. 6. El reo comparecio ante el juez, y fue condenado a la carcel por veinte anos. 7. Con ensenar tambien se aprende, 8. La vida del hombre con ser tan corta, nos suministra abundantes pruebas de que no es un sueno. 9. Esta casa esta cerca de la de mi hermano. 10. Esta vela es de cera. 11. Mi amigo cojea del pie derecho. 12. Nos vestimos de marineros para ir al baile de mascaras. 13.. Yo hare esto para V., pero no de balde. 14. Yo iria de buena gana al cainpo con V. 15. Tengo un empleo y gano desde ayer. 16. Nadie le excedia a este hombre en bondad. 17. Entre otras cosas he visto un cuadro muy hermoso en la casa del medico. 18. Quintana cuenta 314 LESSON 59. con razon a Herrera entre (or en) el numero de los primeros autores espanoles. 19. Este hombre hasta tuvo la insolencia de venir bor- racho a mi casa. 20. Para principiante, no ha hecho V. mal este trabajo. 21. La caridad es sobre todas las virtudes. 22. Se disputa sobre el sentido de este verso. 23. Moviose la conversacion sobre vinos franceses. 24. Tras ser culpado, es 61 que m&s levanta el grito. 25. Este reloj me cuesta cien pesos sin la cadena. 26. Los hornbres estaban sentados alrededor de la mesa. Exercise 118. 1. That lady comes from Europe. 2. She used to live at our house before the death of her husband. 3. What were you doing under the table? 4. I was looking for my pen. 5. We can do nothing without money. 6. Will you go as far as the church for me ? 7. I will accompany you as far as that street. 8. You speak without knowing what you say. 9. Here are some apples for you. 10. My sister lives far from us. 11. Do you know the lady who lives opposite your house ? 12. Yes, she is an English lady. 13. Why do those boys walk behind us 1 14. They are going to the school next to our house. 15. My brother will come first, and I will go afterwards. 16. My father is in his room and is writing to my mother. 17. Do nothing without consulting me. 18. Come and (d) see us this evening with your friends. 19. Do not stand before me, I cannot see anything. 20. His sons were seated around the table. 21. Those two ladies live opposite the church. 22. Let us go as far as the park. 23. The dog is under the table. 24. There is a garden behind the house, and a church behind the garden. 25. I was seated next to my brother, and my sister next to him. 26. Here is money for your dinner. 27. I received these goods by railroad. 28. Has anybody inquired for me? 29. There came a man who inquired for you, and who went away when he heard that you were not at home. 30. We must stay here until to-morrow. Gramatica. Grammar. 1. The preposition a is used in Spanish : 1. To express position at, or direction towards : Esta a izquierda, He is on the left. Fue a bordo, He went on board. Ira a Sevilla, He will go to Seville. THE PREPOSITION. 315 2. In expressions of time; A mediodia, At midday. A las once de la rnanana, At eleven o'clock in the morning. Al llegar, Upon his arrival. 3. To express manner, means : Va a pie, He goes on foot. Le eche a palos, / drove him away with a stick. Gota a gota, Drop by drop. 4. To express price or rate : i A cudnto se vende ? What is the price ? A dos duros el metro, Two dollars a meter. H toda fuerza de maquina, At full speed. A cuatro por ciento, At four per cent. 5. To express resemblance: L la inglesa, In the English style. A lo matador, Like a bull-fighter. 6. After verbs requiring or implying the prepositions to or from : Dio al nino un perro chico, He gave the child a cent. Ofrecio al juez cien duros, He offered the judge a hundred dollars. Robaran al ciego su dinero, They stole the blind man's money. 7. To form a great number of adverbial locutions : A la verdad, Truly. A lo men os, At least. 2. The preposition ante, before, means in the presence of : Ante el juez, Before the judge. It often takes the place of antes que or antes de, and indi- cates the preference of one thing or action over another : Ante todo or antes de todo, Before everything. 3* The preposition con, with, may also mean although or by when accompanied by the Infinitive : Con enseriar tambie'n se aprende, By teaching one also learns. La vida del hombre, con ser tan The life of man, although short, corta, etc. etc. 316 LESSON 59. Con is also used to form certain locutions : Con que V. ha llegado, So you have arrived. 4. The preposition de is used 1. To express time : De dia, In daytime. De noche, By night. De sol a sol, From, morning to night 2. To express origin, derivation, separation : Viene del almacen de su padre, He comes from his father's store. Bajo del tren, He got out of the train. Don Quijote de la Mancha, Don Quixote o/(the province of) La Mancha. 3. To express material and ownership : Un reloj de oro, A gold watch. Una vela de cera, A wax candle. Los primes de la raujer de Juan, Johns wife's cousins. El techo de la casa, The roof of the house. 4. To express use : Un perro de caza, A hunting dog. Una cana de pescar, A fishing rod. 5. To express contents: Un vaso de agua, A glass of water. Una jicara de chocolate, A cup of chocolate. 6. In exclamations of sorrow and pity : i Pobre de mi padre ! My poor father f 7. To express characteristic, cause, manner: La moza de los cabellos rubios, The red-headed girl. Morir de hambre, To die of hunger. 8. When the word pedazo, piece, or another noun is under- stood : Probe del asado, / tasted (a piece of) the roast meat. Dame de vestir, Give me (clothes) to dress. 9. To form many adverbial locutions : De balde, for nothing ; de veras, truly ; De modo que, so that ; de buena gana, willingly. THE PREPOSITION. 317 10. After a passive verb by is expressed by de, if the action te mental: Es odiado de todos, He is hated by all. Era amado de los ninos, He was loved by the children. NOTE. If the action be physical, por is used : Era castigado por el maestro, He was punished by the teacher. 5, The preposition en, in, is used 1. To express rest in, motion into, position : Vivia en aquella casa, He used to live in that house. La cena esta en la mesa, Supper is on the table. Entro en el coche, He got into the carriage. Se sento en la cama, He sat down on the bed. 2. To express time : En todo el dia, During the whole day. En diciendo eso, While saying this. Lo hizo en cuatro horas, He did it in four hours. 6, The preposition para, for, to (in order to), also expresses an act ready to be performed : Estoy para partir, / am about leaving. 7, The preposition por, for, by, though, also expresses : 1. Means, etc. : Casarse por procurador, To marry by proxy. 2. Motive, etc. : Lo hace por fuerza, He does it by force. 3. Price, etc. : Lo compro por poco dinero, He bought it for little money, 4. Time: Se ausento por ocho dias, He was away for a week. Por mucho tiempo, For a long while. 5. What happens in favor of a person or thing : Empenarse por el, - To occupy ones self for him. 318 LESSON 60. 6. What is done in place of a person or thing : Trabajo por el, / work in his place* 4fct,:M, 7. Exchange : Le doy mi sombrero por el suyo, I give you my hat for yours. 8. The estimation in which a person or thing is held : Esta tenido por bueno, He is considered as a good man. Leccidn LX. Lesson LX. DEFECTIVE VERBS. 1st Conjugation. Auto j arse, to long for (only used in the third person). 2d Conjugation. Pacer, to graze. Boer, to gnaw. Placer, to please. Soler, to be accustomed. Baer, to rub off. Yacer, to lie. Beponer, to reply. Gramatica. Grammar. 1, Pacer is not used in the first person singular of the pres- ent indicative, or the whole of the present subjunctive. 2. Placer is seldom used except in exclamations : j Plegue a Dios ! Please God ! \ Pluguiera a Dios ! Would to God ! NOTE. In its other forms it is generally replaced by querer, gustar, etc. 3* Raer is generally replaced by borrar, to erase, or rayar, to cross out : NOTE. When used it is conjugated like caer. DEFECTIVE VERBS. 319 4, Reponer, in the sense of to reply, is only used in the Preterito definido of the Indicative : repuse, repusiste, repuso, etc. 5, Roer is generally found only in the following forms : PRES. IND. Roo, roigo or royo, roes, roe, roemos, roels, roen. PRES. SUBJ. Boa, etc., roiga, etc., roya, etc. 6, Soler is generally found only in the following tenses and persons : Suelo, / am accustomed to ; sueles, suele, solemos, soleis, melon. Solia, / was accustomed to ; solias, solia, soliamos, soliais, solian. NOTE. The present subjunctive is sometimes formed: suela, suelas, suela, solamos, solais, suelan. 7, Yacer, 2. to lie, is conjugated thus: GERUNDIO : INDICATIVO PRESENTE : IMPERFECTO : FUTURO : CONDICIONAL : IMPERATIVO : PRESENTE : IMPERFECTO SUBJUNTIVO-. FUTURO DE SUBJUNTIVO ; Yaciendo. Yazgo, yazco, yago. Yacia, etc. Yacere", etc. Yacer ia, etc. Yace or yaz tu, yaced vosotros. Yazga, yazca, or yaga. Yaciera, etc. Yaciere. 320 LESSON 61. Leccidn LXL Lesson LXL AGREEMENT OF THE VERB WITH ITS SUBJECT. Vocabulario. El creador, the creator. El movimiento, the movement. El padrino, the godfather. El raton, the mouse. El sol, the sun. La causa, the cause, the case. La especie, the species. La fiesta, the feast. La grandeza, the greatness. La humanidad, the humanity. La marcha, the march. La mayor parte, the most. La mitad, the half. La navegaci6n, navigation. La necesidad, necessity. La obra, the work. Vocabulary. Laplanta, the plant. Cesar, Ccesar. Pompeyo, Pompey. Distinto, distinct. Supremo, supreme. Aguardar, 1. to expect, to await Anunciar, 1. to announce. Arruinar, 1. to ruin. Couversar, 1. to converse. Decidir. 3. to decide. Divertir, 3. to amuse. Escapar, 1. to escape. Instruir, 3. to instruct. Interesar, 1. to interest. Juzgar, to judge. Sentir, 3. to feel. Exercise 121. 1. Pedro, Juan y yo heinos estado aqui esta mafiana. 2. El padre y el hijo ban salido esta mafiana. 3. Ni el teatro ni la musica me divierten. 4. El ejercito de Francia e Inglaterra estaban en marcha. 5. El estudiar y conversar con los sabios instruye al hombre. 6. Dar y saber dar son dos cosas muy distintas. 7. La justicia, la religi6n y la humanidad quieren que V. obre de otro modo. 8. Los cielos y la tierra, el sol y las estrellas, todo nos anuncia la grandeza del supremo creador. 9. La mitad de los soldados se ha ido. 10. Es la obra y no la persona que interesa la posteridad. 11. Juzgar y sentir no son la misma cosa. 12. Seran W., senores, quienes decidiran en esta causa. 13. Son trenta duros que V. me debe. 14. El mimero de las especies de animales es ma's grande, segtin dicen, que el mimero de las especies de plantas. 15. Su padre de V. 6 su tio sera el padrino de mi hermanito. 16. El padre de Juan es uno de los que ban sido arruinados por la ultima guerra. 17. Ni V. ni el lo saben. 18. De AGREEMENT OF THE VERB WITH ITS SUBJECT. 321 mis conocidos no todos serian mis amigos. 19. La agricultura, las artes, el comercio y la navegacion, todo esta perdido en aquel pobre pais. 20. La mayor parte de mis amigos esta esta noche en el teatro. Exercise 122. 1. My brother and I will leave to-morrow for the country. 2. Have not most of your friends left for Paris ? 3. Most of them intend to remain in town this summer. 4. Neither Caesar nor Pompey was to be an emperor. 5. John and Henry are very good friends. 6. Great, rich, poor, little, no one escapes death. 7. Fear or necessity are the cause of all the movements of the mouse. 8. One half of the chil- dren of that school are Germans. 9. It is we who are responsible for your conduct. 10. Your brother and I will go to the same school next year. 11. I am sure that it is you who have said that. 12. A great number of strangers were present at that feast. 13. He and I are brothers. 14. Neither you nor your friend will arrive in time. 15. It was your father and not your mother who was here. 16. He or she will have the book. 17. This gentleman and I have traveled together. 18. It is not the son but the daughter who has died. 19. There are three gentlemen at the door. 20. It is they we are expecting. 21. Charles and I are poor, but Peter and his brother are rich. Gramatica. Grammar. 1, When the subject is composed of two or more nouns joined by a conjunction, the verb is put in the plural : El padre y el hijo han estado aqui, The father and the son have been here. 2i When the subjects are connected by ni, neither, or by 6, or, the verb must also be put in the plural. Usage and euphony allow, however, the use of the singular, and we can say : Ni la miisica ni el teatro le divier- Neither music nor the theater amuse ten or divierte, him. This sentence may also have the subjects at the end of the sentence : No le divierte ni la miisica ni el teatro. 3 The verb must likewise be in the plural when one subject alone is expressed and the other or others are understood : El ejercito de Valencia y Murcia The armies of Valencia and Mur- estaban en marcha, da were on their march. 21 322 LESSON 61. 4* If the subjects are not of the same person, the verbs agree with the person which has the priority. The first person has the priority of the second, and the second of the third : V. y yo lo sabemos, You and I know it. V. y el lo saben, You and he know it. 5. The verb is put in the singular when the subject is com- posed of two infinitives : El estudiar y conversar con los Studying and conversing with wise sabios instruye al hombre, men instruct man. 6. When a verb has several subjects not connected by any conjunction, it is put in the singular, unless the sentence begins with the verb. In this case the verb is put in the plural : La justicia, la religion, la humani- Justice, religion, and humanity dad, lo reclama, or Lo reclaman demand it. la justicia, la religion y la hu- manidad, 7 When a word occurs in the sentence which embraces all the others, the verb must agree with this word : Los cielos y la tierra, el sol y las The heavens and the earth, the sun estrellas, todo nos anuncia la and the stars, all announce the grandeza de Dios, greatness of God to us. 8. When the verb has for its subject a general collective noun, it agrees with the latter : El ejercito esta bien organizado, The army is well organized. If the collective is partitive, the verb may either agree with the same, or with the noun which follows it, and which is governed by the preposition de : La mitad de los soldados se ha ido, One half of the soldiers have gone or se ban ido, away. CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. 323 Leccion LXII. Lesson LXIL CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. Conjunctions. The Conjunctions most generally used are : Y, and. Porque, because. Ni...ni, neither... nor. Ya que, since. 0, or. Eespecto, regarding. Ya . . . ya, now . . . now. Por consiguiente, consequently Sea... sea, either. ..or. Por eso, therefore. Pero, but. Sobre, thereupon. Sin embargo, however. Algo, somewhat. No obstante, notwithstanding. Pues, since. A menos que, unless. Mientras, whilst. Si, if, whether, so. Conforme, as. Con tal que, provided. Antes que, before. Para que, in order that. Aun, ever. Porque, why. Por miedo, for fear. Interjections. Of Joy. Ah, ah ! Ah, ah! Gracias a Dios ! Thank God! Ah, que alegria ! ) TTri Bendito sea Dios ! ) God be > What a joy ! , > . 7 . Ay que gozo ! ) Alabado sea Dios ! ) praised ! Bueno! Good/ Vaya, vaya ! Well, now/ Of Sadness. Ah, ay ! Ah, ay ! Dios mio ! Good heavens ! Ay que pena ! What a pain / Valgame Dios ! May God help me! Ay de mi ! Woe to me ! Virgen santisima ! Holy Virgin ! Ay de mi ! Poor me ! Ave Maria ! God forbid / Of Approbation and Surprise. Muy bien ! Very well ! Caspita ! Bien hecho ! Well done ! Chispas ! Me alegro mucho ! / am very glad ! Cascaras ! Grandemente ! Splendid ! Caracoles ! Excelente ! Excellent ! Fuego ! Es un pasmo ! ) _ Ascuas ! f > Beautiful! Zounds I Es una maravilla ! ) Bravo ' Bravo ! 324 LESSON 62. Esta muy bien ! It is very well ! Oiga ! calle ! You don't say so ! Es milagro ! Wonderful ! Hola ! Hallo ! Guapo ! Magnificent ! Mire V. ! Do you see ! Viva, viva ! Hurrah, hurrah ! Caramba ! Plague ! Otra vez ! Another time ! Encore! Toma ! Indeed! (Ironically.) Of Contempt, Blame, and Disgust. Dios mio ! Good heavens ! Guapa cosa ! A fine thing ! Eso no vale nada ! That is good for Qu6 verguenza ! What a shame '> nothing ! Eso es bueno ! That is good indeed ! Quita alia" ! Get away I Vaya, vaya ! Well, now / Oxte ! Shame ! Que asco ! How disgusting ! Calle, que es bueno ! ) That is very Grande hazana, A great feat ! Vaya en gracia ! ] fine / (Iron.) Of Anger. Voto & \ si me enf ado ! Don't make Diantre ! Hang it ! me mad ! Voto a chapiro ! / tell you, sir I Anda enhoramala ! ) _ Par diez ! J _ , Vaya V. a pasear ! I Get away ' Caramba ! \ The plague take you ' Ascuas ! That >s too bad ! Of Exhortation and Encouragement. Vaya, vaya ! Bravely ! Guarda, guarda ! Look out J Vamos, vamos ! Gome on ! A un ladito ! Step aside ! Alerta ! Wide awake ! Cuidado ! Take care I Ea, venga alguien ! Somebody here ! Fuera, fuera ! Out with him ! Ea pues ! Well, now ! Fuego, f uego ! Fire ! Ea. animo ! Courage ! Ay, que me matan ! Murder ! Basta, basta ! Enough ! C6gele, c%ele ! Hold him ) Quedo, quedo ! Gently ! Acabdse ! It is all over ! Of Silence. Calla, calla ! Be silent I Silencio ! Silence ! QuecaUen! Quiet! Chito, vhiton ! Hush! 326 TABLE OF TABULA DE LAS TEP.MINACIONES DE LAS TEES CONJUGACIONES KEGULAKES EN LOS TIEMPOS SIMPLES. o PRESENT INFINITIVE. GERUND. PAST PARTICIPLE. PRESENT INDICATIVE. IMPERFECT INDICATIVE. PRETERIT. o o am-o ain-aba am-4 ain-as am-abas am-aste 1. AR AM-AB am-ando ain-ado am-a am-amos am-aba am-abamos am-d am-amos nm-ais am-abais am-asteis am-an am-aban am-aron COIII-O com-ia coni-i com-eg com -las com-iste 2. ER COM-BR com-lendo com-ido com-e com-emos com-la com-iamoa corn-id coTii-imos com-dis com-iaig com-isteis com -en com-ian com-ieron recib-o recib-ia recib-i recib-es rerit)-ias recib-iste 3. IR RE C IB-IB recib-iendo recib-ido recib-e recib-Imoa recib-la recib-iamos recib-id recib-imos recib-is recib-lais recib-isteis recib-en recib-ian recib-ieroa TERMINATIONS. 327 TABLE OF TEKMINATIONS OF THE THREE REGULAR CONJUGATIONS IN THEIR SIMPLE TENSES. FUTURE. CONDITIONAL. IMPERATIVE. PKESENT SUBJUNCTIVE. IMPERFECT SUBJUNC- TIVE. TERMINATION 1. 2. FUTURE SUBJUNCTIVE. amar-e* am a Ma arn-e am-ara -ase am-are amar-as amar-laa niu-a am-ea am-araa -aaea am -area amar-a amar-ia ani-e am-ara -ase ain-are amar-emoa aniar-iamos am-emoa am-aramoa -aaemoa am-aremoa amar-e*ia amar-iaia am-ad ain-els am-araia -aaeia am-areia amar-an amar-ian am-en am-aran -asen am-aren comer-e* comer-la corn-a com-iera -ieae com-iere comer-is comer-iaa coin-e coin-as com-ieraa -ieaea com-ierea comer-a comer-la com-a com-iera -ieae com-iere conier-emos comer-iamoa com-amoa com-i^ramoa -iesemoa com-ie*remo8 comer-els comer-iaia com-ed com-aia com-ieraia -ieaeis com-iereia comer-an comer-ian com -an com-ieran -ieaen com-ieren recibir-< recibir-ia recib-a recib-iera -ieae recib-iere recibir-as recibir-laa recib- recib-aa recib-ieraa -iesea recib-iereg recibir-a recibir-la recib-a recib-iera -iese recib-iere recibir-emos recibir-lamoa recib-amoa recib-ilramoa -iesemoa recib-ie'remoa recibir-e*is recibir-laia recib-id recib-aia recib-ieraia -ieaeia recib-iereia recibir-an recibir-lan recib-an recib-ieran -ieaen recib-ieren 328 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL TABULA ALFABETICA DE LOS PRINCIPALES VERBOS IRREGULARES 6 DEFECTIVOS, NOTA. El numero colocado despues del Presente del Infinitive de cada verbo indica la Conjugaci6n a la que pertenece este verbo. PRESENT INFINITIVE. GERUND. PAST PARTICIPLE. PRESENT INDICATIVE. IMPERFECT INDICATIVE. PRETERIT. Abolir, 3. to abolish. aboliendo abolido abolimos abolis abolia abolias abolia aboliamos aboliais abolian aboli aboliste aboli6 abolimos abolisteis abolieron Abrir, 3. to open. Regular in all the other tenses. abierto Absolver, 2. to absolve. conjugated like Mover. absuelto Abstraer, 2. to abstract. conjugated like Traer. Acertar, 1. to hit the mark. conjugated like Acrecentar. Acordar, 1. to agree* acordando acordado cuerdo cuerdas cuerda cordamos corddis cuerdan cordaba cordabas cordaba cordabamos cordabais cordaban acorde" acordaste acord6 acordamos acordasteis acordaron Ac os tar, 1. to lay down. conjugated like Acordar. Acrecentar, 1. to increase. acrecentando acrecentado acreciento acrecientas acrecienta acrecentamos acrecentais acrecientan Hcrecentaba acrecentabas acrecentaba acrecentaba- mos acrecentabais Hcrecentaban acrecente" acrecentaste acrecent6 acrecentamos acrecentas- teis acrecentaron Adestrar, 1. to guide. conjugated like Acrecentar. Adherir, 3. to adhere. conjugated like Asentir. IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 329 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS, NOTE. The number put after the Present Infinitive of each verb indicates the Conjugation to which that verb belongs. FUTUEE. CON- IM- PKESENT SUB- IMPERFECT SUBJUNC- TIVE. FUTUEE SUB- DITIONAL. PERATIVE. JUNCTIVE. TERMINATION 1. 2. JUNCTIVE. abolire aboliria abol-iera -iese aboliere abolirsis abolirias abol-ieras -ieses abolieres abolird aboliria abol-iera -iese aboliere aboliremos aboliriamos abol-ie"ramo8 -i6semos abolieremos abolir6is aboliria is abolid abol-ierais -ieseis aboliereis a bo lira u abolirian abol-ieran -iesen abolieren acordare' acordaria acuerde acord-ara -ase acordare acordaraVs acordarias acuerda acuerdes acord-aras -ases acordares acordara- acordaria acuerde acord-ara -ase acordare acordaremos acordariamos acordenios acord-Aramos -dsemos acorddremos acordar&s acordariais acordad acorde"is acord-arais -aseis acordareis acordar&n acordarian ncuerden acord-aran -asen acordaren j , , , . tare acrecentards acrecentarias acrecienta acrecientes acrecent-aras -ases acrecentares acrecentard acrecentaria acreciente acrecent-ara -ase acrecentare acrecentare- acrec&ntaria- acrecente- acrecent-dramos-dsemos acrecentdre- mos mos mos mos acrecentare"is acrecentar- acrecentad acrecent^is acrecent-arais -aseis acrecentareis iais acrecentar&n acrecentnrian acrecienten acrecent-aran -asen arrecentaren 330 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL PRESENT INFINITIVE. GEEUND. PAST PAETICIPLK. PRESENT INDICATIVE IMPERFECT INDICATIVE PRETERIT. Adquirir, 3. to acquire. adquiriendo adquirido adquiero adquieres adquiere adquirimos adquiris adquieren adquiria adquirias adqui7ia adquiriamos adquiriais ndquirfan adquirf adquiriste adquirio adquirimos adquiristeis adquirieron Aducir, 3. to convey. See Conducir. Advertir, 3. to advise. See Asentir. Agorar, 1. to divine. See Acordar. Alentar, 1. to encourage. See Acrecentar. Almorzar, 1. to breakfast. See Acordar. Andar, 1. to walk. andando andado an do andas anda andamos an dais andan andaba andabas andaba anddbamos andabais andaban and uve anduviste anduvo anduvimos anduvisteis anduvieron Apacentar, I. to graze. See Acrecentar. Apostar, 1. to bet. See Acordar. Aprobar, 1. to approve. See Acordar. Apretar, 1. to tighten. See Acrecentar. Argiiir, 3. to argue. See Instrulr. The diaeresis is kept in all forms, except before y. Arrecirse, 3. to be benumbed. See Abolir. Arrendar, I. to rent. See Acrecentar. IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 331 FUTURE. CONDITIONAL. IMPERATIVE. PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE. IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE TERMINATION 1. 2. FUTURE SUBJUNCTIVE. adquirire adquirirds adquirira adquiriremos adquirire is adquirirdn adquiriria adquiririas adquiriria adquiririamos adquiririais adquiririan adquiere adquirid adquiera adquieras adquiera adquiramos adquirais adquieran adquir-iera -iese adquir-ieras -ieses adquir-iera -iese adquir-ieramos -ie'semos adquir-ierais -ieseis adquir-ieran -iesen adquiriere adquirieres adquiriere adquirie'remoe adquiriereis adquirieren an dare andaras andara andaremos andare"is andaran andaria andarfas andaria andariamos andariais andarian anda andad ande andes ande andemos andeis anden and-uviera -uviese .nd-uvieras -uvieses and-uviera -uviese and-uvieramos-uviesemos and-uvierais -uvieseis and-uvieran -uviesen anduviere anduvieres anduviere anduvie"reinos anduviereis anduvieren 332 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL E! PRESENT INFINITIVE. GERUND. if " s PRESENT INDICATIVE IMPERFECT INDICATIVE PRETERIT. PH Arrepentirse, 3. See to repent. Asentir. Ascender, 2. See to ascend. Atender. Asentar, 1. See to establish. Acrecentar. Asentir, 3. asintiendo asentido asiento asentia asenti to acquiesce. asientes asentias asentiste asiente asentia asinti6 asentimos asentiamos asentimos asentis asentiais asentisteis asienten as en t inn asintieron Aserrar, 1. See to saw. Acrecentar. Asestar, 1. See to aim. Acrecentar. Asir, 3. asiendo asido asgo asia asi to seize. ases asias asiste This verb is used ase asia asi6 only in a meta- asimos asiamos asimos phorical sense. asis asiais asisteis asen asian asieron Asolar, 1. See to derastate. Acordar. Atender, 2. atendiendo ateudido atiendo atendia atendf to mind. atiendes atendias atendiste atiende atendia atendio atendemos atendiamos atendimos atendeis atendiais atendisteis atienden atendian atendieron Atentar, 1. See to attempt. Acrecentar. Aterrar, 1. See to prostrate. Acrecentar. Atestar, 1. See to crowd. Acrecentar, Atraer, 2. See to attract. Traer. IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 333 ~ ' J | fc . tit M FUTUBE. < H > I \ IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIV* If Q H rt ^ S S3 R HH ~ TERMINATION ^ M D CO 1. 2. 00 asentire" asentiria asienta asint-iera -iese asintiere asentirds asentirias asiente asientas asint-ieraa -ieses asintieres asentird asentiria asienta asint-iera -iese asintiere asentiremos asentiriamos asintamos asint-ieramos -ie"semos asintieremos asentir&s asentiriais asentid asintdis asint-ierais -ieseis asintiereis asentirdn asentirian asientan asint-ieran -iesen asintieren asire asirfa asga asiera asiese asiere asirds asirias ase asgas asieras asieses asieres asird asiria asga asiera asiese asiere asiremos asiriamos asgamos asi6ramos asiesemos asieremos asire is asiriais asid asgdis asieraia asieseis asiereis asirdn asirian asgan asierau asiesen sieren atendere atenderia atienda atend-iera -iese tendiere atenderds atenderias atiende atiendas atend-ieras -ieses tendieres atenderd atenderia atienda atend-iera -iese tendiere atenderemos atenderiarnos atendamos atend-i6ramos -iesemoa tendteremos atendereis atenderiais atended atenddis atend-ierais -ieseis tendiereis atenderdn atenderian atiendan atend-ieran -iesen tendieren . 334 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL PEESENT PAST PRESENT IMPERFECT GEKUND. PRETERIT. INFINITIVE. PAKTICIPLE. INDICATIVE. INDICATIVE. Atravesar, 1. to cross over. See Acrecentar. Aventar, I. See to fan. , Acrecentar. Avergonzar, 1. See to shame. Ac or dor. Bendecir, 3. bendiciendo bendito bendigo bendecia bendije to bless. bendecido bendices bendecias bendijiste bendice bendecia bendijo bendecimos bendeciamos bendijimos bendecis bendeciais bendijisteis bendicen bendecian bendijeron Caber, 2. cabiendo cabido quepo cabia cupe to be contained. cabes cabias cupiste cabe cabfa cupo cabemos cabiamos cupimos cabe"is cabiais cupisteis caben cabian cupieron Caer, 2. cay en do caido caigo caia cai to fall. caes caias caiste cae caia cay6 caemos caiamos caimos ca6is caiais caisteia caen caian cayeron Calentar, 1. See to warm. Acrecentar. Cegar, 1. See to blind. Acrecentar. Cenir, 3. See to ffird. Pedlr. Cerner, 2. See to sift. Atender. Cerrar, 1. See to close, to shut. Acrecentar. Cimentar, 1. See to ground, found. Acrecentar. IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 335 J . rf . H > FUTUEE. | H ri B 1 I MPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. 11 CM 3 TERMINATION fa 3 8 ^ cw 1. 2. C/5 bend- bend- bend- bendecire" -eciria bendiga -ijera -ijese bendijere bendecirds -ecirias bendice bendigas ijeras -ijeses bendijeres bendecird -eciria >endiga -ijera -ijese bendijere bendeciremos -eciriamos )endigamos -ijerainos -ijesemos bendijeremos bendecireis -eciriais bendecid bendigdis -ijerais -ijeseis bendijereis bendecir&n -ecirian bendigan -ijeran -ijesen bendijeren cab re cabria quepa cupiera cupiese cupiere cabras cabrias cabe quepas cupieras cupieses cupieres cabra cabria quepa cupiera . cupiese cupiere cab re nio3 cabriamos quepamos cupie"ramos cupiesemos cupiereraos cabr6is cabriais cabed quepdis cupierais cupieseis cupiereis cabran cabrian quepan cupieran cupiesen cupieren caere* caeria caiga cayera cayese cayere caerds caerias cae caigas cay eras cayeses cayerea caera" caeria caiga cayera cayese cayere caeremos caeriamos caigamos cay6ramos cayesemos cayeremos caereis caeriais caed caigais cayerais cayeseis cayereis caerdn caerian caigan cayeran cayesen cayeren 336 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL PRESENT INFINITIVE. GERUND. PAST PARTICIPLE. PRESENT INDICATIVE. IMPERFECT INDICATIVE. PRETERIT. Cocer, 2. to boil. cociendo cocido cuezo cueces cuece cocemos coceis cuecen cocia cocias cocia cociamos cociais cocian COCl cociste coci6 cocimos cocisteis cocieron Colar, 1. to strain. See Acordar. Colegir, 3. to collect. See Pedir. -Colgar, 1. to hang. See Acordar. Comedirse, 3. to govern oneself. See Pedir. Comenzar, I. to commence. See Acrecentar. Competir, 3. to compete. See Pedir. Concebir, 3. to conceive. See Pedir. Concernir, 3. to concern. See Asentir. Concertar, 1. to concert. See Acrecentar. Concordar, 1. to agree. See Acordar. Condescendftr,2. to condescend. See Atender. Condolerse, 2. to condole. See Mover. Conducir, 3. to conduct. conduciendo conducido conduzco conduces conduce conducimos conducis conducen conducia conducias conducia conduclamos conduciais conducfan conduje condujiste condujo condujimos condujisteis condujeron IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 337 FUTUEE. CONDITIONAL. IMPERATIVE. PEESENT SUBJUNCTIVE. IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. TERMINATION 1. 2. FUTUEE SUBJUNCTIVE. coceve cocerds cocera coceremos coeereis cocerdn cocerla cocerfas cocerfa cocerlamos cocerfais cocerian cuece coced cueza cuezas cueza cozamos cozais cuezan cociera cociese cocieras cocieses cociera cociese coci6ramos coci6semos cocierais cocieseis cocieran cociesen cociere cocieres cociere cocieremos cociereis cocieren conducir6 conducir&s conducird conduciremos conducireMs conducirn conduciria conducirfas conduciria conduciriamos conducirfais conducirlan conduce conducic conduzca conduzcas conduzca conduzcamos conduzcdis conduzcan condu-jera -jese condu-jeras -jesea condu-jera -jese condu-j6ramos -jesemos condu-jerais -jeseis condu-jeran -jesen condujere condujeres condujere condujeremos condujereis condujeren 22 338 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE 1'EINCIPAL PRESENT INFINITIVE. GERUND. PAST PABTICI^^E. PRESENT INDICATIVE. IMPERFECT INDICATIVE. PRETERIT. Coaferir, 3. to confer See Asentir. Confesar, 1. to confess. See Acrecentar. Conocer, 2. to know t to be ac- quainted with. couociendo conocido conozco conoces conoce conocemos conoc6is conocen conocla conocias conocla conociamos conoclais conocfan couool conociste conoci6 conocimos conocisteis conocieron Conseguir, 3. to obtain. See Pedlr. Consentir, 3. to consent. See Aaentir. Con solar, 1. to comfort. See Acordar. Constrefiir, 3. to constrain. See Pedir. Contar, 1. to count. See Acordar. Contener, 2. to contain. See Tener. Contender, 2. to contend. See Atender. Contradecir, 3. to contradict. See Decir. Controvertir, 3. to controvert. See Asentir. Contraer, 2. to contract. See Traer. Convertir, 3. to convert. See Asentir. Corregir, 3. to correct. See Pedir. Cnbrir, 3. to cover. cubierto Regular in all other tenses. 1 IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VEBBS. 339 FUTURE. CON- DITIONAL. IMPER- ATIVE. PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE IMPEBFECT SUBJUNCTIVE TERMINATION 1. 2. FUTURE SUBJUNCTIVE conocere conoceras conocerd conoceremos' conocere"is conocerdn conoceria conocerias conoceria conoceriamos conocerlais conocerlan conoce conoced conozca conozcas conozca conozcamos eonozcais conozcan conoc-iera -iese conoc-ieras -ieses conoc-iera -iese conoc-i6ramos -i6semos conoc-ierais -ieseis conoc-ieran -ieseu conociere conocieres conociere conocieremos conociereis conocieren 340 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL PRESENT PAST PKESENT IMPEKFECT INFINITIVE. GEEUND. PABTICIPLE. INDICATIVE. INDICATIVE. PKETEKIT. Bar, 1. to give. dan do dado doy das daba dabas df diste da daba di6 damos ddbamos dimos dais dabais disteis dan daban dieron Decaer, 2. See to decay. Caer. Decentar, 1. See to commence with. Acrecentar. Decir, 3. diciendo dicho digo decla dije to tell, to say. dices decias dijiste dice decla dijo decimos deciamos dijimos decfs decfais dijisteis dicen declan dijeron Deducir, See to deduct. Conducir. Defender, 2. See to defend. Atender. Beferir, 3. See to defer. Asentir. Degollar, 1. See to behead. Acordar. Demoler, 2. See to demolish. Mover. Demostrar, 1. See to demonstrate. Acordar. Dene gar, 1. See to deny. Acrecentar. Denostar. I, See to abuse. Acordar. . Derrengar, 1. See to hate. Acrecentar. Derretir, 3. See to melt. Fedir. IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 341 FUTUEE. CONDITIONAL. IMPKEATIVE. PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE IMPEEFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. TERMINATION 1. 2. FUTUEE SUBJUNCTIVE. dare daras dari daremos dareis darin daria darlas daria darlamos dariais darfan da dad d des fll demos deis den diera diese dieras dieses diera diese dieramos diesenios dierais dieseis dieran diesen die re dieres diere die'remos diereis dieren , dire" dirfe dird direraos dir6is diran diria dirias diria diriamos dirfais dirfan di decid diga digas diga digamos digais digan dijera dijese dijeras dijeses dijera dijese dije'ramos dije"semos dijerais dijeseis dijeran dijesen dijere dijeres dijere dijeremos dijereis dijeren 842 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL - - PRESENT INFINITIVE. GERUND. PAST PARTICIPATE PRESENT INDICATIVE IMPERFECT INDICATIVE PRETERIT. Desavenir, 3. to disagree. See Venir. Descender, 2. to descend. See Atender. Descollar, 1. to exceed. See Acordar. Descordar, 1. to uncord an in- strument. See Acordar. Descomedirse, 3. to be rude. See Pedir. Describir, 3. to describe. descrito Regular in all the oth- er tenses. Desflocar, 1. to remove flakes. See Acordar. Deshacer, 2. to undo. See Hacer. Deshelar, 1. to thaw. See Acrecentar. Desleir, 3. to dilute. See Befr. Desolar, 1. to desolate. See Acordar. Desollar, 1. toflay. See Acordar. Desovar, 1. to spawn. See Acordar. Despedir, 3. to dismiss. See Pedir. Despernar, 1. to break or cut off one's legs. See Acrecentar. Despertar, 1. to awake. See Acrecentar. (Desterrar, 1. to banish. See Acrecentar. IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 343 FUTUBE. CON- DITIONAL IMPERATIVE. PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. TERMINATION 1. 2. FUTUKE SUBJUNCTIVE 344 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL PRESENT INFINITIVE. GERUND. , P OT o * PRESENT INDICATIVE IMPERFECT INDICATIVE PRETERIT. Desplegar, 1. to unfold. See Acrecentar. Desvergonzarse, 2. to act impudently See Acordar. Dezmar, 1. to tithe. See Acrecentar. Diferir, 3. to delay. See Asentir. Digerir, 3. to digest. See Asentir. Discernir, 3. to discern. See Aaentir. Discordar, 1. to disagree. See Acordar. Disolver, 2. to dissolve. See Mover. Divertir, 3. to amuse. See Asentir. Doler, 2. to ache. See Mover. Dormir, 3. to sleep. durmiendo dormido duermo duermes duerine donnimos dorrnis duerrnen dorm a dorm as dorm a dorm anios dorm ais dorm an dormi dormiste durmi6 donnimos dormisteis durmieron Elegir, 3. to elect. See Pedlr. 'Embestir, 3. to attack, to assail. See Pedir. Empedrar, 1. to pave. See Acrecentar. Empezar, 1. to begin. See Acrecentar. Emporcar, 1. to soil. See Acordar. IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 345 FUTURE. CONDITIONAL. IMPERATIVE. PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. TERMINATION 1. 2. FUTURE SUBJUNCTIVE. dormire dormirds dormird dormiremos dornrireis dormi'-a'n dorrairfa dormirfas dorniiria dormfamos dormfais dorm Ian duerme dormid duerma duermas duerma durmarnos durmdis duerman durm-iera -iese durrn-ieras -ieses durm-iera -iese durm-ieramos -i6seraos durin-ierais -ieseis durm-ieran -iesen durrniere durmieres durmiere durraiereinos durmiereis durmieren 346 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL PRESENT INFINITIVE. GERUND. PAST PARTICIPLE. PRESENT INDICATIVE IMPERFECT INDICATIVE PRETERIT. Encender, 2. to light. See Atender. -Encensar, 1. to perfume (with in- cense). See Acrecentar. Encerrar, 1. to shut in, to inclose. See Acrecentar. Encomendar, 1. to recommend. See Acrecentar. Encontrar, 1. to meet. See Acordar. Encordar, 1. to put strings and cords (to an in- strument). See Acordar. Engrefrse, 3. to adorn one's self. See Rei'r. -Engrosar, 1. to fatten. See Acordar. Enmendar, 1. to correct. See Acrecentar. Enrodar, 1. to break on the wheel See Acordar. Ensangrentar, 1. to stain with blood. See Acrecentar. Entender, 2. to understand. See Atender. Enterrar, 1. to bury. See Acrecentar. Envestir, 3. to invest. See Pedir. Erguir, 3. to hold up the head. irguiendo erguido yergo yergues yergue erguimos erguls yerguen ergula ergufas ergula ergula mos erguiais ergulan ergul erguiste irgui6 erguimos erguisteis irguieron IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 347 FUTUEK. CONDITIONAL. IMPKKATIVE. PEESENT SUBJUNCTIVE IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE TERMINATION 1. 2. FUTUEE SUBJUNCTIVE erguire erguhis erguird erguiremos erguireis erguirdn erguirfa erguirfas erguirla erguilamos ergurlais ergurlnn vergue erguid yerga yergas yerga irgamos irgdis yergaa rgu-iera -iese rgu-ieras -ieses rgu-iera -iese rgu-i6ramos -i^semos rgu-ierais -ieseis rgu-ieran -iesen rguiere rguieres rguiere rguieremos rguiereia rguieren 348 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL PRESENT INFINITIVE. GERUND. PAST PAETIC T PLK PEE SENT INDICATIVE IMPEEFECT INDICATIVE PEETERIT. Errar, 1. to err. errando errado yerro yerras yerra erramoa erra is yerran erraba errabas erraba errabaruos errabais erraban erre erraste err6 erramos errasteis erraron Escarmentar, 1. to correct. See Acrecentar. Escocer, 2. to irritate. See Cocer. Escribir, 3. to write. Regular in al the other tenses. escrito Esforzar, 1. to strengthen. See Acordar. Estar, 1. to be. (See Auxiliary Verbs, p. 152). Excluir, 3. to exclude. See Instruir. Estrenir, 3. to bind. See Pedlr. Extender, 2. to extend. See Atender. Expedir, 3. to expedite. See Pedlr. Forzar, 1. to force. See Acordar. Fregar, 1. to cleanse. See Acrecentar. Freir, 3. to fry. See Relr. frito freido Gemir, 3. to groan. See Pedir. Gobernar, 1. to govern. See Acrecentar. IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 349 FUTUHE. CONDITIONAL. | 3 PEESENT SUBJUNCTIVE IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. TERMINATION 1. 2. FUTUEE SUBJUNCTIVE errar6 erraras errara erraremos errare"is erraran errarfa errarlas errarla errarfamos errariais errarian yerra errad yerre yerres yerre erremos erreis yerren errara errase erraras errases errara errase erraramos errasemos errarais erraseis erraran errasen errare errares errare erraremos errareis erraren 350 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL ^ PRESENT INFINITIVE. GERUND. PAST PARTICIPLE. PRESENT IMPERFECT PRETERIT. Haber, 2. to have. (See Auxiliary Verbs, p. 136.) Hacer, 2. to make, to do. haciendo hecho ha go haces hace hacemos naceis hacen hacla hacfas hacfa hacfamos haciais haclan hice hiciste hizo' hicimos hicisteis hicieron -Heder, 2. to stink. See Atender. Helar, 1. to freeze. See Acrecentar. Henchir, 3. to stuff. See Pedir. Render, 2. to split. See Atender. Hefiir, 3. to knead. See Pedir. Herir, 3. to wound. See Asentir. Herrar, 1. to shoe. See Acrecentar. Hervir, 3. to boil. See Asentir. Holgar, 1. to rest. See Acordar. Hollar, 1. to depress. See Acordar. Impedir, 3. to impede. See Pedir. Imprimir, 3. to print. See Instruir. irupreso irr, part. Regular in all the other tenses. Incensar, 1. to incense. See Acrecentar. IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. FUTUKK. CONDITIONAL PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. TERMINATION 1 2 FUTUEB SUBJUNCTIVE hare 1 hards hara haremos har&s haian harfa harias harfa hariamos hariais harfan haz haced haga hagas haga hagamos hagdis hagan hiciera hiciese hicieras hicieses hiciera hiciese hicieramos hici6semos hicierais hicieseis hicieran hiciesen hiciere hicierea hiciere hicieremos hicierefs hicieren 352 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL PRESENT INFINITIVE. GERUND. PAST PARTICIPLE. PRESENT INDICATIVE. IMPERFECT INDICATIVE PRETERIT. Incluir, 3. to include. See Instruir. Inducir, 3. to induce. See Conducir. Inf erir, 3. to infer. See Asentir. Inquirir, 3. to inquire. See Adqolrir. Instruir, 3. to instruct. instruyendo instruido instruyo instruyes instruye instruimos mstrufs instruyen instrufa mstrufas instrufa instrufamos instrufais instrulan instruf instruiste mstruy6 instruimos instruisteis instruyeron Introducir, 3. to introduce. See Conducir. Invernar, 1. to winter. See Acrecentar. Invertir, 3. to invert. See Asentir. Investir, 3. to invest. See Pedir. Ingerir, 3. to intermeddle. See Aaentir. Ir,3. to go. yendo ido voy vas va vamos vais van iba ibas iba fbamos ibais iban ful fuiste fu6 fuimos fuisteis fueron Jugar, 1. to play. jugaudo jugado juego juegas juega jugamos jugdis juegan jugaba jugabas jugaba jug&bamos jugabaia .jugaban jugu6 jugaste jugci jugamos jugasteis jugaron Llover, 2. to rain. See Mover. IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 353 J . 1 H . | FUTUEE FUTUEE. | W j5 IMPEEFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. Q H rt ^ SUBJUNCTIVE. PH m TERMINATION O CJ P to 1. 2. instruire instruiria instruya instru-yera -yese instruye re instruirds iustruirias instruye instruvas instra-yeras -yeses instruyeres instruira instruiria instruya instru-yera -yese instruyere instruirenio.* instruiriamos instruyamos instru-yeramos -ye"semos iustruyeremos instruire'is instruiriais instruid instruydis instru-yerais -yeseis instruyereis instruiran instruirian instruyan mstru-yeran -yesen instruyeren ir6 irla vaya fuera fuese fuere iris irfas ve vayas fueras fueses fueres ir& irfa vaya fuera fuese fuere iremos iiiamos vayamos fue'ramos fu6semos fue'remos ir6ia irlais id vay&is fuerais fueseis fuereis Iran irian vayan fueran fuesen fueren jugare" jugarla juege jugara jugase jugare jugaras jugarfas juega juegues jugaras jugases jugares jugara jugarla juege jugura jugase iugare jugaremos jugariamos juguemos jugiramos jugdsemos iugdremos jugar&s jugarfais jugad jugu&s jugarais jugaseis jugareis jugaran jugaiian lueguen jugaran jugasen jugaren 354 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL - . - - -- - PEESENT INFINITIVE. GERUND. B i Q*3 H . 1 PRESENT INDICATIVE. IMPEKFECT INDICATIVE. PKETERIT. Maldecir, 3. to detract. See Bendecir. Manifestar, 1. to manifest. See Acrecentar. Mantener, 2. to support. See Tener. Medir, 1. to measure. See Pedir. Mentar, 1. to mention. See Acrecentar. Mentir, 3. to lie. See Asentir. Merendar, 1. to take a collation. See Acrecentar. -Moler, 1. to grind. See Mover. Morder, 3. to bite. See Mover. Morir, 3. to die. muriendo inuerio muero mueres muere nioriraos moils mueren moria niorlas moila nioriamos morlais morlan moil moriste muri6 morimos moristeis murieron Mostrar, 1. t<> show. See Acordar. Mover, 2. to move. moviendo movido muevo ni neves mueve movemos movers mueven rnovla movlas mo via movfamos tno\fais mo\ Ian movl jioviste movi6 movimos movisteis movieron Negar, 1. to deny. See Acrecentar. Nevar, 1. to snow. See Acrecentar. IRREGULAR OK DEFECTIVE VERBS. 355 FUTURE. CONDITIONAL IMPERATIVE. PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. TERMINATION 1. 2. FUTURE SUBJINCTIVK. - morire morirds niorirA rnoriremos morireis morir&n morirla moririas morirfa morirlamos mori riais moririan inuere niorid inucra rnueras muera muramos nmrdis mueran nmr-iera -iese nmr-ieras -ieses mur-iera -iese mur-ieramos -iesemos rnur-ierais -ieseis mur-ieran -iesen muriere murieres muriere murieremos muriereis murieren mover 6 moveris inoverd, nioveremos niovereis moverAn moveria moveria s moveria moverlamos moverlais moveilan mueve moved mue\a muevas mueva movamos mov^is muevan mov-iera -iese mov-ieras -ieses mov-iera -iese mov-ieramos -iesemos mov-ierais -ieseis mov-ieran -iesen moviere movieres moviere movieremos moviereis movieren 356 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL PRESENT H! PRESENT IMPERFECT GERUND. 23 S PRETERIT. INFINITIVE. ^ S INDICATIVE. INDICATIVE. Pi Oir, 3. oyendo ofdo oigo ofa of tu hear. oyea ofas oiste oye oia oy6 ofnios ofamos ofmos ois oiais ofsteis oyen oian oyeron Oler, 2. to smell. oliendo olido huelo hueles olla ollas oil oliste huele olfa olio olemos olfamos olimos oleis olfais olisteis huelen olian olieron Pedir, 3. to ask for. pidiendo pedido pido pides pedfa pedfas pedf pediste pide pedfa pidi6 pedimos pedfamos pedimos pedfs pedfais pedisteis piden pedfan pidieron Pensar, 1. to think. See Acrecentar. Perder, 2. See to lose. Atender. Pervertir, 3. See to pervert. Asentir. Placer, 2. place placfa plugo 6 placio imp., to please. Plegar, 1. to plait or fold. See Acrecentar. Poblar, 1. to people. See Acordar. IRREUULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 857 J 2 > o H PRESENT FUTUEE FUTURE. B IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE a 3 SUBJUNCTIVE SUBJUNCTIVE TERMINATION 5 1. 2* oire* oirla oiga oyera oyese oyere oiris oirias oye oigas oyeras oyeses oyeres oird oirla oiga oyera oyese oyere oiremos iriamos oigamos oy6ramos oyesemos oye*remos oireis oirfais old oigais oyerais oyeseis oyereis oirdn oirian oigau oyeran oyesen oyeren olere" olerds oleria olerfas huele huela huelas oliera oliese olieras olieses oliere olieres oleri olerla huela oliera oliese oliere oleremos olerlamos olamos olieramos oli^semos olieremos oler^is pie rials oled olais olierais olieseis oliereis olerin olerian huelan olieran oliesen olieren pedire pedirds pediria pedhias pide pi da pidas pidiera pidiese pidieras pidieses pidiere pidieres pedirA pediria pida pidiera pidiese pidiere pediremos pediiiamos pidamos pidieramos pidi6semos pidiea-emos pedireis pedirlais pedid pidais pidierais pidieseis pidiereis pedirin pedirian pidan pidieran pidiesen pidieren placera placeria plegue plega pluguiera pluguiese pluguiere plegue placiera placiese placiere plazca 358 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL PRESENT RJ PRESENT IMPEBFECT GERUND. < hH PRETEBIT. INFINITIVE. INDICATIVE INDICATIVE Poder, 2. to be able. pudiendo podido puedo puedes podfa podias pude pudiste puede podia pudo podemos podlamos pudimos podeis podlais pudisteis pueden podian pudieron Podrir, 3. to rot. pudriendo podrido pudro pudres pod via podrlas podrl podriste pudre podrla pudri6 podrimos podrlamos podrimos podris podriais podristeis pud r en podiian pudrieron Poner, :B. to put. poniendo puesto pongo pones ponie ponfas puse pusiste pone ponla puso ponemos ponfanios pusimos pone"is ponlais pusisteis poneu ponlan pusieron Pref erir, 3. See to prefer. Asentir. Prender, 2. to take. legularinalJ the other prendido preso tenses. Prescribir, 3. to prescribe. prescrito irr. part. Regular in all the other tenses. Probar, 1. See to try. Acordar. Producir, 3. See to produce. Conducir. Proferir, 3. See to proffer. Asentir. Proscribir, 3. to proscribe. proscrito irr. part. legular in all the other tenses Quebrar, 1. See to break. Acrecentar. IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 359 J pi > H PRESENT FUTURE EuruaE. B IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE B 3 SUBJUNCTIVE SUBJUNCTIVE TERMINATION o 3 1. 2. pod re podria pueda pudiera pudiese pudiere podrds . podrlas puedas pudieras pudieses pudieres podra podria pueda pudiera pudiese pudiere podremos podriamos podamos pudieramos pudiesemos pudieremos podreis podriais poddis pudierais pudieseis pudiereis podrdn podrian puedan pudieran pudiesen pudieren podrire pod ri i ds podriria podririhs pudre pudra pudras pudriera pudriese pudrieras pudrieses pudriere pudrieres podriid podriria pudra pudriera pudriese pudriere podrircruos podririamos pudramos pudrieramos pudriesemos pudrieremos podrireis podriria is podrid pudrdis pudrierais pudrieseis pudriereis podriidu podririan pudran pudrieran pudriesen pudrieren pond re pond ids pondrfa pondifas pon ponga pongas pusiera pusiese pusieras pusieses pusiere pusieres pondrd pondrfa ponga pusiera pusiese pusiere pondremos pondriamos pongamos pusieramos pusiesemos pusieremos pondr6is pondrfais poned pongAis :>usierais pusieseis pusiereis pondrdn pondrian pongan pusieran pusiesen pusieren ! 1 360 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL PRESENT INFINITIVE. GERUND. PAST PARTICIPLE. PRESENT INDICATIVE. IMPERFECT INDICATIVE. PRETERIT. Querer, 2. to will. queriendo querido quiero quieres quiere queremos quere"is quieren querfa querlas queiia querfamos querlais querlan quise quisiste quiso quisimos quisisteis quisieron Baer, 2. to erase. See Caer. Eecomendar, 1. to recommend. See Acrecentar. Becordar, 1. to remind. See Acordar. Eecostar, 1. to recline. See Acordar. Beducir, 3. to reduce. See Conducir. Kef erir, 3. to refer. See Asentir. -Begar, 1. to water. See Acrecentar. Begir, 3. to rule. See Pedir. Begoldar, 1. to belch. See Acordar. Beir, 3. to laugh. rieudo reldo rlo rles rle relraos reis rlen rela reias rela relamos relais relan rei reiste ri6 refmos relsteis rieron -Bemendar, 1. to mend. See Acrecentar. Bendir, 3. to surrender. See Pedir. Benovar, 1. to renew. See Acordar. IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 361 FUTURE. CONDITIONAL. IMPERATIVE. PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVR IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. TERMINATION 1. 2. FUTURE SUBJUNCTIVE querr6 querr&s querr& querremos querr&s querrin querrfa querrfas querrfa querrfamos querrfais querrfan quiere quered quiera quieras quiera queramos querdis quieran quisiera quisiese quisieras quisieses quisiera quisiese quisieramos quisiesemos quisierais quisieseis quisieran quisiesen quisiere quisieres quisiere quisieremos quisiereis quisieren reir6 reir4s reird reiremos reirels reirAn reirla reirfas reirfa reirfamos reirfais reirfan rfe reid rfa rias rfa riamos riais rfan riera riese rieras rieaes riera riese rieramos ri^semos rierais ricseis rieran riesen riere rieres riere rieremos riereis rieren 362 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL PRESENT INFINITIVE. GERUND. PAST PARTICIPLE PRESENT INDICATIVE. IMPERFECT INDICATIVE. PRETERIT. Kenir, 3. to wrangle. See Pedir Kepetir, 3. to repeat. See Pedir. Kequebrar, 1. to court. See Acrecentar. Eequerir, 3. to uotify. See Asentir. Kescontrar, 1. to compensate. See Acordar. Resollar, 1. to respire. See Acordar. 'Ueventar, 1. to burst. See Acrecentar. Bevolcar, 1. to wallow. See Acordar. Kodar, 1. to roll. See Acordar. Boer, 2. to gnaw. See Caer. Ho gar, 1. to entreat. See Acordar. Romper, 2. to break. Regular in all the other lenses. rompido roto Saber, 2. to know. sabiendo sabido s6 sabes sabe saberaos sab&s saben sabfa sabias sabfa sabfamos sabfais sabian supe supiste supo supinios supistcis supieron Salir, 3. to go out. saliendo salido salgo sales sale salimos salfs salen salfa sa'las salfa sallamos sa If His salfan salt saliste salio saliraos salisteis salieron Satisfacer, 2. to satisfy. See Hacer. But chang- ing the / to/ IRKKGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 363 r FUTUBK. CON- DITIONAL. IM- PKBAT1VE. PRESENT SUB- JUNCTIVE. IMPKEFECT SUBJUNC- TIVE. TERMINATION 1. 2. Fl.'TUBB SUB- JUNCTIVE. sa >re sa jr4s sa >r& sa )remos sa >reis sa udn sabrla sabiias sabrfa sabrlamos sabrlais sabrian sabe sabed sepa sepas sepa sepamos si'! Ais sepan supiera supiese supieras supieses supiera supiese supieramos supi6semos supierais supieseis supieran supiesen supiere supieres supiere supi6ramos supiereis supieren saldre" saldr&s saldrA saldremos saldreis saldrAn saldrfa saldrfas saldfla saldrla.mos saldil us said t fin sal salid saiga saigas saiga salgamos sal4is salgan saliera saliese salieras salieses saliera saliese salieramos saliesemos salierats salieseis salieran saliesen saliere salieres saliere salieremos saliereis salieren atisf'ace or ^atisfay, (-2(1 pers. sing.) 364 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL - PEESENT INFINITIVE. GEBUND. PAST PARTICIPLE. PKESENT INDICATIVE. IMPEKFECT INDICATIVE. PEETEBIT. Segar, 1. to reap. See Acrecentar. Seguir, 3. to follow. See Pedir. Sembrar, 1. to sow. See Acrecentar. Sentar, 1. to become. See Acrecentar. Sentir, 3 to feel. See Aaentir. Ser, 2. to be. (See Auxiliary Verbs, p. 136.) Servir, 3. to serve. See Pedir. Serrar, 1. to saw. See Acrecentar. Soldar, 1. to solder. See Acordar. -Soler, 2. to be accustomed. suelo sueles suele solemos soleis suelen solfa solfas solia solfamos soliais so 11 an Solver, 2. to loosen. See Mover. suelto irr. part. Soltar, 1. to loosen. See Acordar. suelto irr. part. Sonar, 1. to sound. See Acordar. Sonar, 1. to dream. See Acordar. Sosegar, 1. to appease. See Acrecentar. Soterrar, 1. to bury. See Acrecentar. Sugerir, 3. to SUflffSt See Asentir. IRREGULAR OK DEFECTIVE VERBS. 365 FUTUHE. CON- DITIONAL [MPKBATIVE. PEESENT SUBJUNCTIVE IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. TERMINATION 1. 2. FUTUBE SUBJUNCTIVE suela suelas suela solanios solais suelan 366 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL - - PRESENT INFINITIVE. GERUND. PAST PARTICIPLE. PRESKNT INDICATIVE. IMPERFECT INDICATIVE. PRETERIT. Temblar, 1. to tremble. See Acrecentar. Tender, 2. to expand. See Atender. Tener, 2. to have. See Auxiliary Verbs, p. 139.) Tefiir, 3. to dye. See Pedir. Tentar, 1. to touch. See Acrecentar. Torcer, 2. to twist. See Cocer. Tostar, 1. to toast. See Acordar. Traducir, 3. to translate. See Conducir. Traer, 2. to bring. trayendo traldo traigo traes trae traemos traeis traen trala trafas trala traiamos traiais traian traje trajiste trajo irajiraos trajisteis trajeron Trascender, 2. to transcrni. See Atender. Trascordarse, 1. to forget. See Acordar. Trasegar, 1. to upset. See Acrecentar. Tronar, 1. to thunder. See Acordar. Tropezar, 1. to stumble. See Acrecentar. IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. FUTUKK. CONDITIONAL. IMPEHATIVE. PRESENT SUBJUNCTIV IMPERFECT SCBJUNCTIVE. TERMINATION 1. 2. FUTURE SUBJUNCTIVE I traere traer&s traeri traeremoa traereMa traerdn traeiia traerias traeria traeiiamos traerfais traeiia 11 trae traed traiga traigas traiga traigamos tragdis traigau t raj era trajese trajeras trajeses trajera trajese traj6ramos trajesemos trajerais trajeseis trajeran trajesen trajere trajeres trajere trajeremos trajereis trajeren t I 368 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL PEESENT a PEESENT IMPEEFECT GKRUND. W PEETEEIT. INFINITIVE. * 5 INDICATIVE. INDICATIVE P-I Valer, 2. valiendo valido valgo valla vail to be worth. vales valfas valiste vale valla valid valemos valiamos valimos valeis valfais valisteis valen vallan v aileron Venir, 3. to corny. viniendo venido vengo vienes veufa venfas vine veniste viene venfa vino venimos veniamos venimos venfs venlais venisteis vienen venlan yinieron Ver, 2. to see. viendo visto veo ves vela veias vl viste re vela vi<5 vemos velamoa vimos veis velais visteis ven velan vieron Verter, 2. to spill. See Atender. Vestir, 3. See to dress. Pedir. JTolcar, 1. See to overset. Acordar. Volar, 1. See tofly. Acordar. Volver, 2. legularinall vuelto to return. the other tenses. -Yacer, 2. to lie down. (See Defective Verbs, p. 320.) Zaherir, 3. See to censure. Asentir. IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 369 J o B H PRESENT FUTUEK FUTUEK. | | IMPEEFECT SUBJUWCTIVB. Q 3 SUBJUNCTIVE SUBJUNCTIVE TERMINATION t-H 1. 2. valdr6 valdrfa valga valiera valiese valiere valdras valdrias vale valgas valieras valieses valieres valdra valdrfa valga valiera valiese valiere valdremos valdriamos valgamos valie"ramoa vali6semos vali6remos valdreis valdrfais valed valgais valierais valieseis valiereis valdr&n valdrian valgan va lie ran valiesen valieren vendre" vendrla venga viniera viniese viniere vendras vendrfas ven vengas vinieras vinieses vimeres vendriu veudrfa venga viniera -aniese viniere vendremos vendrfamos vengamos vini^ramos vini^semos vmieremos vendreis vendriais venid vengais vinierais vinieseis vmiereis vendran vendrlan vengan vinieran viniesen vinieren vere" verfa vea viera viese viere vieres vera veria vea viera viese viere veremos verlamoa veamos vie"ramos vi^semos vieremos vere"is verfais ved veais vierais vieseis viereis veran verlan vean vieran viesen vieren 24 FORMAC10N BE LA LENGUA CASTELLANA. La lengua castellana consta de palabras fenicias, griegas, goticas, arabes, y de otras lenguas de las naciones que por dominacion 6 por comercio habitaron 6 frecuentaron estas partes. Pero principalmente abunda de palabras latinas enteras 6 adulteradas. LosRonianosestuvieronen Espana 600 anos a lo menos, aunque no se cuenten, sino desde el de 216 antes de Cristo en que vinieron la primera vez con ejercito, hasta el 416 despues de Cristo en que fue la entrada de los Godos ; y si esta cuenta se hace hasta el ano 623 de Cristo, en que los Romanes acabaron de perder lo que tenian en Espana, saldra que estuvieron mas de 800 anos. En este tiempo introdujeron aqui su lengua vulgar, que era la latina, como lo bicieron en todas las demas provincias que conquistaron. Con la decadencia del imperio ro- mano y venida de los Godos se fue adulterando la lengua latina 6 ro- rnana porque como los vencidos necesitaban acomodarse a la lengua de los vencedores, y estos deseaban y procuraban aprender la de los vencidos, contribuyeron unos y otros a estragar la lengua latina. Los Godos hallaron dificultad en la declinacion de los nombres latinos, FORMATION OF THE SPANISH LANGUAGE. The Castilian (Spanish) language is composed of words derived from the Phoenician, Greek, Gothic, and Arabic, and also from the languages of other nations which inhabited or visited Spain, intent on conquest or commerce. It abounds principally, however, in Latin words, either pure or adulterated. The Romans occupied Spain for at least 600 years, if we date their occupation from the year 216 B.C., when their first army appeared there, until 416 A.D., when the Goths in- vaded the country. But if we ex- tend our calculation to the year 623 A.D., when the Romans finally lost what they still possessed in Spain, the time of their occupation exceeds 800 years. They introduced their language in the country, namely, the Latin lan- guage, as they did in all the other provinces which they conquered. The Latin or Roman language be- came adulterated at the fall of the Roman empire and at the time of the invasion of the Goths, as the con- quered nation had to adapt itself to the language of the conquerors, while the latter desired and endeavored to learn the language of the conquered. These reasons contributed to the al- teration of the Latin language. The Goths found difficulty in the declension of the Latin nouns, and 370 FORMATION OF THE SPANISH LANGUAGE 371 y la dejaron enteramente, supliendo los casos con preposiciones. En los verbos siguieron en parte las conju- gaciones latinas, pero dejaron del todo la voz pasiva, y usaron para suplirla, de los participles pasivos con el verbo sustantivo ser. Esta lengua latina, asi adulterada, se empezo a llamar romance por su derivacion de la romana 6 latina, para distinguirla de la gotica. Con la irrupcion de los Arabes en el ano 714 padecio tambien alteracion el romance ; pero como los Espanoles empezaron desde luego a sacudir el nuevo yugo, a proporcion de las ventajas que iban consiguiendo, iba tambien la lengua cobrando fuerza y cultura. El rey Don Alfonso el Sabio mando que cesase el uso de escribir en latin los privilegios, donaciones reales y escrituras piiblicas. Entre varias obras que compuso, 6 hizo componer en romance, merece singular aprecio y elogio la de las Leyes de las Parti- das, en la cual la lengua ostento toda la riqueza y majestad que habia adquirido hasta entonces, y en que llevo grandes ventajas, no solo a otras obras anteriores y contempora- neas, sino aun a muchas posteriores. . Siguieron su ejemplo D. Juan Manuel, hijo del infante D. Manuel, y el rey D. Alfonso XI. El pri- mero compuso el libro del Conde Lucanor, el segundo el de monteria, ambas dignamente estimados. Escribieronse tambien los Croni- cas del Santo Rey Don Fernando, de abandoned it, supplying the cases with prepositions. They partly fol- lowed the Latin conjugations of the verbs, but entirely rejected the pas- sive voice, which they replaced by passive participles accompanied by the substantive verb ser. The Latin language, thus adulter- ated, began then to be called the Romance, from its derivation from the Roman, and in order to dis- tinguish it from the Gothic. The Romance underwent some alteration after the irruption of the Arabs in the year 714, but as the Spaniards soon began to shake off the new yoke, their language ac- quired strength and culture, the latter keeping pace with the advan- tages obtained in warfare. King Don Alfonso the Wise or- dered that the Latin language should not be used any longer for charters, royal grants, and public deeds. Among different works which he composed himself or superintended in the Romance lan- guage, special mention and praise is due to the Laws of Castile, in which the richness and majesty which the language had acquired are shown to greater advantage than in any pre- vious or contemporaneous, or even in many subsequent works. D. Juan Manuel, son of the infante D. Manuel, and king D. Alfonso XI. followed his example. The former wrote a work called Count Lucanor, and the latter a treatise on Hunting; both works are greatly esteemed. At that time were also written the Chronicles of the Holy King D. Fer- 372 FORMATION OF THE SPANISH LANGUAGE. Don Alfonso el Sabio, de Don Sancho IV., de Don Fernando IV., y de Don Alfonso XL Pedro Lopez de Ayala, ya con estilo mas adornado, escribio las Crdnicas del rey Don Pedro, de Don Enrique II. , y de Don Juan I. Alvar Garcia de Santa Maria, y Fer- nan Perez de Guzman, compusieron la de Don Juan II. Juan de Mena, la obra de las Trescientas, y la Coronacidn. El Bachiller Fern an Gomez de Ciudad Real, el Centon epistolario, que contiene unas ad- mirables cartas sobre los principales sucesos del reinado de D. Juan II. D. Alonso Tostado, Obispo de Avila, publico varias obras en castellano ; Hernando del Pulgar, su celebre Cronica de los reyes catdlicos, y algo mas adelante, el doctor Francisco de Villalobos, en sus Problemas, y otros tratados que compuso en ro- mance, di<5 a conocer la gracia y primor de que la lengua castellana es capaz. La publicaci6n de estas y otras obras semejantes, y la particular atenci6n con- que se dedicaron a cultivar la lengua castellana muchos escritores insignes que han norecido desde el reinado de los Reyes Catd- licos, la fueron puliendo y perfec- cionando, hasta ponerla en el estado en que hoy se halla. nando, of D. Alfonso the Wise, ofD. Sancho IV., of D. Fernando IV., and of D. Alfonso XL Pedro Lopez de Ayala, in a more ornate style, wrote the Chronicles of king D. Pedro, of D. Enrique II. , and of D. Juan I. Alvar Garcia de Santa Maria and Ferndn Perez de Guzman composed the Chronicles of D. Juan II. ; Juan de Mena, a work on the Three Hundred and on The Coronation. Fernan Gomez de Ciudad Real wrote the Epistolce Cento, which contains admirable let- ters on the principal events of the reign of D. Juan II. D. Alonzo Tostado, Bishop of Avila, published several works in the Castilian lan- guage ; also Hernando del Pulgar his celebrated Chronicle of the Catholic Monarchs, and somewhat later, Dr. Francisco de Villalobos, in his Problems and other treatises which he composed in the Romance language, showed the grace and ele- gance of which the Castilian lan- guage is susceptible. The publication of these and other works, and the special atten- tion paid to the cultivation of the Castilian language by many eminent writers who have nourished since the reigns of the Catholic Monarchs, have polished and perfected the language to the point at which it has arrived in our day. GENERAL VOCABULARY. INCLUDING ALL THE WORDS CONTAINED IN THE PRECEDING VOCABULARIES. I. Spanish-English. abajo, downstairs. abanico, m.fan. abierto, opened. abogado, m. lawyer. ^/aborrecer, 2. to hate. abrir, 3. to open. abundante, abundant. a caballo, on horseback. acabar, 1. to finish. 6. casa , to the house, home. acaso, perhaps. accidente, m. accident. accidn, f. action. aceite, m. oil. aceptable, acceptable. acercarse, 1. to ap- proach. acompanar, 1. to accom- pany. aconsejar, 1. to advise. acontecer, 2. to happen; acordarse, 1. to remem- ber. acostarse, 1. to go to bed.- acostumbrado, accus- tomed. acostumbrar, 1. to ac- custom. & crdito, on credit. ^. acusar, 1. to accuse. adelantar, 1. to be fast. adherir, 8. to adhere. adi6s, good-by. admitido, admitted. afable, affable. afeitar, 1. to shave. afuera, out, without. agradable, agreeable. agradecido, thankful. agrio, sour. agua, f. water. aguardar, 1. to expect, to wait. ahora, now. ahi, there. aire, m. air. alabanza, f. praise. alabar, J. to praise. alb anil, m. mason. al contrario, on the con- trary. aldea, f. village. alegrarse, 1. to rejoice. alegre, lively. U ^tfejarse, 1. to leave. Aleman, m. German. Alemania, f. Germany, algo, something, any- f thing, rather. algoddn, m. cotton. 373 alguien, somebody, any- body. alguna parte, some- where, anywhere. algunas veces, some- times. alguno, some, any, some one, any one, somebody, anybody. alii, there. almacen, m. store. almirante, m. admiral. almorzar, 1. to break- fast. almuerzo, m. breakfast. alojamiento, m. lodg- ing. & lo menos, at least. al punto que, as soon as. alquilar, 1. to let. alto, high, tall, loud. amado, loved. amar, 1. to love. amargo, bitter. I ama V. ? do you love. a menos que, unless. menu do, often. Amejicano, in. Ameri- can. amigo , m . friend. 374 GENERAL VOCABULARY. amis tad, f. friendship. atacar, 1. to attack. aniistoso, friendly. atencidn, f. attention. amo, / love. a^ento, attentive. amo, m. master. a'trasar, 1. to delay. amor, m. love. ,atravesar, 1. to cross andar, 1. to walk. over. animal, m. animal. aun, even, yet. anoche, last night. aunque, although. ansioso, eager. ausente, absent. antes de, before. autor, m. author. anunciar, 1. to an- autorizar, 1. to author- nounce. afiadir, 3 to add. ize. autorizaci6n, f . author- aiio, m. year. ization. 4partar, 1. to remove. \ avaro, m. miser. l/ apelar, 1. to appeal. aventura, f . adventure. apenas, hardly, no ayer, yesterday. sooner. ayudar, 1. to help. a pie, on foot. aziicar, m. sugar. apoderarse, 1. to take azul, blue. possession. apostar, 1. to bet. aprender, I. to learn. B. aprendido, learned. aprobar, 1. to approve. bagatela, f. trifle. aquello, that, that thing. bailar, 1. to dance. aqui, here. baile, m. ball. aqul tiene V. , here is. bailo, 7 dance. Arabe, m. Arab. bajar, 1. to come down. arbol, m. tree. bajo, low, under. arce, m. maple. banco, m. bank. armario, m. closet. banquero, m. banker.' articulo, m. article. bafiarse, 1. to bathe. arreglar, 1. to arrange. barato, cheap. arrepentirse, 3. to re- bar co, m. vessel. pent. bastaiite, enough. arriba, upstairs. bast6n,m. walkingstick, arruinar, 1. to ruin. cane. asegurar, 1. to assure. bastonazo, m. blow asi, thus, so, therefore. (with a stick). asi que, so that, as soon batalla, f. battle. as. baiil, m. trunk. asolar, 1. to devastate, bebo, 7 drink. asunto, m. matter, busi- bendecir, 3. to bless. ness. \ beiieficio, m. benefit. bene*fico, benevolent. biblioteca, f. library bien, good, well. Jbillar, m. billiards. bianco, white. boca, f. mouth. bocoy, m. hogshead. bodega, f . cellar. bollo, m. cake. bondad, f. kindness. bonito, pretty. trordado, trimmed. borracho, intoxicated. bosque, m. wood. bota, f. boot. botella, f. bottle. boticario, m. druggist, botdn, m. button. . bueiias noches, good night. bueno, good, well. buenos dias, good morn- ing, good day. buey, m. ox. buque, m. ship, vessel. burlarse, 1. to laugh at buscar, 1. to look for. C. caballerfa, f. cavalry. caballeriza, f. stable. caballero, m. gentle- man. caballo, m. horse. oada, each. cadena, f . chain. caer, 2. to fall. caerse, 2. to fall. caf, m. coffee. caja, f. safe, box. cajdn, m. drawer. calentar, 1 . to warm. caliente, warm. SPANIS ,ISH. 375 callado, silent. centavOJ cent. comparecer, 2. to ap- calle, f. street. cerca, J. pear. callejuela, f. lane. cerca^Sre, nearly. complacer, 2. to please. cama, f. bed. cereza, f. rhern/. componer, 2. to com- cambiar, 1. to exchange. cerveza, f. beer. pose. camino, m. road. jfllKtado, closed, shut. . c'omportamiento, m. camisa, f. shirt. cerrar, 1. to shut. behavior. campo, m. country. Ce*sar, Ccesar. comportarse, 1. to be- cancidn, f. song. ciego, blind. have. cansado, tired. cielo, m. heaven. comprado, bought. canta, sings. ciencia, science. ^compra V.? do you cantar, 1. to sing. cierto, certain. buy? cantatriz, f . singer. ciudad, f . city. comprender, 2. to un- canto, m. singing. claro, clear. derstand. cana, f. cane. clase, f. class. compro, 7 buy. caoba, f. mahogany. clavel, m. pink. comtiii, ordinary, low. capital, f . capital. clima, m. climate. con, with. capital! m. captain. cocina, f. kitchen. concepto, m. opinion. capltulo, m. chapter. cocinera, f. cook. concierto, m. concert. cara, f.face. cocinero, m, cook. conciso, concise. carb6n, m. coal. coche, m. coach. concluir, 3. to conclude,, carcel, f . prison. codicioso, greedy. to Jinish. caridad, f. charity. oojear, 1. to limp, to concluirse, 3. to end. Carlos, Charles. balance. conde, m. count. carne, f. meat. colegio, m. college. condenar, I. to con- carne (f.) de vaca, f. cdlera, m. cholera. demn. beef. ^dolmar, 1. to overwhelm* <5ondesa, f. countess. carnicero, m. butcher. colocacidn, f . situation. Cjondisclpulo, m. fel- carpintero, m. car- Coldn, Columbus. low-scholar. penter. Colorado, red. conducir, 3. to conduct, cartero, m. postman. comedia, f . comedy. to take. caro, dear. comedido, polite. conducta, f. conduct. Carolina, Caroline. comedor, m. dining- confesar, 1. to confess. carta, f. letter. room. conf orme, conformably. carreta, f. cart. comemos, we dine. congreso, m. congress. casa, f. house. 1 come V.? do you dine % fionjuracidn, f. con- casaca, f. coat. comer, 2. to dine, to eat'. spiracy. casar, 1. to marry. comer ciante, m. mer- conmigo, with me. casarse, 1. to marry. chant. conocer, 2. to know. castigar, 1. to punish. comido, eaten. ^conoce V.? do you causa, f. cause, case. comida, f. eating, dinner. know? are you ac- cazador, m. hunter. como, since, about. quainted with ? celebre, celebrated. c6mo, how. conocido, m. acquaint- cena, f . supper. companero, m. com- ance. censurar, 1. to censure. panion. coiiocido, known. GENERAL VOCABULARY. conozco, / know, I am acquainted with. conseguir, 3. to obtain. consejo, m. advice. consistir, 3. to consist. consolar, 1. to console to comfort. construir, 3. to con struct, to build. consultado, consulted. consultar, 1. to consult-. con tal que, provided. contar, 1. to count. contener, 2. to contain. contento, pleased, sat- isfied. contestar, 1. to answer^ contiene, contains. continual, 1. to con- tinue. con tor 11 os, m. pi. the suburbs. contrario, contrary. convencer, 2. to con- vince. convenir, 3. to be proper. conversar, 1. to con- verse. convidar, 1. to invite. copiar, 1. to copy. coronel, m. colonel. cortado, cut. cortaplumas, m. pen- knife. cortar, 1. to cut. corte*s, polite. corto, short. correo, m. post, mail, postoffice. correr, 2- to run. cosa, f. thing, matter of importance. costa, f. expense. costar, I. to cost. costumbre, f. manner. creador, m. creator. credito, m. credit. creer, 2. to oelieve. creo, / believe. criada, f . servantgirl. criado, m. servant. crim en, m. crime. cruel, cruel. cruz, f. cross. cuaderno, m. copybook cuadro, m. picture. cuaiido, when. cuanto, as much. cuaiito, how much. cuarto, m. room. cuatro,/owr. cueiita, f. account. cuento, m. tale. cuchillo, m. knife. culpado, guilty. CH. chaleco, m. vest. champaiia, f. cham- pagne. chiquito, little. da, gives. dado, given. danza, f . dance. dar, 1. to give. dar (1.) un paseo, to take a walk. de, of. debo, / owe. debe, owes. deber, 2. to owe, must. d jtizgar, 1. to judge. infeliz, unhappy. ingenio, m. genius. Inglaterra, England. L. Ingle's, m. Englishman. inmdvil, immovable. labrador, m. farmer. inocencia, f . innocence lado, m. side. inocente, innocent. Iadr6n, m. thief. insolencia, f. insolence. lagrima, f . tear. instante, m. instant. lampara, f . lamp. instruir, 3. to instruct. largo, long. instrument, m. instru- Latin, Latin. ment. lavandera, f. washer- inteligente, intelligent. woman. intencidn, f. intention. lapiz, m. pencil. inter esante, interest- lavar, 1. to wash. ing. leccidn, f. lesson. interesar, 1. to interest. leche, f. milk. interesarse, 1. to take leer, 2. to read. interest. legua, f. league. iniitil, useless. legumbre, f. vegetable. invierno, m. winter. leido, read. invitacidn, f . invitation. le jos, far. invocar, 1. to invoke. lengua, f. language. ir, 3. to go. leiia, f. wood. irse,- 3. to go away. Ie6u, m. lion. Isabel, Isabella. levantarse, 1. to rise. isla, f. island. ley, f . law. Italia, f . Italy. liberal, liberal, 380 GENERAL VOCABULARY. liberalidad, f. liberal- malo, bad, ill, unwell. ity. mandar, 1. to send, to libertad, f. liberty. order. libra, f . pound. mande V., send. libro, m. book. mano, f. hand. licencia, f. license. maiitener, 2. to support. .^Jlcenciar, 1. to disband. manzana, f . apple. ligero, quick. manana, f. morning. limonada, f . lemonade. mauaiia, to-morrow. limpio, clean. marcha, f . march. vfista, f . list. mar char, 1. to go, to listo, ready. march. loco, insane. mar chars e, 1. to depart. Jtbdo, m. mud. marido, m. husband. Londres, London. marinero, m. sailor. Luego que, as soon as. mas, more. "mgar, m. place, spot. , - mascara, f . mask. Luisa, Louisa. matar, 1. to kill. luna, f . moon. maxima, f. maxim. luz, f . light. la mayor parte, the most. media, f. stocking. LL. medico, m. physician. medio, m. means, way. llamar, 1. to call. medir, 3. to measure. llamarse, I. to be called. memoria, f . memory. Have, f. key. menester, necessary. llega, arrives. mentira, f. falsehood. llegar, 1. to arrive. ^ tnercader, m. merchant. llegado, arrived. mercancias, f. pi. lleno,full. goods. llevar, 1. to take. merecer, 2. to deserve. llora, weeps. me*rito, m. merit. llorar, 1. to cry, to weep. mes, m. month. Hover, 2. to rain. mesa, f . table. lluvia, f. rain. mi, my. mill tar, military. milla, f . mile. M. mina, mine. minuto, m. minute. madre, f. mother. mirar, 1. to look at. madrina, f. godmother. miseria, f. misery. maduro, ripe. mismo, same, very, self. maestro, m. teacher. mitad, f. half. magnifico, splendid. finodo, m. way. molestar, I. to trouble. momento, m. moment. montar, 1. to mount. monte, ID. mountain. monumento, m. monu- ment. morder, 2. to bite. morir, 3. to die. Moro, m. Moor. mostrar, 1. to show. motive, m. motive. mover, 2. to move, to turn. movimiento, m. move- ment. muchacha, f . girl. muchacho, m. boy. muchas gracias, I (or we] thank you. mucho, mucha, much. muchos, muchas, many. mucho tiempo, long time. muerte, f. death. muerto, died. mujer, f. woman, wife. mundo, m. world. muneca, f . doll. murid, died. muro, m. wall. musica, f . music. muy, very. N. nacer, 2. to be born. nacidn, f . nation. nada, nothing, not any- thing. nadie, nobody, not any- body, no one. naranja, f. orange. natural, natural. SPANISH-ENGLISH. 381 navegacidn, f. n< tion. necesidad, f. necessity. necesita, needs. i,necesita V.? do you need? necesitar, 1. to need. necesito, / need. necesario, necessary. negocio, m. business. negro, black. ni, neither, nor. nieve, f. snow. ninguno, not any, no. nino, m. child. no, no. noche, f . night. no. ..mas, no. ..more. nombre, m. name. norte, m. north. nosotros, we, us. noticia, f . news. novela, f . novel. nuevo, new. nuez, f . nut. mirnero, m. number. nunca, never. ,aviga*lf>LisLr, o. obedecer, 2. to obey. obediente, obedient. objeto, m. object. obligar, 1. to oblige, to compel. obra, f . work. obrar, 1. to act. obrero, m. workman. obtener, 2. to obtain. ocasidn, f. occasion. ociosidad, f. idleness. ocupado, busy. ocupar, 1. to occupy. , 1. to hate. ofender, 2. to offend. oficial, m. officer. ofrecer, 2. to offer. oir, 3. to hear. \ ojal ! would to God. ojo, m. eye. olor, m. smell. olvidar, 1. to forget. onza, f. ounce. opinidn, f . opinion. orgulloso, proud. oro, m. gold. , 1. to dare. oscuro, dark. , m. bear. otra cosa, something else. otro, other, another. paciencia, f . patience. .jpadecer, 2. to suffer. padre, m. father. padres, m. pi. parents. padrino, m. godfather. pagar, 1. to pay. pagina, f. page. pals, m. country. pajaro, m. bird. palabra, f . word. palacio, m. palace. pan, m. bread. panadero, m. baker. pafio, m. cloth. panuelo, m. handker- chief. papel, m. paper. paquete, m. package, par a, for. "fJarado, standing. paraguas, m. umbrella. pararse, 1. to stand. parecen, seem. parque, m. park. parte, f . part. partir, 3. to leave. pasado, past, last. pasado maiiana, the day after to-morrow. pasar, 1. to pass. pasearse, 1. to take a walk. paseo, m. walk. paternal, paternal. patio, m. yard. patria, f . country. pavo, m. turkey. paz, f . peace. pedazo, m. piece. pedir, 3. to ask for. Pedro, Peter. pegar, 1. to strike. pelea, f. fight. -, 1. to fight. peligroso, dangerous. pelo, m. hair. penoso, hard, painful. pensar, 1. to think, to peor, worse, [intend. pequeno, small, little. ., f . pear. perder, 2. to lose. perdida, f. loss. perdido, lost. perdonar, 1. to forgive. periddico, m. news- paper. permitir, 3. to allow. pero, but. persona, f . person, pertenece, belongs. perro, m. dog. ; m. grief. i, m. neck. picaro, m. rogue. pide, asks for. pie, m.foot. 3*2 GENERAL VOCABULARY. piensa V. ? do you in- tend? pierna, f. leg. pieza, f . piece. . pintar, 1. to depict. pintura, f . painting. pio, pious. pizarra, f. slate. planta, f . plant. plata, f . silver. , pleito, m. lawsuit. ,- plomo, in. lead. poblar, I. to people. pobre, poor. poco, adv. little. pocos,few. poder, m. power. poderoso, powerful. <-fJodrir, 3. to rot. polio, m. chicken. Pompeyo, Pompey. ponerse, 2. to put on. - populacho, m. mob. por, through, by. por cierto, certainly. por desgracia, unfortu- nately. porfiado, obstinate. por mas... que, how- ever. or precisidn, by neces- sity. porque, because. I porque" ? why f por supuesto, of course. i posada, f . inn. posesi6n, f . possession. posible, possible. posteridad, posterity. ? pozo, m. well. practicar, 1. to practise. precepto, m. precept. ' precio, m. price. preciso, necessary. pref erir, 3. to prefer. pregunta, f. question. preguntar, 1. to inquire, to ask. preparar, 1. to prepare. prerogativa, f. preroga- tive. prescribir, 3. to pre- scribe. presentar, 1. to present, to introduce. prestar, 1. to lend. presumido, conceited. pretender, 2. to pretend. prima, f. cousin. primavera, f . spring. primero^rs*. primo, m. cousin. principe, m. prince. principiante, m. begin- ner. principio, m. principle. prisionero, m. prisoner. privilegio, m. privilege* probable, probable. probablemente, prob- ably. probar, 1. to prove. procesidii, f. proces- sion. profesor, m. professor. profundo, deep. prometer, 2. to promise. pronto, soon, quickly. pronunciar, 1. to pro- nounce. propenso, inclined. propicio, propitious. propiedad, f . property. proponer, 2. to propose. ^provenir, 3. to come from (to originate), to result. pr6ximo, next. prueba, f. proof. puede V. ? can you ? puedo, I can. piiblico, public. pueblo, m. town, village. puente, m. bridge. puerta, f . door. puerto, m. port. pues, as, well, for. puesto, put. jpuipero, m. grocer. pufialada, f. stab (with a poniard). que, that, which. qu6, which, what. que*, how. queclarse, 1. to remain. gtf&jarse, 1. to com- plain. quemar, 1. to burn. querer, 2. to grant. queso, m. cheese. quien, who, whom. quiere, wishes. & quiere V. ? will you have ? do you wish ? quieren, wish. quiero, I wish, 1 will have. quieto, quiet. quitarse, 1. to take off. quitasol, ra. sunshade. R. rarp, rare. rat'6n, m. mouse. raz6n, f. reason. recibido, received. recibir, 3. to receive. recomendar 1. to rec- ommend. SPANISH-ENGLISH. 883 recompensa, f. recom- pense. reconocer, 2. to know. ref erir, 3. to relate. refresco, m. refresh ment. regimiento, m. regi- ment. reina, f. queen. reinar, 1. to reign. reino, m. kingdom. relr, 3. to laugh. rendirse, 3. to surren- der. reo, in. culprit. reparar, 1. to compen- sate. repetir, 3. to repeat. representar, 1. to play. reprimir, 3. to repress. residir, 3. to reside. resolver, 2. to resolve. respetar, 1. to respect. responder, 2. to answer. restablecer, 2. to rees- tablish. retrato, m. picture. rey, m. king. ricachdn, m. a very rich man. rico, rich. rfe, laughs. rienda, f. bridle. rincdn, m. corner. rio, m. river. robar, 1. to steal. Romano, m. Roman. Rdmulo, Romulus. ropa, f . clothes. rosa, f . rose. rdbio,fair, blond. ruido, m. noise. ruina, f . ruin. Rusia, Russia. Ruso, Russian. 8. B&bana, f . sheet. sabe, knows. ^,sabe V.? do you know ? sabiamente, wisely. sabio, wise. sable, m. saber. sacar, 1. to draw. saco, m. bag. sagrado, sacred. sale, goes out, comes out, leaves. ^ sale V.? do you go out? salida, f . exit. salir, 3. to leave, to out. salir de, to leave. saltar, 1. to jump. salubre, healthy. sastre, m. tailor. satisfecho, satisfied. se, I know. seda, f . silk. en seguida, immedi- ately. seguir, 3. to continue, follow. segiiii, according to. seguro, sure. semana, f . week. la semana que viene, next week. ,Bembrar, 1. to sow. sentado, seated. sentar, 1. to become. seiitarse, 1. to sit down. sentencia, f. maxim, judgment. sentir, 3. to feel, to regret. sefias, f. pi. direction. sefior, sir, Mr. sefiora, madam, ser, to be. servicio, m. service. servido, served. si, if. si, yes. siempre, always. lo siento, / am sorry for it. siguen, follow. silla, f . chair 9 saddle. sin, without. sin embargo, however. singular, singular. sino, but. soberbio, haughty. solpre, on, upon, about. <7,ar6bretodo, m. overcoat. sociedad, f . society. ro, m - assistance. sol, m. sun. solamente, only. ler, 2. to be in the habit. solo, alone. s6lo, only. sombrerero, m. natter. sombrero, m. hat. to someter, 2. to subdue. son, are. sonar, 1. to dream. sopa, f. soup. sordo, deaf. sorpien6Lido,surprised. su, his, her. sublevar, 1. to revolt. sucio, dirty. sueno, m. dream. suerte, f.fate. sufocar, 1. to suffocate. suministrar, I. to of fer. siiplica, f . entreaty. suplicar, 1. to entreat. 384 GENERAL VOCABULARY. suponer, 2. to suppose. todavia, yet. supremo, supreme. todo, all, everything. suspender, 2. to sus- todo el mun Jo, every- pend. body. tomar, 1. to take. tomo, m. volume. T. tonto, foolish, silly. < torre, f. tower. tal, such as. trabaja, works. talento, m. talent. trabajar, 1. to work. tal vez, perhaps. trabajo, m. work. tambien, too, also. traducci6n, f. transla- tampoco, not either, tion. neither. traducir, 3. to translate. tan, so. traer, 2. to bring. tan pronto como, as traido, brought. soon as. traiga V., bring. tarde, f. afternoon. traje, m. dress. tarde, late. trasparente, transpar- Tartaria, f. Tartary. ent. t6, m. tea. tratar, 1. to treat. teatro, m. theater. tres, three. Telemaco, Telemachus* trineo, m. sleigh. temblar, 1. to tremble. , tripulacidn, f. crew. temer, 2. to fear. triste, sac?. temor, m.fear. L trueno, m. thunder. temprano, early. turbulento, boisterous. tener, 2. to hold, to have. teologal, theological. te6rico, theoretical. U. terremoto, earthquake. ta, f . aunt. ultimo, last. tfo, m. uncle. unos pocos, a few. tiempo, m. time. ufia, f . nail. en tiempo pasado,/or- urbanidad, f. urbanity. merly. listed, you (sing.). tienda, f . shop. Ustedes, you (pi.). tione, has. dtil, useful. tienen, have. tierra, f . earth. tigre, m. tiger. V. tijeras, f. pi. scissors. tlmido, timid. V., see Usted. tintero, m. inkstand. va, goes. to car, 1. to play on. vaca, f . cow. vacio, empty. valiente, brave. valer, 2. to be worth. valor, m. courage. vapor, m. steam t steamer. vara, f . yard. varios, as, several. vaso, m. glass (to drink in). V.? are you go- ing? Vd., see Usted. Vds., see Ustedes. ve, sees. veneer, 2. to conquer. vende, sells. vender, 2. to sell. I vende V.? do you sell? vendido, sold. vendo, / sell. veneno, m. poison. veo, I see. venir, 3. to come. ventajoso, profitable. ventana, f . window. ver, 2. to see. verdad, f . truth. verde, green. verso, m. verse. vestido, m. dress. vestidos, m. pi. clothe* vestir, 3. to dress. vestirse, 3. to dress. & ve V. ? do you see ? vez, f . time. viajar, 1. to travel. viaje, m. journey. victoria, f . victory. vida, f . life. vidrio, m. glass. viejo, old. viene, comes. viento, m. wind. SPANISH-ENGLISH. 385 vigilante, watchful. volver a hacer, 2. to ya no, no longer. vino, m. wine. do again. yerba, f . grass. virtud, f. virtue. voy, / am going. yo, /. visitar, 1. to visit. vuelva V., return. visto, seen. VV., see Ustedes. vive, lives. Z. vivir, 3. to live. Y. volar, 1. to fly. zapatero, m. shoe- volver, 2. to turn, to re- y, and. maker. turn. ya, already. zapato, m. shoe. 26 386 GENERAL VOCABULARY. II. English-Spanish. absent, ausente. about, sobre, como. abundant, abundante. acceptable, aceptable. accident, accidente, m. to accompany, acom- panar, 1. according to, segiln. account, cuenta, f . to accuse, acwsw, 1. to accustom, acostum- brar, 1. accustomed, acostum- brado, 1. to accustom one's self, habituarse, 1. acquaintance, conoci- do, m. are you acquainted with ? conoce V. ? I am acquainted with, conozco. to act, obrar, 1. action, accttfn, f . to add, anadir, 3. to adhere, adherir, 3. admiral, almirante, m. admitted, admitido. adventure, aventura, f . advice, consejo, m. to advise, aconsejar, 1. affable, a/able. after, despue's, despue's de, despue's que. afternoon, tarde, f. afterward, afterwards, despue's. age, edad, f. agreeable, agradable. air, aire, m. all, todo. to allow, permitir, 3. alone, solo. already, ya. also, tambie'n. although, aungue. always, siempre. ambassador, embaja- dor, m. American, Americano, m. to amuse, divertir, 3. to amuse one's self, divertirse, 3. and, t y, e'. angry, enfadado. animal, animal, m. to announce, anunciar, 1. another, otro. to answer, contestar, 1. responder, 2. ant, hormiga, f . any, alguno. anybody, alguien f al- guno. any one, alguno. anything, a/^o. anywhere, alguna parte. to appeal, apelar, 1. to appear, comparecer^ 2. apple, manzana, f. to approach, acercarse, 1. to approve, aprobar, 1. Arab, Jra&e, m. are, son. to arrange, arreglar, 1. army, ejercito, m. to arrive, /%ar, 1. arrived, llegado. arrives, //e^ra. article, articulo, m. as far, Aasta. as far as, hasta. to ask, preguntar, 1. to ask for, pec?zr, 3. asks for, pide. assistance, socorro, m. as soon as, tan pronto como, luego que, ast que t al punto que. to assure, asegurar, 1. at (the house of), en casa. at home, en casa. to attack, atacar, 1. attention, atenci6n,f. attentive, atento. aunt, tia, f . author, autor, m. authorization, autori- zacidn, f . to authorize, autorizar t 1. to awake, despertarse 1. ENGLISH-SPANISH. 387 B. bad, malo. bag, saco, m. baker, panadero, m. to balance, pesar, 1. ball, baile, m. bank, banco, m. banker, banquero, m. bark, barco, m. to bathe, banarse, 1. battle, batalla, f. to be, estar, 1. ser t 2. bear, oso, m. because, porque. to become, sentar, 1. bed, cama, f . beef, carne (f.) c?e vaca,t. beer, cerveza, f . before, delante, antes de. to begin, echarse, 1. beginner, principiante, m. to behave, comportarse, 2. behavior, comporta- miento, in. to believe, creer, 2. I believe, creo. belongs, pertenece. benefit, benefirio, m. benevolent, benefico. to bet, aposlar, 1. between, enfre. billiard, 6i7/ar, m. bird, pdjaro y m. to bite, morder, 2. bitter, amargo. black, ne^ro. to bless, bendecir, 3. blind, ciego. blond, rubio. blow (with a stick), 6as tonazo, m. blue, azw/. to boast, jactarse, 1. boisterous, turbulento. book, libro, m. bo'ot, 6oresentafi 1. invitation, invitacidn, f. to invite, convidar, 1. to invoke, invocar, 1. iron, hierro, m. is, es. Isabella, Isabel. island, /s/a, f . Italy, Italia, f. J. jeweler, joyero, m. John, Juan. journey, viaje, m. judgment, sentencia, f. to judge, juzgar t 1. Julius, ,/M^'O. to jump, saltar, 1. June, Junto, m. to keep, guardar, 1. key, //are, f. innocent, inocente. \ to kill, matar, 1. 392 GENERAL VOCABULARY. kindness, bondad, f. king, rey, m. kingdom, reino, m. kitchen, cocina, f . knife, cuchillo, m. to know, conocer, 2. sa- ber, 2. reconocer, 2. do you know ? ^ sabe V.? iconoce V. ? I know, conozco, yo s. known, conocido. knows, sabe. lamp, Jdmpara, f. language, idioma, m. lengua, f. lane, callejuela,f. last, ultimo, pasado. lasted, durado. last night, anoche. late, tarde. Latin, Latin. to laugh, reir, 3. to laugh at, burlarse, 1. laughs, rfe. law, ley, f. lawsuit, />Zeio, m. lawyer, abogado, m. lazy, haragdn. lead, plomo, m. league, legua, f. to learn, aprender, 2. learned, aprendido. at least, a Zo menos. to leave, saZzr, 3. saZir a*e, dejar, 1. alejarse, 1. partir, 3. leaves, sa/e. leg, pterna, f. lemonade, li monad a, f . to lend, prestar, 1. lesson, leccidn, f. to let, alquilar, I letter, carta, f. liberal, liberal* liberality, liberalidad, f. liberty, llbertad, f. library, biblioteca, f. license, licencia, f . life, wWa, f. light, Zu2, f . to light, encender, 2. do you like ? ^ Ze ^us/a a F.? I like, me gusta. to limp, cojear, 1. lion, Zerfn, m. list, Zt'sfa, f . to listen to, escuchar, 1. little, pequeno, chiquito. little, /?oco, adv. to live, tJivzV, 3. lively, alegre. lives, w've. to lock up, encerrar, I. lodging, alojamiento, m. London, Londres. long, largo. long time, mucho tiem- po. to look at, mirar, I. to look for, buscar, 1. to lose, perder, 2. loss, perdida t f . lost, perdido. loud, aZfo. Louisa, Luisa love, awior, m. to love, amar, \. do you love ? ^ awia F.? I love, amo. loved, amado. lo"W, bajo, cojnun. i luck, cZtVAa, f . madam, senora. mahogany, caoba, f. mail, correo. m. to make, hacer, 2. to make a mistake, equivocarse, 1. man, hombre, m. to manage, gobernar, 1. manner, costumbre, f . manufacturer, /a&n- can^e. to manufacture, ^fin- car, 1. many, muchos, muchas. maple, arce, m. march, marcha, f. to march, marchar, 1. to marry, casar, 1. ca- sarse, 1. mask, mascara, f. mason, albanil, m. master, amo, m. matter, asunto, m. matter of import- ance, cosa, f . maxim, maxima, f . sen- tencia, f. means, medio, m. to measure, medir, 3. meat, carne, f . to meet, encontrar, 1. memory, memoria, f. merchant, comerciante, m. mercader, m. merit, merito, m. mile, /m'ZZa, f. military, militar. milk, ZecAe, f . mine, mma, f. minute, minuto, m. mirror, espejo, m. miser, ayaro, m. ENGLISH-SPANISH. 393 misery, miseria, f. misfortune, desgracia, f. mistake, equivocacidn,f. mob, populacho, m. moment, momento, m. money, dinero, m. month, mes y m. monument, monumento, m. moon, luna, f. Moor, moro, m. more, mds. morning, manana, f. the most, la mayor parte. mother, madre, f. motive, motivo, m. to mount, montar, 1. mountain, monte, m. mouse, rattin, m. mouth, boca, f. to move, mover, 2. movement, movimiento, m. Mr., SeEor. Mrs., Senora. much, mucho, mucha. mud, lodo, m. music, musica, f. must, de&er, 2. my, mi. N. nail, twa, f. name, nombre, m. nation, nacidn, f. natural, natural. navigation, navegacidn y f. near, cerca. nearly, cerca c?e. necessary, precise, me- nester, necesario. necessity, necesidad, f . by necessity, por pre- cision. neck, pescuezo, m. to need, necesitar t 1. do you need? &nece- sita F.:? I need, necesito. needs, necesita. neither, tampoco, ni. never, nunca, jamas. new, nuevo. news, noticia, f. newspaper, perMico, m. next, proximo. next week, la semana que viene. night, noche, f . no, no, ninguno. nobody, nadie. noise, ruido, m. no longer, ya no. no... more, no... mds. none, ninguno. no one, nadie. nor, ni. north, norte, m. no sooner, apenas. not any, ninguno. not anybody, nadie. not anything, nada. not either, tampoco. nothing, nada. novel, novela, f . now, ahora. number, numero t m. nut, nuez, f. O. obedient, obediente. to obey, obedecer, 2. object, objeto, m. to oblige, obligar, 1. obstinate, porftado. to obtain, obtener t 2. conseguir, 3. occasion, ocastin, f. to occupy, ocupar, I. of, c?e. to offend, ofender, 2. to offer, o/reccr, 2. sw- ministrar, 1. officer, oficial, m. office, escritorio, m. often, a menudo. oil, aceiYe, m. old, we/o. on, so6re. only, solamente. to open, a6n'r, 3. opened, abierto. opinion, opinion, f. con- cejoto, m. orange, naranja, f. to order, mandar f I. ordinary, comtin. other, o^ro. ounce, onza, f. out, afuera. outcry, grito, m. overcoat, sobretodo, m. to overwhelm, co/mar, 1. to owe, de&er, 2. I owe, debo. owes, rfe&e. owner, dueno, m. ox, 6wej/, m. package, paquete, m. page, pdgina, f. painful, penoso. painting, pintura t f. palace, palacio t m. 394 GENERAL VOCABULARY. paper, papel, m. parents, padres, m. pi. park, parjue, m. part, parte, f . to pass, pasar, 1. past, pasado. paternal, paternal. patience, paciencia, f . patient (sick person), enfermo, m. to pay, pagar, 1. peace, paz, f. pear, pera, f. to peel, descascarar, 1. pencil, /rfpz'z, m. penknife, cortaplumas, m. people, genie, f . to people, poblar, 1. perhaps, acaso, to/ vez. person, persona, f . Peter, Pedro. Philip, Felipe. physician, medico, m. picture, retrato, m. cwa- rfro. piece, pieza, f. pedazo, m. pink, c/ave/, m. pious, joio. place, lugar, m. plant, planta, f. to play, jugar, 1. repre- sentar, 1. to play on, tocar, 1. to please, complacer, 2. pleased, contento. pleasure, gusto, 111. poison, veneno, m. polite, corte's, comedido. Pompey, Pompeyo. poor, pobre. port, puerto, m. possession, posesion, f . possible, posible. post, correo, m. posterity, posteridad,f postman, ca/tero, m. postoffice, correo, m. pound, /z'6ra, f . power, poder, m. powerful, poderoso. to practise, practicar 1. praise, alabanza, f. to praise, alabar, 1. precept, precepto, m. to prefer, preferir, 3. to prepare, preparar, 1, prerogative, preroga- tiva, f . to prescribe, 3. to present, presentar, 1. press, imprenta, f. to pretend, pretender, 2 pretty, 6ontYo. price, precio, m. prince, prfncipe, m. principle, principio, m. prison, car eel, f . prisoner, prisionero, m privilege, privilegio, m probable, probable. probably, probable- mente. procession, procesidn, f. professor, profesor. profitable, ventajoso. to promise, prometer, 2. to pronounce, pronun ciar, 1. proof, prueba, f. to be proper, convenir, 3. property, propiedad, f. propitious, propicio. to propose, proponer, 2. proud, orgulloso. to prove, probar, 1. provided, con to/ ^we. public, publico. pulled down,demolido to punish, castigar, 1. pupil, discipulo, m. to put on, ponerse, 2. put, puesto. Q queen, m'na, f. question, pregunta, f. quick, %ero. quickly, pronto. quiet, g-wi'eto. R. railroad, ferrocarril, m. rain, Z/uw'a, f. to rain, //over, 2. rare, raro. rather, a/^o. to read, /eer, 2. read, letdo. ready, /ts^o. reason, raztfn, f . to receive, recibir, 3. received, recibido. to recommend, reco- mendar, 1. recompense, recom- pensa, f . red, Colorado, encendido. to reestablish, restable- cer, 2. refreshment, refresco, m. regiment, regimiento, m. to regret, senfir, 3. ENGLISH-SPANISH. 395 to reign, re war, 1. to rejoice, alegrarse, 1. to relate, referir, 3. to remain, quedarse, 1. to remember, acor- darse, 1. to remove, apartar, 1. to repeat, repetir, 3. to repent, arrepentirse. 3. to repress, reprimir, 3. to reside, residir, 3. to resolve, resolver, 2. to rest, descansar, 1. to respect, respetar, 1. to result, provenir, 3. to return, volver, 2. de- volver, 2. return, vuelva V. to revolt, sublevar, 1. rich, rico. a very rich man, rica- chdn, m. right, derecho. ripe, maduro. to rise, levantarse, 1. river, rib, m. road, camino, m. rogue, picaro, m. Roman, Romano, m. Romulus, Rdmulo. room, cuarto, m. rose, rosa, f . to rot, podrir, 3. rudeness, groseria, f . ruin, rwwa, f . to ruin, arruinar, 1. to run, correr, 2. Russia, Russian, saber, sa6/e, m. sacred, sagrado. sad, saddle, silla, f. safe, cq/a, f. said, dicho. sailor, marinero, m. same, mismo. satisfied, satisfecho, con tento. to say, decir, 3. say, diga V. says, oVce. scholar, discfpulo, m. school, escuela, f . science, ciencia, f. Scipio, Escipitin. to scream, gritar, I. season, estacidn, f. seated, sentado. scissors, tijeras, f. pi. to see, ver, 2. do you see ? ^ ve F. ? I see, veo. seem, parecen. seen, vzs^o. sees, re. to select, escoger, 2. self, mismo. to sell, vender, 2. do you sell? &vende V.? I sell, vendo. sells, vende. to send, mandar, 1. en- war, 1. send, mande V, sent, enviado. servant, criado, m. servantgirl, criada, f. served, servido. service, servido, m. several, varios, m. va rzas, f. to shave, afeitar, 1. sheet, sdbana, f . shilling, peseta, f. ship, buque, m. shirt, camisa, f . shoe, zapato, m. shoemaker, zapatero, m. to shoot, fusilar, 1. shop, tienda, f . short, cor^o. to show, mostrar, I. to shut, cerrar, I. shut, cerrado. sick, enfermo. side, Zacfo, m. silent, callado. silk, serfa, f . silly, Zonto. silver, jt?/afa, f . since, desde, desde que. to sing, cantar, 1. singer, cantatriz, f . singing, canto, m. sings, cemta. singular, singular. Sir, .serior. sister, hermana, f . to sit down, sentarse, I. situation, empleo, m. colocacidn, f . skiUful, ^a6zl slate, pizarra, f. to sleep, dormir, 3. sleigh, trineo, m. slowly, despacio. small, pequeno. smell, ofor, m. sno"w, nieve, f. so, asf, ton. society, sociedad, f. sold, vendido. some, alguno. somebody, alguien, al- guno. some one, alguno. something, algo. 396 GENERAL VOCABULARY. something else, otra cos a. sometimes, algunas veces. somewhere, alguna parte. son, hijo, m. song, cancidn, f . soon, pronto. I am sorry for it, lo siento. SO that, a si que. soup, sopa, f. sour, agrio. to sow, sembrar, 1. Spain, Espana, f . Spaniard, Espanol, m. Spanish, espaTiol. do you speak? ihdbla V.f sing. i hablan VV. ? pi. I speak, hablo. they speak, hablan. speaks, habla. species, especie, f . speculation, especula- cidn, f. to spend, gastar, 1. spends, gasta. splendid, magntfico. spoken, hablado. spot, lugar, m. spring, primavera, f. squadron, escuadra, f . stab (with a poniard), punalada, f. stable, caballeriza, f. to stand, pararse, 1. standing, parado. star, estrella, f . state, estado, m. statue, estatua, f. to steal, rofcar, 1. steam, vajoor, m. steamer, vapor , m. stocking, media, f . store, almacen, m. stranger, estrangero, m. strawberry, fresa, f. street, calle, f. strength, fuerza, f. to strike, pegar, 1. strong, fuerte. student, estudiante, m. studied, estudiado. studious, estudioso. study, estudio, m. to study, estudiar, 1. do you study ? ^ estu- dian, W. ? we study, estudiamos. to subdue, someter, 2. suburbs, contornos, m. such as, tal. suddenly, de repente. to suffer, padecer, 2. to suffocate, sufocar, 1. sugar, azucar, m. sun, sol, m. sunshade, quitasol, m. supper, cena, f. to support, mantener, 2. to suppose, suponer, 2. supreme, supremo. sure, seguro. surprised, sorprendido. to surrender, rendirse, 3. to suspend, suspender, 2. sweet, dulce. swollen, hinchado. T. table, mesa, f. tailor, sastre, m. to take, tomar, 1. llevar 1. conducir, 3. to take a walk, c?ar MW paseo, pasearse, 1. to take interest, int ere- sarse, 1. to take off, quilarse, 1. to take possession, apoderarse, 1. tale, cuento, m. talent, talento, m. tall, afro. Tartary, Tartar la, f. tea, ef, m. teacher, maestro, m. teaches, ensena. tear, idgrima, f . Telemachus, 7W maco. to tell, dectV, 3. teU, c/i>a F. tells, cftce. thankful, agradecido. thank you, gracias. I (or we) thank you, muchas gracias. that, aquello, ese. that, que. that thing, aquello, eso. theater, teatro, m. then, despues. theological, teologal. theoretical, tedrico. there, ahf, alii. therefore, asi. there is, hay. thief, ladrdn, m. thing, cosa, f . to think, pensar, 1. this, este. this thing, esto. three, tres. through, por. thunder, trueno, m. thus, asi. tiger, tigre, m. till, hasta. ENGLISH- SPANISH. time, tiempo, m. kora, f. vez, f . timid, ttmido. tired, cansado. to-day, hoy. together, junto. to-morrow, manana. too, demasiado, tambie'n. too many, demasiados. too much, demasiado. tooth, diente, m. tower, torre, f . town, pueblo, m. to translate, traducir, 3. translation, traduccio'n, f. transparent, traspa- rente. to travel, viajar, \. to treat, tratar, 1. tree, rfr&o/, m. to tremble, temblar, 1. trifle, bagatela, f . ^'o- /era, f . trimmed bordado. to trouble, molestar, 1. trunk, 6aw/, m. truth, verdad, f. turkey, pavo, m. to turn, mover, 2. vo/- ver, 2. two, dos. U. umbrella, paraguas, m. uncle, tio, m. under, bajo. to understand, enten der, 2. comprender, 2. unfortunate, desgra- ciado. unfortunately, por iesgracia. unhappy, infeliz. unless, d menos que. until, hasta, hasta que. un'well, malo. unworthy, indigno. upon, sobre. to upset, derribar, 1. upstairs, arriba. urbanity, urbanidad, f. us, nosotros. useful, titil. useless, inutil vegetable, legumbre, f . verse, verso, m. very, mwy, mismo. vessel, buque, ra. barco, m. vest, chaleco, m. victory, victoria, f. village, pueblo, m. aldea. f. virtue, virtud, f. to visit, visitar, I. volume, tomo, m. W. to wait, esperar, 1. aguardar, 1. walk, paseo, m. to walk, andar, 1. walkingstick, bast6n, m. wall, rwwro, m. war, guerra, f. warm, caliente. to warm, calentar, 1. was, era. to wash, favar, 1. washerwoman, / rfera, f . watchful, vigilante. water, a^rwa, f . way, modo, m. medio. weak, c?e6i7. week, semana, f. to weep, llorar, I. weeps, llora. well, pozo, m. well, bien, pues, bueno. w^hat, que'. when, cuando. where, donde. which, que. white, bianco. who, quien. whom, d quien. whose ? ^ de quin ? why? iporque"? wife, mujer, f . will find, encontrard. I will have, quiero. "William, Guillermo. will you have ? ^ quiere V.? wind, viento, m. window, ventana, f. wine, vino, m. winter, invierno, m. wise, sabio. wisely, sdbiamente. wish, quieren. do you wish ? i quiere V.? I -wish, quiero. we wish, deseamos. wishes, quiere, desea. with, con. within, dentro de. with me, conmigo. without, afuera, sin. woman, mujer t f. 398 GENERAL VOCABULARY. wood, basque, m. Una, f. word, palabra, f . work, trabajo, m. obra, f. to work, trabajar, 1. workman, obrero, m. works, trabaja. world, mundo, m. to be worth, valer, 2. worthy, digno. would to God! Ojald! wounded, herido. to write, escribir, 3. do you write ? & escribe V.? I write, escribo. writes, escribe. writing, escritura, f. written, escrito. yard, patio, m. vara, f. year, ano, m. yes, st. yesterday, ayer. yet, todavfa, aun. young, j oven. youth, juventud, f . SPANISH TEXTS ALARCON. El Capitan Veneno (Brownell) . . . $0.50 El Nifio de la Bola (Schevill) 90 AVELLANEDA. Baltasai (Bransby) 65 BRETON. ^Quien es Ella? (Garner) 70 CALDERON. La Vida es Sueno (Comfort) ... .70 FONTAINE. Flores de Espana 45 GALDOS. Dona Perfecta (Lewis) i.oo Electra (Bunnell) 70 Marianela (Gray) 90 JOHNSON. Cuentos Modernos 60 LARRA. Partir a Tiempo (Nichols) 40 MORATIN. El Si de las Ninas (Geddes & Josselyn), .50 TURRELL. Spanish Reader 80 VALERA. El Comendador Mendoza (Schevill) . . .85 Pepita Jimenez (Cusachs) . 90 WORMAN'S SPANISH BOOKS - REVISED First Spanish Book . . $0.40 Second Spanish Book . $0.40. IN their new form these books offer a satisfactory course in spoken Spanish. The FIRST BOOK teaches directly by illustration, contrast, association, and natural infer- ence. The exercises grow out of pictured objects and actions, and the words are kept so constantly in mind that no translation or use of English is required to fix their mean- ing. In the SECOND BOOK the accentuation agrees with the latest rules of the language. AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY (233) A PRACTICAL COURSE IN SPANISH $1.25 By H. M. MONSANTO, A.M., and LOUIS A. LANGUELLIER, LL.D. Revised by FREEMAN M. JOSSELYN, JR., formerly Assistant Professor of Romance Languages in Boston University THIS popular text-book makes the basic principles of Spanish grammar familiar to the student by constant practice and by repetition in Spanish. In the revision the editor has preserved the original form of the work, recast- ing only such grammatical statements as seemed to demand it. His special care has been to present the Spanish text in accordance with the latest rules for orthography and accent. ^| The lessons contain : 1. EXAMPLES, accompanied by their nearest English equivalents, and made to illustrate the grammatical and idio- matic principles which are involved in the lessons. 2. VOCABULARIES placed before the exercises, the masculine and feminine names being grouped separately, and other parts of speech arranged alphabetically. 3. SPANISH EXERCISES. The sentences in Spanish require only the application of instructions contained in the lesson, or in the preceding ones, for translation into English. 4. ENGLISH EXERCISES. The analogous sentences in English are presented in immediate connection with the preceding ones in Spanish. The principles applied in the Spanish exercises are thus made an effective auxiliary in the work of translating English into Spanish. 5. GRAMMATICAL AND IDIOMATIC PRIN- CIPLES. This division may be employed by means of the references, either in connection with the preceding instructions, or as a review. AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE STAMPED BELOW AN INITIAL FINE OF 25 CENTS WILL BE ASSESSED FOR FAILURE TO RETURN THIS BOOK ON THE DATE DUE. THE PENALTY WILL INCREASE TO SO CZNTS ON THE FOURTH DAY AND TO $1.OO ON THE SEVENTH DAY OVERDUE. MAY % 1935 FtB 7 Ujo 1936 \ ; LS39 APR 11 1941 M MAY JA 1941M J JUN 25 1941 F( .. 1944 LD 21-100m-8,'34 PH959 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY